神學資料專屬網站

Schaff-Herzog Religious Encyclopaedia

샤프-헤르초크 종교백과

百科全書 Schaff et al. 1882 general

支援語言狀況

英 韓1%

英 6639/6639 原文 · 韓 75/6639 翻譯 · 0 審核

6639 個項目

韓英對照查看
C8EL... CSEL...

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CSEL...: CSHB Currier. Rdigicua Ordera II Cor Second Epistle to the Corinthians COT See Schrader rnn S The Church Quarterly Review, London, ^^* ^ 1875 sqq. Corpua Mnjnaloirum, begun at Halle, CR < 1834, vol. Ixxxix., Berlin and Leipsio, 1906 sqq. 'M. Creighton, A Hiatory of the Papacy from the Great Schiam to the Sadt of Rome, new ed.. 6 vols., New York and London, 1897 Corpua acriptorum acdeaiaatioorum Lati- norum, Vienna, 1867 sqq. Corpua acriptorum hiatorua Byaantina, 49 vols., Bonn. 1828-78 C. W. Currier. Hiatory of Rdigioua Ordera, New York. 1896 D Deuteronomist nArr i F- Gabrol. Dictionnaira d'ardUologie chri- ^^^^ 1 tienneetde liiurgie, Paris. 1903 sqq. Dan Daniel t J Ha>*t[ryj:M IHtfirinary vf ihe Bible, 4 DB < vc'i-^. Hcjid pxtrn vol,^ Edinburgh and Nf w York, 1808- 1&04 W. Smith and ^. Cbeethimi, Dictionary " of ChriaHa n A niiqu itit*, 2 vols. , London, |g75HM> I W. SrnitU ami H. WacCt DkHonary of ^ VhH^tion BiiHtmpktt, 4 vols., Boston, ie77-K7 \ J. Hjikfltitnc*, J. A H<»lbio, anilJ, C. Lambert, DCO -j .1 D^f^U'ffiir^ of ( 'Ariif o rtti the Ooapala, 2 voU., Edinbu/KhftniJ New V<jrk, 1906-08 Deut Deuteronomy De vir. ill De viria illuatribua DeWette- (W. M. L. de Wette. LehHmch der hia- Sohrader, f^ifi-s toriad^-kritiachen Einleitung in die B^>elj leitung | vol. i. il. 7.. ed. E. Schrader. Berlin, 1860 DCfQ See Wattenbach !L. Stephen and 8. Lee, Dictionary of National Biography, 63 vols, and supplement 3 vols.. London. 1885-1901 rk_;_.- r..iw>/i..^ ( S. R. Driver, Introduction to the lAteratura Dnver, IntrodwyJ . ^ ^y Taatament, 5th ed.. New •^ { York, 1894 E Elohist K. Chevpe and J. S. Black, Encyclo- <adia Biblica, 4 vols., London and DCA. DCB. EB. (T. K. •1 6:t' .^ew York. 1899-1903 ,Ecdeaia, [' Church eccleaiaaticua. Bed deeiastical ' Ecdes Ecdeeiastes Ecdus Eksdesiasticus ed edition; adidiL** edited by " Eph Epistle to the Ephesians Epiat Epiatola, Epiatola, " Epistle." " Epistles " Ersch and Gru- 1 J. S. Ersch and J. Q. Qruber. AUgemeine ber. Sneyklo"{ EneyklopOdia der WiaaenatAaften und vMia { KUnate, Leipsic. 1818 sqq. E.V English versions (of the Bible) Ex Exodus Esek Esekiel faac faaciculua J. Friedrioh, Kirchengeadiichta Deutach- landa,2 vols.. Bamberg, 1867-60 O. F. Fritssohe and C. L. W. Qrimm, omtiMdksmHand-' Kurtgefaaatea axegetiad^ea Handbudi amnacnem nana- ^^ ^^ Apocryphen dea Alten Taata- ''^^^ I menia, 6 parts, Leipsic. 1851-60 Qal Epistle to the Qalatians P. B. Qams. Beriaa epiacoporum eedeaiae Caiholicae. Regensburg, 1873, and sup- plement, 1886. H. Gee and W. J. Hardy. DocumenU lUuairative of Engliah Church Hiatory, London, 1896 .Qeneais Friedrioh, KD.. Fritssche, Exe- ' Hand- Gams, Seriaa epiacoporum Gee and Hardy.. Documenta.. Gen. xii LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS Haddan and Stubbs, Coun- eila...: Hm-., Ha« Harduin, Ctm- cilia Harnack, Dof^ma Hamack, Littero-, tur ^ Hauck, KD. Hauck-Heriog, RE •1 Hefe\e,ConcUienr- J Oeschichte. . . Heimbucher, Or- j den und Kon--{ greoationen. . . Helyot. Ordrf moTMBtiques. . Germ German ^^ ^^ ( Bury, 7 vols., London. 1896-1900 Gk Greek, Greciied ^C. Gross, The Soturcea and lAierature of Englith History , , . lo 14S6, London. 1900 Hab Habakkuk f A. W. Haddan and W. Stubbs. CounciU and Bcdenaetieal DoeumenU RetoHng to Oreat Britain and Ireland^ 3 vols., ^ Oxford, 1869-78 Refers to patristic works on hereaiee or heretics. Tertullian's De praecriptione, the ProB haireeeia of Irenieus, the Panarion of Epiphanius, etc. HaoKai J. Harduin, Conciliorum coUecHo regia maxima, 12 vols.. Paris, 1716 A. Hamack, Hiatorv of Dogma . . . from the Sd German edition^ 7 vols.. Boston. 1895-1900 A. Hamack, Oeadiidite der olkhriMt- lichen lAUeratur bie Eueebiue, 2 vols, in 3, Leipsic, 1893-1904 A. Hauck. KirchengeechicKte Deutach- lande, vol. i.. Leipsic, 1904; vol. ii., 1900: vol. iii.. 1906; vol. iv.. 1903 ReaUncyklop/ldie fUr proteatanHeehe The- ologie und Kircke, founded by J. J. Hersog, 3d ed. by A. Hauck. Leipsio. , 1896-1909 Heb Epistle to the Hebrews Hebr Hebrew C. J. von Hefele, CondUengeeehidiU^ con- tinued by J. Hergenr6ther, vols., i.-vi.. viii,-ix., Freiburg, 1883-93 M. Heimbucher. Die Orden und Kongre- gationen der katholiecfien Kirdie, 2d ed. 3 vols., Paderbom, 1907 P. Helyot, Hieioire dee ordree monae- iiqttea, religieux et militairea, 8 vols., Paris, 1714-19; new ed., 1839-42 Henderson, Doe- j E. F. Henderson, Select Hiatorieal Doeu- umente ( menU of the Middle Aget, London, 1892 Hist History, histoire, hietoria uimt ^^1 3 Historia edeaiaetioa, ecdeeia, " Church ^••'- **^* ( History" Horn Homiliat homiliaif " homily, homilies " Ho8 Hosea Ira Isaiah Ital Italian J Jahvist (Yahwist) J A Journal Aeiatique, Paris. 1822 sqq. P. Jaff^. Bibliotheca rerum Oermani- carum, 6 vols., Berlin, 1864-73 P. Jaff^, Regeeta porUifieum Romanorum . . . ad annum 1198, Berlin, 1851; 2d ed., Leipsic, 1881-88 Journal of the American OrierUal SoeietUt New Haven, 1849 sqq. Journal of Biblical Literature and Ezege- eie, first appeared as Journal of the Society of BibliccU Literature and Exe- gesis, Middletown. 1882-88, then Bos- ton, 1890 raq. The Jewish Encyclopedia, 12 vols., New York, 1901-06 The combined narrative of the Jahvis (Yahwist) and Elohist Jer Jeremiah Jo8ephus,.ln<...]F»5^./«*P^^' " Antiquities of the Josephus, Apion.. .Flavius Josephus, " Against Apion " Joaephus, Life Life of Flavius Josephus Josephus, If or Flavius Josephus, The Jewish War" Josh Joshua vp<r \JahrbQeher fUr protestantisdie Theologie, ''^^ 1 Leipsic, 1876 sqq. mrf j T'Atf Jetvish Quarterly Review, London, •'^« ] 1888 sqo. j0pig \ Journal of Theological Studies, London, } 1899 sqq. Julian, Hym- j J. Julian, A Didionary of Hymnology, nUogy j revised edition^London, 1907 r^fp j Jaarboeken voor Wetensehappelijke Theo- •'"^^ 1 logie, Utrecht, 1846 sqq. KAT See Schrader KB See Schrader KD See Friedrich, Hauck, Rettberg Wetser und WeUe's Ktreherdexikon, 2d ed., by J. Hergenrdther and F. Kaulen. 12 vols,. Freiburg, 1882-1903 G. KrOger, History of Early Christian Literature in the Pirst Three Centuries, New York. 1897 I Jaf!6,BRO... JafT^, Regesia.. JAOS JBL JE JE 1 KL. &Qger. History Krumbacher. GeschidUe. Labbe. Concilia- Lam Lanigan, Ecd. Hist Lat Lev Ldchtenbercer, ESR K. Krumbacher, Oesehiehte der byzan- tinischen lAUeratur, 2d ed.. Munich. 1897 P. Labbe, Saerorum conciliorum note. et amplissima coUectio, 31 vols., Flor- ence and Venice. 1769-98 .Lamentations J. Lanigan, Ecdesiasticcd History of Ireland to the 13th Century, 4 vols., Dublin, 1829 Latin, Latinised Leges, Legum Leviticus F. Lichtenberger, EncydopUie des sci- ences religieuses, 13 vols., Paris. 1877- 1882 T^MTi. nnti )^- Loreni, Deutschlands Oeschiehtsquel- ix>reni, uwj . . . ^ ^ ^^ Mittelalier, 3d. ed.. Berhn, 1887 LXX The Septuagint I Mace I Maccabees II Mace II Maccabees Mai, Nova col- \ A. Mai, Scriptorum veteru$n nova col- lectio 1 lectio. 10 vols.. Rome. 1826-38 Mai Malachi M»nn Pa«m* j R. C. Mann. Lives of the Popes in the MAnn. I'opes. . . . ^ ^^^^ MiddU Aaes. London. 1902 sqq. ( G. D. Mansi, Sanctorum conciliorum Mansi. Concilia. . ■{ colledio nova, 31 vols.. Florence and ( Venice. 1728 Matt Matthew Monumenta Germanics historica, ed. G. H. Perts and others, Hanover and Ber- Un, 1826 sqq. The following abbrevia- tions are used for the sections and sub- sections of this work: AnL, Antiuui- tates, '* Antiquities "; AueL ant., Aue- tores antiquisaimi, *' Oldest Writers "; Chron. min.. Chronica minora, " Leswr Chronicles "; Dip., DipUmuUa, " Di- plomas, Documents "; Epist., E pis- tola, " Letters "; GesL pont. Rom., Gesta pontificum Romanorum, ** DcecUi of the popes of Rome "; Leg., Leges, " Laws "; Lib. de lite, LiheUi de lite inter regnum et sacerdotium sa^ndorum xi et xii coriscripti, " Books concerning the Strife between the Civil and Eccle- siastical Authorities in the Eleventh and Twelfth Centuries "; Nee., Ne- crologia GermanicB, " Necrology of Germany"; Poet. Lat. avi Car., PoetcB Latini eevi Carolini, " Latin Poets of the Caroline Time "; PoeL Lat. med. avi, Poetoe Latini medii avi, " Latin Poets of the Middle Ages "; Script., Scriptores, ** Writers "; Script, rer. Germ., Scriptores rerum Germani- carum. ** Writers on German Sub- jects ''; Script, rer. Langob., Scriptores rerum Langobardicarum et Italicarum. " Writers on Lombard and Italian Subjects "; Script, rer. Merov., Scrip- tores rerum Merovin^icarum, ** Writers on Merovingian Subjects " Mic Micah H. H. Milman, History of Latin Chris- ' '■ ■ '/ ■ ~ MGH, Milman, Latin Chriiiianity. Blirbt. Quellen. Moeller, Chris- tian Church MPL MS.. MSS. tianity. Including that of the Popes to . . . Nicholas v., 8 vols., London. 1860-61 C. Mirbt, Quellen stir Geschic^Ue des Papst- hims und des rtimischen Katholicismua, Tabingen, 1901 W. Moeller, History of the Christian Church, 3 vols., London, 1892-1900 Mpn i •'■ P- Migne, Patrologict cursus completus, ^^^ 1 series Graica, 162 vols., Paris. 18.57-(U5 i J. P. Migne, Patrologict cursiM covnj>lttitin. ) series lAxtina, 221 vols., Paris. 1844-04 ..Manuscript, Manuscripts Mxuutori, Scrip- J L. A. Muratori, Rerum Italicarum scrip- tores » tores, 28 vols.. 1723-61 iNeues Ardiiv der OeseUschaft fUr 6liere NA < deutsche Geschiddskunde, Hanover. ( 1876 sqq. Nah Nahum n.d no date of publication turn Church. . . | -^^^^^ Boston, 1872-81 Neh Nehemiah M««>Aron If iL i ^- P- Niceron, Mimoires pour senrir d. J^iS • \ Vhistoire des hommes iUuJtns .... 43 '^'^ j vols., Paris, 1729-45 tjv^ S Neue kirchliche Zeitschrift, Leipeic. 1890 } sqq. Nowack, ArdiA-^W. Nowack, Lehrbudi der habraisdien ologie ( Archdologie, 2 vols., Freiburg, 1894 n.p no place of publication ' LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS xui NPSF.. J The Nicena and Poet-Nioene Father9. Ist •eriM. 14 vols.. New York. 1887-92; 2d aeries. 14 vols.. New York. 1890-1000 „ » (New Testament. Novum Tetlamentum, "• * ) Nouveau Tealameni, NntM Teatameni Nam Nombers Ob Olmdiah nan i Ordo mneti Benaiidti, ** Order of St. "•■•*• 1 Benedict" O.T Old Testament OTJC See Smith P Priestly document ( L. PMtor, Ths Hiatory at As Popes from Pastor. Pspsa. .A As CIoss of As MvidU Aqm, 8 vols.. ( London. 1801-1906 p» J J Paina sodssia Anglieanmt ed. J. A. Giles. ^^^ 1 34 vols.. London. 183a-46 PEF Palestine Exploration Fund I Pet First Emstle of Peter II Pet Second Epistle of Pcter PUny. HiaL nol... Pliny, Htsfona nalunilts Pbtthast, Wag-} PlCT. .. P* FSB A. Pottbast. BMudhaca hialoriea madii avi. Wagvotiatr diireh dia OaachidUa- warka, Berlin, 1890 .Psalms SProeaadinoa cf As Soeiaty of Biblioal I iiroUolocy. London. 1880 sqq. q.T.. qQ.T ^^^ (qu») vide, ** wnich see '"^ RDM Aenie daa daux mondaa, Paris, 1831 aqq. RE See Hauek-Hersos Bcieb. Dook- I E. Reich. SaUdDoeumania IttuatrcHng Ma- mania I diaval and Modem Hiatory, London, 1906 REJ Raaua daa Hudaa Jvivaa, Paria, 1880 sqq. p^K.. rn ^F.W.RBtthmrs,Kw^anoaaehiehtaDeutad»r- BetttMii. KD. . . ^ 1^^^ 2 vols.. QAttingen, 1840-48 Est Book of Revelation itssus da Vhiatoira daa raWona, Pttfia, 1880 aqq. A. L. Biefater. L^Hnuh daa kaffioUaehan und avanoMadiien iJCtreftenrscUs, 8th ed. by W. Kahl. Ldpsic, 1886 E. Robinaon, Biblical Raaaarehaa in PoissMns, Boston. 1841. and Latar Bihlieal Raaaarehaa in Paiaatina, 3d ed. of the whole, 3 vols.. 1867 J. H. Robinson, Raadinffa in Btaropaan RBB Riditer. iCirdkm- Rnbin«B, Ra- Latar Ra- Hiatory, 2 vols.. Boston. 1904-06 and I J. H. Robinson and C. A. Beard, Davdop- Bobinsoa, Eva\ paanBialonf- Robinson an _ ^ Beard, Modem ' mant ^ Modem Evropa^ 2 vols., Boston, Bwopa i 1907 Rom Epistle to the Romans jRavua daa adaneaa aceUaiaaHqma, Airas, ' 1 1860-74, Amiens. 1876 sqq. Pfp \ Rente da fhSologia at da vhUoaophie^ ^^^ 1 Lausanne, 1873 R.T Revised Version (of the Endiah Bible) sor soruiMm, " oentury " I Sam I Samuel II 8am IlSamuel SitaunqtheridUe der BerUner Akadetme, 1 Berhn, 1882 sqq. F. Max Mailer and others. The Saerad Booka at As Boat, Oxford, 1879 sqq., VOL xlviiL, 1904 Socrsi BooJbs of As Old rsstomsn< r Rain- SBOT * bow Bible'*). Leipsc, London, and Baltimore, 1804 sqq. fco^jT CkriHianS^' ^'^^^^^ Hiatory of As ChriaHan Chunk, RSB.. 8BA SBE. Ckmtk. Scbafl. Crssds. COT..^ Sdtfadar. JC^r. Sdndtf. KB. . . SchOw, GaatkukM ti^ BcriTener. latodutHiam. Stat &J. SK 8MA 8ittth,jrMdU]».. vols. i.-iv.. vi., vii.. New YorlLl882-92, vol. v., part 1. by D. S. Schaff. 1907 P. Sdiair. The Craada of Chriatendom, 3 vols. New York, 1877-84 E. Sehrader, Cuneiform Inacriptiona and As Old Taaiameni, 2 vols., London, 1885-88 E. Sehrader, Die KaiUnetkHften und daa AUa Taatament, 2 vols.. BerUn, 1902-03 E. Sehrader. KailinaehrifaidkeSibUothak, 6 vols.. Berlin. 1889-1901 E. Sohflrar. OaaehidUa daa jUdiaehen Volkea im Zaiialter Jaau Chrietl, 4th ed.. 8 vols.. Leipsio. 1902 sqq.; Eng. transL, 6 vols.. New York, 1891 . .5eris«ores. " writers " ( F. H. A. Scrivener. IntrodueHum to New Taa- t tamani Critidam^ 4th ed., London. 1894 ..SenienUai, " Sentences " . .5ocis«as Jsstt, " Society of Jesua " Theoloffiaehe Siudien und KriUken, Ham- burs. 1826 sqq. SUaungabariihta der MUnehener Aka- dsmis. Munich, 1860 aqq. W. R. Smith, Kinahip and Marriaoa in Sarly Arabia, London, 1908 Smith, OTJC. . . Smith. PropheU.. Smith, ReL of Sam S. P. C. K. S. P. G. . . . Ki^^q. airom. . . S.V Swete. Inbrodue- S Uon } 8; tSs! Thatcher and McNeAl,iSouro0- Book I Theas II These ThT Tillemont, motrss.. I Tim II Tim. . . . Af*.; TJB. TLB... TLZ... Tob.... TQ.... T8 T8BA. TSK... TV. TZT Ugolini, TheaaU' rua V. T W. R. Smith. The Old Taatament in the Jewiah Chwrdi, London. 1892 W. R. Smith. Prophata of laraal . . . to tha Eighth Century, London, 1895 W. R. Smith. Rdigion of tha Samitaa, London, 1894 Society for the Promotion of Christian Knowledge Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Forei^ Parts and following Stromata, ** Miacellanies " sub voce, or sub verbo H. B. Swete. IntrodtuHon fo As Old Tss- tament in Oraak, London, 1900 .Syriac Trinitarian Bible Society O. J. Thatcher and £. H. McNeal, A Source Book for Madiaval Hiatory, New York, 1905 First Emstle to the Thessaloniana Second £pi8tle to the Theasaloniana Thaologiaehe Tijdathrift, Amsterdam and Leyden, 1867 aqq. L. S. le Nain de Tillemont, MSmoiraa . . . accUaiaatiquea daa aix jpramiera aiMea, 16 vols.. Paris. 1693-1712 First EpiBtie to Timothy Second Epistle to Timothy Theologiacher JahraaberidU, Ldpsic. 1882- 1887. Freiburg. 1888. Brunswick. 188»- 1897. BerUn. 1898 sqq. Theologiadiea lAtieraharilaU, Bonn, 1866 ThaMogiaiha LitteraturBaOung, Leipsio, 1876 sqq. Tobit Thaologiaehe Quarlalaehritt, Tubingen, 1819 sqq. J. _A. Robinaon. Taxta and Skadiaa, Wattenbach, DGQ Wellhausen, Haidentum. . . Wellhausen, Prolfl^OMSfui. . ZA Zahn, Einlei- tung Zahn, Kanon.,.. ZATW ZDAL ZDMO. ZDP.... ZDPV., Zech.. Zeph. Cambridge, 1891 sqq. TranaacHona of tha Soeialy of Bihlioal Archaology, London. 1872 sqq. Theologiadte Studien und KriUken, Ham- buig. 1826 sqq. Taxte und Unierau^ungan aur (hadtidUa der altduiatlidien Litterahir, ed. O. von Gebhaidt and A. Hamack, Leipsio. 1882 sqq. TUbinger ZaitachHft far Theologia, TO- binsen. 183&-40 B. tJgolinuB, 7%ssaurus antiquitatum aaerarum, 34 vols., Venice, 1744-69 Vatua Teatamenium, Vieux Taalament, "Old Testament " W. Wattenbach, Z>stilsoUands OaaehidUa- qudlen, 5th ed., 2 vols., Berlin, 1885; 6th ed., 1893-94 J. Wellhausen, Reata arabiaehen Heidet^ tuma. Berlin, 1887 J. Wellhausen, Prolegomena eur Qaadiichte laraeU, 6th ed.. BerUn, 1905. Eug. tranal., Edinburgh, 1885 Zaitachrift Hkr Aaayriologie, Leipsio, 1886-88. BerUn, 1880 aqq. T. Zahn, Binlaitung in daa Naue Taata- meni. 3d ed.. Leipaie, 1007 T. Zahn. Oaadiichta daa neuiaalament- Uehen Kanona. 2 vols.. Leipsio. 1888-02 ZaitachHft fUr die altteatamentUthe Wia- aenaehaft Gicssen, 1881 sqq. Zsitecftri/t for dsulscAss illfsrAum und dsitf- aeheLUaratw. BerUn. 1876 soq. Zaitachrift der deutaehan morganUtndiachen OeadlMdudt, Leipsio, 1847 sqq. Zaitarhrift fOr deutache PhilUogia, Halle, dss deutaehan PalOatina-Var- ZHT. ZKO ... ZKR... ZKT.... ZKW. . . ZNTW. ZPK.,.. ZWT.,,. 1860 sqq. Zaitaehr^ € aina, Leipsio, 1878 sqq. Zeehariah Zephaniah Zntadtr^t Htr dia hiatoriaehe Theolcgia, pubUflhea successively at Leipsio, Hambuig. and Gotha, 1832-75 Zaitachrift fUr Kirchengaachichta, Gotha, 1876 sqq. ZaitachHft Jfir Kirehenratht, BerUn, Tu- bingen, Freibuig, 1861 sqq. Zaila^rift fUr koAoliedte Theolegia, Inna- bruck, 1877 sqq. Zaitachrift fikr ktrdiKdie Wiaaanadudt und kirchlichaa Laban, Leipsio. 1880-80 Zeitachrift fUr die neuteatamentUehe Wia- aenadiaft. Giessen. 1000 sqq. ZaUaehHft tOrProtaatantiamuaundKirche, Erlangen. 1838-76 Zeitachr^ fiir vriaaanethaftliche Theologie, Jena. 1868-60, HaUa, 1861-07, Leipsio. 1868 sqq. SYSTEM OF TRANSLITERATION The following system of transliteration has been used for Hebrew : K = ' or omitted at the beginning of a word. a = b 3 = bh or b l = g j = gh or g ^ = d 1 = dh or d n = h 1 = w r = z 3 = k 3 = kh or k D = m 3 = n D = s B = p B = ph or p P = k n = r B^=:sh r» = t n = th or t The vowels are transcribed by a, e, i, o, u, without attempt to indicate qnantlty or quality. Arabic and other Semitic languages are transliterated according to the same system as Hebrew. Greek is written with Roman characters, the common equivalents being used. KEY TO PRONUNCIATION When the pronunciation is self-evident the titles are not respelled ; when by mere division and accen- tuation it can be shown sufficiently clearly the titles have been divided faito syllables, and the accented syllables indicated. a as in sofa a " " arm a " " at ft " " fore e " " pen' « " " fate i « •' tin t '' " machine o " " obey 6 «' '• no e as in not e " " nor u " « ftill* 0 " •* rule u * " but 0 " " bum 01 « M pine au " " out ei " " Oil iQ *' •• few iu as in diiration c = k " " eat ch " " church ow =s qu as in ^ueen dh (fh) " " the i '* " /anqr g(hanl)" "firo H " " lock (Scotch) hw (ti*) " •* ti*y j " " ;aw > In aooented syllablei only ; In ima4»6nt6d syllables it apjiroziiiaites the amind of e bi OTsr. The letter n, with a dot beneath it. Indicates the sound of n as In ink. BUent n (as in French words) is rendered n. • In Qennan and Franoh namea a aiiproxlmates the sound of u in dtAne. CHAMIER, sha'mye', DANIEL: French preacher (Kefonned); b. at the castle of Le Mont, near Mocas (in the district of Saint-Maroellin, 23 m. w. of Gre- noble), 1565; killed at Montauban Oct. 17, 1621. He belonged to an old Roman Catholic family of Avignon, but his father had embraced the Protestant faith and gained many converts in the south of France, especially at Mont^limar, where he became pastor. Daniel studied at the Univer- sity of Orange and at Geneva under Beza and De la Faje (1583-^). He was ordained minister at Montpellier, and about 1595 succeeded his father at Mont^limar. His intelligence and the firmness of his character led the provincial synod to appoint him deputy to the national synod at Saumur and the political gathering at Loudun in 1596, and thenceforth he was a frequent delegate to such assemblies. He succeeded in preventing the ad- dition of certain limitations to the Edict of Nantes, and brought the Edict to the Synod of Montpellier in 159& In 1601 and 1602 he took part in two celebrated discussions at Montpellier with the Jemits Cotton and Gaultier. In 1603 he presided over the National Synod at Gap, when an article was added to the Reformed confession of faith declaring the pope to be the Antichrist foretold in the Scriptures. In 1607 Henry IV. granted him permission as representative of the Church of Dauphin^ to establish an academy at Montpellier, and he became professor, returning, however, after a short time to Mont^limar. In 1612 he became pastor and professor at Montauban. When Louis XIII. besieged the city in 1621 Chamier sent his Ftudents to the walls, shared himself in all the dangers and misfortunes of the citizens, and was mortally wounded during the defense. In theology he held fast to Calvin's dogma of predestination, even to supralapsarianism; in some other respects he differed from Calvin, e.g., concerning Christ's descent into hell and the doctrine of angels. His woiks were: Ditpuie de la vocation des ministres de Vigliee rifonrUe (La Rochelle, 1589); Epiatolce iexuiiiea (Geneva, 1599); La Confusion dee diepuiee papieiee (1600); DieptUatio echolaetico-theoloffica de (Fcumenico pontifice (1601); Im Honte de Babylone Stian, 1612); La JieuUomanie (Montauban, 1618); Journal du voyage de M. D, Chamier d Paris el d la cour de HenH IV. en 1607 (ed. C. Read, Paris, 1858). G. Bonet-Maury. Bibliography: J. Quick, Memoir of D. Chamier, wUh SoHeea of his DeacendanU, London, 1862. also ia Bead's •ditioD df the Journal, ils. III.— 1
CHANCEL CHANCEL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHANCEL: In the narrowest sense the sanc- tuary of a church, i.e., an enclosure beyond or within the choir containing the altar. As the dis- tinction between clergy and laity developed, it became customary to reserve an ever larger space for the former, and separate it from the body of the church, as by a screen. Their space then came to be designated as the chancel, and the word is often employed in modem usage for all beyond the nave and transepts. See Altar. CHANCERY, APOSTOLIC (Cancellaria Apoe- tolica). See Curia, § 3. CHANDIEU, shan"dyt>', ANTOINE DE LA
ROCHE CHANDIEU, ANTOINE DE LA ROCHE

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHANDIEU, ANTOINE DE LA ROCHE: French Reformed theologian; b. at the castle of Chabot (near Macon) 1534; d. at Geneva Feb. 23, 1591. His trend toward the Reformed was strengthened during his study of law at Tou- louse, and after a theological course at Geneva he became the pastor of the Reformed congregation of Paris, 155&-62. When in the night of Sept. 4, 1557, a Protestant meeting was attacked and 140 persons were imprisoned, Chandieu published his Remonstrance au Rot and his Apologie des bons Chretiens contre les ennemis de lUglise catholique. In consequence, he was arrested, but was soon released at the intervention of Anthony of Navarre. In 1558 he went to Orleans, but soon returned to Paris. He took an active part in the deliberations of the first national synod of the Reformed Church in France which was held at Paris May 26-28, 1559, and assisted in preparing a confession of faith. He presided at the third national synod at Orleans, Apr. 25, 1562, where Morelli's doctrine regarding the general right of voting at ecclesiastical elections was condemned. The controversy never- theless continued, and Chandieu wrote a rejoinder. La confirmation de la discipline eccUsiastique obser- v4e en iglises rfformies de France (Geneva, 1566). At the eighth national synod, held at Nimes, May 6, 1572, the matter of Morelli, who was seconded by Pierre Ramus, De Rosier, Bergeron, and others, was again taken up and again condemned. After the massacre of St. Bartholomew (1572), Chandieu fled to Switzerland, and lived first at Geneva and afterward at Lausanne and Aubonne, everywhere advocating and defending the cause of his country- men, many of whom lived in Switzerland. In the religious war of 1585 he was field-chaplain to Henry of Navarre; but in May, 1588, he returned to his family at Geneva, where he died three years later, lamented by the Protestants of Geneva and France OhAndler Ohannlni and by Bezs. Chandieu was a prolific author, writing under the pseudonyms of Zamariel, Theo- psaltes, La Croix, and, after 1577, of Sadeel. Among his works special mention may be made of the following: MediUUiones in Paalmum xxxii. (Geneva, 1578; Eng. transl. by W. Watkinson, London, 1579); De verba Dei acripto (1580); De vera peccatorum remiasione (1580); Deunico Ckristi aacerdotio (Cieneva, 1581); De veritate naturce hur- mancB Ckriati (1585); De apirituali manducaHone corporia Ckriati (1589; Eng. transl., London, 1859); and De aacramentali manducaHone corporia Ckriati (Geneva, 1589). A collected edition appeared at Geneva in 1592 under the title Antonii Sadadia viri nobUiaaimi opera theohgica. Of great impor- tance was his Hiatoire dea pera^ctUiona et mariyra de Vigliae de Paria depuia Van 1667 juaqu*au tempa de Charlea IX, (Lyons, 1563), in which he de- scribed his residence at Paris (1557-60). He also distinguished himself as a poet, and in 1563 defended his Church in verse against the attacks of the poet Pierre de Ronsard. (Theodor ScHont.) Bibliography: A. Bemus, Le Miniatn A. de Chandieu. in Bulletin tU la eocifU de Vhietoire du proteatantUme fran^ie, xxxvu (1888). 2 sqq.; J. Senebier. Hietoire liUhvire de Oenhm, i. 322 sqq., Geneva. 1786; E. and E. Haa«. La France proteetante, ed. H. L. Bordier, iii. 1049 sqq., PariB. 1862; lichtonbeiver, E3R, iii. 33-41, PariB, 1878.
CHAIIDLER, EDWARD CHANDLER, EDWARD

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHANDLER, EDWARD: Church of England bishop; b. in Dublin about 1670; d. in London July 20, 1750. He studied at Emmanuel Ck)llege, Cambridge (M.A., 1693; D.D., 1701); was con- secrated bishop of Lichfield 1717, and in 1730 was translated to Durham. He gained his reputation by his Defence of Christianity from the Prophecies of the Old Testament (London, 1725), a reply to A Discourse on the Grounda^ and Reasons of the Chriatian Religion (1724) by Anthony Collins (q.v.). Collins replied with The Scheme of Literal Prophecy Considered (1726), and Chandler then published A Vindication of the Defence of Christianity from the Prophecies of the Old Testament (2 vols., 1728). The chief point of their debate was whether or not there was general expectation of the coming of a messiah at the time of the birth of Jesus, Collins denying this and Chandler affirming it. (Chandler has been charged with having bought his see, and with dying " shamefully rich."
CHAITDLER, SAMUEL CHANDLER, SAMUEL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHANDLER, SAMUEL: English Presbyterian; b. at Hungerford (26 m. w.s.w. of Reading), Berk- shire, 1693; d. in London May 8, 1766. He was educated at Bridgewater and at Gloucester, where he formed lifelong friendships with Bishop Butler and Archbishop Seeker. He finished his studies at Leyden; became pastor of the Presbyterian church at Peckham, Surrey (a suburb of London), 1716; assistant at the Old Jewry, London, 1726, and in 1728 pastor. He was a learned and talented man, and is said to have refused offers of preferment in the Established Church. In 1760 he preached a sermon on the death of George II., in which he compared the deceased king to David. This called forth an anonymous pamphlet in which David was described as a bad man, and the comparison objected to as an insult to the late king. Chandler made a brief reply in 1762, and then prepared A Critical History of the Life of David (2 vols.. London, 1766), which is his best known and most valuable work. His other publications were nu- merous, and are for the most part controversial, directed against the Deists or the Roman Cath- olics. Four volumes of sermons were published posthumously (1768). In theology he was a semi- Arian, or, as he expressed it, " a moderate Cal- vinist."
CHANGE OF CONFESSION CHANGE OF CONFESSION

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHANGE OF CONFESSION: The change from one Christian Church to another. The expression is not equivalent to change of religion, and the subject has practical interest mainly as concerns conversions from Roman Catholicism to Protestant- ism and vice versa in certain European countries where legal complications are involved. Where only one confession is recognized by law, there can be no change of confession. Thus there was none before the time of the Reformation; not only was it true that every secession from the Church was considered an offense, but no such thing was recognized either by ecclesiastical or secular law. In Germany rules of procedure in cases of confessional change first began to be for- mulated after the Evangelical princes and the German Empire ceased to acknowledge the law against heretics by the Religious Peace of Augsburg in 1555, and after the Empire decreed at the Peace of Westphalia in 1648 that under certain conditions Protestants in Roman Catholic territories and Roman Catholics in Protestant territories might be tolerated and possess civil rights. These rules were further developed imder the modem principle of toleration, according to which the State recog- nizes in the Churches only more or less favor^ associations, and treats them accordingly from the legal point of view. The Roman Catholic Church, however, still clings to the state of affairs before the Reformation, and still considers itself the only existing Church. According to the Roman view, every one who goes over to Protestantism is a heretic, and every one who changes from Protestantism to the Roman Catholic Church returns from an error of faith to the knowledge of truth or rather to the churchly authority which possesses this truth. The ban is im- posed upon every one who leaves the Church; even every bom Protestant is under the ban; and every one who goes over to Catholicism is required not only to make the Catholic confession of faith, but also to confess that as Protestant he was a heretic, and to renoimce his heresy and ask for absolution. The Protestant Churches admit the right of change, although a person who makes use of this right is regarded as imfaithful. The declaration of an intention to make a change, regular attend- ance at the services of another church, or at its communion table, are considered sufficient to sever old connections. Whoever comes over from an- other Church is not required to abjure his former faith, but simply to make a confession according to the new doctrine, whereupon he is admitted to the Lord's Supper as the signum communionis. It is the task of the State to regulate the exist- ence of different confessions side by side, as well as to protect the liberty of conscience of the in- REUGIOUS ENCYCLOPEDIA Ohandler dividual. Accordingly the legal ordinances con- cerning change of confession proceed from the State. The law of Prussia forbids the making of proselytes, but this is interpreted to mean that no religious party has the right " to seduce members of another confession by force or cimning to join its own Church/' and that ''nobody is allowed to disturb the peace of a family or impair its rights under the pretense of religious zeal." In Austria Protestants were, until 1868, forbidden to con- veri Roman Catholics. The modem State has generally fixed a certain age before which con- version can not take place, in order to exclude dis- putes as to the capacity of judgment of the con- vert. The State leaves the conditions of admission to the church organizations, but sometimes regu- lates the form of withdrawal for the sake of keeping accurate ecclesiastical statistics. The person who leaves has sometimes been leqiured to announce his withdrawal to the pastor, and sometimes a cer- tificate of dismissal is required. The Austrian interconfessional law of May 25, 1868, and the Prussian law of May 14, 1873, require only a dec- laration before the proper state official, who notifies the Church. (A. Hauck.) CHANNnrG, WILLIAM ELLERY. Life (I 1). His Views aa Stated by Himaelf (| 2). His DoctriDes, Influence, and Character (| 3). Works (I 4). William EUery Channing, the most celebrated and influential Unitarian theologian America has pro- duced, was bom at Newport, R. I., Apr. 7, 1780; d. at Bennington, Vt., Oct. 2, 1842. HiB father was an honored judge and a moder- ate Calvinist; his mother, a refined and pious woman. Under such influences he early manifested a deeply religious nature, and chose the clerical profession. He traced his conversion to the influence of the funeral of his father, and a religious revival which then swept over New England. After his father's death he passed under the tuition of his uncle at New London, the Rev. Henry Channing, and then went to Harvard Col- lege, being graduated in 1798. For I. Life, two years he acted as private tutor in Richmond, Va., and while there bad such mental agony from religious doubts that be was physically enfeebled, and returned to New- port in 1800 " thin and pallid," with a constitution permanently impaired. At home he associated much with the Rev. Dr. Samuel Hopkins — the fanx>tis Calvinist, and pupil of Jonathan Eklwards — for whose character he felt the deepest reverence. In 1802 he resumed to Harvard, where he had been elected regent. The same year he was licensed to preach, and at once distinguished himself by Ills fire, his unction, and his elegant style. On June 1, 1803, he was ordained and installed pastor of the Congregational Church in Federal Street, Boffton, his only pastoral settlement. Here he introduced a new era in preaching, and enlivenetl the pulpit by themes of Christian philanthropy ^d social reform. A new edifice was erected in 1809 to aoconmiodate the increased congregations. At the dose of his sermons Channing was often physically exhausted. In the earlier period of his ministry he was as indefatigable in pastoral visitation as in his pulpit. Not long after this time, it became apparent that many of the Congregational churches of New England, especially in Boston and its neighborhood, had, through various influences, become Anti- trinitarian and Anti-Calvinistic (see Conoreoa- TioNALisTS, I., 4, { 8 ; UNirARiANs). In the separa- tion which followed, Channing allied himself with the so-called " Liberal " party, and became its ac- knowledged head. In a famous sermon at the installation of Rev. Jared Sparks as pastor of the Unitarian Society in Baltimore in 1810 he gave a clear statement of the points wherein he diverged from the orthodox churehes of the time. He is commonly called a Unitarian; but, in his own lan- guage, he wished to regard himself as " belonging not to a sect, but to the conununity of free minds, of lovers of truth, and followers of Christ, both on earth and in heaven. I desire to escape the narrow walls of a particular chureh " (Sermon at the instal- lation of Rev. M. J. Motte, 1828). This catho- licity of spirit secured him the esteem of men of all schools and parties. In a letter of May 8, 1841, he declared: " I have little or no interest in Uni- tarianism as a sect. I can endure no sectarian bonds. With Dr. Priestley, a good and great man who had much to do in producing the late Unitarian movement, I have less sympathy than with many of the 'Orthodox'" (Memoir, ii. 105). In a letter of Aug. 29, 1841, addressed to an l<^ngli«hipan, he expressed the noble sentiment: 2. His Views " As I grow older ... I distrust see- as Stated by tarian influence more and more. I Himself, am more detached from a denomina- tion, and strive to feel more my con- nection with the Universal Church, with all good and holy men. I am little of a Unitarian, have little ssrmpathy with the system of Priestley and Belsham, and stand aloof from all but those who strive and pray for clearer light, and look for a purer and more effectual manifestation of Christian truth " {Memoir, ii. 106). From this confession some have inferred that toward the dose of his life he leaned more to orthodoxy; but this is em- phatically denied by his nephew and biographer, and by E. S. Gannett, his colleague and successor. In another letter written three months later (Nov., 1841), he says: " I value Unltarianism, not because I regard it as in itself a perfect system, but as freed from many great and pernicious errors of the older sjrstems, as encouraging freedom of thought, as raising us above the despotism of the Church, and as breathing a mild and tolerant spirit into all the members of the Christian body" (Memmr, ii. 121). Channing opposed, on the one hand, the stiff, cold, Puritan orthodoxy of his day, and combated vigorously the traditional views on the Trinity, the atonement, and total depravity; on the other hand, he opposed equally the rationalistic and radical Unitarianism, and sought a middle way. He was averse to creeds and precise doctrinal statements, and laid stress on freedom and individuality in belief and religious experience. He insisted upon Chaplain the expression of ChriBtian belief in virtuous action and humanitarian sympathies. He dwelt much upon love as expressing God's purpose in the mis- sion of Christ and as the supreme manifestation of Christian character. He emphasized the human element in Christ and Christianity, which was too much overlooked by Calvinism, and paid one of the most beautiful and eloquent tributes 3. His Doc- to the perfection of the moral character trineSy In- of Christ. He held up his example as fluence,and the great ideal to be followed. He Character, found in Christ a perfect manifestation of God to men, and at the same time the ideal of humanity, who spoke with divine authority. He firmly believed in his sinlessness, miracles, and resurrection. He was *' always in- clined," he wrote as late as Mar. 31, 1832, " to the doctrine of the preexistence of Christ " {Memoir, ii. 133). He was, therefore, not a humanitarian, like Priestley, but rather an 'Arian, as his nephew calls him. His talent and generous cast of mind were averse to controversy, and he paid little atten- tion to metaphysical questions. He preferred to dwell upon " Christ's spirit, his distinguishing moral attributes, the purposes of his mission '' (letter of Mar. 31, 1832, Memoir^ ii. 133), and the problems of practical Christianity. He remained a supematuralist to the end; and his last utter- ances on the Gospels and the character of Jesus are among the strongest and noblest. Of the resur- rection he said (letter, Nov. 20, 1839, Memoir, ii. 145): " The resurrection of Christ, related as it is to his character and religion, and recorded as it is in the Gospels, is a fact which comes to me with a certainty which I find in few ancient histories." In a letter, July 6, 1841, regretting omissions in a recent sermon of Theodore Parker, he wrote: " Without miracles the historical Christ is gone. ... In regard to miracles I never had the least diflficulty. The grand miracle is the perfect divine character of Christ, and to such a being a miracu- lous mode of manifestation seems natural. It is by no figure of speech that I call Christ miraculous." Channing, however, was not so much a theologian as a preacher and a philanthropist. He was no dreamer, but a practical reformer. He labored for the purification of life and society, and entered heartily into schemes for the abolition of slavery, of intemperance, of prison-abuses, and of war, and for the circulation of the Bible. He had an exalted idea of the nobility of human nature, and an imdy- ing faith in freedom and progress. Channing's works have been published in various forms (complete ed., 6 vols., Boston, 1848; 1 vol., 1875; London, 1880; etc.), and have been widely circulated in English and translations. The best known are Evidences of Christianity, 4* Works, addresses delivered at Cambridge, 1821; a treatise on Slavery, 1841; discourses on the Character of Christ ; and critical essays on Milton, Finelon, Bonaparte, and Self- culture, The centenary of his birth was celebrated at Newport on Apr. 7, 1880, and memorial meet- ings were also held in New York, Brooklyn, Wash- ington, and several cities of New England. The comer-stone of the Channing Memorial Church at Newport (dedicated Oct. 19, 1881) was laid at this time. (P. ScHAPFf) D. S. Schaff. Biblxoorapht: Memoir of W. E. ChanninOt wUh ExtractB from kia Corrtrpondence and ManuacripU, by his nephew, W. H. Channing, 3 vols., Boston, 1848; Channing, «a vie et tet cruvTM, with preface by C. de R^musat, Paris, 1857, enlarged ed., 1861; C. A. Bartol, PrineijieB and Por- traiU, Boston, 1880; C. T. Brooks. Wiiliam EUery Chan^ ning, a Centennial Mem&ry, ib. 1880; Elisabetii Palmer Peabody, Reminieceneea of William EUery Channing, ib. 1880; The Channing Centenary, ed. R. M. Bellows, ib. 1881; W. W. Fenn, W. E. Channing and the Growth of Spiritual Chrietianiiy, in Pioneera of Religioiu Liberty in America, ib. 1903. Also J. H. Allen, The Unitarians, in the American Churdi Hietory Seriea, New York, 1804; G. W. Cooke, Unitarianiem in America, Boston, 1902; J. W. Chadwick, William EUery Channing, Miniater of Religion, ib. 1903; and other works mentioned under UNrrABXANB. CHAinnNG, WILLIAM HENRY: Unitarian, nephew of William Ellery Channing; b. in Boston May 25, 1810; d. in London Dec. 23, 1884. He was graduated at Harvard, 1829, and at the Cam- bridge Divinity School, 1833. He filled many pastorates, most of them of short duration, the longer and more important being at Cincinnati, 1838-41; Rochester, N. Y., 1852-54; Liverpool, England, 1854-61 (Renshaw Street Chapel, 1854- 1857; Hope Street Chapel, 1857-61, where he suc- ceeded Dr. James Martineau); Washington, D. C, 1861-65. He returned to England in 1865 and spent the rest of his life there, making several visits, however, to his native land. He was an eloquent speaker, but more successful as a lecturer and occasional preacher than as pastor; an earnest, spiritual, and enthusiastic man, but visionary and impractical. The chief elements of his creed were faith in God, belief in Jesus Christ as the perfect man, and a boundless hope for humanity to be realized through organization and external reme- dies. Schemes of social reform captivated him, he sympathized with the Brook Farm experiment, and adopted many of the ideas of Fourier. The antislavery struggle in America enlisted his ardent support, and, while pastor in Washington during the Civil War, he labored untiringly for the Union cause and for the relief of the wounded in the field. He was chaplain of Congress, 1863-64. In 1869 he delivered a course of Lowell lectures at Boston on the " Progress of Civilization." He published many sermons, addresses, and articles, and edited several short-lived periodicals; translated Jouf- fro/s Introduction to Ethics (2 vols., Boston, 1841); prepared a Memoir of his uncle, William Ellery Channing (3 vols., 1848), and edited a volume of his discourses. The Perfect Life (1873); edited the Memoir and Writings of his cousin, J. H. Perkins (2 vols., 1851); and, with James Freeman Clarke and R. W. Emerson, edited the Memoirs of Margaret Fuller (2 vols., 1852). Bibliography: O. B. Frothingham, Life of WiUiam Henry Channing, Boston, 1886. CHAITTAL, JEANNE FRAN9OISE FREMIOT DE. See Visitation, Order op the. CHANTEPIE DE LA SAUSSAYE, shan"te-pi' de la s6"86', PIERRE DANIEL: Dutch Protestant; b. at Leeuwarden (16 m. e.n.e. of Harlingen) Apr. 9, 1848. He was educated at the University of Ghanninff Chaplain Utrecht (D.D., 1871), and after being a pastor of the Reformed Church from 1S72 to 1878, was appointed professor of the history of religions at Amsterdam, where he remained imtil 1899. Since the latter year he has been professor of ethics at Leyden. He is a member of the Royal Academy of Sciences at Anosterdam and several other learned societies, and, in addition to many briefer con- tributions to periodicals and a number of sermons, has written: Lehrbuch der Religionageachichte (2 vols., Freiburg, 1887-79, 3d ed., 1905; Eng. transl. of vol. i. by B. S. Colyer-Fergusson, London, 1892); Zekerheid en Twijfel (Haarlem, 1893); and Re- ligion of the Ancient Teutons (Boston, 1901).
CHAHTRT CHANTRY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHANTRY: A chapel or an aisle in a church endowed for the purpose of having masses said for the soul of the founder, or of others nominated by him; also the money left for such purposes. The chantry priest was one employed on such a foun- dation. There were 1,000 chantries in England when Henry VIII., in 1545, issued his order for their suppression (37 Hen. VIII., cap. 4), on the ground that their possessions were generally mis- applied. The death of the king soon ensuing, their suppression was apparently not carried out. At all events, in the first year of Edward VI. (1 Edward VI., cap. 14, 1547) a very long act was passed dis- solving the chantries, along with free chapels, hospitals, fraternities, brotherhoods, gilds, and other promotions, and devoting their revenues to charitable and educational purposes. The reason given for such appropriation was the alleged main- tenance of superstition and ignorance by these foundations. The text of this article is in Gee and Hardy, Documents, pp. 328-357.
CHAPEL CHAPEL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHAPEL: A small building used for divine worship. It may be entirely detached, to supply the needs of people at a distance from the parish church; or form a separate apartment in a large building, such as a convent or a nobleman's house; or run out of and form part of a large church, with an altar of its own. In this last sense some of the larg^ Gothic churches have small chapels en- tirely surrounding the east end or choir, the " Lady Chapel," dedicated to the Blessed Virgin, being usually directly behind the high altar (see Archi- tecture, Ecclesiastical). In modem English usage the word chapel is commonly applied to non-conformist places of worship, those of the Es- tablishment alone being known as churches; but the tenn " chapel of ease " is occasionally applied to Established places of worship coming under the meaning first given above, and without parochial boundaries. CHAPIN, EDWIN HUBBELL: American Uni- venalist; b. at Union Village, Washington Coimty, N. Y., Dec. 29, 1814; d. in New York Dec. 26, 1880. He studied four years at the Bennington (Vermont) Academy, began the study of law, but abandoned it in 1837 to become assistant editor of the Evangelical Magazine and Gospel Advocate^ a Universalist paper published at Utica, N. Y. He was ordained in 1838. He was pastor at Richmond, Va., 1838-39; at Chariestown, Mass., 1840-45; and assistant to Hosea Ballou in Bos- ton, 1845-48. In 1848 he went to the Fourth Universalist Church, New York, and remained there till death. During his pastorate the society moved from Murray Street to new and more com- modious church buildings on Broadway near Spring Street (1852), and then to the comer of Fifth Avenue and Forty-fifth Street (1866), and adopted the name " Church of the Divine Pater- nity." He was one of the prominent clergymen of New York, and his services were much in demand as lecturer and on special occasions. His sym- pathies and creed were broad, his preaching was eloquent and popular. He possessed a ready wit and no slight poetical talent; an admirable ordina- tion-hynm, " Father, at this altar bending," is from his pen. His publications, chiefly sermons, include Discoureee on the Lord*8 Prayer (Boston, 1850); Moral Aspects of City Life (New York, 1853); Lessons of Faith and Life (1877); The Church of the Living God (1881). Bibliography: S. Ellis, Life of Edwin H. Chapin, Boston. 1882.
CHAPLAIN CHAPLAIN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHAPLAIN: A term which, with its equiva- lents (Lat. CapeUanus, Glenn. Kaplan ^ Fr. Des- servant), designates members of the clergy as- signed to some kinds of special service. In the Roman Catholic Church a chaplain is a priest who acts as assistant to the pastor of a parish. According to both Tridentine and earlier law, each parish has but one priest in full charge; if it is too large to be properly administered by him alone, he is supposed to appoint a sufficient number of chap- lains, with the approval of the bishop. In the These serve directly under him, are Roman maintained by him, and may be dis- Catholic missed at his pleasure. There are cases. Church, however, in which a beneficed founda- tion exists within a parish, with chapels or altars at which the incumbent is bound to say a certain number of masses. Such beneficed chaplains {capeUani curati) are either bound to assist the parish priest, or may be specially directed to do so by the bishop. As beneficed clergy, they can not be removed at the latter's will; but he is not obliged to avail himself of their services, unless certain parochial duties are assigned to them by the terms of their foundation. Such cases occiu* most fre- quently in chapels situated at a considerable dis- tance from the parish church, or in hospitals and similar institutions. In case the parish priest fails to appoint chaplains, or does not appoint enough, when directed to do so by the bishop, the latter, in accordance with the law of Devolution (q.v.), may proceed to appoint. In some places, by either written law or custom, the bishop has a general right of appointment on his own motion; and then the chaplains are removable not by the parish priest but by the bishop — ^unless they have bene- ficed rights as mentioned above. In France the chaplains were called desservants. The old French law distinguishes between parish churches (parochiales eccUeia) and subsidiary {svccur- sales) chapels which supplement them. The system of the seventeenth century drew a distinction between parish priests who were independent in their fimo- Chaplain Chapter lions and chaplains who officiated only by the license of the bishop, revocable at any time. This 83r8tem struck Napoleon when he was thinking of restoring the Church after the destruction wrought by the Revolution. The Concordat of 1801 laid down only the fundamental principles, The French especially regarding the bishops, who Detservants. were permitted to name incumbents approved by the government to the parish churches. The " organic articles " of 1802 went further into detail, and dealt with the support of the churches. As the payment of parish priests was imdertaken by the State, it was desirable to limit their number, and provision was made for the establishment of one in each district. But as these districts were far too large to be administered by one priest, as numy others as were necessary were to be chosen for siuxuraales, and supported by their pensions and the voluntary offerings of the congregations. Their appointment was to be made by the bishop, and revocable at his pleasure. Im- perial decrees of May and December, 1804, rear- ranged the ajssignments and provided a stipend of five himdred francs apiece. The deaservants made increasing claims to independence; but the bishops were not inclined to give up their powers, and Gregoiy XVI. sanctioned the existing arrange- ment until further order. Repeated controversies arose over the position of these priests, who were by far the larger number in France, Belgium, and the provinces on the left bank of the Rhine; and while still theoretically removable, they succeeded in establishing the rule in practise that they should not be displaced except for cause, after an investi- gation by diocesan officials. Historically, also, the name chaplain was early applied to priests who served private chapels, in castles and royal palaces. Bishops also had their private chaplains, who served partly as secre- taries. The popes, too, have always had their own chaplains, who have as a rule acted as their con- fessors. By present use these latter are divided into three classes: honorary, ceremonial, and private. (O. MBJERf.) The clergymen employed in the army and navy of all Christian countries are called " chaplains," and are under different rules and regulations. Thus in the British army they are under a chaplain- general of the forces; are not attached to particular regiments or corps, but to garrisons In MilitBry and military stations at home and and Naval abroad. They are according to their Service, length of service divided into four classes, corresponding to colonels, lieutenant-colonels, majors, and captains, re- spectively; and after twenty-five years' serv- ice are entitled to retire on* a pension. They are not all from the Church of England or Ireland, but some come from the Presbyterian and Roman Catholic churches. In the United States chaplains are appointed by the president, and assigned or transferred by the secretary of war, but report monthly to the adjutant-general, especially as to the baptism, marriages, and fimerals at which they have officiated. During the Civil War there was in the Northern army a chaplain to each regiment. but at its conclusion all were discharged. La- ter, thirty were engaged and sent to posts, gen- eraily on the frontier. To-day there are no regi- mental chaplains, but only chaplains attached to posts. Much depends upon the post commander whether the chaplain, can be efficient or not. In 1907, Major-General Frederick D. Grant reports, there were fifty-three chaplains in the whole arm}', from different denominations and ranked as fol- lows: Majors 4, Captains 41, First Lieutenants 8. He adds: " In general their duties are to have charge of religious instruction, visit the sick, bap- tize children, officiate at marriages and funerals, and by statute they have charge of post schools in the English branches." The number of chaplains in the United States x^wy on July 1st, 1907, was twenty-five, with rank as follows. Captains 4. Commanders 7, Lieutenant-Commanders 5, Lieu- tenants (junior grade) 2. Their duties are thus set forth in the regulations of 1905, communicated by the commandant of the New York Navy Yard. (1 ) The chaplain shall perform divine service and offer prayers on board of the ship to which he is attached, at such times as the captain may prescribe; and on board other ships to which chaplains are not attached, or at shore stations and naval hospitals, when so directed by the senior officer present. (2) He shall be permitted to conduct public worship according to the manner and forms of the church of which he is a minister. (3) He shall facilitate, so far as possible, the performance of divine service by clergymen of churches other than his own, who may be permitted by the captain to visit the ship for that purpot«e. (4) He may, ^ith the sanction of the captain, form voluntary classes for religious instruction. (5) He shall visit the sick frequently, unless the con- dition of the sick renders such visits unadvisable. (6) Under the direction of the captain, he shall supervise the instruction of such persons in the navy as may need to be taught the elementary principles of reading, writing, arithmetic, and geography. He shall report in writing to the captain at the end of each quarter the character of in^struction given, the nimiber of hours of instruction, and the progress made by each person. He shall always report at quarters when on board. His duty in battle is to aid the wounded, and his station at quar- ters for battle and for inspection shall be as the captain may direct. Chaplains shall report annu- ally to the secretary of the navy the official services performed by them. The pay of these army and navy chaplains varies according to their length of service and rank, and in navy according to whether they are at sea or on shore. In the French army and navy attendance upon the chaplains' services is voluntary, but in all other European countries it is compulsory. In the United States navy the pen- alty of disturbing a church service is three months' imprisonment. Chaplains are also attached to militia regiments in the United States. They are chosen by the regiments, generally on the strength of their outeide reputation, so that it is a distinct compliment and recognition of ability and popularity to be asked. They preach an occasional sermon, and clad in a distinctive uniform appear on the parades of their regiments. Ohaplaln Ohapter Chaplains are attached to parliamentary bodies and to state and national societies. Their duties ifl congress, the state legislatures, and the British paitiament are mainly connected with the relig- ious service at the beginning of each day's session, b the ease of societies they preach before the body ODoe a year and say grace at the annual banquet. Prisons, almshouses, asylums, and similar institu- tioDS also have chaplains, who commonly Uve in the building and conduct regular services. Where a chaplain is a man of the right stamp, he is of the utmost help to the officers, as he can do much to pro- mote good feeling between them and the subor- dinates, beneficiaries, or inmates, as the case may be, for he is by education and manner of life the equal of the chief, and by profession and intercourse the friend of all the rest. It is good poUcy in a government or institution to make this branch of service attractive to the clerical profession, and to maintain it by strict discipline. Bibuogbafbt: L. Ferraris, Prompta hMioOieea eanonica, •JY. ** capellanuB," Venioe. 1782-04; Z. B. van Espen, JuB^edaiaaiieumuniveraum, part 2. tit. 3, chap. 2, Louvain, 170O; D. Baair,TraeiatuM de Parodut, pp. 426 sqq., 444 sqq., M5 Hiq.. Fuia. 1856; A. L. Richter, Ldtrbwh det . . . Kinkmntkia, ed. W. Kahl. p. 468, Leipaic. 1886; E. Friedbcrs, LdtHnuh dea KirdianrachU, pp. 175 eqq., ib. 1805 CHAPMAH, (J) WILBUR: Presbyterian; b. at Richmond, Ind., June 17, 1859. He was educated at Lake Forest University (B.A., 1879) and Lane Theological Seminary (1882), and was pastor of the Pint Reformed Church, Albany, N. Y., from 1883 to 1888. He was pastor of Bethany Presby- terian Church, Philadelphia, in 1888-93, and then engaged in evangelistic work until 1899, when he became pastor of the Fourth Pre8b3rterian Church, New Yoric City, where he remained until 1903. In the latter year he was chosen executive secretary of the General Assembly's Committee on Evan- gelistic Work for the Presbyterian Church. His works include: Ivory Palaces of the King (Chicago, 1893); Received Ye the Holy Ghost t (1894); " And PeUT*' (1895); Present-Day Parables (Qeveland, C, 1900); Revivals and Missions (New York, 1900); Present-Day Evangelism (1903); Fishing for Men (Chicago, 1904); and Samuel Hopkins HadUy of ITaterSfrerf (New York. 1906); Another Mile {l^m^ CHAPTER. Origin and Development of the Cominon Life (f 1). In the Eleventh and Twelfth Centuriee (f 2). Canons (f 3). Ifodeni Organisation (f 4). Officen (i 5). Legal Provisions and Duties (f 6). la Pkotestant Churches (| 7). A diapter is an eccledastical corporation of a col- legiate nature, whose principal fimction is to pro- vide for public worship in the cathedral or other church to which it is attached. The origin of diapteiB may be traced back to the early period vhoi the bishop had for a council or senate his fndiyierium, i.e., the total number of the priests ind deacons belonging to his own particular church. Ilw farther development has been largely influ- oead flinoe the fourth century by the extension of I institutionfl in some degree to the secular clergy. Eusebius of Vercelli and Augustine estab- lished a community life for their clergy under one roof, and at Hippo there was even a I. Origin monastic vow of poverty. These ex- and Devel- amples were imitated in Africa, Spain, opment of and Gaul; in the last-named the ex- the Com- pression mensa eanonica waa used mon Life, as early as Gregory of Tours. The phrase is explained by the fact that all the clergy of a church were inscribed in a special list (matriciUa or canon), from which regularly appointed clergy were known as canonici. This use of the term occurs in the canons of the Synod of Laodicea (c. 360), and in the sixth century was general in the Prankish kingdom. The mensa ea- nonica, accordingly, was the common table of the clergy of a particular church, and the vita eanonica their life in common. There was originally no ref- erence in the term to any rule of life, as some have thought from another use of the word canon. By the middle of the eighth century, this community life for the clergy had become very general through- out the Prankish kingdom, usually following the reg- ulations laid down by Chrodegang of Metz for his clergy. At the Synod of Aachen in 816 Louis the Pious caused a new code of rules to be drawn up, based on Chrodegang's, as that had been on the Benedictine rule, and relating to churches other than cathedrals which had several clergy, later known as collegiate churches. According to both rules, the clergy lived with the bishop or other superior in a prescribed house (clausirum), and were required to recite together the canonical hours and to render obedience to their head. In this capacity, besides the bishop, the archdeacon appears in Chrodegang's rule, the provost in that of Aachen. The organization differed from the monastic system in being conditioned by differences of clerical rank and by the permission of private property. In the ninth and early tenth centuries, this became the approved form of clerical life in cathedrals and other larger churches, and the name chapter was applied to the organization. In the rule of Chrodegang capitulum designated originally the chapter to be read at the daily gatherings of the clergy, then the place in which the reading occurred, then the gathering, and finally the community aa a whole. As a result of the gradual redistribution of the revenues which had originally served for the main- tenance of the community Ufe, and the permission of separate residences (jnansiones) for individual clergy, the vita eanonica decasred during the eleventh centiuy in many churches where it had formerly obtained. There were, however, numerous efforts directed to its restoration, in the spirit of the new ascetic movement and on the theory that the pos- session of private property had caused a. In the the decay. Supported by men like Eleventh Hildebrand, F^ter Damian, and Ger- and hoh of Reichersberg, and favored by Twelfth the popes, these efforts were decidedly Centuries, successful, and led to an enforcement of the common life by the Lateran Council of 1059 under Nicholas II., which extended the community principle to property. In the later Chapter eleventh and the twelfth centuries the former secu- lar canons were in many localities replaced by regular canons, living under a stricter rule, especially that known as of Saint Augustine, though it is not his composition, but a collection of excerpts from mainly pseudo-Augustinian sermons. These Augus- tinian canons, in their turn, were not seldom re- placed from the twelfth century on by Premon- stratensians. But the ascetic tendency was not strong or enduring enough to reform all the chap- ters. The independence given by the possession of property prevented their reconstruction on the original model; and the worldliness of the higher clergy made such regulation oppressive, so that the institution once more fell into decay in the thirteenth centuiy. The functions of the preshyterium as the bishop's council were assimied, during the period of the prevalence of the vita canonica, not by the whole body of the clergy living in oonmiunity, but by those of the higher orders; and, on the other hand, room wajs found for the cooperation (in important matters affecting the diocese) of the clergy of the other churches in the see city besides the cathedral, and for representatives of the lay population of the city. The actual current administration was indeed conducted by the cathedral chapter; but when the distribution of revenues above alluded to made a division between the interests of the bishop and those of the chapter, the former was very apt to neglect to consult the latter, or to rely, for support in his measures, on the other clergy and prominent laity. The Decretals of Gregory IX. enforced the right of the chapter to a consultative voice; and it was finally established as common law that the chapter was the only body with an independent right to advise the bishop in the conduct of diocesan affairs. From the beginning of the thirteenth cen- tury the chapters succeeded in excluding the other clergy and the lay nobility from any voice in the election of bishops. A full or capitular canon was one who had a vote in the chapter, a stall in the choir, and com- monly, though not necessarily, a prebend, i.e., a fixed income derived either from a share of the commimity revenues or from certain specially assigned property, tithes, etc. In contrast with the full rights of the canonici aeniorea, who were in major orders, was the position of the juniores — clerks in minor orders or youths re- 3. Canons, ceiving education in the capitular school, who had no voice in the chap- ter. The niunber of both classes was linuted only by the amount of the community property. Later, especially in Germany from the thirteenth century, the number of canonries and prebends was limited in many chapters, at first for various economic reasons and then for the purpose of assuring a richer live- lihood to their members. The custom still, how- ever, prevailed of receiving youths to be trained for canonries. A special fund was set aside for their support, and they were boimd on their side to the vita communis. They were known as /u- niorea canonici non capitulares, domicelli, domv- ceUarta. In chapters with fixed numbers canonici 9upranuTnerarii were those waiting for a prebend to be vacated The Lateran Council of 1179 had indeed forbidden the conferring of Expectancies (q.v.); but under the lax papal interpretation of the application ot this prohibition to capitular positions, and the definite concession of four ex- pectancies to each chapter by Alexander IV. (1254), the practise continued, and admission among the domiceUarea was regularly the title to a full canonry in order of seniority. Qualifications for admission had long been fixed by the chapters themselves before the common law took cognizance of the question. The Clementina required the possession of holy orders, and the Council of Trent decreed that half the canonries should be given to doctors, masters, or licentiates in theology or canon law, and that in cathedral chapters half should be held by priests. The older statutes of the chapters themselves required (be- sides the possession of a '' title ") that the candi- date shoi^d have received at least the tonsure, and be free from notable bodily defects, and of unblemished honor, of legitimate, and sometimes of noble, birth; fourteen years conmionly, some- times less, was the minimum of age. While all canons were theoretically equal, there were offices among them to which special functions were at- tached. Such were the prcebenda doctorales for those holding doctor's degrees, others destined to provide support !or university professors, proB- bendcB parochiales connected with a parochial cure, prcebendcB presbyterales for those in priest's orders who performed the requisite sacerdotal functions when the majority of the canons were deacons or subdeaoons, proebendce exemptcs or libera to which the obligation of residence was not attached, and prcebenda regicB, either those to which sovereigns had the right of presentation from having founded them, or which were held by the sovereigns them- selves as honorary canons. Besides the canons, who were frequently hindered by political position or disinclination from performing their spiritual functions, there were often a number of vicarii, mansionarii, or capellani, who had charge of the services and represented the canons in them. The organization of chapters in modem times is usually a simpler one, especially owing to their loss of political importance in modem states. They usually consist of a number of capitulares or nume- rarii, who enter upon their rights as soon as they are nominated; the canonici exspectantes, juniores , and domiceUarea have almost ceased to exist. The requirements are: priestly or (in some cases) any major orders; the age of thirty in some places, in others that requisite for the sub- 4. Modem diaconate or twenty>two, unless they Organ- must be priests, when it would be ization. twenty-four; practical experience in ecclesiastical service or in an educa- tional position, or at least a notable degree of learn- ing; and in some cases native birth, either within the country or the diocese. Besides the full canons, there are in some countries honorary canons; in Austria and France deserving clerics who hold merely an honorary title without effective member- ship in the chapter, while in Prussia, although the obligation of residence is not imposed, they have Chapter a sort of membership, extending at least bb far as participation in episcopal elections. The office of vicar still exists; but in the modem chapter its holders are assistants rather than, as formerly, representatives of the canons. As to the officers of the chapter, after the redis- tribution of revenues to which allusion has been made and the acquisition of property, the provost gc^nerally retained only the right of presiding over the chapter and administering its property. The enforcement of discipline and the conduct of public worship was usually in charge of the dean, who had a certain disciplinary power, to be exercised with the counsel and assent of the chapter; 5. Officen. in the Middle Ages his functions were frequently combined with those of the archpriest. Other officials were the primiceriua, cantor, or praeentor, in charge of the services and music; the scholasHcuSf in charge of the chapter school, and often of other schools in the see city or the diocese; the aacrista or thesaurariuaf in charge of the sacred .vessels, vestments, and other things used in divine worship; the cellerariuSf who in the days of the vita communis provided for the housekeeping, and the portaritu, who in the same period r^;ulated the intercourse of the members of the chapter with the outside world. In the nine- teenth-century reorganization of capitular life this whole system of official administration has been much simplified in some countries, especially in Germany, while others, such as Italy and Spain, retain more of the medieval arrangements. In accordance with the provisions of the Council of Trent, a theologian and a penitentiary are appointed for each ch^ter. In the eariy period of the vita ixrmmunia the decision as to the reception of new members into the community rested with its head, either bishop or provost, though the seniores sometimes had a consultative voice. After the dissolution of the common life, the chapter had the right in some cases to confirm or reject a nomination made by the bishop, and in others to nominate independently to certain canonries, while others, again, especially those founded by a bishop, were wholly in his gift. Further modifications were introduced by the pi^al claim of reservation, and by the patronal rights of founders. The emperors from the thirteenth cen- tury, and later other sovereigns and secular and ecclesiastical princes in their own countries, claimed the jti8 pnmariarvm precum, the right to appoint one person to each chapter after their coronation or ooosecration. Opposed to this diversity is the principle of the present common law that cathedral canonries are in the joint gift of the bishop and the chapter, while in collegiate churches they are filled by the chapter with subsequent institution at the hands of the bishop. The chapter is now, since the dissolution of the vita eommttnis and the distribution of what was originally common property, a corporation with a separate legal existence of its own apart from the bishop, competent to deal with both ecclesiastical matters and matters of property, and to ordain and manage its own internal affairs independently, as by altering its former statutes and making new ones. By common law the consent of the bishop is not necessary for this, though it is by special provision in some of the newer re- 6. Legal organized systems. The duties of the Provisions chapter as a whole include the daily and Duties, performance of divine service, both mass and choir offices. Cathedral chapters have the further duty of assisting the bishop in pontifical functions and in the adminis- tration of the diocese. The right corresponding to the last-named duty finds expression in various ways. The bishop is required to have the assent of the chapter for any alienation of the property of the cathedral or diocesan institutions, for any notable change in the system of benefices, for the appoint- ment of a coadjutor, for any measures which are prejudicial to the rights or privileges of the chapter, and for the introduction into the diocese of a new feast of obligation. He is further reqxiired to seek their coimsel in the appointment or deposition of ecclesiastical dignitaries, in the granting of dis- pensations or confirmations, in matters which touch the interests of the chapter, in the more important questions of diocesan administration, etc. For the rights of the chapter during the vacancy of a see or the incapacity of a bishop, see Sedbs Vacans. According to the Roman Catholic theory, cathedral chapters are not essential and fundamental parts of the constitution of the Chureh, but the product of historic development. Accordingly, church law leaves a great deal to local usage in regard to the part to be plajred by them in the administration of a diocese; and they are lacking entirely in many dioceses, as in the "missionary" districts of North America, while in others (as in Eng- land, Ireland, and Canada) their organization is very loose. Little need be said here about the survival of chapters in the Protestant churches. For the Eng- lish system, see England, Chubch of, III., § 3. A few scattered chapters, of either cathedral or col- legiate type, still exist in evangelical Germany, such as those of Brandenburg, Naumburg, Merse- burg, and Zeitz in Prussia, and Meissen and Wurzen in Saxony. After the Reformation the chapters which came over to the new doctrine 7. In Prot- with their bishops were usually dis- estant solved: but a few of them succeeded Churches, in maintaining their existence in spite of the local sovereign, especially those which did not become wholly Ptotestant and went on as " mixed chapters " (Osnabrflck, Hal- berstadt, Minden), with a system of alternation as to the bishopric between the two religions, lasting even through the Peace of Westphalia. The con- nection of the others with the bishops who had become Protestants did not last long, and most of them were sooner or later incorporated with the territories of the sovereigns who had at first been their administrators; and only those named above survived the general secularization of 1803. Even these, however, are not properly church bodies, but corporations for the preservation and admin- istration of certain property and revenues; and steps have been taken toward the aboUtion of the Prussian chapters. (A. Hauck.) Chapter and Verse Divieion Oharlsmata 10 Biblxoorapby: D. Bouix, De eapUtdia, Paris, 1862; P. Schneider, Die bisefidfiidien Domkapitd, Mains, 1866; idem. Die Entwidulung der biediOfiidien Domkapitd bie sum vienOtfUen Jahrhunderte, WQrsburs. 1882; G. A. HuUer, Die iurieHeche Pere&rdiehkeiten der DomkapiUl in Deuitchiand, Bambeis, 1860; G. Finassi, Dei eapihUi caAedrali, Lucca, 1863; P. Hinschius, Kirehenrecht der KeUKoUken und Proleetanten, u. 49-161, Berlin, 1871; A. L. Riehter, Lehrbtuh dee kaitudiechen und evangdieehen Kirthenret^Ue, 8th ed. by W. Kahl, pp. 440 sqq.. 628, Leipeic, 1877-86; W. F. Hook. Churth Dictionary, s.vr. Chapter and Dean, London, 1887; E. Hatch, Orovoth of Church Inetitutione, ib. 1887; idem, Organieaiion of Early Chrietian Churchee, ib. 1888: E. Friedbeig. Ldirbuch dee katholiedien und protettanHachen Kirchenrechte, p. 164, Leipeic, 1896; H. D. M. Spenoe, The White Robe of Churchee, London, 1900; H. Schaefer, Pfarrhirche und StifU Stuttgart. 1903; A. Wermingho£f, Kirehenverfaeeung Deutechlande im MiUdaUer, Hanover, 1905. CHAPTER Aim VERSE DIVISION IN THE BIBLE. See Bible Text, III. CHAPTER-COURTS (Chorgerichte): The name applied, in the caaton of Bern after the Reforma- tion, to the tribunals having charge of matrimonial causes and the execution of church discipline. As early as 1470, the town council of Bern had seriously attempted to take in hand the moral condition of the inhabitants, neglected by the Church. In the same jspirit, the Reformation here was rather one of practise than of doctrine. Thus, after the issue of the first reforming decree, it was naturally one of the concerns of the Bernese authorities to replace the suppressed episcopal courts by a new tribimal which should represent the civil government but regard questions coming before it from a religious stand- point. On May 29, 1528, the new court began its work. It was composed of six members — two from the greater and two from the lesser council, with two preachers. It met in the building belong- ing to the old chapter, whence it probably took its name. In September it set forth principles to gov- ern matrimonial causes, and in November the other matters coming under its jurisdiction. These were offenses against the law of God which could not be punished as violations of express civil statutes — such things as drunkenness, incontinence, usury, atheism, superstition, witchcraft, blasphemy, and gambling, which latter was strictly forbidden as unworthy of Christian people. An appeal had been intended to lie to the council, but this was abrogated in Jan., 1529. In March of this year the first formal regulations were put forth, evi- dently based on those adopted at Zurich in 1525. The punishments prescribed consisted of depriva- tion of honors and offices, imprisonment, banish- ment— ^not often money fines, which became more usual later. The strictness of the judges caused no little murmuring at first, and the " Great Synod " of Jan., 1532, was obliged to promise that greater mildness should be shown. The attend- ance of the preachers was even for a time partially dispensed with, but in 1536 they were recalled, since so many questions came up in which their judgment, as expositors of God's word, was needed. In the same year Bern conquered Vaud and the other Savoyard lands to the southwest, and pro- ceeded to introduce the Reformation on its own principles. The ministers of Vaud, especially Viret and Besa, wished to set up a system of strict church discipline on the Geneva model; but this did not agree with the Bernese view of the unity of the State, including the Church within itself, so that ultimately chapter-courts were set up in each church district of the conquered territory. The ministers, under Calvin's influence, stood out ob- stinately for strictly ecclesiastical discipline, with excommunication for its principal weapon. Things finally came to an open breach, and the banishment of a number of the clergy. All this attracted greater attention to the system of chapter-courts; and greater severity than ever was shown against wanton dress, fortune-telling, gambling, and im- moral dances and songs. The rules of the chapter- courts were enforced in the old local tribimals, which were gradually abolished (1561) in the in- terest of administrative unity; the same thing happened (1566) in certain cities, such as Bnigg and Zofingen, where the magistrates had for a time dealt with matrimonial causes and general morality. Viret and his friends had, however, been right in a way. The chapter-courts Were, after all, of the nature of civil government and police. As such, they had done a good deal for external morality and order; but they could do little for the pro- motion of 'vital piety; their connection with the Church was loose and external. The duty of ex- amining and licensing candidates for church offices, which had been originally given to them, fell to another body very soon; the clergy managed their own discipline in their own assemblies; and in the end the chapter-courts had nothing but questions of marriage and paternity and an external police dea mceurs. After 1704 appeals were granted to the town council or the Two Hundred; and in 1708 the number was changed to eight secular judges with two clerical assessors. They had now a formal code of their own, with purely secular penalties, which was revised or enlarged at need. They continued to exist (except in the period of the Helvetic Republic, 1798-1803) until the re- vision of the constitution in 1831. By the law of 1874 most of the duties of the chapter-courts were given to the " church-coimcils," which now regu- late questions of morality in so far as the modem State permits. (E. BLOscHtO Bibliography: C. B. HundMhagen, Die Konflikte in der Bern. Landeekirehe, in C. Trechsel, Beitrdge, Bern. 1841- 1842; Friokert. Die Kircheng^itudie in Bern, Aaniu, 1846; Von StOrler, in Archiv dee hietoriechen Vereine von Bern, 1862; E. Eeli, Acteneammlung eur OeechidUe der ZUrcher ReformaHon, Zurioh, 1879.
CHARACTER CHARACTER

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHARACTER: The composite of definite moral and personal traits which serves to distinguish an individual and to mark the type to which he belongs. Morality is essentially a matter of will, and thus of free agency. The will is, therefore, closely associ- ated with character ; but it exists, in the true sense of the word, only in so far as it is free and accepts the new modification voluntarily, instead of possessing it by nature, or being constrained to it by external influences. The criterion of character, in Kantian phrase, is ''not what nature makes of man, but what man makes of himself." Character must, therefore, di£fer essentially from the original dis- position of man. The different forces and im- 11 Ohapter and Verse Division Ohariemata pulses of the mental life form the basis, means, and mateiial for will and character, but in themselves they are only anteethical. They may, further- more, be devoted cither to lofty or to low ethical ends. Such a naturalistic basis can not be allowed to ooodition the principle of decision for or against the will of God, nor can it be permitted to control the mora] demand and aims. In terms of Christian ethics the fundamental requirements for a noble character are that, as divine revelation demands and renders possible, it should obtain a heart established with grace through faith (Heb. xiii. 9), that it be strengthened with might by the Spirit and become rooted and grounded in self-denying lo\ie (Eph. iii. 16 sqq.), that it come unto a per- fect man, unto the measure of the stature of the fubtesB of Christ (Eph. iv. 13; I Cor. xvi. 13), and that it be ready to perform faithfully every duty which its special ability and position in the vorid requires. The natural dispositions, however, retain their importance for the weal or wo of character, and influences of the temperament may facilitate or aggravate the change for good or bad. On this account the will must influence nature lest it should destroy the formation of character and check the fulfilment of certain individual duties, 80 that the natural man must accordingly become subject to righteous will. Even where it w im- possible to overcome certain natural dispositions, character must at least oppose them, and assert its authority by discipline. On the other hand, the natural elements of psychic life should be allowed a certain influence on the will, in case their tend- ency is good. Additional influences and factors siise from external conditions and social positions, so that cluuacter may be defined, with Scharling, " as the impress of the will on the basis of natiu^l individuality." Thus arises an endless variety and diversity of characters, ovnng partly to moral and immoral free will, partly to varying tempera^ ments, and partl3r to the manifold relations be- tween the will, natural disposition, and personal experience. True ethical goodness of the character, however, always lies in that will which resigns itself to the moral principles, subjects the natural man to them, and at the same time endeavors to become fit for the tasks assigned to it individually, ever striving to become better adapted to its en- dowment and position. Christian ethics must naturally be directed from the very first toward developing and strengthening the character. Suc- ee« here implies not only a mature discretion and insight into the basal principles of morality, but also a thorough understanding of one's own tem- perament and of mankind and the world. (J. KOSTLINt.) CHAiaOT. See War. CHARISKATA, cd-ris'ma-ta: The term used by theologians to designate the remarkable signs of the divine favor and power which accompanied the work of the primitive Chureh, beginning with the gift of tongues on the day of Pentecost, fhe belief in such signs exists to-day among large nnmbera of Protestants as well as in the Roman Catholic Church, with the differ- ence that the latter sees in the miracles of the saints the continuation of these mirac- ulous powers, while on the evangelical side they are supposed to have ceased at the latest with the first three centuries, either through the fault of the Chureh or by God's design. The question of the continuance of the charismata is in many modem treatises connected with that of the con- tinuance of miracles, the writers regarding the gift of supernatural power to effect supernatural operations as a fulfilment of Mark xvi. 17, 18. Baur, on the other hand, saw in the charismata only the gifts and dispositions which the individual converts brought to Christianity, transformed by the working of the Spirit into the various forms of Christian consciousness and life. This view, which excludes any giving of power to work mir- acles, as well as any new divine gift or divine re- enforcement of nattu^ gifts, is demonstrably not (as Baur claims) Pauline, but can not here be con- troverted at length. The word charisma itself does not tell anything as to the nature of the gifts. Except in one passage of Philo and in I Pet. iv. 10, it is only foimd in Paul's use of it, though probably not formed by him. In most of the places where he employs it, it denotes an extraordinary evidence of God's favor; in II Cor. i. 11, his own deliverance from death; in Rom. i. 11 a gift of the Holy Spirit, such as comfort or illumination. In other places it refers to special gifts bestowed upon the Chris- tian (I Tim. iv. 14; II Tim. 1. 6) as signs and tokens of the grace received by belief in the message of redemption (I Cor. i. 6, 7), which render him ca- pable of a particular kind of action, in order to ren- der some special service to the whole body (I Cor. xii. 4 sqq.). The place, therefore, that each mem- ber has in the community he has by virtue of a charisma, which he is to administer to his brethren (I Pet. iv. 10). Natural powers as such are useless to the life of the body of Christ; what it needs must, like itself, be spiritual. Charismata, then, may be defined as powers and capacities necessary for the edification of the Church, bestowed by the Holy Spirit upon its members, in virtue of which they are enabled to employ their natural faculties in the service of the Church, or are endowed with new abilities for this purpose. According to I Cor. xii. 18; Rom. xii. 5-8; Eph. iv. 11, the charismata form the basis of the offices in the Chureh. There can be no office without a charisma; but not all charismata are applicable to the exerdse of an office. Those which correspond to permanent and invariable needs of the Church form the basis of offices, the others do not. To the latter class be- long those of a miraculous or extraordinary char- acter, like those which are peculiar to the apostles or to the apostolic period. Since the number of the charismata must correspond to the needs of the Church, it follows that the lists in I Cor. xii., Eph. iv., and Rom. xii. can not be taken as ex- haustive. (H. CREMERf.) Bxbuoorapht: W. J. Conybeare and J. 8. Howson. lAfe and EpUOM of 8t Paul, chap, sdii.. New York, 1809; Schaff. ChritHan Churtik, i. 230-242, 436-444 (reviews the opin- ionB); Neander. ChriaHan Ckwnh, i. 180-188 et paanm; M. Lauterburg. Der Begriff d§a ChariMma, in A. Schlatter and H. Cremer, BeitrOge gur Forderung cMttfidber 7%#0- Charity Obarlemaffne 12 logie, Gatereloh. 1898; KL, iii. 82-80; DC A, i. 349-350; commentaries oo Acts. Romans, Corinthians, and £pbe- CHARITY, BROTHERS OF (Fratres caritcUis): A name common to several benevolent orders of the Western Church during the Middle Ages. It IB applied especially to the society founded about 1280 by a landowner Guido at Joinville, the Frhes de la ChariU de la bienfieureuse Marie, to which Clement VI. gave an Augustinian rule and which took charge of the great Parisian hospital Les Billets from the fourteenth century until about 1640. In 1540, almost contemporaneous with the rise of the Jesuits, an order was founded in Grenada by the Portuguese Juan Ciudad, called John of God (b. 1495; d. Mar. 8, 1550), which was gen- erally known under the name of Brothers of Charity. After a life of dissipation and wild adventures in the army of the Hungarian King Ferdinand I. in his campaigns against the Turks, John was con- verted by a sermon of the famous Juan d'Avila, and imderwent the most excessive penances, on which account he was regarded as a madman. Learning by hia own experience how the insane were treated in the hospitals of those days, he resolved to devote himself especially to the nurs- ing of these unfortunates and others in special need. In the house which he rented at Grenada, and which became the first scene of his self-sacri- ficing work of love, he received only the sick from the poorest classes. Soon he gathered around him- self and his first two associates, Martino and Ve- lasco, a number of sympathetic laymen. After ten years' activity he died, and Martino took charge of the institution, which as yet had neither a written rule nor a monastic organization. The number of houses soon increased, especially after the estab- lishment of the large hospital at Madrid, which was richly endowed by Philip II., to which others were soon added in different cities of Spain, Italy, and, after the seventeenth century, in France and Germany. The bull of authorization issued by Pius V. (Jan. 1, 1572) elevated the lay society to an order with the Augustinian rule, and placed their houses under episcopal jurisdiction, although the brethren were permitted to elect their directors (majoreSf not priores or abbaUa) and to present some of their number for the priesthood. A general chapter held at Rome by Sixtus V. prepared the outlines of the constitution of the order. These articles were first published in 1589, and were en- larged imder Paul V., Alexander VII., and Clement XI. (cf. the final redaction dating from 1718, in Holstenius-Brockie, Codex regiUaruniy vi. 293-362). The statutes included in their requirements a thorough medical knowledge on the part of the hospital staff. The secular head -master and the chief tender of the sick had to be an experienced physician and siirgeon, respectively. Of the eleven provinces in which the order is found, ten belong to the old world, one to America. The number of houses is at present about 120. (O. ZOcKLERf.) Bibliography: The early Vita of John of God ore given in A8B, MftTch. i. 814-^68. Coiunilt the more modem treat- ments: L. Saclier, VU de S. Jean de Dieu, avee Vhietoire . . . de la fondoHon et du diveloppement de eon ordre, Paris, 1877; C. Wilmet, Ltbenebeeehreibuno dee , . . Johannee von GoU, Regensburg. I860. Further, on the order, con- sult: Helyot, Ordree monaeUquee, iv. 131-147; Heim- bucher, Orden und Kongregationen, ii. 491-496.
CHARITY, CHRISTIAN CHARITY, CHRISTIAN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHARITY, CHRISTIAN: As distinguished from mere compassion, which may be but a transitory emotion or a desire without accomplishment, char- ity requires the cooperation of the will; it pre- supposes a permanent willingness to help one's neighbor in his need. If love comprehends thf whole of Christian moral obligations (Rom. xiii. 9(. charity is its manifestation toward our fellows, whether in temporal or in spiritual need. It is a permanent attribute of God (II Cor. i. 3), because human misery is always before his eyes, and has been operative in him from all eternity, in his plan of redemption. Under the old covenant, God. revealing himself as merciful and gracious, required his people to show mercy toward their needy breth- ren (Zech. vii. 9). It has, however, a deeper foun- dation in the New Testament. As the children of God by their brotherhood with Jesus Christ, the disciples could not but imitate the mercy of God (Luke vi. 36); he who failed in this re>»nl showed that he was imworthy of membership in the new kingdom (Matt, zvfii. 33; James fi. 13). The ethical organization of men is founded upon charity, and destroyed by its absence (Luke x. 37; Heb. ii. 17, iv. 15). Thus the true Good Samaritan is not only the model, but the source of all real charity, and his disciples show their fellowship with him by it (Matt. ix. 13; Rom. xii. 4-5). It is the charac- teristic difference between the Christian and the non-Christian world, which knows little of it. Noth- ing in primitive Christianity so struck the outside observer; even the emperor Julian was obliged to admit its force, while he strove in vain to imi- tate it. Step by step it did away with heathen customs — ^infanticide, removal of the weak and sickly, brutality to slaves; it built hospitals and asylums everywhere. In the Roman Catholic Church, according to the development of ethics since Ambrose in the form of a system of virtues and duties, charity is con- sidered under both heads. Thomas Aquinas reckons it among the so-called " theological virtues," and says that it is the highest of the virtues which go out to our neighbor. He enumerates seven cor- poral works of mercy (feeding the hungry, giving drink to the thirsty, clothing the naked, ransoming the captive, sheltering the homeless, visiting the sick, and burying the dead), and seven spiritual (admonishing sinners, instructing the ignorant, counseling the doubtful, comforting the sorrowful, bearing wrongs patiently, forgiving all injuries, praying for the living and the dead). (L. Lemme.) Bibliography: The stAndard work is G. Uhlhom. Die chrietliche UebeethdHgktit, 3 vols.. Stuttgart, 1882-9a £ng. transl. of vol. i.. New York, 1883.
CHARTTT, SISTERS OF CHARITY, SISTERS OF

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHARITY, SISTERS OF: A name applied loosely to various female communities in the Ronian Catholic Church devoted especially to the care of the sick and the poor. Some associations of this kind will be treated in the article Women, Con- OREOATioNS OF. For the Irish Sisters of Charity see English Ladies. It will be necessary here to 13 Charity Oharlemaffne deal only of the two best known and most influ- ential of these communities. 1. The Sisters of Charity of St Vincent de Paul : The title of Confr^rie de la charUi pour V assistance ipiritueUe et corporelle dee pauvres malades was given by Vincent de Paul (q.v.) originally to the asso- ciation of women which he organized in 1617 in his small parish of ChAtillon-les-Dombes, in the diocese of Lyons, and which, after approval of its statutes by the archbishop, spread also to other places. .AJfter the final transfer of its headquarters to Paris :1618), he founded similar associations in the capital and its neighborhood. He entrusted the direction of these Dames de la Charity, after the lieath of his patroness the Countess of Gondy (1625)i to the devoted Louise Marillac, under whose guid- ance the development of the rapidly growing asso- ciation into a community of unmarried women began in 1633, in which year the first of such mem- bers were admitted to the confraternity. On the Fc^Ht of the Annunciation in the following year a number of these FiUes servantes des pauvres de la ckaritt (biter commonly known as Scmre Grises from their gray habit) took their vows at the village of La Chapellc near Paris. Eight years later they were transferred to the city itself, where, by the time of the death of Vincent and Louise Marillac <br>th in 1660), they had already twenty-eight liouses. The rule drawn up by the foimder was confiraied by Clement IX. in 1668. It includes the obligation of rising daily at four o'clock, making a meditation twice daily, willingly tending all the sick, even the most repulsive, and rendering un- conditional obedience to superiors. Life-vows were not taken by the sisters, but after a probation of five years a vo^^ of obedience was pronounced which was to be renewed from year to year. The opler was placed in a sort of dependence on the " Priests of the Slission," or Lazarists, whose su- perior was to be their director. The order spread during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries principally in France and Poland, and reached the number of 500 houses. With the other religious oniers it was suppressed at the Revolution, but continued its self-sacrificing labors none the less, until it was formally reestablished by Napoleon in 1^7. and began a new and wider growth. In France alone it had about 400 houses in 1890; but the hiicudngof the hospitals carried out by the gov- ernment in the last few years has considerably weakened it since. Its total membership in all countries is supposed at present to be about 30.000. [The sisters of charity of St. Vincent de Paul were established in the United States in 1809 by Elizabeth Seton (q.v.). In 1907 this branch of the order ntmibered 4,698 professed sisters and had charge of 27 asylums, 33 orphanages, 27 acade- mies, and 103 parochial schools.] 2. The Sisters of Charity of St Charles: A community of similar nature and purpose grew up under this name in 1626 in the great hospital of St. Charies Borromeo at Nancy. The general of the Premonstraten^ians, Epiphanius Ludovicus, abbot of Estival, drew up in 1652 a rule for it, a^^rording to which the members were to take the three usual monastic vows, together with a fourth binding them to devote themselves for life to the care of the sick poor and friendless children. From the mother house at Nanpy they spread first through France, and in the nineteenth century through a large part of Germany and Austria. At the end of this century they numbered about 450 houses with nearly 3,000 members, divided into four con- gregations at Nancy, Prague, Trebnitz, and Treves. (O. ZdCKLEBf.) Biblioorapht: F. Bournaud. Lea Senara, 1633-1000, Parw. 1900; F. F. Buflfl, Der Orden der barmhenigen Sehvoeatem, SchaffliauBen, 1847; D. Wulf, Daa aegenareiche Wirken der Schweatem, MOnster. 1861; Siatera of Charity, Catholic and Proteatant, London, 1856; G. Uhlhorn, Die ehriaUiche LiebeaUiAtiokeit aeit der Reformation, pp. 210-227, Stuttgart, 1882; F. Herv4-Baiin, Lea Oranda Ordrta dea femmea, ParlB. 1880; C. de Richemont. Hiatoire da Mme. U Oraa, ib. 1894; L. Baunard. La VHUrable Louiae de MarUlae, Paris, 1808; B. R. Parkes. Hiatoric Nuna, London. 1808; Currier, Religioua Ordera, pp. 446-462; Heimbucher. Orden und KonQregaHonen, ii. 430-438. CHARLEMAGNE. Ecclesiastical Policy of the Prankish Kings (11). Charlemagne's Policy (I 2). Coronation as Emperor (} 3). His Services to Learning (| 4). The loonoolastic Controversy (| 6). Charlemagne or Charles the Great (Lat. Carolus Magnus), founder of the Holy Roman Empire, was the son of Pepin, the first of the Carolingian line of Prankish kings, and grandson of Charles Martel, the powerful mayor of the palace under the last Merovingian kings. He was bom c. 742, per- haps at Aachen or Ingelheim; d. at Aachen Jan. 28, 814. With his father and younger I. Ecclesi- brother, Karlman, he was anointed astical king of the Franks by Pope Stephen II. Policy of in 754. He ruled jointly with Karbnan the Frank- after Pepin's death in 768, and alone ish Kings, after Karlman's death in 771. He was crowned emperor of the Romans at Rome by Pope Leo III. on Christmas Day, 800. In both civil and ecclesiastical matters Charle- magne carried out with consummate ability the policy of his father. From Qovis, the first Mero- vingian king (481-511; see Franks), onward the Frajoki^h rulers piu^ued the policy of endowing and extending the Roman Church as a means of consolidating and strengthening the civil adminis- tration. The conquest of heathen peoples was not thought complete until they were Christianized and the newly acquired territory had been provi- ded with a well-ordered and comprehensive eccle- siastical establishment. Resources devoted to ecclesiastical equipment and endowment were sup- posed to jrield the best possible results in assim- ilating and loyalizing the communities in which they were expended. Where land was abundant it cost little to endow with landed estates arch- bishoprics, bishoprics, abbacies, etc., especially as the incumbents owed allegiance to their bene- factors and could be relied upon for any kind of needful service. The Ijombards (q.v.) had long been a thorn in the side of the papacy. In 739 Pope Gregory III. had entreated Charles Martel to come to his relief, but Charles was not ready for so great an undertaJdng^ Oh»rL„ Charles 14 In 753 Stephen II. gained permission to visit Pepin for secret conference. Pepin sent his young sons Charles and Karbnan to meet him, and received him (754) with the utmost cordiality. The con- ference was epoch-making. With the concurrence of his nobles, Pepin made with the pope an offen- sive and defensive alliance, recogniased the pope's ecclesiastical headship, and undertook to deliver the papal territory from Lombard oppression and to promote the papal cause in all Prankish posses- sions and dependencies; while the pope commended Rome and the Romans to the protection of the king, crowned him patriciits Romanorum and king of the Franks, crowned his two sons, and undertook to support the Prankish kingdom in every possible way. A successful campaign against the Lom- bards (754) led to the bestowal on the pope of the territory claimed as the patrimony of Peter (see Papal States) and the exarchate of Ravenna, but the conquest did not prove permanent, and it was left for Charlemagne to complete it (774). From his childhood Charlemagne was carefully instructed by his father in warfare and in state- craft, and in eariy youth was associated with his father in the government of the realm. When crowned at St. Denis (754) he was a. Charle- made to promise to Peter and his magne's vicar or his successors to be a friend to Policy, their friends and an enemy to their enemies. As ruler his policy was to extend his kingdom as widely as possible by con- quest and to bring the whole domain into a well- ordered and homogeneous organism by diffusing throughout Christian civilization. His five cam- paigns against the Lombards (773, 774, 776, 780, and 7S4) had for their object the emancipation of the Church from Lombard oppression and encroach- ment and the inclusion of their territory in his own domain. The bestowment of a portion of the territory upon the Roman See and the apparent recognition of the alleged Donation of Constantine (q.v.) involved no surrender of his own sovereignty. His eighteen expeditions against the Saxons (770- 784) had for their object the subjugation of their territoiy to Prankish rule and the Christianization of the entire population. He regarded the latter work, with the establishment of a full ecclesiastical system dependent on the Roman See, as necessary to the permanence and effectiveness of the former. His five campaigns against the Saracens in It<aly were for the protection of Prankish territory and of Roman Christiam'ty. The same may be said of his seven campaigns against the Arabs in Spain. Many of his wars were for the protection of fron- tiers already established; but when territory was once definitely acquired and incorporated in his realm his first thought was to provide for the speedy Christianization of its population by covering the territory with Christian institutions and by com- pelling the people to submit to baptism and con- form to the cultus of the Church. Free forms of Christianity fared little better with Charlemagne and his predecessors than paganism, imiformity and articulation with the Holy Catholic Church being regarded as essential for the purposes of the State. The infliction of the death penalty for attempts to evade baptism, for desecration or destruction of church property, and for the cele- bration of pagan rites was based upon his con- viction that the Christianization of the entire population was essential to the accomplishment of his political ends. In 790 Pope Leo III., sorely beset by a hostile faction and driven from Rome, made his way to the king's court at Paderbom. He was received with all honor and sent back with a 3. Corona- royal guard and assurance of ample tion as protection. Near the end of 800 Emperor. Charlemagne visited Rome to com- plete the restoration of order and of the pope's authority, and on Dec. 25, while engaged in a religious service, he was crowned emperor by the grateful pope. This coronation was prized by Charlemagne as involving a recognition by the Ro- man See, the most influential surviving represent- ative of Roman dignity and authority, of his right to be regarded as the legitimate successor of the CsBsars and as a solemn expression of the pope's determination to make common cause with him in the work of building up a world-wide empire in which the Roman form of religion should have exclusive sway. It is evident that he had no thought of subordinating the civil to the eccle- siastical authority. After the coronation as before, he legislated as freely in ecclesiastical as in civil matters. His capitularies and laws abound in minute regulations for evexy department of eccle- siastical life and work. Of primazy importance was the educational movement begun by Pepin and carried forward with unremitting zeal and vast expenditure by Charlemagne. He had a deep per- 4. His Serv- sonal interest in all forms of knowl- ices to edge, and throughout his reign was Learning, diligent in his efforts to learn. The most eminent scholars of Britain and of Italy were drawn into his service. Something tike a university was maintained in the court, and by an educational system under the guidance of Alcuin (q.v.) he sought to diffuse civilization throughout his realm. The monasteries and the churches were the chosen channels for the qjread of enlightenment. It is probable that no other ruler ever accomplished so much for the diffusion of learning. A statement by Einhard (Vita, xxv.) that the emperor could not write can not fairly be taken to mean more than that he neglected to acquire a skilful use of the pen, preferring the serv- ices of amanuenses. He is said to have had a speaking knowledge of Latin, to have understood Greek, and to have had some acquaintance with Hebrew. Charlemagne followed in the footsteps of Pepin in his attitude toward the worship of images. The Caroline Books (q.v.), put forth in the name of Charlemagne and with his authority, 5. The combated the decisions of the Second Iconoclastic Nicene Council in favor of image- Controversy, worship, approved by the pope, wlHle at the same time condemning icono- clasm. Images are declared to be useful for the ornamentation of the churches and the perpetuation 18 OhftrleaMgae Charles vT of holy deeds, yet they are by no means neoessaiy. ChristuDS having fellowship with Christ ought ]ilwa3rB to have him present in their hearts and to be able to look beyond the sensible into the spiritual. The Scriptures and not images are the proper outward means for gaining acquaintance with Christ. The Synod of Frankfort (794), called and controlled by Chariemagne, condemned the adoration and service of images (see Images and Imagk-worship, II.). The negotiations between Charlemagne and the empress Irene looking to- ward the marriage of the two sovereigns and the reuniting of the East and the West, which were brought to an end by the overthrow of the em- press (802), no doubt had in view the worid-wide unification of ecclesiastical as well as civil admin- istration. Chariemagne paid little heed to moral or eccle- siastical considerations in contracting and annul- ling his marriages, and had no idea of limiting liim- self to one wife at a time. Besides several regular mairiages, he sustained semimarital relations with a number of women, whose children he recognized and provided for. A. H. Newbcan. BiBXJoomAFST: A convenient lift of souroes 18 given in Pottluwt, W^gvm»er, pp. 192-194. 1234-35. The Opera Ommia, iadndinK letten, ftre in MPL, xcrii.-xcviii. The CmpOularia, ed. O. H. Ports, are in MGU,Leg., i (1835). 32-lM, and the Lt^ea Lanoobardorum are in the same, iv ( 1868). 485-614. Other important early sources are given in MOH, Script, i.-ii.. 1826-29. Several short docu- ments are given in the original in 8. Mathews. Sdect UmUmoal DoeumenU, pp. 10-14. Boston. 1892; a capitu- lary b in EIng. transl. in E. F. Henderson, DoewnenU, pp. 180-200: several documents are in Thatcher and Mo- Neal. &rairos Book, pp. 35-38. Excellent illustrative ex- tracts are given in English, with a bibliography, in Robin- son. European Hialory, pp. 126-149. The fundamental life is the Vita Koroli Maoni by Ein- hard: it is in A8B, Jan.. ii. 877-888; also. ed. PerU. in MGB, Script, h (1829). 443-463; ed. O. Waits, in ScHpt rw. Germ., Hanover. 1880; in MPL, xcvii. 25-62; a good edition is by A. Holder. Freiburg, 1882; there is an Eng. tmncL by 8. E. Turner. New York. 1880, and in Thatcher and McNeaJ, Source Book, pp. 38-48. Modem treatments of the life are: P. A. Thijm, Karl der Groue und eeine Zeit, MQBel«r. 1868; E. L. Cutts, Charlemaone and hie Titnee, Ltfkdon. 1887; J. I. Mombert, Hiat. of Charlee the Great f.»iAi«, 1888 (echolarly. discusses the aouroes); J. I. Uombcrt, ffist of Chariee Ike Great, ib. 1889; R. Foss. Kmi dm' Qroeee, Gtltersloh, 1897; T. Hodgkin, Ckarlte As Ormat New York. 1897; H. W. C. Davis, Charlemaone, New York, 1900. Sborter treatments or discussions of various phases of his fife aad activities are: A. Ebert. AUgemeine GeechitJUe dm LUeredur dee Mittelaltere, ii. 3-106. Leipdo, 1880; A. Weet^ Aiadn and Ihe Biee of the Chrieiian Sehoole, New York, 1803; E. F. Henderson, Germany in the Middle A^ea, pp. 66 sqq.. New York, 1894; F. Gregorovius, Rome in Ike Middle Apee, vol. ii., book iv., chaps. 4-7. vol. iii., book v., chap. 1. London, 1894-95; J. A. Ketterer, Karl der Qroem und die Kircke, Munich, 1898; C. L. Wells, Tke Age of Ckarlemaone, New York. 1898; J. Nover, Kmi der Groeee und eeine Paladine, Glogau. 1900; J. Bryee, The Holy Roman Empire, especially chap, v.. New York, 1904; J. B. MuUinger. The Sehoole of Charlee Ike Great ib. 1904; H. Pruts. The Age of Charlemagne, vdL vitL of Hieiorv of AU NaHone, ed. J. H. Wright. Phila- delphia, 1905: Milman, LaHn Chrietianiiy, book iv.. chap, lo., book v., ehftp i.; Neander, ChrieHan Church, vol. iii., pemam; Sehaff. ChrtaHan Church, iv. 236-249; Moeller. Cyietian Churdk, it. 90-96. (3onsult also: 8. Abel and B. SUnaoa. JahrhQMAm' dee fr&nkiedien Reiche, 2 vols., Ijtipmc 1883; WattenYmrh, DGQ; and the literature under Atccmr. CHARLES V. Charles's Policy. The Diet of Worms (f 1). Political Events Favor the Protestant Cause (f 2). Attempts at Religious Unity. Diet of Augsburg (f 8). Efforts for a General Council (| 4). Renewal of Hostilities ; Failure to Secure Unity (f 5). Abdication (f 6). Charles V., emperor of the Holy Roman Empire 1519-56 and king of Spain (as Charles I.), was bom at Ghent Feb. 24, 1500; d. at the monastery of San Jer6mmo de Yuste (124 m. by rail w.s.w. of Madrid), in Estramadura, Sept. 21, 1558. He was the son of Philip the Handsome of Austria and Joan of Aragon, grandson on the paternal side of the emperor Maximilian I. and Mary of Burgundy, on the maternal side of Ferdinand and Isabella, who had united Aragon and Castile into the king- dom of Spain. In 1516 he succeeded Ferdinand and Isabella as king of Spain, and ruler of the Netherlands, of the kingdom of Naples (including Sicily and Sardinia), Milan, Luxemburg, and Franche-Comt^. As a member of the house of Hapsburg he was archduke of Austria. Thus as a youth of sixteen he was by far the most powerful sovereign in Europe. In 1519 he was elected emperor in competition with Fr^ds I. of France, largely through the influence of Frederick of Saxony (see Frederick III., the Wise). From the beginning of his reign as king of Spain Charles was beset with difficulties. It reqxiired the most strenuous efforts of Ximenes, chief counselor of Ferdinand, to prevent open revolt I. Charles's in Spain, where Charles's right to the Policy, suco^on was considered doubtful The Diet and where, because of his Dutch train- of Worms, ing and Dutch counselors, he was impopular. He entered upon his impe- rial administration amid the throes of the Prot- estant revolution, threatened in the West by the jealousy and ambition of the king of France and in the East by the attacks of the Ottoman Turks, who were encouraged by France to do their worst. The necessity of protecting the Netheriands, his Italian and other Western possessions from French voracity, and the Eastern domains of the house of Hapsburg from Turkish aggression, lay at the basis of Charles's policy in ecclesiastical matters. Immediately after his coronation as emperor at Aachen (Oct., 1520) the necessity of vigorous measures for the suppression of Lutheranism be- came manifest. The Diet of Worms followed (Jan. 28-May 25, 1521), but Charles, influenced by his confessor, Quintana, and having a wholesome dread of civil war, refused to deal as simimarily with Luther as the papal nuncio, Girolamo Alean- dro, wished. The Edict of Wonns, representing the extent to which Charles was prepared to go in the direction of coercion, prohibited the printing, sale, and reading of Luther^s books, and the giving of comfort and support to him; but the safe- conduct under which he had come to Worms was respected (see Worms). On May 8 a secret treaty was made at Worms betweeh the emperor and the pope against France. Henry VIII. of E^ngland joined the alliance, hoping to acquire territory lost to France and to increase Oharles V. 16 his own importance by having Wolsey, his chief counselor, elected pope. War broke out almost immediately. The duke of Bourbon a. Political espoused the imperial cause. The pope, Events Fa- expecting the French to win and fear- Yor the ing the increase of imperial power in Protestant Italy, transferred his allegiance to Cause. Francis, and thus angered the em- peror, who proved victorious and took Francis prisoner in the (battle of Pa via (1524). The marriage of Charles to the infanta of Portugal rather than to Mazy, daughter of Henry VIII., caused the latter to withdraw from the imperial alliance and make peace with France. Availing themselves of the emperor's absorption in extras German enterprises, many German princes ignored the Edict of Worms and openly promoted the Lutheran cause. In July, 1525, Duke George of Saxony, the elector of Brandenburg, the arch- bishop-elector of Mainz, and the duke of Bruns- wick met at Dessau and formed a Catholic league to cooperate with the emperor in exterminating " the accursed Lutheran sect." In Feb., 1526, the elector of Saxony and the landgrave of Hesse (joined later by seven other princes) formed the Gotha-Torgau alliance for the defense of Lutheran- ism. The manifest strength of the evangelical cause and his breach with the pope caused Charles to assume a conciliatoxy attitude, and the Diet of Speyer (June, 1526; see Speter, Diets op) left the German princes free to deal with religious questions each according to his sense of duty. Turkish invasion in the east and the need of a German army for the chastisei^ent of the pope promoted thiJB policy of toleration. In May, 1526, a secret league was formed by the pope, France, England, Venice, Milan, and Florence, against the emperor, who (Sept. 17) declared the pope no pastor, but a usurper, and appealed from him to a general council. In 1527 Charles sent a German Lutheran army led by Georg von Frundsberg and a Spanish army led by the duke of Bourbon against the pope and his allies. The imperial troops forced their way into Rome at the cost of the lives of about five thousand of its defenders and for eight days reveled in pillage, dnmkenness, and outrage. The pope took refuge in the castle of St. Angelo. Cardinals were dragged through the city and forced to pay ransom. St. Peter's was used for a stable. Just before the sack of Rome England and France had agreed to unite in demanding of the emperor the release of the French princes held by him as hostages and the payment to England of certain indemnities, and to make war on him immediately in case of his refusal. The sack of Rome and mal- treatment of the pope augmented the hostility of England and France. Henry VIII. hoped, by suc- coring the pope and antagonizing the emperor, to secure the good offices of the former in the matter of the divorce from Catherine of Aragon, a relative of the latter. Charles felt it advisable to come to terms with the pope. He restored most of the territory taken from him and received a promise to convene a general coimdl for the pacification of Christendom and the reformation of the Church. In 1528 the duke of Bavaria sought the coopera- tion of England, France, and Lorraine in an effort to depose Charles; and Philip of Hesse sought the assistance of France, Silesia, Poland, and oth- ers against the house of Hapsburg. 3. Attempts Charles's decisive victory over the at Religious French led to the Peace of Cambrai Unity. (July, 1529), and was followed by Diet of an agreement between him and the Augsburg. French king to cooperate in efforts for religious imification. The Second Diet of Speyer (1529; see Speter, Diets op) nul- lified the tolerant policy of the first. The man- ifest determination of Charles to crush Lutheran- ism led the Lutheran princes to unite in a protest — whence the designation "Protestants." The fail- ure of Lutherans and Zwing^ans to unite for the defense of the Evangelical cause (see Marburo, Conference op) and the retreat of the army of Suleiman from the gates of Vierma caused the emperor, now at peace with France and the papacy, to feel that at last he was master of the situation. He was, in fact, now at the height of his power, and all that was lacking to complete success was the restoration of religious unity. He plarmed to visit Germany, call a diet for religious pacification, sum- mon the different Evangelical parties to present their views, and have them confuted by Roman Catholic theologians invited for the purpose. He annoimoed his intention to leave all past errors to the judgment of Christ, and to give due considera- tion to every man's opinions; yet he did not con- ceal his determination to bring all the people of his empire into one commonwealth and one Church. Arriving in Augsburg for the diet of 1530, he sought to intimidate the German princes, insisting that they should keep their preachers silent during the sessions of the diet and requesting them to join him in the Corpus Christi procession. They stanchly refused compliance. The irenic confession of faith prepared by Melanchthon (see Augsburg Confession and rrs Apology) was attacked by the Roman Catholic theologians. Charles objected to the harsh polemics in which they indulged and insisted on a more conciliatory statement than they at first prepared. The confession of Zwingli and that of the four cities (see Tetrapolftan Confession) were treated with even less consideration. Lorenzo Campeggi. representing the pope, urged drastic measures for the extirpation of heresy; but Charles was too much of a statesman not to see that in case of a conflict the Evangelical princes and cities would be supported by France, Bavaria, and other anti- Hapsburg powers, and again assumed a concilia- tory attitude. The Schmalkald League (1531; see ScHMALKALD ARTICLES) soou had as its members all the Lutheran princes and cities and gained the support of France, England, Dexmiark, Himgary, and the duchy of Gelders; and Charles was again embarrassed by Turkish aggression. By the Relig- ious Peace of Nuremberg (q.v.; 1532) he renew^ the toleration of 1526. Charles spent the following nine years in Spain, and from this time onward was unwearied in his efforts to secure the convocation of a general council which should thoroughly reform the eccle- 17 Obarles V. nastical administration, redrefis the grievances of the Protestants, and make possible the reunion of Christendom. His overtures to the 4. Efforts Lutheran princes for the settlement for a of differences by a free ooimcil were General repelled, and for the next few years ConnciL he had the mortification of seeing Protestantism advancing more rapidly than ever before. In 1541 he conferred in person with Paul III. regarding a council, and Trent ^as selected as being outside of, but near Italy and in Catholic Aijstria (see Trent, Council of). Charles insisted that reformation should have pre- mlence of doctrinal definition, while the pope and his advisere thought the latter the matter of supreme importance. As a compromise it was arranged that alternate sessions should be devoted to refor- mation and doctrine. Charles's interest in refor- mation was political rather than moral or religious. He thought efforts at coercion without antecedent reformation would result in war and render uni- fication impossible. He repeatedly invited the Protestants to send representatives to the ooimdl, with promises of safe-conduct and fair treatment. At the Fourth Diet of Speyer (1544) a dispute between the duke of Bnmswick and the elector of Saxony and the landgrave of Hesse that had resulted in the imprisonment of the former and the seizure of his estates, was settled by the emperor, and he secured the promise of a large German aimy for a campaign against the Turks. With the help of the English and the Germans Charles gained such advantages over the king of France as to be able to make a favorable peace (Crespy, Sept., 1544). The peace involved an agreement on the part of the two sovereigns to unite in promoting the council and in reunifjring Christendom. At the Diet of Worms (May, 1545) the impossi- bility of reconciling the Protestants became more manifest to the emperor than ever before, and he began to prepare for the inevitable 5. Renewal conflict. War was immediately re- of Hostil- newed between the duke of Bnms- ities; wick and the elector of Saxony and Failure to the landgrave of Hesse. It resulted dis- Secnre astrouslyto the former. The elector Unity. of the Palatinate showed Protestant leanings early in 1546 and the death of the elector-archbishop of Mainz (Sept., 1545) precipi- tated a strug^e for ascendency between supporters of the emperor and the Protestants. At the Diet of Regensburg (June, 1546) the Schmalkald allies protested against the coimcil and petitioned for continuance of peace. The emperor treated their overtures with contempt and expressed his purpose to vindicate his imperial authority. In July he dedared war against the allies as outlaws and rebels. The defection of Maurice of Saxony gave a marked advantage to the imperial cause, and by June, 1547, Charles had destroyed the Schmalkald League and had the Protestants at his mercy. Yet even now he was too prudent to attempt the sudden and violent extirpation of the Evangelical faith. He secured the concurrence of the Lutheran princes ^dA theologians in the Augsburg and Leipsic Interim.*) (nee Interim) in a scheme for the partial XII.— 2 and gradual restoration of Roman Catholicism. The return of Maurice to the support of the Lu- theran cause, disagreement between the emperor and the pope, and the intervention of France deprived the imperial cause of the advantages that had been gained. In the Treaty of Passau (Aug., 1552) Charles felt obliged to grant amnesty and religious toleration to the Lutherans, and by 1554 the im- perial authority had become so weakened that Charles allowed his brother Ferdinand to make peace (1555) with the Lutherans on terms recog- nizing complete equality of rights for Lutheran and Roman Catholic princes (see Augsburg, Relig- ious Peace of). Deeply humiliated and utterly discouraged, Charles abdicated (1556), leaving to his son PUlip his hereditary possessions. He was 6. Abdi- succeeded in the imperial office by cation, his brother Ferdinand. He retired to the monastery of Yuste, where, broken in health and depressed in spirit, he spent the two remaining years of his life. Shortly before his death, seeing in Luther the cause of all his woes, he expressed regret that he had not burned the archheretic at the Diet of Worms. Charles was unquestionably a statesman of more than average ability, self-possessed, comparatively tolerant, free from fanatical zeal for the Roman Catholic faith, less treacherous than most of the rulers of his time, and supremely concerned to conserve and extend the Hapsburg possessions and power and to effect religious unification as a means to this end. (Cir- cumstances beyond his control made his position an extremely difficult one. From his point of view, it probably would have been advisable to crush Lutheranism in its infancy. A. H. Newman. Bibuoorapby: A very eztenaivo bibliography may be found in the BrUith Muteum Cataiogiie under " Charles V. Emperor of Germany." Amonc the voluminous aources may be mentioned: K. Lanx, Correapondenz dea Kaiatra Karl V. auB dem kaiaerlichen Archiv, 3 vols., Leipsic, 1844- 1846; Staatapapiere tur Oeuhichte dea Kaiaera Karl V., Stuttgart, 1845; Actenatueke und Brief 0 zur GeachichU KarU v., Vienna, 1863-67; J. J. I. von DOllinger, Do- kumante zur Oeadkichte Karla V., in BeitrOge, vol. i., Re- gensburg, 1862. A French version of a Portuguese transl. of the lost autobiography of Charles was pub- lished by K. de Lettenhove, Commentairea de Charlea- QuirU, Brussels, 1862, Eng. transl., Autoinoffraphy of the Emperor Charlea V., London, 1862 (covers, 151fr-48). Early lives are by: A. UUoa, Venioej 1660; Sandoval, Valladolid. 1606; Sepulveda, Madrid, 1780; A. de Musica. Leipsic, 1728. An English classic and standard authority is W. Robertson, Hiat. of Charlea V., ed. W. H. Prescott, best ed. Philadelphia, 1867, new ed. London, 1882. Con- sult further; D. G. van Male, LeUrea aur la vie intirieure de Vempereur CharUa-Quint, Brussels, 1843; W. Brad- ford, Correapondence of Charlea V. arui hia AnUnaaadora in England and France, London, 1860; J. J. Hannusch, Kaiaer Karl V., aeine Zeil und aeine Zeitgenoaaen, Vienna, 1863; A. Pichot, CharUa-Quint, Chronique de aa vie inUrieure et de aa vie politique, Paris, 1864; W. Mauren- brecher, Karl V. und die deutadis ProteatarUen, 1643-66, Dilsseldorf, 1866; O. C. Krabbe, Kaiaer Karl V. und daa Aug^narger Interim, Rostock, 1872; A. von Druffel. Kaiaer Karl V. und die rdmiache Curie, 1644-40. 3 parts, Munich, 1877 sqq.; H. Baumgarten, Oeachichte Karla V., Stuttgart, 1886; W. Stirling-Maxwell, Cloiater Life of Charlea V., ed. J. Stirling-Maxwell, London, 1891; Baum- garten, Karl V, und die deutathe Reformation, Coburg, 1803; O. Wals, Die Denkwttrdigkeiten Kaiaer Karla V„ Bonn, 1901; J. Bryoe, The Holy Roman Empire, chap, xix.. New York, 1904; E. Annstrong, The Emperor Charlea Obarlei Ohaaa, 160. BUmabeth Irah 18 F., 2 toIb.. London. 1002; Putor, Popu, vi. 370, 421; Creichton. PapaeUt vi. 100-127 et pasaim; SehAff, Chriu^n Church, vi. 262 0t paanm; Moeller, ChruHan ChvrA, iii. 28 0qq. et pMsim (worth oonmilting). The subject is treated neoeaaarily in works on the Reformation and on the choroh history of the period. CHARLES (n6e RUNDLE), ELIZABETH: Church of England authoress; b. at Tavistock (13 m. n. of Plymouth), Devonshire, Jan. 2, 1828; d. at Hampstead (a suburb of London) Mar. 28, 1806. She was educated at home, and commenced to write at an early age, her work winning the ap- proval of such authors as James Anthony Froude and Tennyson. In 1851 she married Andrew Paton Charles (d. June 4, 1868), a chandler, and did much philanthropic work among the poor of Wapping. After 1894 she resided at Hampstead, where she continued her interest in philanthropy, attending the meetings of the North London Hospital for Consumption, and taking an active interest in the Metropolitan Association for Befriending Yoimg Servants, while as early as 1885 she had foimded at Hampstead a home for incurables called Frieden- helm. Mrs. Charles was a prolific writer, but her fame rests chiefly on her ChronicUa of the SchOnberg- Cotta Family, first published at London in 1863. This is a historical romance of the time of Luther, and gained wide popularity, running through many editions and being translated into most European and several Oriental languages. Among her other works special mention may be made of her Rest in Christy or the Crucifix and the Croes (London, 1848); Tales and Sketches of Christian Life in Different Lands and Ages (1850); The Two Vocations (1853); The Voice of Christian Life in Song (1858); The MoTtifrs of Spain and Liberators of Holland (1862); Wanderings over Bible Lands and Seas (1862); Sketches of Christian Life in England in the Olden Time (1864); Sketches of the Women of Christendom (1880); An Old Story of Bethlehem (1884) ; The True Vine (1885); The Great Prayer of Christen- dom : Thoughts on the Lord's Prayer (1886); Wan- derings over Lands and Seas (1887); Martyrs and Saints of the First Twelve Centuries (1887); " By the Coming of the Holy Ghost " (1888); " By Thy Glorious Resurrection and Ascension " (1888); and the autobiographical Our Seven Homes, edited by Mary Davidson (1806).
CHARLES, ROBERT HENRT CHARLES, ROBERT HENRY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHARLES, ROBERT HENRY: Anglican theo- logian and Ethiopic scholar; b. at Cookstown (21 m. w. of Armagh), County Tyrone, Ireland, Aug. 6, 1855. He was educated at Queen's University, Ireland (B.A., 1877), and Trinity College, Dublin (6. A., 18i81); and was incorporated M.A. at Exeter College, Oxford, in 1802. He was ordered deacon in 1883 and ordained priest in 1884, and was suc- cessively curate of St. Mark's, Whitechapel (1883- 1885), St. Philip's, Kensington (1885^86), and St. Mark's, Kennington, Surrey (1886^9). In 1898- 1906 he was professor of Biblical Greek in Trinity College, Dublin, and in 1905 was also appointed Grinfeld lecturer on the Septuagint at Oxford. He was Hibbert lecturer at Oxford in 1898, Jowett lecturer in London in 1898-99, and select preacher at Dublin in 1889-1900 and 1902-03, and was elected a fellow of the British Academy in 1906. In addition to numerous contributions to theological periodicals and encyclopedias, he has written Forgiveness and Other Sermons (London, 1886); The Book of Enoch (Ethiopic text; 1903); Ethiopic Version of the Hebrew Book of Jubilees (Oxford, 1894); The Apocalypse of Barueh (Syiiac text and translation; London, 1896); The Assumption of Moses (Latin text and translation; 1897); Critical History of the Doctrine of a Future Life in Israel^ in Judaism, in Christianity (Jowett lectures for 1898-99; 1899); The Ascension of Isaiah (Ethiopic, Greek, and Latin texts and translation; 1900); The Book of Jubilees : or, The Little Genesis (trans- lation; 1902); The Ethiopic Version of the Book of Enoch (1905); Greek Version of the Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs with the Variants of the Arme- nian and Slavonic Versions and the Hebrew and Ara- maic Fragments (Oxford, 1906); TeOament of the Twelve Patriarchs (1908); and, with W. R. MorfiU, translation of the Slavonic text of The Book of the Secrets of Enoch (1896). CHARLES, SAINT, SISTERS OF CHARITY OF. See Charity, Sisters of.
CHARLES, THOMAS CHARLES, THOMAS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHARLES, THOMAS: Welsh Methodist; b. at Pantdwfn, near St. Clears (8 m. w.s.w. of Carmar- then), Carmarthenshire, Oct. 14, 1755; d. at Bala, Merionethshire, Oct. 5, 1814. He was educated imder Methodist influences in Wales and at Jesus CoUege, Oxfoid (1775-78; B.A., 1779), was or- dained deacon and priest in the Church of England, and held a curacy in Somersetshire; but his opin- ions and style of preaching im fitted him for service as an English curate, and in 1783 he settled at Bala and soon became a leader of the Welsh Methodists. He made long preaching tours over all North Wales, instituted " circulating schools " and Sunday- schools, and trained teachers at his own expense. The revival which began in 1791 and spread from Bala as a center was a direct result of his labors. He maintained close connections with the English Methodists and extended his efforts to Ireland in 1807. In 1802 he helped to found the British and Foreign Bible Society (see Bible SoGiiniES, I., 2). He wrote tracts and books in Welsh for the relig- ious instruction of his countrymen, including a cate- chism, which in English translation was recom- mended by the Coimtess of Huntingdon for use in her chapels, and a *' Scriptural Dictionaiy " in Welsh (4 vols., Bala, 1805-08) which went through seven editions. A printing-press which he estab- lished at Bala in 1803 issued more than 300,000 copies before his death. Biblioobafht: Ekiward Morgan, Memoir of Ac Life and LabouTM of Thomat CharUe^ London, 1828; Wflliam Hushes, Life and Letters of Thomae Charlee, Rhyl. 1881; Bteaya, Lettert, and IniereaUng Papere of Thomae Charlee, ed. E. Morgan, London, 1836. CHARlfOCK, STEPHEN: Puritan; b. in Lon- don 1628; d. there July 27, 1680. He studied at Emmanuel College, Cambridge, took his degree there, and became minister in Southwark; in 1649 he went to Oxford and became fellow of New Col- lege (1650) and proctor (M.A., 1652); went to Ireland with Henry Cromwell as chaplain (1655); returned to England soon after the death of Oliver 19 2^^, Cromweil, and lived for fifteen years in London in retirement and without regular charge; in 1675 he was appointed joint pastor with Thomas Wat- son of a Presbyterian congregation in Bishopsgate Street, London. He was a grave and impressive preacher and a man of fervent piety. Ilis chief work was On the Existence and AttribiUes of God, published posthumously, ed. Richard Adams and Edward Veal (London, 1681; many subsequent editions; American ed., with biographical sketch by William Sjrmington, 2 vols., New York, 1874); there is an edition of his Works with memoir by Edward Parsons (9 vols., London, 1815), and an- other with introduction by James McCosh, in SicMs Series of Standard Divines (5 vols., Edin- bui^, 1864). BtBUOGBAPHT: NoUoes additional to those mentioned in the text are A. 4 Wood. Atkena Oxonienaea, ed. P. Bliss, ill 1234-36, 4 vola., London, 1813-20; DNB, x. 134- 13& CHASRON, ahar''r^h^ PIERRE: French Roman ratholicecdesiasticand theologian; b. at Paris 1541 ; d. there Nov. 16, 1603. He studied law at Orleans and Bourges, and practised for several years, after vhich be entered the Church and soon became a pulpit orator of note. He preached for a number of years in various cities of southern France, and was finally ^pointed preacher to Queen Margaret. Id his forty-seventh year he returned to Paris and wished to enter a monastic order, but was re- jected on account of his age. He then resumed his activity aa a preacher, and in Bordeaux made the acquaintance of Montaigne. In 1594 he was ap- pointed vicar-general by the bishop of Cahors, and in the following year was sent aa a deputy to a eoDvention of the French clergy, where he was so highly esteemed that he was chosen first secretary. Charron was the author of three works. The first of these was his TraiU des trois viritis, contre Urns aUue9f idoldtres, fuifs, mafumUtans, hir^tiques et fcfUsmatiques (Bordeaux, 1594), in which he main- tained against the atheists that there is a God and a religbn; against the pagans, Jews, and Moham- medans that the Christian religion alone is true; and against heretics and schismatics that salvation can be found only in the Roman CathoUc Church. He likewise wrote a collection of sixteen Discours chrdiens (1600), on the mass, the knowledge of God. salvation, and the communion of the saints. Still more famous was bis TraiU de la sa^esse (1601; Eng. tranal. by S. Leimard, London, 1612 [?]), in which be proceeded from the thesis that the true understanding of man consists in knowledge of himself and of the nature and limits of his powers, fio that this wisdom should direct his inward and his outward life. Truth, on the other hand, can be found with God alone, and man is unable to gain it by himself. This agnostic tendency led Chama to express himself with such freedom concerning all positive religions, including Chris- tianity, that the Jesuit Garasse branded him as an atheist. The TraiU was accordingly expurgated by Jeannin for the edition of 1604, but in this form the book found few readers, and three 3rear8 later the text was restored with Jeannin's notes. Shortly before his death Charron published a compendium of his work with an apology under the title Petit traiU de la sagesse (Paris, 1606). (C. Pfendbb.) Biblxoorapht: The works, with a Life by If . de la Roch»- Maillet, were published, Paris, 1636. Consult: G. A. &unte-BeuTe, Cau»erie9 tU Z/undi, vol. xi., 4th ed., 16 voU., Paris. 1882-«5.
CHARTERIS, ARCHIBALD HAMILTON CHARTERIS, ARCHIBALD HAMILTON

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHARTERIS, ARCHIBALD HAMILTON: Church of Scotland; b. at Wamphray (15 m. n.e. of Dum- fries), Dumfriesshire, Dec. 13, 1835. He studied at Edinburgh (B.A., 1853), Tabingen (1870) and Bonn (1871); d. at Edinburgh Apr. 24, 1908. He was minister of St. Qui vox, Ayrshire (1858-69), New Abbey, Dumfriesshire (1859-63), and The Park Parish, Edinburgh (1863-68). From 1868 to 1898 he was professor of Biblical criticism in Edinburgh University. He was chairman of the General Assembly's Committee on Christian Life and Work, 1869-94, and was instrumental in establishing the Young Men's Guild, the Woman's Guild, and the Deaconesses' Hospital, and in reviving the order of deaconesses as a part of the organization of the Church of Scotland. He was appointed a chaplain to the queen in 1869, and was moderator of the General Assembly of the Church of Scotland in 1892. From 1901 to 1908 he was chaplain in ol^ dinary to the king in Scotland. In theology he was a conservative. He has written Life of Pro- fessor James Robertson (Edinburgh, 1863); Canon- icity: A Collection of Early Testimonies to the Canonical Books of the New Testament (London, 1880); The New Testament Scriptures (1888); and The Church of Christ (1905).
CHASE, FREDERIC HENRY CHASE, FREDERIC HENRY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHASE, FREDERIC HENRY: Anglican bishop of Ely; b. in London Feb. 21, 1853; studied at Christ's College, Cambridge (B.A., 1876); was curate of Sherborne, Dorset (1876-79), and of St. Michael's, Cambridge (1879-84). He was tutor of the Qergy Training School, Cambridge, from 1884 to 1887, and its principal from 1887 to 1901, and was lecturer in theology in Pembroke College, Cam- bridge, from 1881 to 1890, and in Christ's College from 1893 to 1901, as well as examining chaplain to the archbishop of York in 1894-1905. He was Hulsean lecturer in 1900, and was Norrisian pro- fessor of divinity in Cambridge University and president of Queen's College, Cambridge, from 1901 to 1905, as well as vice-chancellor of the uni- versity from 1902 to 1904. In 1905 he was con- secrated bishop of Ely. He has written Chrysostom (London, 1887); The Old Syriac Element in the Text of Codex Bezce (1893); The Lord's Prayer in the Early Church (Cambridge, 1891)'; The Syro- Latin Text of the Gospels (London, 1895); Credi- bility of the Book of Acts (Hulsean lectures for 1900- 1901; 1902); and The Gospels in the Light of His- torical Criticism (1905). He also edited F. J. A. Hort's Commentary on I Peter (London, 1898).
CHASE, IRAH CHASE, IRAH

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHASE, IRAH: American Baptist; b. at Strat- ton, Vt., Oct. 5, 1793; d. at Newton Center, Mass., Nov. 1, 1864. He was graduated at Middlebury College, Vt., 1814, and Andover 1817; he was or- dainwi 1817, and preached for a year as missionary in Virginia; in 1818 he became professor of lan- guages and Biblical literature in the first Baptist theological school in the country, then at Phila- Ohasidim Chastity 20 delphia, in 1822 incorporated with Columbian University at Washington; he resigned in 1825 and was one of the founders of the Newton Theo- logical Institution and professor of Biblical theology there till 1836, of ecclesiastical history, 1836-45. The latter part of his life was spent in literary work. He wrote much for the religious periodicals and published, with other books, Remarks on the Book of Daniel (Boston, 1844); The Work Claiming to be Ute ConetitiUione of the Holy Apostles, including the Canons, Whiston^s Version, revised from the Greek, with a prize essay upon their original con- tents translated from the German (New York, 1848); The Design of Baptism Viewed in its Relation to the Christian Life (Boston, 1851); Infant Baptism an Invention of Man (Philadelphia, n.d.). CHASmiM (Heb. J^sidhim, "Pious"): 1. A Jewish religious party important during the time of the Maccabean wars. They advocated the strictest ideals of Judaism prescribed by the scribes, op- posed the Gredzing tendencies of the age, and for a long time supported the Maccabees in the strug- gle with the Seleuddffi for independence. They were the precursors of the Pharisees. See Has- MONBANS, § 1. 2. The adherents of a religious movement which arose among the Polish Jews in the seventeenth century. It was essentially a pietistic and m3n3tic reaction against Talmudism, and thus presents a certain analogue to the pietism current in Christian circles about the same period, though there was no actual relation between the two. The founder of the Chasidim was an obscure Polish rabbi named Israel ben-Eleazar, who received the epithet of Baal Shem-Tob or " Master of the good name " (i.e., the myotic name of God), whence he was fre- quently termed Besht (from the initial letters b^h4). Teaching a religion of the heart, and dis- carding Talmudic formalism for personal faith and love of God, he gathered about him- The self an enormous following which num- Founder of bered many rabbis whom the legalism the Chasi- of the Talmud had failed to satisfy, dim and his About 1740 he made his headquarters Teachings, in Miedzyboz in Podolia, and there developed his two cardinal doctrines that God is everywhere, and that man may com- mune with God. The first tenet was pantheistic and the second cabalistic. To attain perfect com- mimion with the deity ecstatic prayer and medita- tion, often induced by violent physical motions or even by the use of intoxicants, were necessary, while thus a direct influence might be brought to bear upon God himself. Formalism was altogether discarded by Chasidism, and in a like spirit the non-Jewish asceticism grafted on Talirudic ritual- ism by the " practical Cabala " was rejected. The Chasidim werd to serve and worship God with gladness and in the freedom of the spirit, while reason was distinctly subordinate to faith. He who realized Chasidic ideals was " righteous " {ffaddii) and had preeminence over lesser souls. Herein lay the danger of the system, for the i^addik came, in increasing measure, to be regarded as a quasimediator with God, who could influence the deity to bestow blessings on those that had not achieved perfect righteousness and communion with the divinity. This concept was The thoroughly non-Jewish, nor was such Zaddikim. homage ever rendered to any rabbi as to the ordinary ^addiJf, The cleav- age between the orthodox Jews and the Chasidim grew wider; separate synagogues were formed, and changes were made in the arrangements of the prayers, the rules for slaughtering, and other ancient Jewish customs. It was not until after the death of Besht, however, that the power of the lioddiJf gained full development, but then the rule was evolved that the '* righteous " should be sup- ported by less holy souls in retiun for his mediation with God. From a sincere, though often ignorant, leader of his flock he became only too frequently a mere thaumatuigist, healing the sick and per- forming other mirades with his amulets and the penances which he imposed. Yet Chasidism was not a homogeneous system, but developed, in course of time, into two distinct schools, one finding its center in South Russia and Poland, and the other in Lithuania and White Russia. The cause of this demarcation was, in the main, intellectual. In South Russia and in Poland the mystical and pietistic trend was no new thing. It had already been exemplified in the movements headed by Jacob Frank (q.v.) and in the religious upheaval caused in Oriental Judaism by the pseudo-Messiah Shab- bethai Zebi. It had been augmented, moreover, by the religious anarchy consequent on the political disturbances in Poland and by the savage perse- cutions of Chmiehiicki and the Haidamacks. The result was a combination of ignorance and despair, which furnished a fallow soil for an optimistic mys- ticism freed from all restraints of the ritual law. In these regions, then, the ^addil^ floiuished and worked his mirades at the expense of the still more benighted Chasidim. In White Russia and Lithuania, on the other hand, these destructive factors had not been at work, and the Talmud retained its podtion of honor and its conservative power. There, moreover, the Jews History centered in the dties, and thus were of under the intellectual restraint and ' Chasidism. stimulus of the scholars of the Talmud, while in the villages of Poland and South Rusda imagination could run riot, devoid of the restraint of scholarship. For all these reasons Chasidism did not gain in the north the exdudve dominance which it possessed in the south, and its break with rabbinical Judaism was far less radical. The ^addik of White Russia and Lithuania was little more than a heterodox rabbi, and was deeply influenced by the " rational Chas- idism " taught by Zalman of Liozna (1747-1812), who postulated the need of an intelligent faith rather than absolute subjection of reason, and reduced the ^addik to the place of a teacher instead of a thaumaturgist. Chasidism, being suspected (and not without some probability) of an afiinity with the vagaries of Frank and Shabbethai Zebi, was everywhere bitterly opposed by orthodox Judaism, represented by the mitnaggedim (** opponents "). In the north, 21 Ohasidim Chastity where the hold of Chasidifun was so slight, the hos- tility was extreme, and the sectarians were de- nounced to the government, although without success. The result was the existence of the two scbooLs side by side, but in the south rabbinical Judaism was completely routed, and the ^addUcim took the place of the rabbis. The Chasidim, how- e\^r, met with their most fonnidable opponents when the maskilim (" enlightened ") arose in the nineteenth century. This movement, inspired by Moses Mendelssohn and his followers, was fatal, in it) importation of Occidental Christian learning and criticism, to the ignorant mysticism of Chasi- di^m. Its power is now confined to the uneducated Jews of southern Russia, where the maskilim meet the stubborn resistance of stagnation Oppodtion and a reactionazy tendency which is to the more intense, because less enlight- SfBtem. ened, than that of rabbinical Judaism. This trend is not improbably increased by the attitude of the Russian government toward the Jews, but elsewhere the despair which evoked it no longer exists, and with the absence of the cause the effect has vanished. Yet in passing judgment on Chasidism, it should not be forgotten that, with all its faults, it possessed one important element which was the secret of its power, the insistence on personal piety and faith as the means of salvation, rather than on the intellectualism of rabbinical legalism, a teaching by no means new in Judaism, but revived and fostered by this sect in a time of need. Bibuogea^ht: H. Graetx, OtadiidUe der Jvdtn, vol. xi., ehAp. 3. Leipdc. 1891 (the fullest aooount); J. M. Jest. GtMckiehU tUa Jud^nihumB und seiner Sekten, iii. 184, 3 pwtA, ib. 1857-59; L. L5w, Veroangenheit und Gegen- wart der ChandOer, Budapest, 1859; J. R. Ehrlich, Do- Wtg meifias LAena, Vienna, 1874; S. Schechter, StitdiM in JudaUmt, Philadelphia, 1896; KL, iii. 102-103; JE, Ti. 2S1-250. CHASTER 8ha8''tel^ ETIEinfE LOUIS: Swiss church historian; b. at Geneva July 11, 1801; d. there Feb. 24, 1886. He was educated at Geneva, and subsequently studied in France, Italy, and Engjand. In 1832 he became a pastor in his native city, where, seven years later, he was appointed professor of church histoiy in the theological faculty of the university. He was a prolific author, his chief works being as follows: Conferences sur Vhis- toire du Christianisme (2 vols., Geneva, 1839-47); Hidoire de la destruction du paganisms dans V empire ^Orient (1850); Etudes historiques sw V influence de la chariU durani les premiers sikdes ckrHiens (Paris, 1853; Eng. transl. by G. A. Matile, Phila- delphia, 1857); Le Christianisme au dix-neuvihne fieck (Geneva. 1874; Eng. transl. by J. R. Beard, London, 1875), this forming, in a new edition, part of his Histoire du Christianisme depuis son origins Pi»qu*& nos jours (5 vols., Paris, 1881-84); and lAttres incites de Madame de Maintenon au lieu- tenant de Baville (1875). His Melanges historiques ft religieuz appeared posthumously, together with a biographical sketch by A. Bouvier (Paris, 1888). CHASmT: Chastity in the modem accepta- tion of the word is a condition and a virtue — the state of physical and moral purity in sexual rela- tions, and self-preservation from imallowed sexual desires. As a virtue it was highly esteemed early in heathen antiquity, by the Romans, and among the Germanic tribes— all the more as it was un- common. Even to the present day it has been required more strictly from women than from men, and there are traces of this inequality in the Mosaic law. Indeed it can not be said that as concerns chastity Israel rose much above the general level of the pre-Christian period; the nation's moral consciousness of sexual purity was not acute. Christianity first gave to chastity its full value. The New Testament writers use the word hagnos in this connection, which originally meant " dedi- cated," "holy," then "pure," "chaste." The New Testament idea is based upon the entirely new. Christian, conception of the value and sig- nificance of the human body and of its life. Included in the plan of salvation, destined to eternal com- munion with God, called to futiu« transfiguration in celestial existence, the body to the Christian is an object of solicitude and conscientious care (I Cor. vi. 19). In the performance of this duty the Christian must fight all carnal desires (I Pet. ii. 11), especially the sexual instinct, which in all times and places has been recognised and felt by men as one of the fiercest and most invincible. That the instinct in itself is not sinful may be inferred from God's institution of wedlock. But any transgression of this limit is unchastity, whether in thought (Matt. V. 28), in word (Eph. v. 3, 12), or in deed (I Cor. vi. 15). The destructive effect of incontinence ex- tends not only to the body, but to the soul as well, which is thereby polluted, made unfit for all good, and irretrievably estranged from spiritual inter- course with God, hence these sins exclude ^rom the futiue communion of heaven (I Cor. vi. 9, 10; Eph. V. 5; Rev. xxi. 8, 27). For the attainment of chastity training is neces- sary. For the Christian this training has its root in the grace of regeneration. The guidance and support of the Holy Spirit is indic^nsable and assured (Rom. viii. 13; Gal. v. 22-23), but is in- effectual without personal exertion and self-dis- cipline on the part of the individual (I Cor. ix. 27; Eph. iv. 29, V. 4; Phil. iv. 8; I Tim. v. 22). The duty of prayer, watchfulness, and the other means of self-training is incumbent on all without respect to sex or age, and rests in an especial degree upon those whose calling is to educate others. While wedlock is a holy defense of chastity (I Cor. vii. 2), it is no guaranty of purity (I Cor. vii. 3-5; I Pet. iii. 1-7). Celibacy, too, has its dangers; it is im- posed upon many by circiunstances in modem times, but incontinence is not excused thereby. Finally the successful result of Christian training and discipline, made possible by the Christian's inward relation to Jesus Christ, is something dif- ferent from the natural sense of shame and outward deconmi, also from the particular gifts of chastity referred to in Matt. xix. 12, which Paul attributes to himself (I Cor. vii. 7), for which the tradition of the Chiurch praises the Apostle John, and which is mentioned in the Apocalypse (xiv. 4). Karl BuRGERf. Oheetham M CHASUBLE (Lat. castdQ): The principal vest- ment worn by Roman Catholic priests when cele- brating mass. See VEaniBirre Ain> Insignia, EcCLBSIAflTIGAL. CHAtEL, sha^'tel', FERDINAin) FRAK^OIS: Founder of the £glise catholique-frangaifie; b. at Gannat (34 m. b.b.w. of Moulins) Jan. 9, 1795; d. at Paris Feb. 18, 1857. At first chaplain of a regi- ment of the line, he was called by the July Revo- lution of 1830 to a place of importance at Paris. An adherent of the liberalism of the period, he sou^t to found a Church based on reason rather than on Rome, retaining, for the most part, the forms of Roman Catholic ritual, yet changing their meaning and rendering them patriotic in tendency- His theological education was but superficial, and it is clear that at first he was rationalistic and later pantheistic in tendency, while he preserved traces of the cult of Reason in the sense that term bore during the French Revolution. Chfttel soon won a considerable following in his movement for re- form, and in 1831 he was able to announce the establishment of the £g^ise catholique-frangaise, a temple for several thousand persons being erected at Paris in the Faubourg St. Martin two years later. On the high altar was a representation of Reason in the form of a woman who supported another holding a cross and typifying Religion, while near them was a lion as a symbol of the strength of Reason. The sides of the altar were adorned with pictures of F^nelon and St. Vincent de Paul, with the words gloire and patrie. The service had the form of a mass; feasts were celebrated in honor of great men, especially Frenchmen; and at Christmas Ch&tel himself was honored as a "reformer" by the side of Christ. About 1837 the community reached its height, although the majority of its adherents were confined to Paris, but in 1842 it came to an end. The government of Louis Philippe favored it at first, but later be- came hostile to it. ChAtel long survived the organization which he had founded, and died in poverty and neglect. He expounded his views in a series of works, none of which was of any spiritual importance. F. Kattenbusch. Biblioorapht: A. Theiner, in TQ, 1832. pp. 651 sqq.; H. B/bUcbUn,DaaChr%9lentumin Frankreieh, pp. 283 Bqq., Hamburg, 1837; F. F. Fleok, Wwefuehaftiidie Reiw dwrdi . . . FronJbreuA, vol. ii., part 2, pp. 65 sqq., Leipeio. 1838; F. Kunstmann, in ZeiUehrift fur Theoloffie, iii (1840). 67 sqq.; R. Holsapfel. in ZHT, xiv (1844). 103 Bqq.; A. Martin, Chdtd H Viglite francaiae, Montauban, 1004; KL, iii. 108-110.
CHAUNCY, CHARLES CHAUNCY, CHARLES

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHAUNCY, CHARLES: 1. Second president of Harvard College; b. at Ardeley or Yardley Bury (10 m. n. of Hertford), Hertfordshire, England, 1592 (baptised Nov. 5); d. in Cambridge, Mass., Feb. 19, 1672. He studied at Trinity College, Cambridge (B.A., 1613; M.A., 1617; B.D., 1624), and became fellow and lectiuer in Greek (or pro- fessor); was vicar of Ware, Hertfordshire, 1627-33, and of Marston St. Lawrence, Northamptonshire, 1633-37. His stem Puritanism brought him into difficulties with the church authorities in both parishes, and in 1634 he was suspended and im- prisoned; after some months' confinement he made submission, but regretted the act ever afterward. He decided to go to America, and before sailing wrote The RetracUon of Charles Chaunqf formerly minister of Ware in Hertfordshire (London, 1641), published, as he says, ** for the satisfaction of all such who either are, or justly might be, offended with his scandalous submission, made before the High Commission Court, Feb. 11, 1635." He ar- rived at Plymouth, Dec, 1637, and acted as as- sistant there till 1641, when he went to Sdtuate; he was invited to retiun to Ware in 1654 and was making preparations for departure when he was offered the presidency of Harvard to succeed Henry Dunster; he accepted with reluctance, was in- augurated Nov. 29, and filled the position faith- fully and well. He was a good scholar and, in addition to his attainments as a theologian, had considerable knowledge of medicine; he is said to have been an admirable preacher and was esteemed for his piety. He published The Doctrine of the Sacram/^f with the right use thereof, catechetically handled by way of question and answer (London, 1642); a volume of sermons on justification (1659); and Antisynodalia scripta Americana, or a pro- posal of the judgement of the dissenting ministers of the churches of New England assembled Mar, 10, 1662 (Cambridge, 1662). He had six sons, who were all graduated at Harvard, all became ministers, and all are believed, like their father, to have been physicians as well. His eldest son Isaac (b. at Ware Aug. 23, 1632; d. in London Feb. 28, 1712) was ejected as rector of Woodborough, Wiltshire, by the Act of Uniformity in 1662, and in 1687 became minister of the independent congregation in Buiy Street, London, formerly served by John Owen; on his resignation in 1701 he was succeeded by his assistant, Isaac Watts; for the rest of his life he practised medicine and tau^t. He was a voluminous writer. Biblioobapht: William Chaunoey Fowler, Memtniai* t^ the Chaunceya, Boston, 1858; Cotton Mather, in his Mao- nalia, gives a chapter to F^vsiclent Chauncy under the title Cadmus Amarieanua, bk. iii., chap, xxiii.. vol. i., pp. 463-476, Hartford. 1865; James Savase. Oensakx/ieal DieHonary of the Firtt SetOera of New Bngland, i. 366-369, Boston, 1860. 2. New England cleigjrman, great-grandson of President Chauncy; b. in Boston Jan. 1. 1705; d. there Feb. 10, 1787. He was graduated at Harvard, 1721; ordained assistant minister of the First Church of Boston, 1727, and remained there till his death. He cultivated a plain and matter- of-fact style in preaching, and was noted for scrupu- lous integrity. He tried to check the extreme excitement attending the preaching of Whitefield, and v<rote in reference to it Seasonable Thoughts on the Stale of Religion in New England (Boston, 1743), and two or three open letters to White field (1744- 1745). He stoutly opposed the establishment of episcopacy in the colonies, and published The Validity of Presbyterian Ordination Asserted and Maintained (1762) and A Complete View of Epis- copacy until the Close of the Second Century (1771). He believed in the final restoration of all, or Uni- versalism, and advocated it in The Salvation for All Men Illustrated and Vindicated as a Scripture Doc- trine (1782); Divine Glory Brought to View in the Final Salvation of All Men (1783); The Benevo- 33 Chasuble Cheetham lence of the Deity Fairly and Impartially Considered < 1784); Five Dissertations on the Scripture Account of the FaU and its Consequences (1787). BmuooaArBT: W. C. Fowler, MemoriaU of the Chaunceya, pp. «»-70. Boston. 1858. CHATrrAUQUA IflSTlTUTlON: An institution on Chautauqua Lake (poet-office, Chautauqua, X. Y.), founded in 1874 as a Sunday-school teachers' normal institute by John H. Vincent, now retired bishop in the Methodist Church, and by Lewis Miller of Akron, O. Within four years there de- \'eloped a complete system of popular education, the main features of which have survived to the present day. The activities of the institution center primarily about a smnmer assembly conducted on the Insti- tution ground for eight weeks from late June to late August. At this assembly two main educa- tional features are carried on side by side. A series of simmier schools has been evolved which divides itself into two main groups: the first — ^the academic courses or schools — ^including the English language and literature, modern languages, classical lan- guages, mathematics and science, psychology and pedagogy, and religious teaching. The second — the professional schools — includes library training, domestic science, music, arts and crafts, expression, phyaica] education, and practical arts, llie work in these schools is carried on for six weeks (July- August) and is conducted by a faculty of some ninety instructors from universities, colleges, and normal schools from the Atlantic C>oast to the Middle West and the Far South. The second systematic scheme for general education is pro- moted by means of a popular programme which includes during the season over three hundred lectures, readings, concerts, and entertainments. Besides the two divisions of the siunmer schools and puUic progranmie, Chautauqua Institution shows its sense of responsibility toward visitors through an established series of clubs which makes place for Chautauquans of all ages from the kindergarten child to the members of the men's and women's dubs. Of these different organizations, five — the Kindergarten, the Girls' Club, the Boys' Club, the Athletic Qub, and the Men's C^ub — ^now have their own well-equipped and centrally located buildings. The work of the Institution, however, does not cease with the close of the summer assembly, for through the Chautauqua Literary and Scientific Cirde large numbers of people are reached through- out the year by means of a regular series of uni- versity extension readings. Four books are pre- pared jreariy for the course and The Chautauquan, a monthly magazine, supplements the lines of thought developed in the text-books. The activity of the Reading Cirde is directed and systematized by the adoption of a succession of years — the American Year, En^h-Russian Year, Franco- German Year, and Classical Year; by reading for four years a person passes through the series and qualifies himself for the certificate of completion of the oounie. During 1905-07 registration in the sum- mer schools averaged 2,465, the total attendance at the assembly each summer was somewhat over 50,000, and the total membership for the Reading Circle from the beginning to 1907 approximated 270,000. The plan of Chautauqua Institution is extensive, but constantly developing. On the tract of nearly three hundred acres a town with some five hundred cottages has sprung up. An amphitheater seating five thousand, a hall of philosophy with a capadty of eight hundred, and a dozen smaller halls and class buildings provide amply for the various classes and audiences. The Institution holds a charter from the State of New York whereby no element of private profit is permitted. It owns its own light- ing and water plants and its own printing estab- lishment, and performs all the functions of an ordinary town although upon a system of govern- ment which is entirely unique. The Extension Department circulates each year over a million pieces of matter, and the number of assemblies more or less similar in natiue which all owe their stimulus to the original Chautauqua aggregates nearly three hundred. P. H. Botmton. Bibliography: J. H. Vincent, The Chautauqua Movement, Boston. 1886; C. A. Teal. CoutUino the Coet; or, a Sun^ mer at Chautauqua, New York, 1889; F. C. Bmy, Reading Journey through Chautauqua, Chautauqua, 1005 (on the system of instruction). CHAVASSE, sha'VOs', FRANCIS JAMES: And- ean bishop of Liverpool; b. atEdgbaston (a suburb of Birmingham) Sept. 27, 1846. He studied at Christ Church, Oxford (B.A., 1869), and was curate of St. Paul's, Preston (1870-73), vicar of St. Paul's, Upper Holloway (1873-78), and rector of St. Peter- le-Bailey, Oxford (1878-89). He was then prin- cipal of Wycli£fe Hall, Oxford, in 1889-1900, and in the latter year was consecrated bishop of Liver- pool. He was select preacher at Oxfoid in 1888- 1889 and 1901-02, and at Cambridge in 1893 and 1902, and was also lecturer in pastoral theology in the latter university in 1898. CHEDORLAOMER. See BABTLOinA (vol. L, p. 407, foot-note); Israel, History of, L
CHEETHAM, SAMUEL CHEETHAM, SAMUEL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHEETHAM, SAMUEL: Anglican archdeacon and canon of Rochester; b. at Hambleton (20 m. n.e. of Leicester), Rutlandshire, Mar. 3, 1827; d. at Rochester July 19, 1908. He was educated at Christ's CoUege, Cambridge (B.A., 1850), became deacon in 1851, and priest in 1852. He was vice- principal of the Collegiate Institute, Liverpool, in 1851^3, and from 1853 to 1858 was assistant tutor of Christ's College, where he was also fellow from 1850 to 1866. He was ciu^te of Hitchin, Herts, in 1858-61, vice-principal of the Theological College, Chichester, and curate of St. Bartholomew's in the same city in 1861-63, and professor of pastoral theology in King's College, London, from 1863 to 1882. He was also chaplain of Dulwich College from 1866 to 1884 and archdeacon of Southwark from 1879 to 1882. In the latter year he was made archdeacon of Rochester, and has also been canon of the same cathedral since 1883, as well as examining chaplain to the bishop of Rochester from 1878 to 1897. He was Hulsean lecturer at Cambridge in 1896. In theology he is a Broad-churchman. In addition to numerous minor contributions, he has written The Law of the Land and the Law of the Mind (Lon- don, 1866); Colleges and Tests (1871); A History of the Christian Church during the First Six Cen- turies (1894); same, iSince the Reformation (1908); The Mysteries^ Pagan and Christian (Hubean Lec- tures for 1896, 1897); Mediceval Greek History (1899). He likewise edited the Dictionary of Christian An- iiquiiies (2 vols., London, 1875-80) with Sir William Smith, and contributed a large number of articles to it.
CHEKE, SIR JOHN CHEKE, SIR JOHN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHEKE, SIR JOHN: English scholar; b. at Cambridge June 16, 1514; d. in London Sept. 13, 1557. He studied at St. John's, Cambridge, and adopted the Reformation doctrines there; became one of the first Greek scholars in England, and in 1540 regius professor at Cambridge; in 1544 was made tutor to Prince Edward, and when the latter succeeded to the throne, in 1547, received honor and wealth. He espoused the cause of Lady Jane Grey, was her secretary of state, and was com- mitted to the Tower by Mary in 1553; released the next year, he went abroad and settled at Strasburg. In 1556 he visited Belgium, was arrested there by order of Philip II., and taken to England; through fear of dying at the stake he renounced the Protec- tant religion, and his death is said to have been hastened by shame and regret for his weakness. He made an English translation of the Gospel of Matthew (all but the last ten verses) and of the first twenty verses of the first chapter of Mark, with notes (ed., with seven of his letters, James Goodwin, London, 1843), to illustrate a notion he had about " reform " in English spelling and to show that it was possible to use only Saxon words; he edited and translated into Latin some of the homilies of Chrysostom; also Cranmer's treatise upon the Eucharist (1553) and wrote some other tracts; of special interest is The Hurt of Sedition , how grievous U is to a Commonwealth (1549). Bibliography: J. Stxype, Life of the Learned Sir John Cheke, Oxford, 1821 (contains a tranal. of Gheke's " Trea- tise of Superstition "); an account of the Life is also added to O. Lansbaine's ed. of The True Sulked to the RebM, Oxford, 1641. For his Gospel transl. consult J. I. Mom- bert, Engliah Vereione of the BtUe, pp. 234-237. London, new ed., 1908. CHEMNITZ (KEMNITZ), MARTIN. Pretheological Activity (§1). Work as a Theologian (§ 2). Share in the Formula of Ck)ncord (§ 3). Part in the Adiaphorist Ck)ntroverBy (§ 4). Polemics against the Roman Catholics (§ 6). Evaluation of Chemnits (§ 6). German theologian and controversialist of the Reformation period; b. at Treuenbrietzen (35 m. s.w. of Beriin), Brunswick, Nov. 9, 1522; d. at Brunswick Apr. 8, 1586. The death of his father when he was a boy made attainment of education difficult; he was at the Magdeburg school from 1539 to 1542, and then earned money enough by teaching to go to the University of Frankfort-on- the-Oder for a time, and in 1545 to that of Witten- berg. Here he came into contact with Melanchthon, on whose advice he took up mathematics, which led him to astrology. These studies consumed 60 much time that he paid little heed to Luther's teaching, thou^ he heard him. The outbreak of war took him away from Wittenberg; in 1547 he settled at Kdnigsberg and supported himself by teaching some young Polish noblemen, becom- ing later rector of the school at Kneip>- I. Pre- hof . He still pursued his astrological theological studies, until on a visit to Wittenberg Activity, he was advised by Melanchthon to turn his attention to theology. The plague put an end to his school work, and he ac- companied Melanchthon's son-in-law Sabinus to Salfeld, where he laid the foundation of his theo- logical learning. In 1550 he retmned to K5nigs- berg, where the duke, who esteemed him as an astrologer, made him his librarian. He was now convinced of the insecure foundations of astrology, and devoted himself systematically to theology, studying the Bible in the original, the Fathers, and the controversial writers of the time. The dis- turbances stirred up by Osiander's controversy on justification made him uncomfortable at Konigs- berg, and in 1553 he returned to Wittenberg, where he lectured for a time; but in the following year went to Brunswick to settle permanently, as coad- jutor to the superintendent, becoming superin- tendent himself in 1567 and holding the post until 1584, when he resigned on account of 2. Work his health. He was not noted as a as a preacher, but he .was a diligent and Theologian, methodical pastor. The continuance of his studies, however, made him known rather as one of the first theologians of his time, and he was caUed upon to take part in every controversy. In 1567 he went with his superior M6rlin to Prussia to reorganize the Church there, distracted by the divisions over Osiander's teaching, and the Corpus doctrince PrtUenicum was the result. He rendered still more important services in the principality of Brunswick-Wolfenbtittel, where, in 1568, Duke Julius sunmioned him, with AndreiL, to assist in establishing Protestantism. The docu- mentary results of his work here, and at LOneburg with Duke William, remain in the Corpus doc- trince Julium and the Corpus WUhelminum. He also gave the impulse to the f oimding of the Julian University at Helmst&dt in 1576. The later years of his life were largely taken up by work connected with the Formula of Concord (q.v.). Its final acceptance, in spite of all difficulties, was largely due to the untiring work of Chemnitz. Before this, however, he had the misfortune to fall out with Duke Julius, whom he rebuked sharply for having his son consecrated bishop of Halberstadt with all the rites of the old Church. The Protestant princes who were working for the 3. Share adoption of the Formula omitted on in the For- this account to invite the duke to their mula of conferences at Jilterbock, and he de- Concord, clined to have anything fiurther to do with their undertaking. Thus the Formula was not definitely accepted in Brunswick, and the Corpus Julium remained the standard there, as at the University of Helmst&dt, which thus assumed an isolated position ultimately favorable to the growth of the doctrines of a Calixtus. Chem- nitz wrote a defense of the Formula against its critics, which was published at Magdeburg in 1582. This the Helmst&dt theologians attacked, espe- cially OQ the ground of its containing the doctrine oi ubiquity, and a oonferenoe was called at Qued- linbuig by the three electors and Duke Julius to reconcile the differences. Chemnitz made his last important public appearance at this meeting, but could not prevail. His death was felt as a public calamity by all Protestant Germany. His first participation in the disputes of the time was occasioned by the Adiaphorist controversy (see Adiafhora), at the instance of MOrlin, who was a steadfast Lutheran. He was next moved to utterance on the question of the Lord's Supper by the fact that Zwinglianism had found an entrance into Brunswick. He was not present at the con- ference held there in 1561 by Mdrlin against Hardenberg, the principal representative of this doctrine in northern Germany, but sent a treatise which contributed to Hardenberg's 4. Part in condemnation. In the same year he the Adi- published a more complete and sys- aphorist tematic RepetUio aana doctrinas de Contro- vera j/rcBsentiay in which, avoiding ▼enj. dogmatic subtleties, he rests his be- lief in the real presence on the plain sense of the words of institution. In 1570 he went on to treat directly of the Incarnation, which then (exactly contrary to the logical sequence of the early Church) was treated as dependent on the eucharistic controversy, in his De duabus nahiris in Christo, etc. Soon afterward he declared against Crypto-Calvinism (see Philippistb) in two forcible expressions of opinion on the li^ttenberg Cate- chism, which influenced the action of the authorities in Brunswick and Lower Saxony. But he was even better known through his polem- ics against the Roman Catholic Church and the Jesuits. The latter in 1560 had published in Ccdogne, where they were strong, a criticism of a Protestant catechism. This was the first literary onslaught of theirs to attract general attention in Germany, and Chemnits was the first to take it up and warn people of the danger from the Order. His counterblast was entitled Theologia Jesuitarum praeipua capita (1572). Payva d'Andrada (q.v.), a Portuguese Jesuit and member of the Council of Trent, published two works in rejoinder (1564), the first of which came into Chem- 5. Polemics nits's hands together with the decrees Against of the Council, to which it appealed. tiie This seemed to him to open the way Roman for a more thoroughgoing work, and CatfaolicB. gave him the idea of his famous Examen concUti Tridentini (1565-73), than which no book of the period was more dam- a^ng to the Roman claims. It ran through numerous editions, and was translated into German and French; a modem edition was brought out by Preuss (Berlin, 1861). His dogmatic standpoint '» indicated not only in these polemical works, but in the Loci theologiei, commenting on Melanch- tboD's Loci, which, left uncompleted by him, his successor heyaeT and his son published in 1591. Here, without directly contradicting Melanchthon, he interprets him in a tone of moderate Lutheran oitJMdoxy, attempting to work out a consistent integral body of doctrine, and to show its relation to the Christian life. Leyser also edited and published his incomplete exegetical works, the Harmonia evangelica and the Poatilla oder Aua- legung der Evangelien, in 1593. Chemnitz's mind was not of the creative oider; but it was just what was needed for his time, following upon an age of productivity, when sys- tematization and confirmation were the great requirements. He took a middle 6. Evalua- course among the parties of the age; tion of strongly influenced as he had b^n Chemnitz, by Melanchthon, his doctrine leaned more to strict Lutheranism, and the Philippists (q.v.) upbraided him as an apostate. Sober discretion characterized both his writings and his practical work. He was suspicious of inno- vations, exhorting his readers to " hold fast the form of sound words," and never going to the ex- tremes of the younger Lutheran school. His prac- tical cast of mind shows itself in his theology, which is never merely speculative, but occupied rather with laying down serviceable and unques- tionable formulas. His life, taken as a whole, must certainly be pronounced a blessing to the Church he served so long. (Johannes Kunze.) Bibliography: The best source for a life is J. Rehtmeyer, Der berUhnUen Sladt Braunaditoeig KireKenhittorie^ iii. 273 sqq., Brunswick, 1710. Other sources are the letters of Chemnits in the library of the University of Gottingen, and J. Gasner, Oratio de vita, aiudiU et obUu M. ChemniHi [Brunswick], 1588. Other accounts are: T. Pressel, MarUn Chemnitz, Elberfeld, 1862; C. O. H. Lents, l>r. Martin Chemnitz, Qotha, 1866 (usee MSS. sources); H. Hachfeld, Martin ChemniU, Leipidc 1867 (also based partly on unprinted sources); R. Mumm, Dis Polemik de» M. ChemniU geifen daa KonsU mm Trent^ Leipsic, 1905; Sohaff, Christian Church, vii. 601.
OHEMOSH CHEMOSH

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHEMOSH: The national god of the Moabites according to the Old Testament, confirmed by the Moabite Stone (q.v.); by the Moabitish names KamuBuriadbi (i.e., Chemoehnadab, cf. the Hebr. Jehonadab), mentioned as a king of Moab in an in- scription of Sennacherib ("Taylor Cylinder," II. 63; H. Zimmern, in Schrader, KAT, p. 472), Chemoshmelek (or Chemoshgad)^ the father of Mesha (Moabite Stone, 1), and Chemoshyehi, upon a gem with Phenician inscription found at Beirut and probably Moabitish (E. Renan, Mission de PlUnicie, Paris, 1864, pp. 351-352; De Vogtl^, Me- langes d'archiologie orientalef Paris, 1868, p. 89). The name may possibly be found also in one or two other inscriptions (W. Gesenius, in Scriptura lingucBque Phcenicia manumenta, Leipsic, 1837, p. 159; P. Le Bas and W. H. Waddington, Inscriptions grecqves et latines recueiUies en Qrhce ei en Asie Mineure, iii. 1, Paris, 1870, n. 2220). In Judges xi. 24 Chemosh is spoken of apparently as god of the Ammonites; but elsewhere in the Old Testament the Ammonitish god is called Milcom (related to Molech) (I Kings xi. 5, 7, 33; II Kings xxiii. 13), and there is reason to believe that the passage Judges xi. 12-28 is an interpolation and originally referred to the Moabites (cf. the commentaries on Judges). The etymology of Chemosh is uncertain. Concerning the character of the god and his worship not much is known. His priests are mentioned, and an image of him (which was to be carried away as a trophy by enemies) is implied in Jer. xlviii. 7 (cf. Ohemoah Ohiamaoe THE NEW SC^.HAFF-HERZOG d6 verse 13); the expression "Chemosh said to mc " (Moabite Stone, 14, 32) indicates prophets or an oracle; he was worshiped at a '' high place '' (I Kings xi. 7; Isa. xvi. 12; II Kings xxiii. 13; Moab- ite Stone, 3) and, at least in extreme cases, his cult included human sacrifice (II Kings iii. 27; cf. Moabite Stone, 14-17). The expression "Ashtar Chemosh '* (Moabite Stone, 17) probably indicates that a female deity was associated with Chemosh; it is thought by some, however, that Ashtar is an- other name for Chemosh and that the compound " Ashtar Chemosh " is formed like Yahweh Elohim (cf. E. Meyer, in ZDMG, vol. xxxi., 1877, p. 733; F. Baethgen, BeUrdge zur aemiiUchen Religionage- schichte, Berlin, 1888, pp. 13 sqq.; G. A. Barton, A Sketch of Semitic Origina, New York, 1902, pp. 141-144). Chemosh was worshiped by the idola- trous Israelites (I Kings xi. 7, 33; II Kings xxiii. 13). The similarity of the language applied to Chemosh, both in the Old Testament and in the Moabite Stone, to that used of Yahweh ia very striking. The Moabites are the " people of Che- mosh," his sons and daughters he "gives into cap- tivity " (Num. xxi. 29; cf. Jer. xlviii. 46); Che- mosh gives possessions (Judges xi. 24). In the Moabite Stone Chemosh is the lord and protector of Moab; he commanded Mesha to go to war (14, 32) and gave the victory (4, 19); the slaughter of his ene- mies was a " pleasing spectacle for Chemosh " (1 1- 12); because he was " angry with his land " Che- mosh allowed Omri to oppress Moab (5). See Moab, and for the inscription, Moabite Stone. Bibliography: Besides the works already mentioned and those referred to in the article MoABrrB Stone, oonsult: D. Hackmann, De Chemotcho MoabUarum idolo, firemen. 1730; F. C. Movers. Die Ph&nizigr, i. 334-337. Bonn, 1841; P. Bchols. OdUendienst und Zauberweaen bei den aUtn HebrOem, pp. 176-182, Regensburg, 1877, and the litera- ture under Moab.
CHENEY, CHARLES EDWARD CHENEY, CHARLES EDWARD

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHENEY, CHARLES EDWARD: Reformed Episcopal bishop; b. at Canandaigua, N. Y., Feb. 12, 1836. He was educated at Hobart College (B.A., 1857) and at the Protestant Episcopal Theo- logical Seminary, Alexandria, Va., from which he was graduated in 1859. He was ordered deacon in 1856 and ordained priest two years later. After being curate of St. Luke's, Rochester, N. Y. (1858- 1869), and of St. Paul's, Havana, N. Y. (1859-60), he became rector of Christ Church, Chicago, in 1860. His pronounced evangelicalism, however, caused him to be tried by Bishop Whitehouse, although the verdict was overruled by the civil courts. His church, nevertheless, seceded from the Protestant Episcopal communion, and in 1873, on the organization of the Reformed Episcopal Church, he was elected first bishop, still retaining his rectorate, which he has since held continu- ously. His jurisdiction was changed in 1878 from the Northwest to the Synod of Chicago, and in 1905 he was president of the Synod of Reformed Episco- pal Churches of the Central States. While in the Protestant Episcopal Church he was, naturally, an adherent of the pronounced Low-church party, and now describes himself as " believing heartily in the great fundamental principles held by all evangeliccd Christians," and as " totally opposed to all that leans toward any compromise with Roman- ism, and equally opposed to the radicalism in- volved in the destructive criticism of God's Word." He has written: Twenty-Eight Sermons (Chicago, 1880); A Ward to Old-Fashioned Episaypaliam (Philadelphia, 1884); What is the Reformed Episco- pal Church? (1885); What do Reformed Episcopa- liansBelievef (1888); The Enlistmentof the Christian Soldier (Chicago, 1893); A King of France un- named in History (1903); and The Second Norman Conquest of England (1907). CHERBURY, EDWARD HERBERT, LORD. See Deism, I., ( 1. CHERETHITES, ker'e-thaits, AlVD PELETHTTES, peFe-thoits (Heb. hakkerethi wehappelethi): The designation of the royal body-guard of King David, commanded by Benaiah (II Sam. viu. 18, xv. 18, XX. 7, 23; I Kings i. 38, 44; I Chron. xviiL 17; called sdmatophylcJces by Josephus, Ant., VII. v. 4). The interpretations '' executioners and runners " (Gesenius and others) and " bowmen and sUngers " (Targum Jonathan, Peshitto) are not supported by etymological proof, and are inadmissible be> cause the Hebrew forms are unquestionably gen- tilic nouns. The name " Cherethite " in the above passages is to be taken as in I Sam. xxx. 14 (cf. Zeph. ii. 5; Ezek. xxv. 16), where the reference is to the Philistine population, or at least to a part of the same. The connection of this people with the island of Crete is less certain, though it is easily possible that they were Cretans (see Cafhthor). The word Pdethi (" Pelethites ") seems to be an abbreviation of Peliehti (" Philistines "), intended to rime with Kerethi, and the two words taken together allude in a general way to the various elements of the Philistine population. There is nothing improbable in David's having a standing body-guard wholly or chiefly of Philistines, sub- ject to himself alone and reliable in times of civil strife. His attitude toward Ittai and his country- men from Gath (II Sam. xv. 18-22, xviii. 2) shows that such relations with foreigners (even uncir- cumdsed) were not found offensive, either from a national or a theocratic point of view. This body-guard is not to be confused with the " mighty men " who constituted the native corps d^Uite (cf. II Sam. XX. 7). Probably the royal body-guard was popularly known as the " Cherethites and Pelethites " untU long after David's time, though the appellation must soon have become inapplicable to the nation- ality of the guardsmen. In the time of Atbaliah mention is made of the " captains and the guard " (II Kings xi. 4, 19; Heb. hakkari toefcoro^m, evidently formed after analogy with the old double name). The '* guard " are the footmen and the accompanying halberdiers who ran before the king's chariot (II Sam. xv. 1; cf. I Sam. xxii. 17 and elsewhere). The " captains," however, are more correctly the " Carites " (cf. R.V.) or " Carians/' and the passage shows that in a later period this adventurous people, who were often employed as mercenaries (cf. Herodotus, ii. 152, v. Ill; Livy, xxxvii. 40) had come to occupy in Jerusalem the place of the old Philistines. The Hebrew text (kethibh) of II Sam. xx. 23 has kari (both English 27 ChemoBh Ohiemaoe versions follow the Iperi in translating " Chere- tbites"), perh^>B by confusion with the later passage. The Great Cylinder Inscription of Sen- oacherib seems to indicate that Hezekiah had an Arabian body-guard (cf. Sayce, Higher Criticism and the Monuments, pp. 431, 433, London, 1894). C. VON Orelli. Bibliography: The diasertationB of Carpiov and Opitz, still TBhiable. are in Usolini, Thesaunia anHquiiatum «i- crarumi^ rxvii. 423 sqq., 451 sqq., 34 vols., Venice, 1744- 1789. Consult also C. Iken, DiBaertaiwneM jAUohgieo-Vieo- Ugicm, pp. 111-132. Leyden, 1727; B. Behrend, Die KreH wtd PUti, Krotosehin, 1868; 8. R. Driver, Notea on the H«br. Text of Samuel, London. 1890; R. Kittel. Hiatory of Oko Hobrmwe, ii. 153. 164. ib. 1806; DB, i. 376-377; EB, I 730-740; Smith, OTJC, p. 262. CHERUB. See Angel.
CHESHIRE, JOSEPH BLOTJITT, JR. CHESHIRE, JOSEPH BLOUNT, JR.

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHESHIRE, JOSEPH BLOUNT, JR.: Protes- tant Episcopal bishop of North Carolina; b. at Tarborough, N. C, Mar. 27, 1850. He was grad- uated at Trinity College, Hartford, Conn., in 1869, and after teaching for two years, studied law and was admitted to the North Carolina bar in 1872. He practised for six years, and then, having studied theology privately, was ordered deacon in 1878, and priested two years later. He was curate at Chapel Hill. N. C, 1878-81. and was rector of St. Peter's, Charlotte, N. C, 1881-93. In the latter year he was consecrated bishop coadjutor of North Caro- lina, and within the year, on the death of Bishop Lyman, he became bishop of the diocese. BIBLIOGRAPHY: W. S. Perry, The Episcopate in America, p. 361. New York. 1895. CHEYNE, ch^'ni', THOMAS KELLY: Church of England; b. at London Sept. 18, 1841. He was educated at Worcester College, Oxford (B.A., 1862), and also studied at the University of Gdt- tingen. He was ordered deacon in 1864, and ordained priest in the following year, and from 1868 to 1882 was feUow of Balliol College, Oxford, in addition to being a college lecturer on Hebrew and divinity in the same college from 1870 to 1871. He became rector of Tendring, Essex, from 1880 to 1885; was Oriel professor of the interpretation of Scripture, Oxford 188&-1908; became canon of Rochester 1885. He became a member of the Old Testament Revision Company in 1884, was Bampton Lecturer in 1889, and American Lecturer on the History of Relig- ions in 1897-98. He is one of the leaders of the '* higher criticism " of the Bible in the English- Kpeakiog worid, and in this spirit edited the Ency- riapoedia Btblica in collaboration with J. S. Black (4 vols., London, 1899-1903). His independent works include, in addition to numerous contribu- tions to standard works of reference, as well as to theological periodicals, Notes and Criticisms on the Htbrew Text of haiah (London, 1868); The Rook of Isaiah ChronolofficaUy Arranged (1870; m collaboration with S. R. Driver); The Fropheeies of Isaiah (2 vols., 1880-81); Micah n882) and Hosea (1884) in The Cambridge Bible , Jeremiah in The Ptdpit Commentary (1883-84); The Book of Psalms, a New Translation (1884); Job and Sotoman (1887); Jeremiah, his Life and Times ri888); The Origin and Religious Contents of the Psalter (1891; the Bampton Lectures for 1889); I Aids to the Devout Study of Criticism (1892); Found- ers of Old Testament Criticism (1893); Introduc- tion to the Book of Isaiah (1895); Book of Isaiah (critical text and translation) in the Polychrome Bible (2 vols., 1898-99); Jewish Religious Life, after the ExUe (New York, 1898; American Lec- tures on the history of religions for 1897-98); The Christian Use of the Psalms (London, 1899); Critica Biblica (1904); BitAe Problems and the New Ma- terials for their Solution (1904); and Traditions and Beliefs of Ancient Israel (1907). CHEYIVELL, FRAlfCIS: Puritan; b. in Oxford 1608; d. at Preston, near Brighton, Sussex, 1665. He studied at Merton College, Oxford, and became fellow; took orders and held a curacy near Oxford and a living near Banbury; on the outbreak of the civil war he became an active partizan of the par- liamentary side, and, as a reward for his services, was given the living of Petworth, Sussex, in 1643. He was a member of the Westminster Assembly the same year. In 1646 parliament determined to " reform " the University of Oxford and appointed Cheynell one of a commission to " prepare the way," and the next year made him one of the visitors; he is said to have been " the most detested as well as the most active and meddlesome of all." In 1648 he took forcible possession of the Lady Mar- garet professorship of divinity and the presidency of St. John's C/ollege, but either resigned or was removed in 1650. He was deprived of his living some time before the general ejection of non-con- forming ministers in 1662. He attended William Chillingworth (q.v.) in his last illness, showing himself " as charitable and compassionate as his rigid orthodoxy would permit him to be" (Des Maizeaux, Life of Chillingworth, p. 314): he refused to officiate at the burial, but attended the cere- mony with Chillingworth's book in his hand, and in the course of a bitter harangue threw it into the grave, exclaiming, " Get thee gone, thou cursed book, ... rot with thy author and see corrup- tion." To justify his conduct he published Chil- lingworthi novissima, or the sickness, heresy, death, and burial of W, Chillingworth (London, 1664); he also published The Rise, Growth, and Danger of Socinianism (1643) and other works. Biblxoorapht: A. Ik Wood. A&tena Ozonieneee, ed. P. BIIba. vol. ii., 4 vols.. London. 1813-20; D. Neal, Hiet. of the PvffUana, vol. iv.. ib. 1738; DNB, x. 222-224. CmCAOO-LAMBETH ARTICLES. See Fun- damental Doctrines op Christianity, § 4; Lam- beth Conference. CHIEMSEE, ki''em-fl6^ BISHOPRIC OF: A bishopric of the modem Bavaria. Before the middle of the eighth century, a monastery was founded, probably from Salzbuig, on an island in the Chiemsee, the largest lake of Bavaria. In 788 it was given by Charlemagne to the church of Mets, which retained possession of it till 891, when King Amulf exchanged it for Luxeuil and presented it to Salzburg. The foundation of the bishopric was due to Archbishop Eberhard of that see (1200-46), and was confirmed by the Lateran Council m 1215 and by Innocent III. shortly after The extent of its jurisdiction was only about eight miles by four, Children's Bibles China 28 comprising the valleys of the Prien and the Achen with their tributaries. The see was suppressed in 1807, in the process of reorganization of the Ba- varian Church. (A. Hauck.) Bibliography: J. E. von Koch-Stemfeld, Bevtr&ge zur teutuhen Lander- . . . und SUuUenrKunde, ii. 26^314, 3 vols.. Munich. I82&-33; Rettberg. KD, ii. 243; Hauck. KD, u. 432, iv. 655. 924; /CL. iii. 134-137. CHILDREN'S BIBLES. See Bibles for Chil- dren. CHILDREN'S COMMUNION. See Lord's Sup- per, V. CHILDREN'S DAY, CHILDREN'S SERVICES. See Sunday-schools and Children's Services.
CHILE CHILE

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHILE: A republic of South America, bounded on the north by Peru, on the east by Bolivia and Argentina, on the south and west by the Pacific Ocean; area, 307,620 square miles; population, 2,712,150 by census of 1895, estimated in 1903 at 3,205,992. The Indians number about 50,000. The predominant religion is Roman Catholic. An active missionary propaganda, in which Fran- ciscans and Jesuits were especially zealous, began immediately after the Spanish conquest under Valdivia in 1539-41, from the town of Santiago (founded 1541) as a base. The heroic resistance of the Araucanians, the ruling native people, prevented extensive results till late in the seventeenth cen- tury. The period of separation from Spain began in 1810 and ended in 1827, when the Spanish garri- sons were finally withdrawn. The present eccle- siastical organization includes the archdiocese of Santiago of Chile (founded 1561, raised to archi- episcopal rank in 1840) and the dioceses of Con- cepcion (1563), Ancud (1840), and La Serena (1840). The vicariates apostolic of Antofagasta (for Chile and Bolivia) and Tarapacd (for Chile and Peru), and the prefecture of Araucania have been estab- lished in recent years. There is an apostolic dele- gate and envoy extraordinary. The Roman Catholic religion is legally recognized as '' protected " (protetta) by the State, and the Church receives an annual subsidy of about one million pesos. Freedom of religious confession, however, is granted. Plans of the curia concerning the relations between the Church and non-Catho- lics and educational affairs led to a difference with the government in 1883; nevertheless President Balmaceda maintained the provisions respecting complete tolerance of Protestant worship, and state promotion of higher instruction. One con- sequence was the founding of a Catholic University at Santiago in 1889; beside which the State Uni- versity (founded by the Jesuits, 1743) with five faculties is still active. Primary instruction is not uniform, and school attendance is not compulsory; private, parochial, and public schools exist side by side for both white children and Indians; approximately 1,960 schools are maintained by public funds as against somewhat over 500 by other arrangements. The State also provides for several normal schools. There is evidence of a noteworthy expansion of secondary schools for boys and girls, and the man- agement and equipment are good; a state peda- gogical institute for this branch of education is in operation at Santiago. Higher education is served, apart from the university, by an Academy of Art, a Conservatory, and an Institute for Agriculture and Mining. Immigration has given rise to a number of con- siderable congregations of the Anglican Church and of the Presbyterian confession, and a German Evangelical Church " of the country." The former are found especially in Valparaiso, Santiago, Con- cepcion, Iquique. The fourteen German Evan- gelical congregations are not yet completely co- ordinated by synodical union, but they have everywhere an assuring support in the way of German schools, even though most of these are not strictly associated with the Church. The German total is estimated at 12,000; that of English-speaking Protestants at 7,000. Wilhelm Goetz. Bibliography: Mrs. M. R. Wright. Republic of Chile, Philadelphia. 1905; J. T. Medina. Loa Aboriginee de Chile, Santiago, 1882; C. Ochseniua, Chile, Land urui Leute, Leipaic. 1885; H. Kuns. Chile und die deuUd»en Kolonien, Leipsic, 1801; A. U. Hancock. A Ilist. of Chile, Chicaga 1893. CHILIASM, kiri-azm. See Millennium, Mil- lenarianism.
CHILLIN6W0RTH, WILLIAM CHILLINGWORTH, WILLIAM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHILLINGWORTH, WILLIAM : Church of Eng- land; b. at Oxford Oct., 1602; d. at Chichester Jan. 30, 1644. He became a scholar of Trinity College, Oxford, 1618 (B.A., 1620; M.A., 1623; fellow, 1628). He entered heartily into the theo- logical controversies of the time, and, undertaking to argue against a Jesuit at Oxford (John Percy, but known as John Fisher), became himself a con- vert to Romanism and went to Douai in 1630; here he attempted to write out the reasons for his change of faith with the result that he wavered, returned to Oxford in 1631, and in 1634 declared himself again a Protestant. He seems to have been influenced by a longing for authority and certainty; the apparently firmer foundation offered by the Church of Rome proved delusive; and then he settled upon Scripture interpreted by reason. Some of the claims of the Church of England seemed to him unreasonable, and he declined to take orders. His great work was called forth by a controversy between a Jesuit, Matthias Wilson (alias Edward Knott), and Dr. Christopher Potter, provost of Queen's College, Oxford, as to whether Protestants could be saved. Three books had already appeared when Chillingworth entered the contest (Charity Mistaken, 1630, and Mercy and Truth, 1634, by the Jesuit; Want of Charily Justly Charged, 1633, by Dr. Potter). His work, after being examined and approved by the vice-chancellor of Oxford and two divinity professors, appeared at Oxford in 1638 with the title The Religion of Protestants a Safe Way to Salvation : or an Ansv?er to a Book en- titled Mercy and Truth. A second edition was necessary within five months, and a host of answers and criticisms was called forth, from Puritans as well as Roman Catholics. It is a defense of Protes- tantism, which, he says, he understands to be not •* the doctrine of Luther, or Calvin, or Melanchthon; nor the confession of Augusta [Augsburg], or 20 Children's Bibles Ohlna Geneva; nor the catechifim of Heidelberg, nor the articles of the Church of England; no, nor the harmooy of Protestant confessions; but that wherein they all agree, and which they all subscribe with a greater harmony as a perfect rule of their faith and actions, that is, the Bible. The Bible, I say, the Bible only is the religion of Protes- tants " (part i., chap, vi., sec. 56). He argues strongly for free inquiry, and denies that any church is infallible. Concerning the Church of England he declares that he believes its doctrine '* so pure and orthodox that whosoever believes it, and lives according to it, undoubtedly he shall be saved; and that there is no error in it which may neces- >itate or warrant any man to disturb the peace or renounce the conmiunion of it. This, in my opinion, is all intended by subscription " (preface, ticc. 40). This being acceptable to the bishops, in 1638 Chillingworth was made chancellor of Salisbury with the prebend of Brixworth in North- amptonshire annexed. He took the royalist side in the contest between king and parliament, and wrote against "rebels"; became chaplain in the royal army and was taken prisoner at Arundel Castle in Dec., 1643; being ill at the time, he was taken to Chichester, where his death was hastened, as was believed by his friends, by the injudicious efforts of the Puritan Francis Cheynell (q.v.) to ctinvert him. t']-iuooKA.PHT: Chillinsworth'a minor writings were pub- lished in 1687 under the title Additional Diacouraea; the bnkt edition of his Worka is that of Oxford, 1838, 3 vols.; a Hiaiarieal and Critieal Account of the Life and Wri- tinga of WiBiam ChiUingvorOi by P. Des Maiaeaux ap- peared in London. 1726; and his Life by Thomas Birch was prefixed to the tenth folio edition of his Worka (1742), reprinted in the edition of 1838. Cf. DNB, x. 252-257. CHIMERE. See Vestments and Insignia, Km L ESI AST! C A L. CHUVA. The Earliest Period (§ 1). The Second Period (f 2). The Modem Period (f 3). 3. Protestant Missions. The First Period, to 1842 (§1). The Second Period. 1842- 1860 (f 3) The Third Period, 1860- 1895 (f 3). The Fourth Period, from 1895 (§ 4). General Features. Chri»- tian Literature (f 5). Various Forms of Work (§6). StatUtics (§ 7). China forms the southeastern part of the Chi- nese empire, is from 1,300,000 to 1,500,000 square miles in extent, and has a population of perhaps 375,000.000. Its capital is Peking. The name •China " is often loosely used for the entire empire, which includes, besides China proper. Manchuria, Mongolia, East Turkestan, and Tibet. The gov- enimental authority in large districts is purely nominal, and for this reason and owing to the encroachments of European powers, the boundaries •ukI area are uncertain and fluctuating. The ex- tent is given as about 4,200,000 square miles, and I. Native Retifpons I. Coofueianimn. CoDfndua Cl 1 ). The Teacfains of Goofu- dos (f 2). lu Defects ii 3). ITsoian. Origin and Cbaracteri<«- tJ€8(i 1). Saperstitioa of the Chi- nese (i 2). 3. Buddhiflm. 5. Chinese Sects. TI. Cluvtian Missions. 1. Ne^^torian MiHsions. 2. Rixnan Catholic Mia- a late estimate of the population (admittedly very uncertain) is 425,000,000. L Native Religions: In speaking of the "relig- ions " of the Chinese it is always necessary to point out that not only does the Chinese language con- tain no such wonl as " religion *' in the sense of a relation between God and man, but there has never been any equivalent to this idea in the minds of the Chinese people. The teaching of the Sages, which are ethical as distinguished from religious, are grouped under the term "instruction." To " worship the gods " means also to pay one's respects. 1. Confacianlam: Confucius (q.v.) was a teacher and a philosopher who wished to reform his native state by a return to the past. At the 1. Oon- age of fifty-five he became an official, ItLcius. but his morals were too pure and his aims too lofty to make him successful and he retired in disgust to private life. His great work was the instruction of his pupils, who are said to have numbered 3,000, seventy-two of whom arc enrolled among the Sages of the empire. They gathered up his sayings in a kind of Memorabilia which for ages hajB been a text-book in every Chi- nese school. Confucius edited the books already reckoned as classical, but added comparatively little of his own, his most important work being a bald compendium of Chinese history covering about 240 years, including his own lifetime. Through the use of them as text-books his comments on the Book of Rites, the Book of Poetry, the Book of History, and the Book of Changes, together with the Memorabilia, have probably exerted more influ- ence upon a greater number of human beings than any other writings in the history of mankind. The Book of History should be especially mentioned, which, as Dr. Williams remarks, " contains the seeds of all things that are valuable in the estima- tion of the Chinese — ^it is at once the foundation of their poUtical system, their history, and their religious rites, the basis of their tactics, music, and astronomy." Although while he lived his precepts were neglected, Confucius began to be appreciated after he was dead, and has long been regarded by the Chinese as a perfect Sage (otherwise called " Holy Man "), to whom there is a temple in every city, where there are annual offerings of animals and of silk. The ornamental portals inform the passer-by that his " Virtue Equaled Heaven and Earth," which is tantamount to his deification. In the words of Dr. Legge: " The homage which is offered to the Master could not be more complete were he Shang Ti himself." In striking contrast with this universal estimate of the Chinese people is that of Confucius himself in such modest sentences aa the following: "The Sage and the man of perfect virtue — ^how dare I rank myself with them? It may simply be said of me that I strive to become such without satiety, and to teach others without weariness. In letters I am perhaps equal to other men; but the character of the Superior Man, carrying out in his conduct what he professes, is what I have not attained to. The leaving virtue without proper cultivation; the not thorou^y China 30 discussing what is learned; not being able to move toward righteousness of which knowledge is gained; and not being able to change what is not good — these are the things which occasion me solicitude. I am not one who was born in possession of knowl- edge; I am one who is fond of antiquity, and earnest in seeking it. A transmitter, and not a maker, believing in and loving the ancients." This latter trait of the Master has been perpetuated in the Chinese people, whose face has for more than two millenniums continued to be turned to the past. Aside from the voltuninous works which constitute the Chinese classics, a view of what is for conve- nience comprehensively termed Confucianism must take accoimt of the standard interpretation of these works by Chu Hsi, a highly distinguished scholar of the Sung dynasty (1130-1200 a.d.), whose oonmientaries on the classical works have for centuries formed the recognised standard of orthodoxy. Like all other complex systems of human thought, Confucianism is many-sided. But its essence is expressed in the " Five Constant 2. The ^^rtues " of Benevolence, Righteous- ^■^ ' ness, Propriety, Wisdom, and Sin- OonftwSua. <*"*y' as well as in enforcing the duties of the " five relations " of Prince and Minister, Husband and Wife, Father and Son, Brother to Brother, and Friend to Friend. Confucius taught the duty of keeping aloof from spirits, while at the same time treating them re- spectfully. " We have not performed our duties to men," he says; " how then can we perform our duties to spirits ? " " Not knowing life, how can we know about death? " The laws of nature, and of the spiritual world as well, lie beyond the com- prehension of all men except those endowed by natxue with the spirit of wisdom. " He who has sinned against Heaven has no place for prayer." It has been claimed that there are six essential elements in Confucianism, five of which differ- entiate it from any other system of non-Christian thought. These are: (1) The direct responsibility of the sovereign to Heaven, Shang Ti, or God. (2) The greater importance of the people than the sovereign. (3) The discrimination of the five social relations, with their appropriate duties. (4) Insistence on the virtues just mentioned, with the doctrine that the wise and the able should rule, the object of the ancient civil service examination being to ascertain who the wise and the able are. (5) The presentation of an ideal, or Princely Man, as a model upon which every Confucianist should form his character. The influence of this upon the unnumbered millions of Chinese must have been measureless. (6) Filial piety, which involves not merely suitable treatment of the living, but the worship of ancestors, the real religion of the Chinese people, and perhaps the most potent among several causes which have perpetuated the race through all the millenniums ot Chinese history. Confucianism is mixed with and debased by an intricate system of nature- worship, mduding worship of heaven and earth, the sun and the moon, the douds, the rain, thunder, the five great mountains, tbe north pole, the spirits of dead worthies, and much else, combining in one ritual gods, ghosts, flags, and cannon. It embodies much of ideal excellence for an ideal world, but it is deficient in the Defects ^^®^ °^ *^® relations, for it has no knowledge of God, its account of men is inadequate, it has no elucidation of the fact of sin, and no remedy for it, nor any explanation of the relation between man and God. Confucius used the term Heaven instead of Shang Ti. As Dr. Legge says: '' He was unreligious rather than ir- religious; yet by the coldness of his temperament and intellect in this matter his influence is unfa- vorable to the development of true religious feel- ing among the Chinese people generally, and he prepared the way for the speculations of the lite- rati of medieval and modem times which have exposed them to the charge of atheism." Confucianism is a wonderful product of human development, with a unique grip on its adherents. Its strength lies in the inherent rectitude of its injunctions, which, if followed, would make the worid a very different one from that which we see. But it has the fatal defect of altogether failing to recognize the inherent weakness and inability of human nature to fulfil these high behests, and for this inability Confucianism has neither explanation nor remedy. In its adoration of Confucius and other worthies, its face is ever toward the past. Its worship of ancestors has no ethical value,* and is quite destitute of any directive or restraining power. While Confucianism has unified and con- solidated the Chinese people, it has not, as the Great Learning enjoins, renovated them, and it never can do so. It can do no more for China than it has sdready accomplished, and it is now a spent force. 2. Taoism: The Chinese character Tao sig- nifies a " road, reason, doctrine." The indigenous religion called by this name owes its 1. Origin reputed origin to Lao-tssse (" Old OYi^raMt^ Master," as distinguished from Con- ^rtloB " ^^^^ ^ Master; see Lao^tbze), who is supposed to have been half a cen- tury older than Confucius, and to whom is gener- ally attributed the work called " Canons of Reason and Virtue," a treatise remarkable alike for its brevity and its profundity. Historically next to nothing is known of Lao-tsze, and the authenticity of the treatise passing under his name is much disputed. Taoists are linked to Confudanists by a common regard for the Book of Changes, of which great use is made by them. The Taoism of the present day has nothing to do either with the Canon of Reason just mentioned or with its alleged author, whose philosophy is now only a historical curiosity. Modem Taoism occupies itself with a quest for the elixir of immortality, the conquest * [This statement will not be accepted by all students of Chinese religion. Many of them look upon ancestor-worship as the apotheosis of the family, and point out that the prac- tise of laying before the ancestral tablet as a worthy offeriDg the article or document which evidences that the individual had done something which reflected credit on the family must affect the offerer and his descendants. The contem- plation of distinguished or even respectable ancestors has stirred many among us to nobler living. Yet it is true that the evangelising of China is hindered by the practise. — Kd.] 31 China of the pMB/ODB, and espedally with the exorcising of denioos. It is extensively mixed with Bud- dhist ideas, having borrowed from that system the DotioQ of a trinity of Pure Ones. A being having the same title as the Shang Ti of the Confudanists is worshiped, but his functions are practically delegated to a divinity called Pearly Emperor Supreme Ruler, who is regarded as an apotheosis of a man named Chang who lived in the Han d^rnasty (189 B.c.)» and whose supposed successors, into each of whom the soul of the founder trans- migrates, lives on the Dragon-Tiger mountain in Kian^, and is by foreigners termed " the Taoist Pope." Eight *' Immortals/' each of great ca- pacity, some of them objects of worship, figure largely in popular Taoism. In almost all villages there is a temple to the local god (or god of the Bofl) who is regarded as a constable reporting deaths, ete., to the dty god (Ch'eng Huang) in whose temple are represented by images the most horrible tortures of the future life, visited upon the wicked. A 8ea Dragon King rules the waters, and is often worshiped in the form of water (or even land) sniikes. Taoism boasts an immense literatiu^, but with the exception of the classic named it is of little value, and is not reducible to a system. It descends into owi'mfJ worship of the " Five Great Families/' via.; the Fox, the Rat, the Weasel, the Snake, and the Hedgehog, each of which is spoken of to terms of the highest respect, and considered to be endowed with supernatural powers. The dense ignorance of the Chinese regarding the unifonnity of nature, and the apparent absence of any intuition of cause and effect, *• ^y*'" make the popular mind a fertile seed- of ^e bed for the cultivation of superstitious Chinese. gP™M of every sort. Every few years a wave of fanaticism seems to be propagated throughout the empire, issuing in tales of cue-cutting without visible agency, Iddnaping of children, and the like. The whole Boxer move- ment in China was stimulated by beliefs which negative and defy the laws of nature. Men who are confident that no sword that was ever forged can cut them, that no rifle-bullet can penetrate their charmed bodies, that no artillery can destroy them are dangerous elements in any dviliied land, and China is full of such men. It is difficult to find in Taoism at the present day a ungle redeeming feature. Its assumptions are wholly false, its bald materialism inevitably and hopelessly debasing. 8. Buddhism: This Indian religion is supposed to have been introduced into China in the Han dynasty, by the Emperor Ming Ti, in consequence of a dream. At different periods it encountered great opposition both from the agnostic Confit- nanists and the materialistic Taoists. The essen- tial doctrines of Buddhism (q.v.) are the vanity of ^ material things, the siipreme importance of charity, and the certainty of rewards and punish- naent by means of the transmigration of souls. The Five Precepts of Buddhism forbid the taking of life, stealing, lust, improper speech, and the use of wine. The Buddhist habit of renouncing one's family and becoming priests or nuns is in theory totally opposed to Confucian teaching and instincts, yet like the belief in the transmigration of souls, and the bliss of attaining to be a Buddha, it is com- mended to the Chinese by long custom. The poverty of thousands of Chinese makes their chil- dren available for service in the temples, though Confucianism has never assented to it. Yet what- ever their theoretical views, Chinese of all ranks call in Buddhist or Taoist priests, or both, upon due provocation, especially at funerals. The im- limited utterance of the name of Omito Fo (Amita Buddha) will bring great felicity, and its incessant enunciation is one of the principal industries of the Mongols. The power of Buddhism has arisen from the fatal weakness of Confucianism, which has nothing to say of the hereafter. The literature of Buddhism, like that of Taoism, is appallingly ex- tensive, embracing both translations from the Sanskrit (which embodies the northern form of Buddhism as the Pali language does the southern), and also attempts to write Sanskrit texts in Chinese characters. Although Buddhist tenets are deeply enshrined in the hearts of the Chinese people, Chinese scholars, even when adopting Buddhism, have always affected to despise it. It has ren- dered the Chinese more compassionate to the brute creation than they would otherwise have been, and it has introduced the graceful but costly pagoda, as well as the dagoba, or memorial tope. While often displaying the negative activity arising from the cohesive power of ancient, vested interests, Buddhism in China has long since lost the virility which it attained through persecution, and haisi passed into a hopeless and senile decay. 4. MohamTnedanimn ! Mohammedans are scat- tered throughout China, particularly in the cities, being strongest in the southwestern provinces, their total number being estimated at twenty millions. They reached China in the T'ang dynasty, over a thousand years ago. Their mosques are especially in evidence in such great centers as Peking, Tien-Tsin, Canton, etc. The Mohammedans are much more lax in their practises than their coreligionists in India. They do not intermarry with the Chinese, but sometimes adopt Chinese children. They do nothing to propagate their faith, and apparently have never done so. The Chinese consider them as more violent in temper and more cruel in disposition than themselves, but the days of their early persecution have long since passed away. With the exception of their mono- theism there is often very little distinction between the followers of the Prophet and the Chinese. 6. Ohinese Sects: China is honeycombed with many varieties of secret societies, neariy all of which profess to " practise virtue " as an end. Many of them are, however, semipolitical, and all of them are tabooed by the government. Their manuals are copied by hand, and are practically inaccessible, and their tenets are compounded of fragments of Confucianism, Taoism, and Bud- dhism brewed in a common kettle. Their practises have unquestionably had their origin in Indian sources, the Chinese intellect not being sufficiently metaphysical to originate, or even to comprehend, Ohlna subtleties of this sort. Some use a species of planchette for obtaining adumbrations of fate, some keep ledger accounts of merits and demerits, while others strive after the (Taoist) " pill of im- mortality." The I Ho Ch'Uan (or " Boxers ") in 1899 adopted the name of an organization much more than a century old. Whenever any society is vigorously repressed, it invariably reappears under a new name. The existence of these count- less sects is a conspicuous witness to the radical insufficiency of each of the standard " religions " of China to satisfy the wants of the human soul. n. Christian Missions.— 1. Nestcrian Missions: According to ancient tradition Christianity was carried to India and perhaps even to China by the apostle Thomas. While it is not impossible that a knowledge of the new faith may have penetrated so far in the early centuries, no certain evidence of it is now to be obtained. The Nestorians, how- ever, sent missionaries to China at the beginning of the sixth century, as is proved by the black marble tablet discovered near the present Si Ngan Fu, the western capital of China, in 1625, record- ing the establishment of the " Illustrious Doc- trine." The date of this justly famous monument of the past is 781 a.d., and its authenticity, once hotly disputed, is now irrefragably established. Judging by the allusions in Marco Polo's narrative, in the thirteenth century Nestorian churches must have been nmnerous. The followers of this faith were no doubt bitterly antagonized by the aggres- sive Mohammedans, who came to China somewhat later than they, the Nestorians in turn persecuting the early Roman Catholic missionaries. Nestori- anism seems to have survived for almost a thou- sand years, traces of it being mentioned by travelers as late as the fourteenth century. But not a building which the Nestorians erected, not a page which they wrote has been preserved, and after more than twelve centuries they are remembered only by a stone tablet [In Nov., 1907, probably on account of the increasing nmnber of European vandab in the province, the governor of 8hen-Si removed the Nestorian Tablet from its ancient posi- tion in an open field near Si Ngan Fu and placed it in the Peilin Temple, inside the walls of the city.] 2. Boman OathoUo Missions: The efforts of the Roman Catholic Church to establish itself in China are divisible into several well- •; *J* marked periods, of which the first be- ^ " gan with the arrival of John of Monte Period. Corvino (q. v.), who reached China in 1292, during the Yuan, or Mongol dynasty. This zealous priest labored alone for eleven years, being later reenforoed by seven assist- ants and himself made archbishop. His letters speak of translating the Psalms and the New Testa- ment into Mongol, and of some 30,000 '' infidels " converted. But with the advent of the native Ming dynasty and the expulsion of the Mongols in 1368, so completely were the traces of the past effaced that it was long forgotten that Christianity had ever entered the Celestial empire at all. The second period of Roman Catholic missions is separated from the first by more than two cen- turies of sileqoe. The great missionary Francis Xavier (q.v.) died on the island of St. John in 1552, after heroic but unavailing efforts to enter China. In 1582 two Jesuit priests s * ^^^A "^^^^^^^ ^y * stratagem in getting a Peri!^ foothold in the province of K wangtung. One of these was Michele Ruggieri (Roger), and the other the celebrated Matteo Ricci (q.v.), a man of great natural abilities, of a genial diplomatic temperament, and gifted with an un- wearying patience. After nearly twenty years of romantic adventures he at last accomplished his great purpose, reaching Peking in Jan., 1601, where his labors were most indefatigable, and at his death in 1610 at the eariy age of fifty-five, they appeared to be crowned with success, especi^y in winning the literati. Ricd's Chinese writings remain to this day as an evidence of his unique achievements. His most famous convert was a Han Lin named HsU, who took the name of Paul, and whose daugh- ter (baptized as Candida) was a foster-mother to the infant Church. The family estate near Shang- hai (locally called Sikawei — " home of the Hsu family ") is now perhaps the most important center of Roman Catholic influence in China. Ricci nominated Longobardi (Lombard) as his successor, who after careful investigation felt obliged to re- verse the poUcy of concession to Chinese customs in regard to the worship of ancestors, and in the use of the characters Shang Ti as the designation for God. These divisive and perversive questions were the rock upon which Roman Catholic missions in China ultimately spUt. The talents of Adam Schaal, one of his successors, like those of Ricci himself, were various and imposing, his labors ranging from astronomical eriidition, exhibited in the reform of the Imperial calendar, to the compo- sition of works of theology, and of metal for the casting of caimon. His success was provocative of jealousy, so that he was undermined by intrigues, and died of grief and mortification at the age of seventy-eight, having been thirty-seven years in the employ of five monarchs. The achievements and honors of his successor, Ferdinand Verbiest, were if possible even greater, continuing for a period of thirty years to 1688. This trio of men of extraordinazy abilities and devotion not pefhai^s equaled in missions in any other part of the world might have been expected to insure the success of the Church to which they gave themselves. But meantime the seeds of dissension which ultimately proved the ruin not only of the Jesuit labors in China but also of those of the Franciscans and Dominicans who followed them were yielding their harvest of ill. Ricci had endeavored in every- thing to regard Chinese prejudices that he might win the Uterati. Upon the representations of Lombard, Pope Innocent X. (1645) forbade the worship of Heaven, and the rites to the dead, but the Jesuits succeeded in getting a bull from Alex- ander VII. (1656) practically (althouf^ not in form) reversing the decision. A third bull main- tained the validity of each of the former, the rites being forbidden to those who thought them idol- atrous, but lawful to those who considered them as merely civil and not religious. In 1699 the Jesuits with signal imprudence appealed the ques- 83 Ohlna tioD to the Emperor K'ang Hsi, whose decision in their favor was flatly contradicted by a bull of Clement XI. (1704) absolutely forbidding the rites, and the use of the terms " Heaven " and '* Shang Ti " for God. The Emperor K'ang Hsi was not the man to divide his rule with an Italian gentlenian, and the result was that while missions were still patronized at court for scientific pur- poses, they were persecuted in the provinces with the connivance of the emperor. On the accession of his successor, Yung Cheng (172S-36), by various decrees the missionaries were banished and the Church extinguished. It is said that '' more than 300 churches were destroyed or suppressed, and 300,000 Christians abandoned to the fury of the heathen." Thus at the end of a century and a half of great prosperity the work of the past appeared to be again wholly undone; but the fortitude under bitter persecutions and the ifAm oo^^^'^cy of the Roman Catholic Period Christians during the succeeding cen- tury and a quarter till the practical toleration of the Treaty of Whampoa, and the fuller liberty of the treaties of 1858, afford the most convincing proof of the genuineness of their religion. During the last half-century the expansion of the Roman Catholic Church in all parts of the empire has been marked, but as it does not publish statistics, only estimates are possible. In a re- cent work by the vicar apostolic of the province of Chehkiang there are said to be twenty-seven bishops, and the number of Christians is esti- mated at three-quarters of a million, although figures twice as large are often met with. From the Protestant standpoint it is a capital defect of the Roman Catholic policy that practically Qo use is made of street chapel preaching, and that the Bible as a whole is not translated for the converts. The standard of admission to the Church is not high, and great harm is done to the cause by the too ready acceptance of many appli- cantB whose obvious motive is the prosecution of lawsuits, and revenge.* It should be said that in *0n March 15, 1899, the Chinese government was m- <l'^rrd to inoe this decree, which is thus translated in Froident Hawks Pott's The Outbreak in China, pp. 107 sq. (Ncir Y'ork, 1900): " Churches of the Catholic religion, the propagation of which has been long sinoe authoriied by the Imperial Government, having been built at this time in all the provinces of China, we long to see the Christiana aul the people live in peace, and, in order to make their protection more easy, it has been agreed that local authori* tin fhaU exchange visits with missionaries under the con- <litioii8 indicated in the following articles: 1. In the differ- ent degzees of the ecclesiastical hierarchy, bishops being in Tuak. sad dignity the equals of viceroys and governors, it is screed to authorise them to demand to see viceroys and poveiaora. . . . Vicars-general and archdeacons will be au- tborind to demand to see provincial treasurers and judges, tad tsotaas. Other priests will be authorised to see pre- fects of the first and second class, independent prefects, sub- pnfecta. and other functionaries. 2. When a mission ad- ^. jcrave or important, shall come up unexpectedly in any praviaee. the bishope and the missionanes of the place *twQld ask for the intervention of the minister or consuls of the power to which the pope has confided the protection f>i religion. These last will regulate or finish the matter, fither with the Tsungli Yam6n or the local authorities. In *f^ to avoid protraeted proceedings, the bishop and the I have equal right to address themselves at once m.— 3 many cases the Roman Catholic converts showed the greatest firmness under the persecution of the Boxer period, unknown numbers enduring martyr- dom for their faith. 8. Protestant Missions: Protestant missions to China owe their origin to a general revival of spiritual life at the end of the eight- ^y ® eenth century, which was naturally Period manifested in greatly increased ao- to 1842*. tivity both at home and abroad. These missions in China are naturally divisible into four distinct periods, each terminated by a foreign war. In this vast field the London Missionary Society had the honor of being the pioneer, in the face of difficulties which can now be but imperfectly comprehended. Robert Morri- son (q. V.) reached Canton by way of New York Sept. 7, 1807. The East India Company would not allow him passage on its ships, but later was glad to employ him as its interpreter, when it was evidently for its interest to command the services of so thorough a Chinese scholar. His labors were unintermittent and immense. He completed the translation of the entire Bible into Chinese in 1818, partly in collaboration with his associate, William Milne. In 1823 his great Chi- nese Dictionary was published by the East India Company at an expense of twelve thousand pounds sterling. Dr. Morrison died in 1834, when the relations between Great Britain and China were becoming every year more strained, the missionary outlook being then almost as unpromising as when he began his work. The impossibility of getting a foothold on Chinese soil led to the establishment of an Anglo-Chinese College at Malacca (subse- quently transferred to the newly ceded island of Hongkong) in which Mr. Milne labored with dili- gence in teaching, and in preparing and printing Christian books. Walter Henry Medhurst, who came as a printer, spent many years at Batavia. The next society to begin work in China was the American Board, which sent out Rev. Elijah Cole- man Bridgman, who reached Canton in Feb., 1830, together with Rev. David Abeel (q.v.), who soon after joined the mission. Three years later, Mr. Samuel Wells Williams, then a mere youth, went out as a printer. In the ensuing decade, before the opening of the war with Great Britain, three other American societies entered the field, the Protestant Episcopal, 1835, the Baptist Missionary Union, 1836, and the Presbyterians (North), 1838. Med- ical work in this period was begun in 1834 by Dr. Peter Parker, who opened a hospital in Canton Oct., 1835, where the successful treatments, especially in eye and surgical cases, were phenomenal and most influential in diminishing prejudice. Dr. Thomas Richardson CoUedge, of the East India Company, opened a dispensary at his own expense in 1827. to the local authorities, with whom they may negotiate the matter and finish it." President Pott adds: " The missions of the Anglican Communion and other Protestant Churches have unanimously refused to a^k for any similar privileges, foreseeing clearly that, althoxigh the possession of such would vastly increase their power, yet this assumption would be attended with the gravest dangers, and could but make their cause unpopular in the eyes of the Chinese." — S. M. J. Ohlna 84 8. Th0 Baoond Dr. Bezgamin Hobson, of the London Mission, also conducted a hospital in Canton, Macao, and Honi^ong, from 1839 to 1843. The war with Great Britain was teiminated by the Treaty of Nanking in 1842, as a result of which the ports of Canton, Amoy, Fuchau, Ning-po, and Shanghai were definitely opened to trade. From the dose of the war to the settlement at the end of the next one is to be reckoned as the second period of Protestant missions to China, characterized by an activity Period ®° *^® P*"^ ®' *'^® British, American, 1848-60. '^^ German missionary societies fully equal to that of the agents of com- merce. The various missions to the Chinese in Java, Siam, and the Straits of Malacca were now transferred to the Chinese empire itself. Among them were those of the American Baptist Mission- ary Union, removed from Bangkok to Hongkong in 1842, and thence to Swatow in 1860; the American Presbyterian Mission from Singapore to Canton, with work opened later at Amoy and Ning-po, the Southern Baptists likewise beginning in Hongkong in 1842, and in Canton in 1845. During this period of renewed energy the American (Dutch) Reformed, the Church Missionazy Society, the English Baptist Society, the American Methodist Episcopal (lx)th North and South), the Berlin and Basel Mission, the English Presbyterian, the American Seventh- day Baptists, the Wesleyan Mission, and the Methodist New Connexion were first seen in China (discrepancy in the dates of the opening of some of these missions is often due to the fact that in some instances the preliminary work was dis- continued). The difficulties inherent in the initial stages of missions among the self-centered, sus- picious, and practically hostile people like the Chinese were greatly aggravated by the rise and rapid growth of the T'ai P'ing rebellion, which devastated nearly all the provinces of the empire, lasting from 1850 to 1864, when Nanking was captured, and in its sequelee for three years more. The last four years of this period witnessed another war with Great Britain — the effects of the defeat half a generation before having worn off — ^the Taku Forts were taken, and Peking was entered by the British and French in Oct., 1860. At the close of the war of 1840-42 the number of living Chinese converts might have been counted on the fingers of one hand. After eighteen years more of sapping, mining, and laying of foundations, there were in 1860 at the most but a few score, but im- portant beginnings had everywhere been made in evangelistic, medical, educational, and literary work. All the open ports of China were at this time centers of intense and unwearied activity, confined within these limited areas like waters behind a closed lock. By the Treaty of Tien-Tsin many new ports were opened, and Christianity in each of its forms was explicitly tolerated. More than a himdred mis- sionaries had been penned up in Shanghai awaiting the expected opening of inland China. Tien-Tsin was first reached by Henry Blodget (American Board) in company with British troops, and Peking by Mr. Joseph Edldns (London Mission), while Mr. Griffith John, of the same society, settled at Hankow, from which strategic point missions were opened in Hupeh and later in Szechuen and 8. The Hunan. Similar expansion took place ^™ from each of the other ports. This 1860-06 P®^^ ^^ missions is full of impor- tant political events so intimately re- lated to aU foreign interests that the one can not be considered without the other, and they must there- fore be briefly mentioned. Among them are the sup- pression of the T'ai P'ing rebellion (1864), the re- ception by the emperor of the foreign ministers in audience (1873), the murder of Mr. Augustus Ray- mond Margary (1875), with the resultant Chef u Con- vention (1876), by which greater security was ^ven to foreigners in China, and in connection with which more new ports were opened. A great steamship company was organized under Chinese manage- ment, and a network of telegraph lines began to overspread the empiro. The most important sin^e step in the evan- gelization of China was the development (rather than the organization) of the China Inland Mission (1865), founded on a combination of faith and works, which within a single generation has covered China with a chain of mission stations. Each of the older societies endeavored to expand into the illimitable regions beyond, and many new missions were begun. At the first general conference of missionaries in Shanghai in May, 1877, attended by 126 representatives, the total nmnber of Protestant workers was 473, of whom 228 were connected with thirteen British societies, 212 with ten American societies, and two of German origin. The number of Christians in ninety-one stations with 312 or- ganized churches was about 13,000. Thirteen years later a second conference was held, in May, 1890, when the societies had increased to forty, male missionaries to 589, married women to 391, and the unmarried to 316, a total of 1,296. There were 522 churches, and the Christians were neariy three times as numerous as in 1877, niunbeiing 37,287. More than sixty hospitals and forty-four dispensaries treated in 1889 348,000 patients. By the end of the century, however, this work had vastly expanded, so that 128 hospitals and 245 dispensaries, conducted by 162 male and 79 lady physicians, treated in one year 685,047 patients. The influence of this branch of missionary work in a country like China is immeasurable. Other op- portunities for philanthropy arose in connection with the great famine of 1877-78, which over- spread all northern China. The loss of life among the Chinese was estimated at between nine and a half and thirteen millions. Famine relief proved a golden key to unlock many closed doors. Similar relief has been afforded upon a large scale at other times in connection with other famines, floods, and pestilence, not without visible effect. The terrible massacre at Tien-Tsin in June, 1870, was one of a long series, the most numerous outbreaks taking place in 1891-93, apparently as a direct result of the blasphemous Hunan tracts, the whole Yang-tzu val- ley being ablaze with excitement. Another atroc- ity took place at Ku Ch'eng, Fukien province, in 1895, when Mr. Robert Warren Stewart and most of ' 35 China his family were murdered. The great province of Ssechuen became a hotbed of violence, foreigners were temporarily expelled, and 50,000 Christians (largely Roman Catholics) suffered, many being killed. These events were directly connected with China's ignominious defeat by Japan (1894-95), for which all foreigners were supposed to be in some way responsible. These continual outrages occurred in every part of the empire, and often without warning, in spite of imperial edicts and official proclamations, but in no instance had they any permanent effect in restraining mission work. For a long time the bitter but wholesome lessons of the war with Japan seemed to be forgotten or ignored. But in 1898 the emperor *• T*^® began a series of reform measures p^od ^^*^^ ^*^^ brought on a crisis, and 2hmil886 **® ^*® ^* aside by his aunt, the ' empress dowager, who reversed all his measures. The effect of this reaction was in- stantly felt throughout the empire. The cumula- tive force of the loss of Chinese territory by for- eign aggression, of commercial intrusion, of railways, and the opening of mines, added to the chronic prejudice against foreign religions, led to the fanat- ical I Ho Ch'Qan crusade of 1899-1900, with its spectacular oonaequenoes of the flight of the court and the occupation of Peking by foreign armies, ^hich, however, within a few months retired. The native Christians had now established their right to exist, and often afforded striking object- lessons of fidelity. Although practically all mis- aon property (except at protected ports) had been destroywl from the Yellow River to the Amur, within two years almost everything was replaced with a far better plant than would otherwise have been possible. The fidelity of the Cliinese Chris- tians,' while not uniform nor universal, won praise from every quarter, many thousands of them los- ing their lives, ajs well as 135 Protestant mission- aries, and fifty-three children, thirty-five Roman Catholic fathers, and nine sisters. It will be convenient to combine in a brief and summary view some features of missionary work which have been slowly developing t. 0«aeral (j^ipjng the sixty and more years since J2^2|J[; the Treaty of Nanking. Bible trans- Litera- lation, one of the great labors of the tore. first missionary, has ever since been prosecuted with untiring zeal, and is stfll in progress. It is impossible to go into details, but in general it may be said that the word of God has hem put into the literary style (adapted for universal circulation among scholars), into man- darin colloquial, supposed to be spoken in some forai by 75 per cent of China's four himdred mil- lions, and into the patois of special districts, the l:i.-t-named both in Chinese characters and in an increasing degree by the use of Roman letters. The three great Bible societies, the British and Foreign, the American, and the Scotch, have been indefatigable in their work of distribution, largely by sales, which were never on so extensive a scale a* at present. Numerous societies, especially the Thincac and the Central China Tract societies, have put into circulation imcounted millions of sheets, booklets, and books, so that at times it has been impossible to keep pace with the demand. Great mission presses, notably for nearly sixty years that of the American Presbyterian Mission, and more recently those of the United Methodist Missions in Shanghai and Fuchau, are kept constantly busy. Influential religious journals and magazines are issued in nearly all the principal mission centers, especially at Shanghai, penetrating not only all parts of the empire, but every part of the worid where Chinese are to be foimd. One of the most important agencies for influendngChinese thought is the Society for the Diffusion of Christian and General Knowledge Among the Chinese, founded by Dr. Alex- ander Williamson, and now imder the leadership of Dr. Timothy Richard. Its Review of the Times f conducted by Dr. Y. J. Allen, has long reached a large circle of officials in every province, and pr&- viously to the reform plans of 1898 it was especially procured by the emperor himself for his study. Great quantities of Christian and useful literature are distributed to scholars at the dvil-servioe exam- inations in the provincial capitals, tending to dissi- pate prejudice in influential quarters. The distinction between the Roman Catholic and the Protestant form of Christianity has now become well understood both by 6. Vari- officials and people. Woman's work oas Forms for woman has been expanded in every of Work, direction, in evangelizing, medical, and educational lines, the first Woman's Medical College being opened in Canton Dec, 1902, with an immediate success, foretokening speedy imitation elsewhere. The Educational As- sociation of China is a most important unifjring and developing force for every agency connected with teaching, especially in the preparation of text-books. At the St. Louis Exposition of 1904 this association made an important exhibit of education in China in all its aspects. The Young Men's Christian Association has established an energetic work in Shanghai, Tien-Tsin, Peking, and other centers, which promises great results in the future. Christian Endeavor societies (and Ep- worth leagues) have taken firm root in China, and an experienced missionary has been chosen to act as a traveling secretary in the interests of this effective agency. Student Volunteer conferences have been repeatedly held, at which influential and representative men have been gathered in large numbers. An antifoot-binding reform move- ment, distinct from that of missionary origin but allied to it and in sympathy with it, has spread widely over China, promoted by some of its highest statesmen, and favored by the empress dowager. Special work for the insane has been begun at Canton, for the deaf at Chefu, and for the blind at Peking. The hostile and bitterly antiforeign province of Hunan has been entered and is now occupied by thirteen societies with a force com- prising at present about eighty-seven mission- aries. As an incidental result of the cataclysm of 1900 three leading societies, the London Mission, the American Board, and the American Presbyterian, have formed an important union in educational work in the Chili province, looking toward a union China Chrlat, Order of 36 univeraity. In Shangtung there is a similar partner- ship between the American Presbyterian and the English Baptist Missions. The relations between officials and all mission- aries since 1900 have been much improved. Al- though occasional outbreaks still occur, earnest efforts are now made to prevent them on account of their possible consequences. It can not be doubted tiiat the result of the war between Japan and Russia will exert an important influence upon Christian work throughout the Chinese Empire. In Beach's Geography and Atlas of Protestant Missions (New York, 1903), 68 Protestant societies 7 Btati ^'^ reported as working in China (33 Soir*' American, 22 British, 12 Continental, and 1 international), with a total of 2,785 workers, of whom 610 were ordained men, 578 unordained, 772 wives, and 825 other mis- sionary women, living in 653 stations, and working 2,476 outstations. There were 162 male physicians and 79 women physicians, with 259 hospitals and dispensaries treating more than 691,000 patients annually. H. O. D wight's Bins Book of Missions for 1907 indicates that the number of workers was rapidly increasing, as it gives from the reports of 59 societies an aggregate of 3,146 missionaries. The aggregate of native workers is 8,243, and the total number of Christians 249,878. Fukien, at the be- ginning the most difficult province, has the largest number of converts, with continuous accessions. There were 1,819 day-schools with 35,412 pupils, and 170 higher institutions instructing 5,150 students. According to tables published in Shanghai in 1904 by Dr. Richard, there were in 1901 4,126 Roman Catholic churches and chapels in China, 904 Euro- pean missionaries, 471 native priests, 3,584 schools, 60 colleges, and 720,540 Christians. ([Considering the brevity of a century in comparison with the age-long periods of Chinese history, the excep- tional difficulties to be overcome, the ignorance, the conservatism, and the contempt of the Chinese race for everything from abroad, the results of a hundred years of Protestant missions are in every way remarkable as a prophecy and a promise of what is yet in the future. Arthur H. Sbiith. Biblioobapht: For history: S. W. Williams, The Middle Kingdom, New York, 1809 (comprehensive and stand- ard); A. M. Smith, Chineae Characteristic; New York, 1900. On geography: H. P. Beach, Oeograi^y and Atlae of Prolutant Mientnu, New York, 1903; E. L. Oxenham, Hieiorieal Atlae of the Chinese Empire, London, 1898. On the language and literature: W. A. P. Martin, The Lore of Cathay, New York. 1901 (best); R. K. Douglass. Lanouage and Literature of China, London, 1875; T. Walters, Eeeaye on the Chinese LangiuMge, Shanghai, 1889. On the religious sources: For Confucianism, 3BE, iii., xvi., xxvii., xx\'iii.: J. Legge, Chinese Classics, 7 vols.. London, 1861-87. For Taoism: Lao-Tsie. The Canon of Reason and Virtue, by P. Carus. Chicago, 1903; W. G. Old, The Classics of Confucius, Shu King, London, 1906. For Buddhism: 8BE, xix.; S. Beal, Buddhist Literature in China, London. 1882, and Catena of Buddhist Scrip- tures, London. 1871, also Dhammapada; Texts from the Buddhist Canon, London. 1878; E. Chavannes, Les In- scriptions chinoises de Bodh-Gaya, Paris. 1896. On the r^ ligions in genera/: P. D. Chantepie de la Saussaye, Lehr- buch der Religionsgeschichte, i. 57-114, TQbingen, 1905; 8. Johnson, Oriental Religions . . . China, Boston, 1877 (full, but discursive); J. H. Plath, Die Rdigion und der CuUus der alien Chinesen, Munich, 1862; R. K. Doug- las. Confuaaniam and Taoism, London, 1879; J. Legge, RAigiona of China, Confucianism and Taoism, London. 1881; A. Reville, La Religion ehinoise, Paris, 1889; C. de Harles, Les Religions de la Chine, Paris, 1891: E. U. Parker, China and Religion, London. 1906. On Con- fucianism: H. A. Giles, Confucianism, in Rdigious Sys- tems of the World, London, 1901; idem. Religions of An- cient China, ib. 1906; E. Faber, Digest of the Doctrines of ConfueiiAS, Hongkong, 1875, and Mind of Mencius, Shanghai, 1882. On Taoism: A. de Pouvoirville, U Taoisme et les sodHis secrites chinoises, Paris, 1897; I. W. Heysinger, Lao Tste, the Light of China, Philadelphia, 1903; E. H. Parker, China and Religion, London, 1905. On Chinese Buddhism: E. Lamairesse, Le Bouddhisme en Chine . . . , Paris, 1893; J. Edkins. Chinese Bud- dhism, London, 1880; 8. Beal, Buddhism in CMna, in NonrChristian Religious Systems, London. 1884 (Beal is the authority on Buddhism in China): E. J. Eitel. Hand- hook . . . of Chinese Buddhism, London. 1888; J. J. M. de Groot. Religious System of China, vols. i.-v.. Leyden, 1892-1907 (still in progress); Tai-^tang kan-ying pien: Treatise of the Exalted one on Response and Retribution, from the Chinese by Teitara Suzuki and Paul Carus, Chi- cago, 1906; J. D. Ball. The Celestial and his Religions; or, the Religious Aspect in China, ib. 1906. On missions: Statistical: J. S. Dennis, Centennial Sur- vey of Foreign Missions, New York, 1902. General: Memorials of Protestant Missionaries to the Chinese, Shanghai, 1867; Conferences on Missions, at Shanghai. 1877 and 1890. at Shantung 1893 and 1897 {Reports pub- lished at Shanghai); J. Gilmour. Among the Mongols, London. 1884; W. Campbell. Miesionary Success in . . . Formosa, London, 1889; Church Work in North China, London. 1893 (on Anglican missions); M. G. Guinness, Story of the China Inland Mission, 2 vols., London, 1893; China Mission Handbook, Shanghai, 1896; G. L. Maekay. From Far Formosa, . . . Island, People and Missions, New York, 1896; R. Lovett. Hist, of London Missionary Society, chaps, xix.-xxvi., London, 1899; J. C. Gibson, Mission Problems and Mission Methods in South China, London, 1901; L. Miner. China's Book of Martyrs, Bois- ton, 1903; J. Ross. Methods of Mission Work in Man- diuria, London, 1903; M. Broomhall. Pioneer Work in Hunan, ib. 1906; W. A. P. Martin. Awakening of China. New York. 1907; W. E. Soothill, A TypiaU Mission in China, New York. 1907. For the Boxer troubles: A. H. Smith, China in Con- vulsion, New York. 1901; M. Broomhall, Martyred Mis- sionaries of Vie China Inland Mission, London. 1901; E. H. Edwards. Fire and Sword in Shansi, London, 1903: R. C. Forsyth, China Martyrs of 1900, London, 1904. On Roman Catholic missions: F. Prandi, Memoirs of Father Ripa, London, 1844; Abb^ Hue, Christianity in China, Tartary and Thibet, best ed., 3 vols., London. 1857; T. Chancy, La Colonis du Sacri-Caeur dans les CSvennes de la Chine au xvUL siide, Paris, 1889; Abb^ Pierre, La Chine chritienne. La Vis et les etumres de H. A. LanguiUat, 2 vols., Paris, 1893. CHINIQUY, sht"nl"k!' or chin"i-kwi', CHARLES
PASCHAL TELESPHORE CHINIQUY, CHARLES PASCHAL TELESPHORE

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHINIQUY, CHARLES PASCHAL TELESPHORE: Presbyterian: b. of Roman Catholic parents at Kamouraska, Quebec, Canada, July 30, 1809; d. in Montreal Jan. 16, 1890. He studied at the college of Nicolet, Canada, 1822-29, and was professor of belles-lettres there till 1833; was ordained a Roman Catholic priest 1833; vicar and curate in the province of Quebec till 1846; he established the first temperance society there and won the title " Apostle of Tem- perance of Canada." In 1851 he was called by Bishop Vandevelde, of Chicago, to direct the tide of Roman Catholic emigration toward the prairies of Illinois; in 1858, with his congregation at St Anne, Kankakee County, 111., he left the Church of Rome, and joined the Canadian Presbyterian Church. He lectured in England 1860, 1874. and 1882, and in Australia 1878^80, and published a number of books and tracts upon temperance, and others bitterly hostile to the Roman Catholic 37 China Ohrlat, Order of ( hurch, which have passed through many editions and been translated into different languages. Bibliography: His autobiogrftphy, Forty Yeart in the Ckvth of Rame^ appeared Chicago. 1900. CHIUR, cd'un. See Remphan.
CHOIR CHOIR

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHOIR: 1. In the older churches, especially the Gothic, that part which contains the high altar and in which the services are sung. It is usually separated from the nave by a railing or rood-screen, and in monastic churches only mem- U're of the order sit within it. See Architecture, EccLEBiAancAi., I., SS 15, 18. 2. A body of sing- ers appointed to lead the music in public worship. CHOISY, shwa'^zf, JACQUES EUGENE: Swiss Protestant; b. at Geneva, Switzerland, Feb. 26, 1866. He was educated at the college and univer- sity of his native dty, from which he was graduated in 1885, the theologiod faculty of Montauban, from which he was graduated in 1888, and the Univer- aity of Berlin. Since 1898 he has been pastor of the parish of Plainpalais, Geneva, and was also moderator of the Compagnie des Pasteurs from 19(H to 1905. In 1898 he received from the faculty of arts of the University of Geneva the Theodore Clapar^e prize, and three years later was awarded the Daniel Colladan prize by the consistory of the National Protestant Church of Geneva. He has been a member of the Soci^t6 des sciences th^o- logiques of Geneva since 1890 and was its president in 1903-05, and has also been a member of the Geneva Soci^t^ d'histoire et d'archtologie since 1893 and president of the Soci^t^ du musde his- torique de la r^ormation in the same city since its foundation in 1897. In theology he terms him- self a " broad Evangelical, much indebted to higher criticism for a more accurate and trustworthy understanding of God's revelation in the Bible." In addition to a translation of A. Hamack's Grund- TiM» der Dogmengeschichle (Paris, 1893), he has written PoKhase Radbert, itude historiqtie 8ur le newikme nide el sur le dogme de la Ctne (Geneva, 1888); La Thiocraiie & Oenkve au temps de Calvin (1897); and U6tat chr&ien calviniete it Oenkve ou tempe de TfUodore de Bkze (1903). CHORAL. See Mtxbic, Sacbed. CH0RElfT£, co-ren'tt or -t6. See Mesbauanb. CHOREPISCOPUS, cO'^re-pis^co-ptTS (Gk. chOTe- pi»kopo9, " country bishop "): The name given to a dasB of assistants to the bishops in the adminis- tration of their dioceses from the third to the elevenUi century. As the name implies, they ren- dered this service principally in the country dis- tricts. In the fourth century they attended councils like the bishops (Ancyra, 314; Neocses- area, between 313 and 325; Antioch, 341) and had some at least of the episcopal prerogatives, though the question whether they received epis- copal consecration is disputed. A tendency showed itself in the same century to restrict their powers and make them altogether dependent on the diocesan bishops. The Councils of Sardica and Laodioea attempted to suppress them entirely, foibidding the installation of bishops in country places and providing for the needs of such districts by itinerant visitors of a merely priestly character. These efforts were only partially successful, and the institution continued in partial use in the East as late as the sixth century, though now in entire subordination to the diocesan bishops and with no further claim to the strictly episcopal character. In the West chorepiscopi are hea[rd of only from the eighth century, as assistants or deputies of mis- sionary bishops in the new dioceses, or as admin- istrators of vacant sees. There is no demonstrable connection with the Eastern usage. In the ninth century they are also found in the see cities as assistants to bishops who were much occupied with affairs of state. The reforming legislation of this period, appealing to the Eastern canons, empha- sized their dependence on the diocesan bishops, and toward the middle of the century undertook to suppress them altogether. They disappeared in the first half of the tenth century in France, but in the extensive German dioceses, supported by Rabanus liaurus, they maintained their existence to the middle of this century, and were found in Ireland as late as the thirteenth. Their place was to a great extent taken by the archdeacons (see Archdeacon and Archpriebt). (P. HiNBCHIUSt.) Bibliography: Hefele. ConeUienoesdnehte, ii. 200, iii. 478, 603, 665, 745, Ens. traiml., u. 60, 321. iii. 158; J. L. tod Moebeim, InstUutet of Eed. Uitt, ed. W. Stubbs, i. 63, 230 sqq., London, 1863; Bingham, OrigineM, book ii., chap, xiv., f 12; Schaff. Chrutian Church, iii. 200-270; KL, iii. ISa-lOl.
CHRISM CHRISM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISM: The specially prepared mixture used for anointing in the Eastern and Roman Catholic Churches, except in the case of Extreme Unction (q.v.) when olive-oil mixed with water is used. That employed in the administration of baptism, con- firmation, and holy orders, and in the consecration of churches and altars, is composed according to Roman usage of oil and balsam, to which other odorous spices are added by the Greeks. It early received a special benediction, as is shown by Ter- tullian, De baptismo vii.; Cyprian, Epist., Ixx. 2; Apostolic Constitutions, VII. xxvii. 1. From the end of the fourth century the right to consecrate it was reserved to the bishops — ^in the East later to the patriarchs. From the fifth century Maimdy Thursday was the day appointed for the blessing. (A. Hauck.)
CHRISMAL CHRISMAL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISMAL: A word used in the same senses as "chrisom" (q.v.); also a cloth for covering relics.
CHRISOM CHRISOM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISOM: The white cloth with which the Roman priest covers the head of an infant after the administration of baptism or, in the early Church, the white garment put upon the newly baptised as a symbol of purity; also the vessel in which the chrism is preserved. CHRIST, BRETHREN IN. See Riveb Breth- ren. CHRIST, DISCIPLES OF, CHRISTIANS. See Disciples of Christ.
CHRIST, ORDER OF CHRIST, ORDER OF

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRIST, ORDER OF: The Knights of Jesus Christ, an order founded by King Dionysius of Christ. Order of Ohrlstum Brothers 38 Portugal in 1317, like the Spanish orders of Alcan- tara and Calatrava (qq.v.) under Cistercian rule and to fight against the Moors. It was endowed with property of the Templars, who had been sup- pressed in 1312. Papal confirmation was received from John XXII. in 1319, the grand master being made subordinate to the abbot of the Cistercian monastery of AloobaQa. The knights gained im- portant victories and became rich and powerful. At their chief seat, Thomar (75 m. n.e. of Lisbon) in Elstremadura, and at Batalha, twenty miles farther west, they erected magnificent buildings in pointed style, imitating the churches of the Tem- plars in Cyprus and the Mosque of Omar in Jerusa- lem (cf. the Viscount de Condeiza, O mosteiro da Batalha, with French transl., Lisbon and Paris, 1892; J. Demjac, Thomar und Batalha, in the Zettschrift fUr hildende Kunst, new series, vi [1895], 98-106). About 1500 Pope Alexander VI. re- leased the order from the vow of poverty. It had then 450 commanderies and an enormous income. A reform was effected in 1550 by the Hieronymite abbot Anton of Lisbon, and confirmed by Pope Julius III. At the same time the grand- mastership was formally attached to the crown, as it had been actually from the time of King Emman- uel (1495-1521). Pius V. in 1567 removed the jurisdiction of the abbot of Alcobaga, and Gregory XIII. in 1576 granted the king supreme power over both knights and monks. The order was secu- larized in 1797 and its property confiscated in 1834. It is now merely an order of merit. A less important Italian Ordine di Christo was founded by Pope John XXII. about 1320. It also became an order of merit. (O. Z6cKLERt.) Bibliography: Helyot, Ordr^a mona&iique; vi. 72-76, Paris, 1718; G. Giuod. Iconografia Btorica degli ordini reliffUm e oavattereaehi, i. 34-36. Rome, 1836; G. Moroni, Dizionario di erudizione 9lorico-eccUHa»Hca^ xviii. 210-219. Venice. 1843; Meimbucher, Orden und KonartgaHonen^ i. 227; Currier. Reli4nau9 Orden, p. 217. CHRIST, crist, PAUL: Swiss Protestant; b. at Zurich Oct. 25, 1836; d. there Jan. 14, 1908. He was educated at the universities of Tubingen and Basel, and after being a pastor successively in the canton of Orisons (1858-62) and at Chur, the capital of the same canton (1862-65), he was a professor in the cantonal school of Chur from 1865 to 1870. He was then pastor at Lichtensteig (1871-75) and Rheineck (1875-80), both in the canton of St. Gall, and after four years of retirement on account of impaired health (1880-84) was municipal archivist at Chur (1884-87) and again professor in the cantonai school of the same dty (1887-89). Since 1889 he has been professor of systematic and practical theology at the University of Zurich. In theology he repre- sents the speculative and liberal school. He has written CkrMiche Religumalekre (Zurich, 1875); Bilder aua der Geschichte der chrisUichen Kirche und SiUe (St. Gall, 1876); Bdigidw Betrachtungen (1881); Der PesHmUmua und die SiUenlehre (Haar- lem, 1882); Die Lehre vom Gebet nach dem Neuen Testament (Leyden, 1886); Die eittiiche Weltord- nung (1894); and Grundrisa der Ethik (Berlin, 1905).
CHRISTADELPHIANS CHRISTADELPHIANS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTADELPHIANS: A small sect which originated in the United States about 1850. They call themselves Christadelphians because of the belief that all that are in Christ are his brethren, and designate their congregations as " ecclesias " to '' distinguish them from the so-called churches of the apostasy." John Thomas, the founder, a physician, born in England, came to America in 1844 and joined the Disciples of Christ. In a short time, however, he established a separate denomina- tion, because he believed that, though the Dis- ciples were the most " apostolic and spiritually enlightened religious organization in America," the religious teaching of the day was contrary to the teaching of the Bible. Christadelphians reject the Trinity. They be- lieve in one supreme God, who dwells in unap- proachable light; in Jesus Christ, in whom was manifest the eternal spirit of God, and who died for the offenses of sinners, and rose for the justi- fication of believing men and women; in one bap- tism only — immersion, the " burial with Christ in water into death to sin," which is essential to sal- vation; in immortality only in Christ; in eternal punishment of the wicked, but not in eternal tor- ment; in hell, not as a place of torment, but as the grave; in the resurrection of the just and un- just; in the utter annihilation of the wicked, and in the non-resurrection of those who have never heard the Gospel, lack in intelligence (as infants), or are sunk in ignorance or brutality; in a sec- ond coming of Christ to establish his kingdom on earth, which is to be fitted for the everlasting abode of the saints; in the proximity of this sec- ond coming; in Satan as a Scriptural personifica- tion of sin; in the millennial reign of Christ on earth over the nations, during which sin and death will continue in a milder degree, and after which Christ will surrender his position of supremacy, and God will reveal himself, and become Father and Governor of a complete family; in salvation only for those who can understand the faith as taught by the Christadelphians, and become obe- dient to it. They have no ordained ministers. There are about sixty *' ecclesias " in the United States, and a few in England, where most of their literature is published. H. K. Carroll. Bibliography: Sources of doctrine are the works of the founder, generally published in pamphlet form in Bir- mingham and London. The principal are: Eureka, 1869; The Revealed Myatery, 1809; Who are the Chriaiaddvhianet 1869; The Book Unaealed, 1870; Phaneroaie, 1870; An- aetaaie, 1871; Clerical Theology Uneeriptural, 1877, and Elpie Israel. West Hoboken. 1871. Also the foUowing works by Robert Roberts: A Defence of Ike Faiih Fro- tiaimed in Ancient Timee, . . . Revived in Ae Chrieta- delphiana, Birmingham, 1868; BverlaeHng Puniehment not " Eternal Tormente," ib. 1871; Meaning of Ike Chrieta- delphian Movement, London, 1872; Thirteen Leebiree on the Thinge Revealed in ... " Revelation,** Birmingham, 1880; The Good Confeeeion, ib. 1881; Dr. Thomaa, hie Life and Work, ib. 1884. Their oigan is The Chrietadel- phian, published at Birmingham, Eng. Consult H. K. Carroll, Religioue Forcee of the U. S., pp. 89-90, 454, New York, 1896. CHRISTENTUMSGESELLSCHAFT, DIE DEUTSCHE ("The German Society for Christen- dom "): A society which had a wide influence at the end of the eighteenth and beginning of the nine- teenth centuries. In that period of deep depres- sion and discouragement for the Evangelical 89 Chriat, Order of Ohrietlan Brothers Church of Gennany, it brought believing, earnest Chiifltians together by personal intercourse and by eorreqpondenoe, and helped them to successful cooperation. Its special object whjb to oppose the bold depreciation and mockery of the Word of God then so a»nmon, as well as the tendency repre- Bcnted by Nikolai's ZeiUckrift in Berlin and the Gathaer Zeitung. Its founder was Dr. Johann August Urispei^ger (q.v.)> of Augsburg, who be- longed to the old school of simple Scriptural faith and piety. He thought that the friends of the Gospel should stand together and strengthen one another as did its enemies. In 1777 he wrote to a number of German, Dutch, Danish, and Ehiglish theologians without getting much response, and in 1779 and 1780 traveled widely in the hope of effecting more by personal contact. But the result was still the same, and he came home much dis- couraged. In Basel, the last place he had planned to visit, he foimd a response. Here since 1756, stilted up by lyAnnone, the aealous pastor of Mut- teni, a number of like-minded men had already been oiganiaed, who listened with delight to Url- sperger's ideas; and the society was able to hold its first formal meeting on Aug. 30, 1780. The begin- ning once made, the thing spread; branches were formed at Nuremberg the next year, then at Stutt- gart, Frankfort, Berlin, Magdeburg, eto. As the numbers grew, and correspondence came in even from America, a more formal organization waa required. Basel was made the headquarters at the end of 1782, and a manifold activity radiated from it, embracing all that is meant nowadays by home and foreign missions. Selections from the vast mass of correspondence were sent to all the branches, in printed form after 1783. Urlsperger had orig- inally wished to write and circulate good theological treatises, but the central body turned its efforts in a more practical direction, wishing indeed to up- bold the true faith, but not to renew the old con- troversies. The name, too, was changed froqi the original DevUehe OeseUschaft zur Befdrderung i^Bridlidur WahrheU und GoUsdigkeit ("German Society for the Promotion of Christian Truth and Piety ") to the present title. In 1801 Steinkopf , who had been tl^ general secretary, was called to the Savoy Chapel in London, and formed a link between Germany and England, where the mighty revival of spiritual life set a standard for emulation. The Basel Bible Society was founded in 1804 as the first result; and the second was the mission house, also at Basel, planned as early as 1805 by C. F. Spittier on the model of the Berlin mission school (founded in 1800 by Jftnicke, a member of the so- ciety), and realized in 1815 with the help of C. G. Blumhardt (q.v.). A number of other foun- dations and special organizations marked the suc- ceeding years. Among them were the training- Bcbool and orphanage at Beuggen (1820); the Society of the Friends of Israel (1831); the Society for the Spread of Christian Literature (1835); the deaf and dumb asylum at Biehen (1838); and tlie deaconess home in the same place (1852). The original association fulfilled its task in giving the impulse to so many and varied good works; it still exists, however, under the direction of a central committee in Basel, where the Sammlungen fiir lAebhaber chrisUicher WahrheU und GoUadig- keit is still published periodically, after an existence of more than a century. (R. ANBTSDrf.) Bibliography: C. J. Riggenbaoh, I. Stookmeyer, and H. Pratoriua, Zur humUrHdhriogn OeHuAtnUgfnar d€r deutm^en ChrUtentumtOMeUaekaft, BamI, 1881; A. Ostertag, Snt8tehuno90eadiiehte der evanodUehmi Mimon§unett9ehafi gu Baad, ib. 1865.
CHRISTIAN CHRISTIAN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTIAN: The term Christians, "of the party of Christ," occurs in the New Testament only in Acts xi. 26, xxvi. 28; I Pet. iv. 16. The first passage states that it originated at An- tioch, which accords with the fact that the ter- mination -ano8 was recognized and employed espe- cially in Grecian Asia. The date implied by the passage is 40-44 a.d. None of the New Testa- ment passages requires an invidious meaning, though it is suggested in the second and third. There is no historical foundation for the statement often made that it was a " nickname." Tertullian says that non-Christians pronounced it Chiestianos, the word conmionly associated with the Greek word chrestoa, " serviceable," and the Codex Sinau ticua reads Chrestianos in all New Testament pas- sages. Its earliest use by Christians, apart from the New Testament, is found in the Apologists, Justin Martyr, Athenagoras, Theophilus, ete., after whose time it was generally appropriated by Chris- tians. That it originated outside of Christian and Jewish circles is most likely because (1) Christians spoke of one another as "the brethren," "the saints," " the disciples," " the faithful," ete.; (2) the Jews used the term "Nazarene." Ite con- venience would justify ite use; while the frequency with which the term " Christ " occurred in the Christocentric preaching of the early apostolic age would justify ite application to the disciples. Geo. W. GmnoRB. Bibliography: R. A. Lipsius, Ueber den Uraprung und . . . Oebraudt dM ChrUtennamenB, in OratulaHonapro- gramm der theotogiaehen FaeuWU Jena fUr Haae, 1873, pp. 6-10; DB, i. 384-^6; SB, i. 762-763; DCG, i. 316-31& CHRISTIAN BROTHERS (BROTHERS OF THE CHRISTIAN SCHOOLS): The most noted and influential of the Roman Catholic educational brotherhoods, founded by Jean Baptiste de la Salle (b. at Reims Apr. 30, 1651; d. at Rouen Apr. 7, 1719), who was canonized May 24, 1900. Placed in charge of a congregation of Sisters of Jesus in Reims in 1080, De la Salle soon added to his duties the direction of a number of schools for boys, whose teachers he bound to a life of renun- ciation and union. The brothers were required, in addition to the three simple vows, to give in- struction invariably without compensation, and to wear a special habit. In 1688 their founder was appointed their first superior-general and removed to Vaugirard near Paris, in 1696 to Saint Yon, a house of novices at Rouen,, which remained the center of the congregation until 1770. The Chris- tian Brothers spread rapidly throughout France, and in 1724 were recognized by Benedict XIII. The antimonastic decree of the National Assembly of Feb. 13, 1790, dissolved the congregation, which then had 121 houses in France, but it still retained ite organization in Italy, and was reestablished in Ohristlan Brother* Ohrlatian Boienoe 40 France under Napoleon in 1804. By 1822 the houses of the Christian Brothers numbered 180 in France, and since that time the congregation has spread over the greater part of the Roman Catholic world (especially Belgium, Spain, Italy, and Aus- tria), and is represented in Turkey, India, Egypt, Australia, and America. With about 1,300 houses, over 2,000 schools, and 14,000 members, the Chris- tian Brothers are now the strongest Roman Cath- olic male order. Although without official connection with the Jesuits, the Christian Brothers, who are also called Ignorantins because of their law which forbids them to admit to their number priests with a theological education, have many points in com- mon with the older order. When the Jesuits were expelled from France in 1764, the Christian Brothers aided materially in maintaining sympathy for the exiles among the people and preparing the way for their return. Much of their organization and discipline also recalls the Jesuit system, especially the assistants charged with the supervision of the acts of the superior-general, the frequent visita- tions, the rules for confession and prayer, and the training of their members, which consists of a novitiate and a course of practical teaching of one year each. (O. ZbcKLRH'f,) Biblioorapht: Heimbucher, Orden und KongregoHonen, ii. 280-285; Dis ekrUaiche SchulbrUder, 2 vols.. Augs- burg. 1844; J. A. Krebs. Leben dea . . . J. B. de la SalU, ntb§t Anhang aber Oesckichte . . . teinea Ordena, Regent- burg. 1868; F. J. Knecht. J. B. de la Salie und da» In- •HhU d0r ekrUaithen Schtdbmder, Freiburg. 1879; Mra. M. WilBon. The ChrUtian BroOurB, their Origin and Work, London. 1883; J. B. Blain. La Vie du . . . J.-B. de la Salle, Versailles, 1887; P. Helyot. Ordrea numaatiquee, Till. 233 sqq.; Currier. Beligioue Order; pp. 45&-457. CHRISTIAir CATHOLIC APOSTOLIC CHURCH
IN ZION CHRISTIAN CATHOLIC CHURCH IN ZION

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTIAN CATHOLIC CHURCH IN ZION: A religious society, the formal organization of which was effected by John Alexander Dowie (q. v. ) in Chicago, 1896. The growth of the movement dates back to the founder's discovery of his alleged power to obtain cure of disease through prayer, on account of which he retired from the Congregational min- istry in Melbourne and established a church and tabernacle for '' divine healing." His emigration to the United States in 1888 was followed by the establishment of " missions of healing " on the Pa- cific Coast. After his settlement at Evanston, 111., in 1890 he conducted work on the same lines there and in Chicago, with missions in Canada, Minne- sota, Pennsylvania, and Maryland. The success of his efforts in Chicago decided him in 1893 to make that his center of operations, and a tabernacle and *' divine healing rooms " were erected. His fol- lowing was so large that organization was deter- mined upon. In 1900 a large tract of land was bought on Lake Michigan, 42 m. n. of Chicago, and •* Zion City " was planned, where were to be erected schools, a college to train the ministry and propa- gandists, various business establishments and fac- tories (for which large sums have been solicited and received from believers), and residences for the adherents of the Church. The branches already established in the West and elsewhere were brought into connection with the central organization, in which a theocratic element was claimed. In the organization of the Church Dowie was ** general overseer," and claimed to be Elijah III., John the Baptist being Elijah II. Other officers are overseers, elders, evangelists, deaconesses, and conductors of gatherings. The propaganda is carried on by bc^ds of *' Zion Seventies " who in twos act as tract-distributors. Missionaries are sent in all directions, and branches are established in different countries in Europe, eastern Asia, and South America. The basis of church-membership is belief in the Scriptures as the rule of faith and practise, in the necessity of repentance for sin and of trust in Christ for salvation, and belief in the witness of the Spirit. In 1905 Mr. Dowie was compulsorily retired, and Wilbur Glenn Voliva elected in his place, though the former objected that the election violated the theocratic constitution. No statistics are obtain- able as to membership or ministry. The receiver appointed for the affairs of Zion City reported in Sept., 1906, total assets of $2,528,581 and liabilities of $6,125,018. W. H. Larrabee. Bibliography: R. Harlan, John Alexander Dowie and the Christian Catholic Apostolic Church in Zion^ EvansviUet Wis., 1906; J. A, Dowie and his Zion, in Independent, liii (1901), 1786; Dowie Movement in Chicago, in Out- look, Ixviii (1901). 429; J. M. Buckley. John Alexander Dowie, Analyzed and Claaaified, in Century Magazine, xlii (1902). 928-982; J. Swain. The Prophet and his Profits, ib., pp. 122 sqq.; J. J. Halsey, Genesis of a Modem Prophet, in American Journal of Sociology, ix (1903). 310; J. K. Friedman, in Everybody'a Magazine, ix (1903). 567; J. H. Shepstone, Dowie and hia City of Zion, in the London Sunday Magazine, xxxiii (1904), 563. The Church periodical is Leaves of Healing, a weekly published at Zion City.
STATES CHRISTIAN COMMISSION, THE UNITED STATES

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTIAN COMMISSION, THE UNITED STATES: An organization to care for the religious needs of the soldiers in the field during the Civil War, first proposed by Vincent Colyer, of New York, in 1861. The idea was taken up by the Young Men's Christian Association, and at a convention held in New York in Nov., 1861, a commission of twelve was organized to take charge of the work. Bibles, hymnals, tracts, religious books, and news- papers -were distributed through the armies, and personal religious work was done. Two special works were undertaken: The Commission aimed to be a medium of speedy and reliable communica- tion between the soldiers and sailors and their friends at home, and it circulated loan-libraries of general literature. The total value of money con- tributed and other gifts was officially estimated at $6,291,107.68. The final meeting of the Commis- sion was held in Washington Feb. 11, 1866. The leading men in the movement were the president, George H. Stuart, of Philadelphia, and Nathan Bishop (q.v.), of New York. Bibliography: Lemuel Moss. Annals of the United States Christian Commission, Philadelphia, 1868. CHRISTIAN CONNECTION. See Christians. CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE, SOCIETY OF; The name of several religious associations of which the most important are. (1) The Society of Christian Doctrine (Societd, della doUrina cristiana)^ founded at Rome in 1562 by Marco de Sadis Cusani, of Milan (d. 1595), to instruct the people in Christian teach- 41 Christian Brothers Christian Science ing. It consisted of priests and laymen , and spread in Upper Italy, Germany, and Austria. In 1586 the Roman branch was made a spiritual oongrega- tNHi with its seat at the church of St. Agatha in Traste\'ere (whence they are sometimes called Agathiats). The others constituted a brother- hood under secular presidents, connected with the dericai congregation by a common directing body {definUorium). They founded schools and under- took general as well as religious instruction, taught in the churches, and strove to lead the young to a religious life. The number of clerical members lud fallen to fifty-four in 1747, for which reason Benedict XIV. in that year united them with a French congregation of like name, (2) the Fathers of Christian Doctrine {Phres de la doctrine chr^i- enne), founded in 1592 by C^sar de Bus (b. at Ca- YaiU<» 1544; d. 1607), with the help of a former Calvinist, J. B. Romillon, canon of Isle, and a canon of Avignon, named Pinelli. The object was to instruct in Roman doctrine and to check the spread of Calvinism. Clement VIII. confirmed the constitution in 1597. Most of the members were united with the Somaschians (q.v.), while a mi- nority joined the Oratorians of Berulle in 1616. In 1547, however. Innocent X. again made the Phet doctrinaires an independent body, and Alex- ander VII. in 1659 allowed them to take the simple vowB. At the outbreak of the French Revolution they had twenty-eight houses in France; in 1900 th^ had one in France (at Cavaillon, diocese of AWgnon) and six in Italy. Cardinal Bellarmine wrote his DoUrina criatiana and Dichiaratione pHi eopiota deUa doUrina cristiana for the use of the Italian congregation, and De Bus composed a popular exposition of the catechism for the French congregation (published at Paris, 1666). The only scholar of the congregation worthy of note was the general superior Pierre Annat (d. 1715), author of an Apparatus meihodicus ad pogUieam theciogiam (Paris, 17(X), and often). (O. Z6CKLERt.) BiBuooaAPirr: Helyot, Ordrm monaaiiqae; iv. 232-252; Heimbucher. Orden und KonifngaHonen, ii. 338-341; Carrier. iUliounu Ordtr; pp. 436-438; P. du Mas, La Vic du ^fnfraitU CUar de Bum, Paris, 1703; J. J. Chamoux, Vie du vHUrabU CUar de Bub, Paris, 1864. CHIUSTIAn ENDEAVOR SOCIETY. See Young People's Societieb. CHIUSTIAN LOVE, BROTHERS OF. See Hip- POLTTTS, SaDTT, BROTHERS OF. CHRISnAH AND MISSIONARY ALLIANCE: An of]giiniaUion to promote a deeper spiritual life ftmong Christians of all denominations, and a more ^a^nmye missionary work in neglected fields at borne and abroad. The work was begun during a convention at Old Orchard, Me., in 1887 by a num- ber of Christian men and women, connected with various Ehrangelical denominations in the United Slates and Canada. It is not a sectarian body, bat a fraternal union of Christians. It is incoi^ porated under the laws of the State of New York, ud is managed by a board g| fifteen directors, elected for a term of three years at the annual meet- ing of the society. It has about 200 branches in the United States and Canada, and 100 mission stations in foreign countries. There are about 200 official workers in the home land, and 600 foreign laborers in the mission fields abrcNEui, of whom one- half are natives and the others American and Cana- dian missionaries. There are about 4,000 commu- nicants in the various* native churches. The fields include western India, southern, central, and west- em China, Japan, the Kongo and the Sudan in West Africa, Palestine, the West Indies, Venezuela, Chile, Bolivia, Ecuador, and Argentina. The special object in beginning the foreign mission work was to endeavor to reach neglected fields, where other missions had not been established. Tibet was the first objective point of the society, and for many years a successful mission has been established on its borders. In other coimtries the most destitute fields have always been chosen, and the society endeavors to avoid duplicating the work of other societies. Another object was to employ a class of laborers for whom an open door was not easily foimd under other organizations. Many of the missionaries of the Alliance are laymen specially trained for this work, and also unmarried women. A large and successful Bible Institute is maintained at South Nyack, N. Y., for the preparation of the laborers, from which over 3,000 students have gone out in the past twenty years. The attendance in the classes of 1906-07 was over 300. The work of the society is sustained by volun- tary contributions. During the past twenty years about 13,000,000 have been contributed in this way, and the annual income at the present time is about a quarter of a million dollars. One aim of the society is to cultivate a spirit of rigid economy and great simplicity and self-denial in the methods of work. The missionaries voluntarily receive no fixed salary, but a sufficient amoimt to meet their actual expenses on the field, gladly giving their lives in disinterested service and simple faith in Qod to take care of them through the friends at home. There are no expensive buildings, and most of the home workers and officials receive no salary and give their services freely for Christ's sake. In this way the maximum service is secured at the smallest expense, and the self-denial of those who give finds its response in the self-sacrifice of those who go. A. B. Simpson.
CHRISTIAN MISSIONARY ASSOCIATION CHRISTIAN MISSIONARY ASSOCIATION

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTIAN MISSIONARY ASSOCIATION: A loose confederation of churches in Kentucky, in which each church was independent and claimed to be unsectarian. The churches were bound together by no creed or ecclesiastical tie, but the general system of doctrine was Evangelical, and baptism by immersion was preferred. The confed- eration, now extinct, reported in 1895 thirteen or- ganizations and 754 communicants. Bibliography: H. K. Carroll, Religious Forces of the United States, p. 06. New York. 1896. CHRISTIAN REFORMED CHURCH. See Re- formed Church, Christian. I CHRISTIAN SCIENCE. See Science, Christian. Christian Socialism 42 CHRISTIAN SOCIALISM. I. Definition and Principles. The Term (| 1). Relations to Science and Religion (f 2). Attitude to Various Forces and Theories (| 3). II. History. 1. England. Initiation of the Movement (§ 1). Results (I 2). 2. Continental Europe. Basal Principles (| 1). Results (I 2). 8. The United States. 1. Definition and Principles: The term "Christian Socialism "was first used in 1848 by J. F.D.Maurice (q.v.). He wished to express the idea that social- ism is a development and outcome of 1. The Christianity; and that, if it is to be Term, effective, it must have a definite Christian basis. To this view later Christian Socialists have always adhered, although the term has been used to express a number of other ideas, especially in Europe. It is fre- quently employed there loosely to indicate any ap- plication of Christian principles to social life. Both Protestants and Roman Catholics have so applied the phrase, perhaps in order to show that the Church was not antagonistic to socialism when subjoined to the leadership of the Church. The term should, however, be restricted in use to the idea which Maurice desired to express; although this restriction does not imply adherence to the economic views held by early Christian Socialists. Circumstances have changed and social thought has developed. Christian Socialists may, and do, hold various views on economics; but they must believe in socialism as a development and outcome of Christianity if they would be counted among the followers of Maurice and Charles Kingsley. The definition of Christian Socialism as given by Maurice can be understood only on the basis of his ethical and religious principles. The most impor- tant of these is that there are two forces which came into prominence in the nine- 2. Bttla- teenth century, although they had had tiona to A prior existence — science, and man as Boienoe an end in himself. The Church was and Be- compelled to adopt some attitude in ligion. regard to both, since both seemed hos- tile— science as threatening the en- tire structure of theology, and the new theory of man as giving rise to the labor movement with socialism as an attendant, emphasizing the mate- rial advantages of civilization. Christian Socialists maintained an attitude of hospitality toward both of these forces. They claimed an essential agree- ment between the ascertained results of science and the fimdamental teachings of the Bible, and argued that, since God was ruler both in the spiri- tual and the secular spheres of life, there could be no discrepancy between revealed religion and science when both were rightly and fully under- stood. Both were inspired by God, although in different degrees and for different purposes. With respect to the endeavor of the masses to obtain fecognition as individuals. Christian Socialists maintained that the essence of Christianity was brotherhood, and that its aim was the acquirement of dignity by every man as a child of God. They contend^ that the system of privileged classes was foreign to the spirit of Christianity, and a para- sitic growth upon the body politic. The fimda- mental principle of their philosophy may be sum- marized in the statement that the worid is created by God; the Christian religion is revealed by him. The principle has, however, other corollaries: (1) Since God has created the world, he has also redeemed it — ^the whole of it, each human being in it, and all hmnan relations — because the incarna- tion was a imiversal redemption. (2) Since all men are, at least potentially, the children of Grod, they are brothers in all relations. (3) Since God has created men individuals, each with a special endowment, every man must do some useful work and develop his God-given faculties; he should, moreover, have the opportunity so to do. From the vantage-point of this principle Chris- tian Socialists began to wage war upon their con- temporaries. They fought the Calvinistic doc- trine of a partial redemption through election; Roman Catholicism, because as an organization that Church depreciates family life more or leas by its teaching of asceticism and by ma- 8. Attitude ^°^^ rewani in heaven dependent upon to Various " good works," in this way putting a Foroes and premimn on wealth and requiring the Theories, continuation of a system whereby the few are able to reap rewards from the labor of the many. Against communists, social- ists, and anarchists it was urged that they denied the raison d'itre of nationality, and thus violated a fimdamental law of human nature, since the de- velopment of the individual could take place only on the basis of nationalism, and not on that of co»- mopolitanism. They inveighed against the laissez- faire doctrine as a perversion of Christian doctrine and of sound economic principles. They berated the rich who paid wages merely sufiident to keep their workmen alive and thus used human beings as a means to selfish ends. They questioned the ability of socialism to remedy present evils merely by changing the eystem. of economic production and distribution, and pointed out that only by the infusion of the spirit of Christian brotherhood and by the conversion of every individual could the in- dividual be induced to work for all, and all for one, since the best work in the worid had not been done from economic motives, but from an unselfish de- sire to help others. n. History.— 1. Bn^land: The year 1848 was a dark one for English workingmen. Conditions combined to bring their wrongs and suffer- ings to a head. Chartism had, moreover, stirred up considerable discussion and caused much po- litical unrest. On April 10 there was 1. Initia- cui immense mass-meeting at Ken- tion of nington Common, London; 100,000 the Kove- men proposed to march to Parliament m«nt. and force it to accept the so-called six points; viz., universal suffrage, aboli- tion of property qualifications for members of Par- liament, annual parliaments, equal representation, payment of representatives, and vote by baDot. TMs programme seemed revoiutionaiy; the Gov- 43 OhrlstUa SoolAllna eminent put WeUington in charge of London, and 150.000 householders were sworn in as special con- stables. But the assemblage was a mere rabble, ance fiober woridngmen stayed away, and O'Con- nor, the Irish agitator, absented himself. A heavy downpour of rain cowed the crowd completely, so that the meeting dispersed in confusion. But the danger was not yet passed. In order to prevent the recurrence of similar or more dan- gprouB meetings, three men, Frederick Denison M&uriee, Charles Kingsley,and John M. Ludlow, decided after consultation to write and publish Poli- tia for the People (May 6, 1848). Only seventeen weekly numbers appeared, but these succeeded in turning the inqiencfing revolution into a peaceful social evolution. The writers declared thcdr sym- pathy with the woridngmen, warned them against viokoce, appealed to the justice and charity of the rich, and expounded their principles with skill and leal. Others joined them, and numerous meetings were held, both for the instruction of workingmen and for mutual encouragement. Henry Uayhew had contributed a series of articles to the Morning Chronide of London during 1849 on the sweating system, and these called forth in 1850 Kinsley's tract Cheap Clothes and Nasty. In the same year the little group of friends decided to issue Trade on Chrietian Socialiemf with the key- word: Association, i.e., Cooperation versus Com- petition. In order to alleviate at least the direct poverty among the laboring classes, the Christian Socialists started in 1850 the Society for the Pro- motion of Woridngmen's Associations. Since co- operative societies were not legal at that time, Lud- low exerted all his influence to have the Industrial and Provident Societies' Act passed in 1852. Mau- rice and his friends inmiediately used this oppor- tunity to establish a number of cooperative con- cerns. The principles underlying them, adopted at Manchester May 15, 1853, were: (1) human society is a body consisting of many members, not a collection of warring atoms; (2) true workers must be fellow woricers, not rivals; (3) the prin- ciple of justice, not of selfishness, must govern exchanges. These sodeties thus established have prospered to a remarkable degree. In 1906 the turnover of the Cooperative Wholesale Society, with more than 2,000 local branches, was $500,000,000, with a sur- plus of over $12,000,000. In 1876 the Guild of St. Matthew was formed for the purpose S. Basalts, of drawing the Church and the work- ingmen closer together, and to close as ftf as possible the social chasm between the rich and the poor. It was absorbed in 1880 by the (^linstian Social Union, under the leadersMp of Canon Scott Holland, although it still maintains sn individual existence within the larger body, ttd has a spokesman in the Church Reformer, The Union consists of men of all classes who are willing to woik for the following purposes: (1) to claim (or the Christian law the ultimate authority in so- Qsl practise; (2) to study how the truths and prindite of Christianity may be applied to the •oeial and economic difficulties of the present time; nd (3) to present Christ as the living king and master, the enemy of wrong and of selfishness, and the power of love and righteousness. The earlier Christian Socialists also worked in other fields, such as village improvement societies, drew up a pro- gramme for the National Health League, founded the Workingmen's College in London, and secured the passage by Parliament of a number of laws for the benefit of workingmen. They encountered much bitter opposition both in and out of the An- glican Church. Some of them suffered persecu- tion, as when Maurice was removed from his pro- fessorship at King's College in 1853, although he was later (1866) appointed to one at Cambridge. Nevertheless, their fearless and sincere conduct and self-sacrifice made many friends for them. While the movement as a separate organisation has died, it has been the seed of many reforms throughout England in every sphere of Ufe, while the United Kingdom itself has been greatly improved socially and morally by the lives and teachings of these men. The conference of 194 Anglican bishops as- sembled in 1897 practically adopted as its princi- ples the platform of Maurice and of the Christian Social Union (see Lambeth Confbiubncb). The non-conformists have also caught the spirit, and the Rev. John CUfford and many others are mem- bers of the Christian Socialist League. 2. Oontinental Snrope: Analogous Continental movements can not properiy be called Christian So- daUsm. They were always Christian, but never so- cialistic. They were started largely with the purpose of undermining secular socialism. But the principal objection to applying the term to the 1. Basal Continental movements is that they Prinoiples. never formulated a philosophy of life and of the Sttfte such as Maurice and Kingsley gave to England. As a result they were unable to present a world-view as systematic, far- reaching, and comprehensive as that offered to English workingmen. This difference may ex- plain why in Great Britain the socialist party and other extremists did not develop great strength after the appearance of the Christian Socialists. The English workingman has been taught to look at the economic problem as only one among many, whereas German and French lalx>rers came to con- sider that of supreme, if not of sole, importance. Biarx simply sjrstematiaed that view in lus Kapv- tal. The Christian workers of France and Ger- many had nothing to put into the hands of work- ingmen which could compare with that book. There is another difference of prime importance be- tween the two schools. The Continentals always leaned on the arm of the Church, of the State, or of both; whereas Englishmen were not afraid to at- tack either or both whenever necessary. Conti- nental laboring-men regarded these leaders as hire- lings of the State or emissaries of the hierarchy, while in fact they were defenders of society on Church and State principles, and sought to ally the altar and the crown. For these reasons the Oontinental movement was doomed to failure. The laboring class has kept aloof, and adopted Marxism. The leaders were, nevertheless, in earnest, and began woric along other lines. The Roman Catholics founded nu- Christian Socialism Christians 44 merous societies under the leadership of Baron von Ketteler (q.v.), archbishop of Mainz, who ex- erted a great influence. The object of these so- cieties was partly ecclesiastical, partly political — the people were to be guarded from the infidelity of the socialists, and were to be used because of their possession of the ballot. The Roman Catho- lic Church has in Gennany succeeded so well in this that it has been able through the votes of ar- tisans, laborers, and peasants to secure a large number of seats in the Reichstag. There has been no hesitation at times to form an alliance with the socialists, when the Church's purposes were served, and the State has been several times compelled to capitulate before the union thus effected. But along with this political and ecclesiastical activity an inunense amount of valuable practical Christian work has been done — ^a description of which would be foreign to this article. The Protestant Church in Germany began prac- tical Christian work in the early part of the nine- teenth century, which made rapid headway after 1850. Hardly any Church in Christendom does so much valuable work as the Lutheran, but — ^it is all done under the auspices or in alliance with the g ^^ State, and is, therefore, discredited Kultm, among the socialists who showed their opposition by withdrawal en masse from the Church. Men of influence like Drs. Stacker and Kdgel failed after earnest endeavors to organize an independent political or Christian party, while they have been eminently successful in uniting various charitable and philanthropic movements in the Innere Mission (q.v.). In France, Belgium, Switzerland, Austria, Denmark, and elsewhere no distinctively Christian Socialist move- ments have developed. The Christians of emi- nence in these coimtries, such as the Comte de Mun in France, Laveleye in Belgium, and Prince von Lichtenstein in Austria, who might have led in this direction, were either dependent on the Roman Catholic Church for the expression of their views, or did not imitate a distinctive independent Chris- tian Socialism. They simply contributed to litera- ture or founded charitable and philanthropic in- stitutions. 8. The United States: The seed which was sent out from England found a much more favorable soil in the United States. This country had been the camping-groimd of numerous communistic and other societies (see Communism), and the experi- mental station for such idealistic organizations as Brook Farm near Boston. No hostility was mani- fested by either State or Church to independent movements along Christian Socialist lines, nor was the attitude of the people unfavorable. Neverthe- less, no movement of any national importance has been inaugurated. A number of men prominent in the Church and in business became interested in the work of Maurice and Kingsley. A paper, the Equity, was published in 1874-75 in Boston. An organization was formed in that city April 15, 1889, largely under the leadership of W. D. P. Bliss, called the Society of Christian Socialists. The constitution emphasized the stewardship of all gifts and of property, the fatherhood of God, and the brotherhood of man, it deprecated the present industrial and commercial systems as individual- istic, unjust, and contrary to the law of God; rec- ommended socialism (without defining it) as the necessary outcome of Christian teachings; and in- vited all Christians and Churches to join the new movement. But the ideas did not taJce root, and the movement to-day is a mere sentiment which finds a channel for its activities in charity and phi- lanthropy. Some journals, such as the OuUook, the Kingdoniy the Christian Statesman, advocate Christian Socialism to a limited extent, but as a whole the movement has taken the shape of prac- tical reform. See Socxaxism. Rudolph M. Binder. Bibliography: Besides the publications mentioned in the text, the sources are contained in Trada on Chriatian Socialism, London, 1850 sqq.; the Christian Socialist, a journal issued from Nov. 2, 1850, to June 28, 1851; Charles Kincsley's two novels, Yeaai, London, 1848, and Alton Locke, ib. 1860; F. D. Maurice, Moral and M^fta- Tphyaioal PhUoaophy, 2 vols., ib. 1871-72; and other wri- tings of these two leaders. Further light is to be gained from the biographies of these two men. For different phases of the subject consult: A. V. Wood worth, Chria- tian Soeialiam in England, London, 1903 (contains a full bibliography); E. R. A. Seliipnan, Otoen and the Chriatian Soeialiata, in Political Science Quarterly, June, 1886; B. F. Westcott, Social Aapecta of Chriatianity, London, 1887; idem. The Inoamation and Common Life, ib. 1803; M. Kaufnxann, Chrutian Socialiam, ib. 1888; W. D. P. Bliss, What Chriatian Socialiam la, and The Social FaiA of the Catholic Churd^ (tracts). New York, 1894; O. D. Herron. The New Redemption and the New Society, Boston, 1804; F. 8. Nitti, Catholic Socialiam, London, 1806; W. D. P. Bliss, et alia. Encyclopedia Social Reform, New York, 1906.
CHRISTIAN UNION, THE CHRISTIAN UNION, THE

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTIAN UNION, THE: A religious organ- ization of the United States, founded by James F. Given in the first year of the Civil War. Mr. Given (d. 1869) was a graduate of Marietta Col- lege and an ordained minister of the Methodist Episcopal Church. In 1860, when political ex- citement and prejudice were high and bitter, he found himself out of sympathy with his Church. He began the publication of a religious paper, the Christian Witness (Columbus, O.), and called a meeting of others who shared his views to or- ganize an antipolitical and antisectarian brother- hood. Ministers and laymen of several denom- inations, chiefly from Ohio, met in Columbus in 1861, where they chose the name " The Christian Union," declared the Bible the only rule of faith and practise, and adopted strict congregational government for each local church. The first gen- eral council, held in Terre Haute, Ind., in 1863, adopted the following principles: (1) Christ the only head of the Church; (2) the Holy Bible the only rule of faith and practise; (3) good fruits the only test of fellowship; (4) each local church to be self-governed; (5) the union of all Christians to be worked for; (6) political preaching discoun- tenanced. The Christian Witness was made the organ of the society. The membership of the Union is found chiefly in the country and small villages, there being no city churches. It stands for Evangelical Chris- tianity and pleads for the union of all Christians on the basis of the Bible. At first its numbers increased rapidly, but in recent years losses and gains have been about equal. There are now 45 Christian Socialism Christians about 250 ministers, 300 churches, and 20,000 members, of whom more than two-thirds are in Ohio and Missouri, with churches also in Indiana, Illinois, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Oklahoma, and Tennessee. Two or three schools have been estab- lished, but have failed to receive adequate sup- port, and at present there are no denominational schools or colleges. The Ckrigtian Union Messen" ^n ^Greencastle, Ind.) and the Witness Herald (E-xceiskx- Springs, Mo.) are papers published by clergnnen of the Union. H. J. Duckworth. CHRISTIANI, ARNOLD: German theologian; b. at Johannenhof Dec. 14, 1807; d. at Riga Mar. 16. 1886. In 1838 he became pastor of Ringen; in 1849 dean of the district of Werro; in 1852 pro- fessor of practical theology at Dorpat and preacher to the university. From 1865 to 1882, when he rttired, he was general superintendent of Livonia. FMdes a volume of sermons (Dorpat, 1852), he published tliree books on the Apocalypse (Riga, 1861-75), in which he followed the Erlangen school. (A. Hauck.) CHmSTIAHS: As a denominational designa- tion, a name given to two religious bodies of America. 1. A Church dating from the early part of the nineteenth century, also known as the Disciples of Christ (q.v.). 2. A denomination sometimes called the Chris- tian Comiection for purposes of identification — a phrase which they admit usually refers to them. The name which they use themselves was formerly sometimes incorrectly pronounced CHirist-iaDs. The denomination resulted from three independent movements, two of which partook of the nature of spcessicMi. In 1793, in North Carolina and Vir- KinAa, twenty or thirty ministers, influenced chiefly by Rev. James O'Kelly (q.v.), withdrew from the Methodist Episcopal Church on account of objec- tions to the government of bishops and the use of creeds and disciplines. They were followed by about 1,000 members. At first they Origin, were called Republican Methodists; but in 1794 on motion of Rev. Rice Haggard the name Christian was unanimously adopted, and since that time they have ac- cepted no other name. The second movement was in Vermont, in 1800, among the Baptists, Abner Jones, a physician, and Rev. Elias Smith l<eing prominent in it. The third movement, in K)0 and 1801, was in Kentucky chiefly, among the Presbyterians; prominent here were David Pur- >ianoe, John Thomson, Robert Marshall, John Dunlavy, William Kinkade, Richard McNemar, Nathan Worley, and Barton W. Stone (q.v.). The three movements were severally unknown to each other until a number of years had passed, when they came together without negotiation or formal organic action. Thpy aU accepted the Bible as the only creed, Hinstian as the only name, and Christian charae- t<-r a.") the only test of fellowship. Generally they tjftptize by immersion, but some ministers sprin- '^i*'. They are universally open communionists, «a their test of fdlowship compels. Sometimes they are called trinitarian, and sometimes anti- trinitarian; but almost universally they hold to the divinity of Christ. They themselves refuse to pronounce on these dogmas, which are disputed among Christian people. They are congregational in government; but there seems to have been no pressure on this point organically since the O'Kelly movement in the South. They have annual dis- trict conferences and quadrennial general conven- tions. In 1854, at the general convention at Cincinnati, resolutions were passed condemning human sla- very. The Southern brethren of the denomination withdrew, and perfected a separate organization. The division lasted till long after the History. Civil War; but at the convention at Haverhill, Mass., in 1894, under un- contested ruling of a brother temporarily called to the chair by the president, that the Southern brethren " only called themselves Christians, took the Bible for their only creed, and granted full fellowship to all Christians, and therefore were entitled to membership in the convention on the same basis of representation as others," they took their seats in the convention and have been work- ing with the general body ever since, greatly in- creasing its organic effectiveness. The question of the " union " of denominations has several times proved injurious to the Chris- tians. A third of a century after their rise. Bar- ton W. Stone, one of their prominent ministers, made a " imion " with Alexander Campbell, the founder of the Disciples of Christ (q.v.), which really proved a surrender by Stone. Somewhat more than fifty churches were in this way lost to the Christians. This element in the Disciple denomination clung to the name " Christian "; so that there has been some confusion, many supposing that the Disciples are the original body. But the Disciples differ from the Chris- tians in giving fellowship exclusively to the im- mersed; while the Christians make Christian character their only test of fellowship or membei^ ship. In 1885 and 1886 there was agitation for union with the Free Baptists, whose genius is more like that of the Christians; and in some sections it was actually voted and supposed to be effected. But the churches did not follow the leaders, and the movement was abandoned. From 1893 to 1898 organic union with the Congregationalists was talked of, making some denominational fric- tion, which led to the cessation of the agitation. The membership of the Christians is almost wholly in the United States and Canada, number^ ing about 120,000. Former estimates were too large. They have few churches west of Kansas, or south of North Carolina. The following insti- tutions of learning belong to them or are affiliated with them: Union Christian College, Ntmibers at Merom, Ind.; Christian Biblical and Educa- Institute (a theological seminary), at tionalln- Stanfordville, N. Y.; Elon College, at stitutions. Elon College, N. C; Starkey Semi- nary, at Lakemont, N. Y.; Defiance College, at Defiance, O.; Palmer College, at Le Grand, la.; Kansas Christian College, at Lincoln, OliriatUaa Christinas 46 Kan.; and Franklinton Christian College (for ne- groes), at Franklinton, N. C. Their quadrennial convention of Oct., 1850, held at Marion, N. Y., directed the founding of a college giving equal privileges to the sexes; and they established An- tioch College at Yellow Springs, O., and made Hon. Horace Mann its first president; but they later lost the institution to the Unitarians. It was the first college to give fully equal honors to both sexes in " coeducation." Union Christian College, their next college, may be considered the effect of the abortive attempt at Antioch. [In Canada the Christians pay the salary of one of their members as professor in McMaster Univer- sity, a Baptist institution, and encourage their young people to study there. — A. H. N.] The Christians were also the first in modem times as a denomination to authorize the ordina- tion of a woman to the Gospel ministry; but they were not the first to ordain; this being done irreg- ularly before their action. The foreign mission work of the Christians is only twenty years old; it is carried on now in Japan and Porto Rico, and there is agitation to begin work in India. In 1808 the Rev. Elias Smith established the first religious newspaper, the Herald of Gospel Liberty, at Portsmouth, N. H. After various vicissitudes, it is now the property of the general body and is published by the Christian Publishing Association, a denominational corporation at Dayton, O. Other periodicals to be mentioned are: the Ckristian Sun, weekly, property of the Southern Christian Con- vention, Elon College, N. C; the Christian Van- guard, semimonthly, property of the Ontario Chris- tian Conference, Toronto and Newmarket, Ontario; the Young People's Worker, monthly, Raleigh, N. C; various Sunday-school periodicals, issued by the Christian Publishing Association, Dayton, O., quar- terlies and weeklies, and the Christian Missionary, monthly, property of the American Christian Con- vention, Dayton, O.; the Afro^hristian Messenger, monthly, Franklinton, N. C. J. J. SUMMERBBLL. Bibliography: Smiih'B Worka, by Elias Smith, Exeter, N. H., 1805; John Dunlavy, ManifeMto, Pleasant Hill, Ky., 1818; John Rogers, Biography of Barton Warren Stone, Cincinnati, 1847; D. Purvianoe, Biography of D. Purtfiance, Dayton, O., 1848; J. R. Freeae. Chriatian Church Hittory, Philadelphia, 1852; N. Summerbell. History of the Christians, Cincinnati, 1871; £. W. Hum- phreys, Memoirs of Deceased Christian Ministers, Day- ton, 1880; J. F. Burnett, Origin and Prineiji^ea of the Chriatiana, Dayton, 1903; J. J. Summerbell, Scripture Doctrine, Dayton, 1904; idem. The Chriatiana and the Disciples, Dayton, 1906. CHRISTIANS OF ST. JOHN. See Mandjbans. CHRISTIANS OF ST. THOMAS. See Nesto-
RIAN8. CHRISTIE, FRANCIS ALBERT CHRISTIE, FRANCIS ALBERT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTIE, FRANCIS ALBERT: Unitarian; b. at Lowell, Mass., Dec. 3, 1858. He was educated at Amherst College (B.A., 1881), and studied phi- lology at. Johns Hopkins (1884-86) and theology at the universities of Berlin, Heidelberg, and Mar- burg (1889-93). He taught in the Roxbury Latin School, Roxbury, Mass., in 1881-84 and was clas- sical master at Lawrenceville School, Lawrence ville, N. J., in 1887-89. He was subsequently an in- structor in the Harvard Divinity School ( 1891-92). and since 1893 has been professor of church his- tory in Meadville Theological School, Meadville, Pa.
CHRISTLIEB, THEODOR CHRISTLIEB, THEODOR

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTLIEB, THEODOR: A voluminous theo- logical author; b. at Birkenfeld (27 m. w.n.w. of Stuttgart), Wurttemberg, Mar. 7, 1833; d. at Bonn Aug. 15, 1889. His education was received mainly at Tuebingen, where he studied theology under Tobias Beck and F. C. Baur. He was ordained in 1856 as assistant to his father, and soon took charge of a church at Ruith near Stuttgart. A Lutheran by education and conviction, he laid more stress on honest faith and real conversion than on dog- matic subtleties; the narrow exclusiveness of many Lutherans repelled him, and he had close asso- ciations with numbers of the Reformed, coming later to be among the supporters of definite union. His pastoral duties left him time for literary work, out of which grew his Leben und Lehre des Johann Scotus Erigena (Gotha, 1860). From 1858 to 1865 he was in London as pastor of the Lutheran German church of Islington. He was recalled by the king of Wtirttemberg to be pastor at FrieJ- richshafen. While there he delivered lectures at St. Gall and Winterthur, afterward enlarged into his second important work. Modems Zweifel am christlichen Glauben (Bonn, 1868; Eng. transL, Edinburgh, 1874). In a moderate and conciliator.- tone, yet not paying sufficient attention to the results of Biblical science, he attempted to meet some of the principal modem objections to Chris- tianity, dealing especially with materialism, pan- theism, and deism, and going on to develop a Chris- tian theism, paying particular attention to the doctrine of the Trinity and the possibility of mii^ acles, and vigorously opposing the rationalistic con- ceptions of Strauss, Renan, and Baur. In 1868 he was called to Bonn as professor of practical theology and preacher to the university, and here he remained until his death. The piupose of his lectures was rather the formation of earnest and devout pastors than the display of scientific learning. Similarly, his preaching, which had a wide influence, was characterized rather by warm, earnest pressing home of the great truths of Chris- tianity than by a seeking after oratorical effect. His work extended far beyond the bounds of the university. In England he had learned to know and to esteem members of other churches than his own, and he worked constantly for unity of spirit between them, without wasting time in fruitless efforts for external imity. He took part in the work of the Evangelical Alliance, and attended it^ conferences in Basel, Copenhagen, and New York, where he read a paper on The Best Methods of Counteracting Modem Infidelity (New York, 1873), dealing with unbelief as it shows itself in the indi- vidual, in scientific investigations, and in the prac- tise of social life. In order to stir up the Geraian churches to more zealous activity, he delivered a lecture at Copenhagen in 1884 on the best means of counteracting religious indifference, in which, while deprecating sensational methods such as those of the Salvation Army, he suggested the appointment, especially in large places, of evangelists who should 47 Chrlatians Ohrlatmaa cany the Gospel to the people outside the church building, working in harmony with the pafitor. To carry this idea into effect, he founded the Oennan Evangelistic Union, in conjunction with BernstoffiF and Puckler. He purchased in Bonn a disused Presbyterian chapel with a large house at- tached, and turned it into a training-school for evangelists. After his death the institution was transferred to Barmen, where there was thought to be a wider field for its work. He was also an en- thusiastic advocate of foreign missions, and in IS74, with Wameck, foimded the AUgemeine Mis- sionszeiUckrift, in which most of his writings on missionary topics first appeared. The best known of these is Der gegenwartige Stand der evangdischen Heidenmistian (Gutersloh, 1879; Eng. transL, London, 1880). Another of his numerous works which was translated into English was his sharp arraignment of England for permitting and even eDcouraging the opium traffic, Der indobritische Opiumhandel und seine Wirkungen (1878; Eng. tranal., London, 1879). (E. Sachsse.) Bxbudobapvt: Zum OedHdUniM TKeodor ChriaUiebt, Bonn, 1889; Mrs. T. Christlieb. TUodar CKrUUitb of Bonn, London, 1892 (by his widow).
CHRISTMAS CHRISTMAS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTMAS: The supposed anniversary of the birth of Jesus Christ, occurring on Dec. 25. No sufficient data, however, exist, for the determina- tion of the month or the day of the event. Efforts to reach a fixed date for Zacharias's ministration and to combine this with the ** sixth The Day of month " mentioned in connection Christ's with the annunciation to Mary (Luke Birth not i. 26) have given no assured result. Known. Hippolytus seems to have been the first to fix upon Dec. 25. He had reached the conviction that Jesus's life from con- ception to crucifixion was precisely thirty-three years and that both events occurred on Mar. 25. By calculating nine months from the annunciation or conception he arrived at Dec. 25 as the day of Christ's birth. The uncertainty of all the data discredits the computation. There is no historical evidence that our Lord's birthday was celebrated during the apostolic or early postapostolic times. The uncertainty that existed at the beginning of the third century in the minds of Hippolytus and others — ^Hippolytus eariier favored Jan. 2, Clement of Alexandria (Strom., i. 21) " the 25th day of Pachon" (=May 20), while others, according to Clement, fixed upon ^r. 18 or 19 and Mar. 28 — proves that no Christmas festival had been estab- lished much before the middle of the century. Jan. 6 was earlier fixed upon as the date of the baptism or spiritual birth of Christ, and the feast of Epiphany (q.v.) was celebrated by the Basi- lidian Gnostics in the second century (cf. Clement of Alexandria, ut sup.) and by catholic Christians by about the beginning of the fourth century. The earliest record of the recognition of Dec. 25 as a church festival is in the Philocalian Calendar (copied 354 but representing Roman practise in 336; cf. Ruinart. Acta Martyrum, p. 617; MPL, xiii.; Ligbtfoot, The LUberian Calendar, in his Clement of Rome, vol. i., p. 246). In the East tba celebration of Jan. 6 as the physical as well as the spiritual birthday of the Lord prevailed gen- erally as early as the first half of the fourth cen- tury. Chrysostom (in 386) states that Earliest the celebration of the birth of Christ Traces of " according to the flesh " was not in- the Church augurated at Antioch until ten years Festival, before that date. He intimates that this festival, approved by himself, was opposed by many. An Armenian writer of the eleventh century states that the Christmas festival, invented in Rome by a heretic, Artemon, was first celebrated in Constantinople in 373. In Egypt the Western birthday festival was opposed during the early years of the fifth century, but was cele- brated in Alexandria as early as 432. The Jeru- salem church was celebrating birth and baptism on the same day (Jan. 6) about the middle of the fourth century, the former at Bethlehem, the latter at the Jordan, although the twenty-mile journey between involved great inconveniences (supposed letter of Bishop Cyril of Jerusalem to Bishop Julius of Rome, preserved in Combefis, Historia hceresie monothelitarum). The Jerusalem bishop asks the Roman bishop to ascertain the real date of Christ's birth in order that, if possible, the practical diffi- culty may be overcome. Julius is represented as sending to Cyril a calculation in favor of Dec. 25, based upon the supposition (derived from Josephus) that Zacharias's vision took place at the Feast of Tabernacles. The Jerusalem church, however, persisted till 549 or later in celebrating birth and baptism on Jan. 6 (Cosmas Indicopleustes). The Christmas festival has never been adopted by the Armenians, the physical and spiritual birthdays being still celebrated conjointly on Jan. 6. The wide-spread conviction during the early centuries that the baptism of Jesus was the occa- sion of his spiritual birth, or his Relation adoption as Son of God and his exal- to the tation to divine rank and power, Epiphany, tended to magnify the anniversary of his baptism and to cause comparar tive indifference as regards the precise date of his birth according to the flesh. In two Latin homi- lies, ascribed by some to Ambrose of Milan (4th cent.) and by others to Maximus of Turin (5th cent.), Jan. 6 is declared to be the birthday of the Lord Jesus, " whether he was bom of the Virgin on that day or was bom again in baptism." It is his " natal feast," his " nativity both of flesh and of spirit." As thirty years before he "was given forth through the Virgin," so on the same day he was " regenerated " and " sanctified " " through the mystery." The writer, or an interpolator, virtually contradicts the statement about Christ's regeneration by explaining that " Christ is bap- tized, not in order that he may be sanctified by the waters, but that he may himself sanctify the waters." The naive adoptionism that was so widely prev- alent till the end of the second century in Syria, Asia Minor, Italy, northern Africa, and elsewhere, and for centuries later in Armenia, Spain, etc., was gradually displaced by the formulation and gen- eral acceptance of a christology (based upon the prologue of John's Gospel and the Epistles of Paul) Christmas Christology 48 which laid stress upon the preexistence of Christ as the eternal divine Logos and of the absolute deity of Jesus Christ from the time of his conception. The physical birth assumed more and more im- portance in the Christian consciousness. The celebration of Christmas as a special Christian festival spread rapidly from the middle of the fourth century onward in sympathy with the triumph of the orthodox christology. How much the calculation of Hippolytus had to do with the fixing of the festival on Dec. 25, and how much the date of the festival depended upon the pagan Brumalia (Dec. 25), foUow- Relation ing the Saturnalia (Dec. 17-24) and to the celebrating the shortest day in the Roman year and the " new sun " or the begin- Saturnalia, ning of the lengthening of days, can not be accurately determined. The pagan Saturnalia and Brumalia were too deeply entrenched in popular custom to be set aside by Christian influence. The recognition of Sunday (the day of Phoebus and Mithras as well as the Lord's Day) by the emperor Constantine as a legal holiday, along with the influence of Manicheism, which identified the Son of God with the physical Sim, may have led Christians of the fourth century to feel the appropriateness of making the birthday of the Son of God coincide with that of the physical sun. The pagan festival with its riot and merry- making was so popular that Christians were glad of an excuse to continue its celebration with little change in spirit or in manner. Christian preachers of the West and the Nearer East protested against the unseemly frivolity with which Christ's birthday was celebrated, while Christians of Mesopotamia accused their Western brethren of idolatry and sim-worship for adopting as Christian this pagan festival. Yet the festival rapidly gained accept- ance and became at last so firmly established that even the Protestant revolution of the sixteenth century was not able to dislodge it and Evangelical Christians even of the more radical types, who reject or Ignore nearly all of the ecclesiastical festivals, have never been able wholly to ignore it. The religious significance of Christmas has been too commonly minimized among Christians, the day among adults being degraded into one merely for the exchange of presents, often neither given nor received in any affection, but out of a sense of ob- ligation or as barter. In too many homes the chil- dren, whose day it more particularly is, are not taught to link their menymaking on Christmas with the gift of God to the world in the person of his Son Jesus Christ. Although some of our denom- inations hold service on that day, the vast majority of Protestants do not attend, and most of our denominations keep their churches closed. But as it is unquestioned that the Christian Church was foimded by Jesus Christ, it will be well to celebrate the event of his birth, if not on Christmas day, then on some other day. The old gospel story of the Nativity was formerly taken literally and has in- spired many beautiful hymns and been the sugges- tion of many legends and elaborate festivities. By design, on Christmas many important events have taken place, as the crowning of Charlemagne as Holy Roman Eknperor (800), and William as King of England (1066). A. H. Newman. Biblxoorapht: E. Mart^ne, !>• anHquU eedmia ritOfua, m. 31 sqq., Venioe, 1783; A. J. Binterim, DenkwOrdiffkeUa^ V. 1, pp. 628 sqq.. Mains. 1829; J. C. W. Augusti. Hand- frucA <Ur chrUUiehen ArdUt^ogiet 3 voLb., Leipaie, 183&- 1837; J. P. Thompflon, Chriatnuu and the SaiumaUa, in BibliotUea Sacra, zii (1866), 144 aqq.; P. Cmaml Weik- naditan; UnprHno^t BrOucke und Aberglauben, Berlin, 1862; J. Marbach, Dis heUioe WeUmachtgfeier, Frank- fort. 1866; A. H. Grant, The Chtardt Seaaona, New York. 1881; J. H. Hobart. FuUvala and Feaata, London. 1887; T. K. Henrey, The Book of CknatmoB: demripUve of tKe Ctutoma, CeremoniMt TradiHona, SuperaHtUma, Fun, Feelino, FaaHvUiaa of the Chriaimaa Seaaon, London. 1841. New York, 1888; H. Uaener, Reliffionaoeaehiehtr licKa Unieraudiunffen, vol. i., Bonn, 1889; P. de Lacarde. MiUKeilunoen, iv. 241-323. Gdttincen. 1891; F. C. Cony- beare. Hiat. of Chriatnuu, in AJT, iii (1899). 1-21; idem. The Key of Truth, Introduction. Oxford, 1898; H. Thurs- ton, in American Eodeaiaatieal Review, Dec., 1808; A. Tille, YuU and Chriatmaa, London. 1899; H. Ans. Die lateiniachen Magierapiel. Unieraudmngen und Tezte aur VoroeBchichte dea . . . Weihnachtaapiela, Leipsio, 1907; R. H. Sohauffler, Chriatmaa, ita Origin, CelehraHon and Signifieanea, New York, 1907; Bingham, Originea, XX. iv. (investigation of aouroea); DC A, i. 367-364; DCG, i. 261-262. CHRISTO SACRUM ("Sacred to Christ"): The name of a religious society organized in 1792, at Delft in Holland, by certain well-educated jroung men belonging to the Walloon deacons' confrater- nity. Its purpose was the defense of the Christian faith against deistic and Voltairean tendencies, and the promotion of universal Christian love, inde- pendent of ecclesiastical affiliations. Though it disregarded separate creeds, it had a creed of its own, expressing its own minimum of belief; it recognized as brothers " all who honestly believe that all men are sinful and corrupt; that God requires the punishment of sin; that Jesus Christ came as a mediator to take this punishment upon himself, which he alone, being both God and man, could do; that those who believe in him and in his satisfaction, and penitently invoke his intercession, are immediately saved; and that through his as- cension the Holy Spirit operates faith and con- version in them." The society grew by the acces- sion of members of various churches, until a special meeting-place was needed, which was dedicated by Canzius, one of the principal founders, in 1802. The services were more like Lutheran or Anglican worship than Reformed, and everything was done to enhance the solemnity of the Lord's Supper. The original intention was to have the members retain their former church connections; but when the society was condemned by the Walloon and Reformed authorities, it gradually took shape as a separate sect. It numbered as many as 117 mem- bers under Canzius, but when in 1810 he removed to Leyden it gradually fell off, maintaining a pre- carious existence imtil 1836, when the building was closed. (J. A. Gerth van Wuk.) Bibliographt: Kalender voor de Proteatanten in Naderland, vii (1862), 196-266; H. Gr^Koire, Hiattrire dea aeetea re- ligieuaea, v. 331, 6 vols.. Paris, 1828-46; B. Glamus, Ge- achiedenia der chriatdij'ke kerk en godadienal in Nederland, iii. 376-380, Amsterdam, 1844; J. Reitsma, QtaOiiedenia der Hervorming en hervormde hark in Naderland, p. 347, Groningen, 1893. 49 Ohristmaa Ohristoloffj CHRIST0L06T. L The Biblical Chratolosy. 1. The Old Testament Christology. 2. The New Testament Christolocy. VI. Christ the Ideal Man (| 1). 1. Yet abo God (| 2). 2. II. The Ante-Nicene Christolosy. 1. The Early Simple Faith. Heresies (fl). Hie Church Doctrine (fi 2). VII. The DiTinity of Christ Consistently Held (I 3). VIII. 1 TheoloKical Speculations. Jmtin Martyr (| 1). 1. Clement of Alexandria (| 2). 2. Origen (f 3). Irenctts (| 4). 3. Tcrtnilian (| 6). IX. DioDysius of Rome (I 6). m. The Nieene Christolosy. X. I?. The Chaloedonian Christology. 1 . An Answer to Heresies (| 1). The Chaloedonian Statement (| 2). 2. V. The Poet-Chaloedonian Christology. 3. MoDophysitiBm (f 1). Monothelitism (| 2). Adoptionism (| 3). Christology is a word derived from the Greek after the analogy of " theology " (q.v.). It em- braces the doctrine of Christ's person; while so- teriology is the doctrine of Christ's work (the doc- trine of salvation). The word was used by the En^sh theologians in the seventeenth century * azKl during the nineteenth was reintroduced from Germany. Christology is based upon the life and testimony of Christ, as represented historically in the Gospds. and as reflected doctrinally and experimentally in the Acts and Epistles. It treats of the mystery of the in- eamation as a problem of personality, viz., (1) the humanity, (2) the divinity of our Lord, and (3) their relation to each other in his one per- son. This divine-human personality forms the basis of his work, which is the redemption, recon-* ciliation, and reum'on of man with God. It is the central doctrine of Christianity, was the one article of St. Peter's creed (Matt. xvi. 16), and forms the heart of the Apostles' Creed. The leading evangelical theologians of Europe and America have come to agree more and more in this estimate of its importance; and the ever-increasing number of lives of Christ and works on his incarnation and work strengthens the christocentric character of modem theology. Yet care must be taken not to emphasise the incarnation at the expense of the equally important doctrines of atonement by Christ's death, and regeneration by the Holy Spirit (see ATomsuENr; Regeneration). *Dr. Thomaa Jackson (1505-1640) defined it correctly as " that part of divinity which displays the great mystery of fodliiMM — God mmniStsied in the human flesh." John Oven used the term in his XptvroAoytA, or a DedanUion 0f Af GloriPU» Mytery of Ok* PerMtm of Chritt^ Ood and if oa (London. 1679), and Robert Fleming, jun., a Scotch dirine (d. 1716). wn>te a ChrivUAogy (3 vols., London, 1705- 1706). Some French writers also use it. Lichtenberger '-Ef^r/dopfdie, iii. 129) defines it correctly: "On oomprend •nn» ce nom " (Christologiel " Tensemble des doctrines tou- f haat la personne de J^sus-Christ dans ses rapports avec Dieu "t avee lliumanit^, telles qu'elles sont oontenues dans le .VoMMOtt TeUameni ct telles qu'elles ont €t& d^velopp^es iMtiM le eoum dee nicies, au sein de I'^glise chrdtienne." Ill.^l The Medieval Church (| 4). The Ecumenical Christology. Its I leading Ideas. Criticism. Favorable Opinions (I 1). Objections and Criticisms (1 2). Real Value (| 3). The Orthodox Protestant Chris- tology. The Scholastic Lutheran Chris- tology. The Communicatio Idiomatum. The Doctrine of the Twofold State of Christ. The Threefold Office of Christ. The Kenosis Controversy Be- tween Giessen and TQbingen. Modem Christologies. The Humanitarian or Unitarian Christology. The Pantheistic Christology. The Christology of Schleiermaoher and His School. Schleiermacher (§1). tJlImann (I 2). Rothe (I 3). Horace Buahnell (| 4). 4. The Modem Kenotio Ilieory. General Outline (| 1). Gess (§ 2). Martensen (fi 3). Kahniw and Lange (| 4). Julius MQller (fi 6). Goodwin and Crosby (| 6). Criticism (fi 7). 5. The Ritschlian Theory. The Theory State^ (f 1). Its Merit and Limitation (§ 2). 6. The Theory of a Gradual or Pro- gressive Incarnation. The Theory (f 1). Its Merits (I 2). 7. Conclusion. Elements of Truth in All Theories (M). The Mystery of Christ (| 2). Limits of This Article (fi 3). XI. Additional Note. Preezistence (§ 1). Incarnation (| 2). L The Biblical Christology: ThiB embraces (1) the Messianic prophecies of the Old Testament; and (2) the christology of the New Testament, which includes (a) the testimony of Christ in the Gospels; and (b) the christology of the apostles — James, Peter, Paul (including the christology of the Epistle to the Hebrews), and John (including the Apocalypse). Christ is the heart of the Scriptures and the key to their spiritual understanding. 1. The Old Testament Chriatoloflry : The Old Testament is the preparation for the New. The soul of the Old Testament is the promise of the Messiah, which began in Paradise with the prot- evangelium of the serpent-bruiser, and culminated in the testimony of John the Baptist, pointing to Jesus of Nazareth as the Lamb of God, which ta- keth away the sin of the world. See Messiah, Mes- SIANISM. 8. The New Testament Ohriatoloflry : It is the unanimous teaching of the New Testament writings that Christ combines in a most real though mys- terious way the double character of a unique divine sonship and a unique sinless manhood in one har- monious personality; and that by this very con- stitution of his person he is qualified to be the Lord and Savior of the human race, and the only Media- tor between God and man. He represents at once the nearest approach which God can make to man, and the nearest approach which man can make to God. The orthodox christology, handed down from the early Church, is an attempt to formu- late this '' mystery of godliness" in definite state- ments and to guard it against error; but every age must grapple anew with this problem of problems, and make it alive and fruitful for its own intel- lectual and spiritual benefit. Christ strongly asserts his humanity, and calls himself about eighty times in the Gospels ** the Son of Man" (q-v.); not a son of man among other de- scendants of Adam, but the Son of Man emphat- ically as the representative of the whole race. He is thus interpreted by the apostles to be the second Adam, descended from heaven (cf. Rom. v. and ChristoloffF 50 I Cor. XV.); the ideal, the perfect, the absolute man, the head of a new race, the king of Jews and Gen- tiles, the model man for universal 1. Ohriat imitation. While putting himself on a the par with us as man, he claims at the Ideal Kaa. same time, as the Son of Man, superi- ority over all, and freedom from sin, and thus stands solitary and alone as the one and only spotless human being in the midst of a fallen race, as an oasis of living water and fresh verdure, surrounded by a barren desert. He nowhere con- fesses sin, betrays a consciousness of sm, or asks pardon for sin; and this was not because he did not feel the evil of sin, for he pardoned sin and con- demned sins in the severest terms. He alone needed no repentance, no conversion, no regenera- tion, no pardon. This sinlesHneHs of Christ is the great moral miracle of histoiy which underlies all his miraculous works, and explains them as natural manifestations of his miraculous person. On the other hand, Christ as emphatically as- serts his divinity, and calls himself not simply a son of God among other children of God by adop- tion, but '' the Son of God" (q.v.) above all others, in a peculiar sense; the Son by nature; the Son from eternity; the Son who alone knows the Father, who reveals the Father to us, who calls him, not ** our " Father (as we are directed to pray), but "my" Father. He is, as his favorite disciple calls him, the "only-begotten Son" (according to some of the oldest manuscripts, " the only-be- gotten God," Gk. theoa)) or, as the Nicene theology expresses it, "eternally begotten of the essence (Gk. ousxa) of the Father." He is thus represented by himself; and the representation which he makes of hunself was affirmed by the apostles. Paul never calls him " the son of man," but frequently " the son of God " (" God's own son," Rom. viii. 3, 32, etc.). To the apostles Christ was a divine- himian being, truly God and truly 8. Tet man in one person; and his words also Ood. and acts and sufferings have a corre- sponding character and effect. Hence he puts forth claims which in the mouth of eveiy other man, no matter how wise and how good, would sound like blasphemy or lunacy, but which from his lips appear as natural as the rays of light emanating from the sun. He represents himself con- stantly as being sent from God, or as having come directly from God, to teach this world what he had not learned from any school or book. He calls himself the Light of the Worid, the Way, the Truth, and the Life; he invites all men to come to him, that they may find rest and peace; he claims the power to forgive sins, and to raise the dead; he says, " I am the Resurrection and the Life," and he promises eternal life to eveiy one that beheveth in him. Even in the moment of his deepest humil- iation, he proclaimed himself the King of truth, and the Ruler and Judge of mankind. His king- dom is to be coextensive with the race, and ever- lasting as eternity itself. And with this conscious- ness he sent forth his disciples to proclaim the gospel of salvation to every creature, forewarning them of persecution and pledging them his presence to the end of the world, and a crown of glory in heaven. He coordinates himself in the baptismal formula with the Eternal Father and the Eternal Spirit, and allows himself to be worshiped by the skeptical Thomas as his " Lord " and his " God." This central truth of Christ's divine-human person and work is set forth in the New Testa- ment writings, not as a logically formulated dogma, but as a living fact and ^orious truth, as an object of faith, a source of comfort, and a stimulus to a holy life, in humble imitation of his perfect example. The simple narrative of the Gospels is far more pow- erful for the general benefit of mankind than all the systems of theology. But the mind of the Church must meditate, and tiy to grasp this truth; and the New Testament itself furnishes ever new impulse and food for theological speculation. The formu- lated statement of christology begins as early as Paul and John. n. The Ante-Hicene Christology, from 100 a.d. to the Council of Nicsea, 325. — 1. The Barly Simple Faith: The ecclesiastical development of the fun- damental dogma started from Peter's confession of the Messiahship of Jesus (Matt. xvi. 16), and from John's doctrine of the incarnate Logos (John i. 14). It was stimulated by two opposite here- sies— ^Elbionism and Gnosticism; the one essen- tially Jewish, the other essentially heathen; the one affirming the humanity of Christ to the exclu- sion of his divinity, the other running into the opposite error by resolving his himianity into a delusive show (Gk. dokisU, pkantasma; 1. Hexeaiea. see Docetibm); both agreeing in the denial of the incarnation, or the real and abiding 'union of the divine and human in the person of our Lord. There also arose in the second and third centuries two forms of Unitarianism or Monarchianiam: (1) The Rationalistic or Dynamic Unitarianism — ^represented by the Alogi, Theodotus, Artemon, and Paul of Samosata — ^which either de- nied the divinity of Christ altogether, or resolved it into a mere power (Gk. djfnamia), althou^ its representatives generally admitted bJs supernatural generation by the Holy Spirit. (2) The Patripas- sian and Sabellian Unitarianism, which maintained the divinity of Christ, but merged it into the es- sence of the Father, and so denied the independent, preexistent personality of Christ. So Praxeas, No^tus, Callistus (Pope Calixtus I.), Beiyllus of Bostra, and Sabellius. See the articles on the here- sies named and their representatives. In antagonism to these heresies, the Church taught the full divinity of Christ (against Elbion- ism and rationalistic Monarchianism), Ch h ^^ ^^^ humanity (against Gnosticism Doctrine. ^^^ Manicheism), and his independent personality (against Patripassianism and Sabelliamsm). The dogma was developed in close connection with the dogma of the TVinity, which resulted, by logical necessity, from the deity of Christ and the deity of the Holy Spirit on the basis of the fundamental truth of Monotheism. The ante-Nicene christology passed through many obstructions, loose statements, uncertain conjectures and speculations; but the instinct and main current of the Church was steadily toward the Nicene and Chalcedonian creed-state- 51 Ohristolonr meats, especially if the worship and devotional life as well as the theological literature be con- sidered. Christ was the object of «.Jj^7*^ worship, prayer, and praise from the Ohxist^n- ^^'y beginning, as must be inferred fliftantly' ^'^^ such passages of the New Testa- Held, ment as John xx. 28; Acts vii. 59, 60, ix. 14, 21; I Cor. i. 2; Phil. ii. 10; Heb. i. 6; I John v. 13-15; Rev. v. 6-13; from the heathen testimony of Pliny the Younger con- cerning the aiaging of hymns to Christ as God (" Carmen Ckrisio quasi Deo dicere" Epist, x. 97); from the " Gloria in Excelsis," which was the daily morning hymn of the Eastern Church as early as the second century; from the " Tersanctus "; from the Hymn of Clement of Alexandria to the divine Logos {Padaffogus, ill. 12); from the state- ments of Origen {Contra Cdsumf viii. 67) and Eusebius {Hist, ecd., v. 28); and from many other testimonies. Christ was believed to be divine, and adored as divine, before he was clearly taught to be divine. The ante-Nicene rules of faith as they are found in the writings of Iren£eus, Origen, Tertullian, Cyprian, etc., are in essential agree- ment among themselves and with the Apostles' Creed, as it appears, first in the fourth century, especially at Rome and AquUeia. (Cf . Rufinus, De t^mbolo.) They all confess the divine-human character of Christ as the chief object of the Chris- tian faith, but in the form of facts, and in simple, popular style, not in the form of doctrinal or logical statement. The Nicene Creed is much more ex- plicit and dogmatic in consequence of the preceding contest with heresy; but the substance of the faith is the same in the Nicene and Apostles' Creeds. (For these Ante-Nicene Rules of Faith, cf . Schaff , Crteds, ii. 11-45.) 2. TheolofficMtl Speoolations: In the apostolic Fathere only simple practical, BibUcal statements are found, with reminiscences of apostolic preach- ing for the puiposes of edification. Ignatius of Antioch calls Christ God without qualification {Ad Ephes., vii. 18; cf. Ad Rom,, vi.). Polycarp calls him "the eternal Son of God " {Ad Phil, ii. 8), and associates him in his last prayer with the Father and the Spirit {Martyrium Polycarpi, xiv.). The theological speculation on the person of Christ began with Justin Martyr, and was carried on by Clement of Alexandria and Origen, in the East; by Irensus, Hippolytus, and Tertullian, in the West. Justin lfart3rr (d. 166) takes up the Johannean Logos idea, which proved a veiy fruitful germ of theologiod speculation. It was prepared by the Old Testament personification of the word and wisdom of God, assumed an idealistic shape in Philo of Alexandria, and reached a realistic com- pletion in St. John, although it is not 1. Jnstin lilcely that John's had anything more Xartyr. in common with Philo's idea than the name " Logos." Following the sugges- tion of the double meaning of the Greek logos (ratio and oraiio), Justin distinguishes in the Logos two i^lf'tnents — the immanent and the transitive; the Revelation of God ad intra, and the revelation ad extra. He teaches the procession of the Logos from the free will (not the essence) of God by gen- eration, without division or diminution of the divine substance. This begotten Logos he conceives as a hypostatical being, a person distinct from the Father, and subordinate to him. He coordinates God, the Son, and the prophetic Spirit, as objects of Christian worship {Apol., i. 6). Peculiar is his doctrine of the logos spermaiikos, the '' seminal Logos," or the Word disseminated among men, i.e., Christ before the incarnation, who scattered elements of truth and virtue among the heathen philosophers and poets, although they did not know it. Clement of Alexandria (d. 220) sees in the Logos the ultimate principle of all existence (without beginning, and timeless), the revealer 2. Clement of the Father, the sum of all intelli- of Alex- gence and wisdom, the personal truth, andria. the author of the world, the source of light and life, the educator of the race, who at last became man to make us par- taken) of his divine nature. Like some other ante-Nicene Fathers (Justin Martjrr, Tertullian, and Origen), he conceived the outward appear- ance of Christ's humanity in the state of humilia- tion to have been literally without form or come- liness (Isa. liii. 2, 3); but he had made a distinction between two kinds of beauty — the outward beauty of the flesh, which soon fades away; and the moral beauty of the soul, which is permanent, and shone even through the servant form of our Lord {PtBdor gogus, iii. 1). Origen (d. 254) felt the whole weight of the christological problem, but obscured it by foreign speculations, and prepared the way both for the Arian heresy and the Athanasian orthodoxy, though more fully for the latter. On the one band he closely approaches the Nicene homo- ousion by bringing the Son into imion with the essence of the Father, and ascribing to him the attribute of eternity. He is, properly, 8. Oriffen. the author of the Nicene doctrine of eternal generation of the Son from the essence of the Father (though he usually represents the generation as an act of the will of the Father). But, on the other hand, he teaches subordinationism by calling the Son simply " God," and " a second God," but not "the God" {ho theos or aiUos theos). In his views on the humanity of Christ, he ap- proached the semi-Gnostic Docetism,and ascribed to the glorified body of Christ ubiquity (in which he was followed by Gregory of Nyssa). His ene- mies charged him with teaching a double Christ (answering to the lower Jesus, and the higher Sotir of the Gnostics), and a merely temporary validity of the body of the Redeemer. As to the relation of the two natures in Christ, he was the first to use the term " God-man " and to apply the favorite illustration of fire heating and penetrating the iron, without altering its character. The Western Church was not so fruitful in speculation, but, upon the whole, soimder and more self-consistent. The key-note was struck by Iremeus (d. 202), who, though of Eastern origin, spent his active life in the south of France. He carries special weight as a pupil of Polycarp of Chriatoloffy 52 Sm3rma, and through him a grand-pupil of 8t. John, the inspired master. He likewise uses the terms " Logos " and " Son of God '*' interchange- ably, and concedes the distinction, made also by the Valentinians, between the inward and the uttered word, in reference to man; but contests the application of it to God, who is above 4. IrensBus. all antitheses, absolutely simple and unchangeable, and in whom before and after, thinking and speaking, coincide. He repudiates also speculative or a priori attempts to explain the derivation of the Son from the Father. This he holds to be an incomprehensible mystery. He is content to define the actual distinction be- tween Father and Son by saying that the former is God revealing himself; the latter, God revealed. The one is the ground of revelation; the other is the actual, appearing revelation itself. Hence he calls the Father " the invisible of the Son "; and the Son, " the visible of the Father." He dis- criminates most rigidly the conceptions of genera- tion and of creation. The Son, though begotten of the Father, is still, like him, distinguished from the created world as increate — ^without beginning, and eternal; all plainly showing that Irenseus is much nearer the Nicene dogma of the essential identity of the Son with the Father than Justin Martyr and the Alexandrians. When, as he does in several passages, he still subordinates the Son to the Father, he is certainly inconsistent, and that for want of an accurate distinction between the eternal Logos and the incarnate Christ. Expres- sions like " My Father is greater than I," which apply only to the Christ of history, in the state of humiliation, he refers also, like Justin and Origen. to the eternal Logos. On the other hand, he is charged with leaning in the opposite direction — toward the Sabellian and Patripassian views — ^but unjustly. Apart from his frequent want of pre- cision in expression, he steers in general, with sure Bibb'cal and churchly t£u;t, equally clear of both extremes, and asserts alike the essential imity and the eternal personal distinction of the Father and the Son. He vindicates at length the true and full himianity of Christ against the Docetism of the Gnostic schools. Christ must be man, like us in body, soul, and spirit, though without sin if he would redeem us from sin, and make us perfect. He is the second Adam, the absolute, universal man, the prototype and summing up of the whole race. He also teaches a close union of the divinity and himianity in Christ, in which the former is the active principle, and the seat of personality, the latter the passive and receptive principle. TertulUan (about 220) can not escape the charge of subordinationism. He bluntly calls the Father the whole divine substance, and the Son a part of it, illustrating their relation by the figures of the fountain and the streaih, the sun and the beam. He would not have two suns, he says; but he might call Christ God, as Paul does in Rom. ix. 5. The sunbeam, too, in itself considered, may be called sun, but not the sun a beam. Sun and beam are two distinct things {species) in one essence («t<6- stantia), as God and the World, as the Father and the Son. But figurative language must not be taken too strictly, and it must be remembered that Tertullian was especially interested to distinguish the Son from the Father, in oppo- 6. Tertal- sition to the Patripassian Praxeas. Uan. In other respects he did the Church christology material service. He pro- pounds a threefold hypostatical existence of the Son (JUiaHo): (1) The preexistent, eternal imma- nence of the Son in the Father, they being as in- separable as reason and word in man, who was created in the image of God, and hence in a measure reflects his being; (2) the coming forth of the Son with the Father for the purx>ose of the creation; (3) the manifestation of the Son in the world by the incarnation. He advocates the entire yet sin- less humanity of Christ, against both the Docetistic Gnostics {Adv. Marcionem and De came Ckristi) and the Patripassians {Adv. Praxeam). He ac- cuses the former of making Christ, who is all truth, a half lie, and, by the denial of his flesh, resolving all his work in the flesh into an empty show. He urges against the latter that God the Father is incapable of suffering and change. Professor War- field (see bibliography) lays much stress upon the definition which Tertullian gives of the Trinity, and regards Tertullian rather than Origen as the real father of the Christian doctrine of the Trinity. Dionysius, bishop of Rome (262), came nearest the Nicene view. He maintained distinctly, in a IM *^® controversy with Dionysius of nysiuiB Alexandria, the unity of essence and of Home. *^® threefold personal distinction of Father, Son, and Spirit, in opposition to SabelUanism, tritheism, and subordinationism. His view is embodied in a fragment preserved by Athanasius {De sententiis Dionysii, iv., and Routh, ReUquia sacra, iii., Oxford, 1846, p. 384). m. The Hicene Christology, from 325 to 381: This is the result of the struggle with Arianism and semi-Arianism, which agitated the Elastem Churob for more than half a century. The Arian heresy denied the strict deity of Cbnst (his coequality with the Father), and taught that he is a subor- dinate divinity, different in essence from God (Gk. hetero-ou8ios)f preexisting before the world, yet not eternal (" there was a time when he was not ")f himself a creature of the will of God out of nothing (Gk. ktisma ex ouk ontOn), who created this present world, and became incarnate for our salvation. Semi-Arianism held an untenable middle ground between the Arian hetero-cusia and the orthodox homo-ousiaf or coequality of the Son with the Father, and asserted the hamoi-<msia, or similarity of essence, which was a very elastic term, and might be con- tracted into an Arian, or stretched into an ortho- dox, sense, according to the general spirit and tend- ency of the men who held it. In opposition to these heresies, Athanasius of Alexandria ("the father of orthodoxy") and the three Cappadocian bishops — Basil, Gregory of Nazianzus, and Gregory of Nyssa — maintained and defended with superior ability, vigor, and perseverance, the homo-onsiOf i.e., the essential oneness of the Son with the Father, or his eternal divinity, as the comer-stone of the whole Christian system. This doctrine triumphed in the councils 63 Christology of Nicsa (325) and Gonfitantinople (381), and is exppeased in the Nicsno-Constantinopolitan Creed, which has stood ever since like an immovable rock : " (We beliere) ... in one Lord Jesus Christ, the only- beeotten Son of God. begotten of the Father beforo all worlds (God of God]. Li«ht of Light. Very God of Very God, Begot- ten, not made, being of one substance with the Father; by whom all things were made; who for us men and for our «alTation came down from heaven, and was incarnate by the Holy Ghost of the Virgin Mary." etc See Abianibm; Athanasittb; Conbtai«tinopol- HAH Crxed; Nicaa, Councils of. IV. The dudccdonian Christology: This finds its Donnal expression in the Chalcedonian state- ment of 451 (see below, { 2). It was the answer of the orthodox Church to the heresies relating to the proper constitution of (Christ's divine-human per- son, of which the chief were three, viz., (1) Apol- [inarianism, a partial denial of the humanity of Christ. Apollinaris (the Yoimger) of Laodioea (q.v.; d. 390), on the basis of the Platonic trichot- omy, ascribed to Christ a human body (Gk. sOma) and animal soul {psychi alogos), but not a human spirit or reason (psychi logikif nous, pneuma); he put the divine Logos in the place of ^ ^'^ the rational soul, and thus substituted f^*' a theo8 tarkophoros for a real thean- Herasiea. ^^^P^'* — & mixed middle being for a divine-human person. From this er- ror it follows, either that the rational soul of man was not redeemed, or that it needed no redemption. (2) Nestorianism (from Nestorius, patriarch of Constantinople, d. in exile 440; see Nbstorius) admitted the full deity and the full humanity of Christ, but put them into loose mechanical con- junction, or affinity (Gk. synapheia), rather than a vital and personal union (fundsia); and hence it objected to the unacriptural term " mother of God " (GL theotoko9, Lat. Deipara), as applied to the Vir- gin Mary, while willing to call her "mother of Christ" (Ckristotokas). (3) Eutychianism (from Eutyches, presbyter at Constantinople, d. after 451; see Euttchianism) is the veiy opposite of Nestorianiam, and sacrificed the distinction of the two natures in Christ to the imity of the person to such an extent as to make the incarnation an absorpUon of the human nature by the divine, or a deification of human nature, even of the body: hence the Eutychians thought it proper to use the phrases "God is bom," "God suffered," "God was crucified/' " God died." The third and fourth ecumenical councils (Ephe- lUB, 431, and Chaloedon, 451) settled the question of the precise relation of the two na- ^ The tures in Christ's person. The decree of T^®*" the CouncU of Ephesus, under the lead g^^^ of the violent Q^ of Alexandria, was gj^Q^^ merely negative, a condemnation of the error of Nestorius, and leaned a little towaxd the opposite error of Eutyches. Nes- torianism triumphed temporarily in the " Robber Synod " of ESphesus, in 449, under the lead of Dioocurus of Alexandria, who inherited all the bad, and none of the good, qualities of his prede- oenor, Cyril. But Dyophysitism reasserted itself; aod Dioecunis and Eutyches were condemned by the Council of Chalcedon. This council gave a clear and full statement of the orthodox chris- tology as follows (for Greek and Latin text and notes, cf. Schaff, Creeds, ii. 62-fi5): " Following the holy Fathera, we all with one consent teach men to confess one and the same Son. our Lord Jesus Christ, the same perfect in Godhead and also perfect in Manhood; truly God and truly man. of a rearonable [rational] soul and body; consubstantial [coequal] with the Father according to the Godhead, and consubstantial with us accord- ing to the Manhood; in all things like unto us, without sin, b^otten before all ages of the Father according to the God- head, and in these latter days, for us and for our salvation, bom of the Virgin Mary, the Mother of God, according to the Manhood; one and the same Christ, Son. Lord, Only-begot- ten, to be acknowledged in two natures, ineonftuedly, un- ehanoeably, indiviaMy, inaeparobly; the distinction of na- tures being by no means taken away by the union, but rather the property of each nature being preserved, and con- ciirring in one Person and one Subsistence, not parted or divided into two Persons, but one and the same Son. and only-begotten, God theiWord, the Lord Jesus Christ; as the prophets from the beginning [have declared] concerning him. and the Lord Jesus Christ himself has taught us, and the Creed of the holy Fathers has handed down to us." The same doctrine is set forth in a more con- densed form in the second part of the Symbolum Qiticunquef or the so-called Athanasian Creed (for text and transl., with notes, cf. Schaff, Creeds , ii. 66-71; see Athanasian Crebo). V. The Post-Chalcedonian Christology: The Chalcedonian decision did not stop the contro- versy, and called for a supplementary statement concerning the two wills of Christ, corresponding to the two natures. Eutychianism revived in the form of Monophysitism (see Monopht- 1. Kono- sites), or the doctrine that Christ had phyaltlam. but one composite nature (Gk. mia physis syrUhetos or mia physis ditU), It makes the hiunanity of Christ a mere accident of the immutable divine substance. The liturgical shibboleth of the Monophysites was '' God has been crucified," and they even introduced the idea into the Trisagion (q.v.); hence they are also called Theopaschites (from theos, " God," and paschein, " to suffer "). The tedious Monophysite contro- versies convulsed the Eastern Church for more than a himdred years, weakened its power, and facilitated the conquest of Mohammedanism. The fifth ecumenical council (553) made a partial con- cession to the Monophysites, but did not recon- cile them. They separated, like the Nestorians, from the orthodox Greek Chureh, and continue to this day under various names and organiza^ tions— the Jacobites in Syria, the Copts in Egypt, the AbjTssinians, and the Armenians. Closely coimected with Monophysitism was Mon- othelitism (see MoNOTHELrrEs), or the doctrine that Christ had but one will, as he had but one person. The orthodox maintained that will is an attribute of nature, rather than of person, and consequently that Christ had two wills — a human will and a divine will — both working 8. Kono- in harmony. The Monothelite con- theUtiam. troversy lasted from 633 to 680. The Emperor Heraclius proposed a com- promise formula-'One divine-human energy (mia theandrike energeia); but it was opposed in the West. The sixth ecumenical council condemned Chilstology 54 the Monothelite heresy, and repeated the Chalce- donian Greed, with the following supplement oon- oeming the two wills (cf. SchafF, Creedi, ii. 72-73): " And we likewise preach tieo natural wHU in him [Jesue Christ], and two naiwral operationM undivided, inconvertible, inseparable, unmixed, acoordins to the doctrine of the holy Fathers; and the two natural wills [are] not contrary (far from it), as the impious heretics assert, but his hiunan will follows the divine will, and is not resisting or reluctant, but rather subject to his divine and omnipotent will. For it was proper that the will of the flesh should be moved, but be subjected to the divine will, according to the wise Atha- nasius." The same council condemned Pope Honorius I. (626-638) as a Monothelite heretic, and his suc- cessors confirmed its decision. Monothelitism con- tinued among the Maronites on Moimt Lebanon, who. however, afterward submitted to the Roman Church, as well as among the Monophysites, who are all Monothelites. With the sixth ecumenical council closes the de- velopment of the ancient Catholic christology* The Adoption controversy (see Adop- 8. Adop- tionism), which arose in Spain and tionlam. France toward the close of the eighth century, turned upon the question whether Christ as man was the Son of God by nature (naturaliUr), or simply by adoption {nuncupative). The Adoptionists maintained the latter, and shifted the whole idea of sonship from the person to whom it belongs to the nature. Their theory was a modi- fication of the Nestorian error, and was condemned in a synod at Frankfort, 794; but it did not result in a positive addition to the creed statements. The scholastic theology of the Middle Ages made no progress in christology, and confined itself to a dialectical analysis and defense 4. TheKe- of the Chalcedonian dogma, with a dleval one-sided reference to the divine na- Ohurch. ture of Christ. John of Damascus in the East, and Thomas Aquinas in the West, were the ablest exponents of the Chalce- donian dogma. The medieval Church almost for- got, over the glorious divinity of our Lord, his real humanity (except his passion), and substituted for it virtually the worship of the Virgin Mary, who seemed to appeal more tenderly and effectively to all the human sensibilities and sympathies of the heart than the exalted Savior. VL The Ecumenical Christology (i.e., the chris- tology taught in conmion by the doctrinal standards of the Greek, Latin, and Evangelical Protestant Churches). 1. Its Leading Ideas: These may be stated as follows: (1) A true incarnation of the Logos, i.e., the second person in the Godhead (Gk. enanthrO- pi8i8 theoUf ensarklkna tou logouy Lat. incamatio verbi). This is an actual assumption of the whole human nature — ^body, soul, and spirit — into an abiding union with the divine personality of the eternal Logos, so that they constitute, from the moment of the supernatural conception, one un- divided life. The incarnation is neither a con- version or transmutation of the divine nature into the human nature, nor a conversion of man into God, and consequent absorption of the one, nor a confusion (Gk. krasisj synchyaU) of the two. On the other hand, it is not a mere indwelling (Gk. enoikUis, Lat. inhabUatio) of the one in the other, nor an outward, transitory connection (Gk. synapheia, Lat. conjunctio) of the two factors. (2) The distinction between nature and person. Nature or substance (essence, Gk. oiLsia) denotes the totality of powers and qualities which constitute a being; while person (Gk. hypostasiSf prosdpon) is the ego, the self-conscious, self-asserting, and acting subject. The Logos assumed, not a human per- son (else we should have two persons — ^a divine and a himian), but human nature, which is common to us all. (3) The God-man (Gk. iheanthrOpos) as the result of the incarnation. Christ is not a (Nes- torian) double being, with two persons, nor a compoimd (Apollinarian or Monophysite) middle being, a tertium quid, partly divine and partly human; but he is one person, at once wholly divine and wholly human. (4) The duality of the natures. The orthodox doctrine maintains, against Eutychianism, the distinction of na- tures, even after the act of incarnation, with- out confusion or conversion (Gk. asynchytSs and atreptdSf Lat. inoonfuse and imfnutahUiter), yet, on the other hand, without division or separation (Gk. adiavrelds and ach&rislOs, Lat. indiviae and inseparabiliter); so that the divine will ever re- main divine, and the human ever human; and yet the two have continually one common life, and interpenetrate each other, like the persons of the Trinity (Gk. perichCresis). According to a fa- miliar figure, the divine nature pervades the hu- man as the fire pervades the iron. Christ has all the properties which the Father has, except the property of being imbegotten; and he has all the properties which the first Adam had before the fall; he has, therefore (according to John of Da- mascus), two consciousnesses and two physical wills, or faculties of self-determination (Gk. autexouaia). This is the extreme border to which the doctrine of two natures can be car- ried, without an assertion of two full personalities; and it is almost impossible to draw the Une. (5) The unity of the person (Gk. hendsia kath' hypo- stasinf henOsia kypoatattki, Lat. unio hypoatatica or unto peraonalia). The union of the divine and human nature in Christ is a permanent state, result- ing from the incarnation, and is a real, supernatural, personal, and inseparable union, in distinction from an essential absorption or confusion, or from a mere moral union, or from a mystical union, such as holds between the believer and Christ. The two natures constitute but one personal life, and yet remain distinct. '* The same who is true God," says Pope Leo I. in his famous Epistle, which anticipated the decision of Chalcedon, . " is also true man; and in this unity there is no deceit, for in it the lowliness of man and the majesty of God perfectly pervade one another. . . . Because the two natures make only one person, we read, on the one hand, 'The Son of man came down from heaven ' (John iii. 13), while yet the Son of God took flesh from the Virgin; and, on the other hand, ' The Son of God was crucified and buried,' while yet he suffered, not in his Godhead, as coetemal and oonsubstantial with the Father, 55 Ohristoloffy but in the weakness of human nature." (6) The vhole work of Christ is to be attributed to his person, and not to the one or the other nature exclusively. The person is the acting subject; the nature, the organ or medium. It is the one divine-human person of Christ that wrought mirades by virtue of his divine nature, and that suffered through the sensorium of his human nature. The superhuman effect and infinite merit of the Redeaner's work must be ascribed to his person, because of his divinity; while it is his human- ity alone that made him capable of, and liable to, temptation, suffering, and death, and renders him an example for our imitation. (7) The An- hifpostana^ or, more accurately, the Enhypostasia (Impersonality), of the human nature of Christ. The meaning is that Christ's himian nature had no independent personality of its own, and that the divine nature is the root and basis of his personality. His humanity was enhypostatised throu^ union with the Logos, or incorporated into his personality. The Synod of Chalcedon says nothing of this feature; it was an afterthought developed by John of Damascus. It seems incon- sistent with the dyotheletic theory ; for a being with consdousness and will has the two essential ele- ments of personality, while an impersonal will seems to be a mere animal instinct. Ritschl (Jus- tification and BeconcUiaHon, New York, 1900, p. 437) says: " That the divine revealing Word con- stitutes the form, and the human indUvidual the substance, of the person of Christ ... is what in the end the doctrine of the Greek Church comes to. For the theory of the anhypostaais of the human nature in Christ ... is intelligible only if the Divine Logos is the form in which this human in- dividual exists, outside of which he has no real existence at all. For the form is the basis of real- ity" 2. Ghriticlsm: The Chalcedonian christology is regarded by the Greek and Roman, and by the majority of the orthodox English and American theologians, as the highest christological knowl- 1. Vavor- edge attainable in this world. Dr. aUaOoin Shedd {HisUrry of Christian Doctrine, loaL " i.» New York, 1863, p. 408) thmks it probable that " the human mind is unable to go beyond it in the endeavor to unfold the mystery of Christ's complex person." Dr. Hodge (Systematic Theciogyy ii.. New York, 1872, pp. 397 sqq.) notices and criticizes several of the more recent ''erroneous and heretical doctrines," but holds to the Chalcedonian statement as adopted by the scholastic Calvinists of the seventeenth century. On the other hand, the Chalcedonian chris- tology has been subjected to a rigorous criticism in Germany by Evangelical as well as rationalistic divines — by Schleiermacher, Baur, Domer, Rothe, and the modem Kenoticists, also by Ritschl and his followers, and by Professor Paine in America. It is charged with a defective psychology, and now with dualism, now with docetism, according as its dis- tinction of two natures or the personal unity is made its most prominent feature. It is said to OBoUate between two extremes, without truly recon- ciling them; as the orthodox doctrine of the Trinity stands between tritheism and modalism, now leaning to the one, now to the other, when either the tri- personality or the union is emphasised. It assumes two natures in one person; while the dogma of the Trinity assumes three persons in one nature. Professor Paine (Critical History of the Evolutian of Trinitarianism, Boston, 1900, p. 279) marvels *^ how such a bald antinomy, Christ wholly God and wholly man, could have been adopted by theo- logians who were adepts in the ArLstotelian and Platonic philosophies." Again he speaks of the Chalcedonian christology as " an unhistorical and unscientific violation of logical and psychological laws." The Chalcedonian definition, it is further objected, teaches a complete human 8. Ohjo^ nature with reason and will, and yet ^ilti^ denies it personality. It does not do cisms. justice to the genuine humanity of Christ in the Gospels, and to all those passages which assert its real growth. It over- shadows the hmnan by the divine. It puts the final result at the beginning, and ignores the inter- vening process. If we read the Gospel histoiy, we find that Christ was a helpless infant on his mother's breast — and therefore not onmipotent till after the resurrection, when ** all authority in heaven and on earth " was given imto him (Matt, xxviii. 18); he grew in wisdom, and learned obedience (Luke ii. 40; Heb. v. 8), and was ignorant of the day of judgment (Mark xiii. 32), therefore not onmisdent; he moved from place to place, and was therefore not omnipresent before his ascension to heaven; he was destitute of his divine ^ory, which he was to regain after his death (John xvii. 5). To con- fine these limitations and imperfections to his himian nature, while in his divine nature he was, at one and the same time, onmipotent, onmisdent, and omnipresent, even in the manger and on the cross, is to destroy the personal unity of life, and to make two Christs. How can ignorance and onmi- sdence simultaneously coexist in one and the same mind? How can one and the same individual per- vade and rule the universe in the same moment in which he exdaims, " My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me? " Christ speaks and acts throughout as one undivided ego. We must, there- fore, so reconstruct or improve the Chalcedonian christology as to conform it to the historical realness of his humanity, to the full meaning of his own sayings concerning himself, and to all the facts of his life. This is generally felt among the Evan- gelical theologians in Germany, where christo- logical speculation has been most active since the Reformation, and by not a few in other countries. If anything has resulted from the multitude of lives of Christ, written by learned and able men in the nineteenth century, it is the fact of the perfect and unique divine-human personality of Jesus of Nazareth (cf. some good remarks on this subject by Dr. J. O. Dykes, in the Expository Times, Jan., 1906, pp. 161 sqq.). At the same time the Chalcedonian dogma is the ripest fruit of the christological speculations and controversies of the ancient Church, and can never be lost. It gave the clearest expree- Ohristoloffy THE NEW SCHAFF-HER20G 66 Bion to the faith in the incarnation for ages to come. It saves the full idea of the God-man as to the essential elements, however imper- 8. Beal feet the form in which it is cast. It Value. defines with sound religious judgment the boundary-line which separates christological truth from christological error. It guards against two opposite dangers — ^the Scylla of Nestorian dualism, and the Charybdis of Eutychian Monophysitism, or against an abstract separation of the divine and human , and an absorption of the human by the divine. It excludes also every kind of mixture of the two natures which would result in a being which is neither divine nor human. With these safeguards, theological speculation may boldly and hopefully move on, and penetrate, if possible, deeper and deeper into the central truth of Chris- tianity. Vn. The Orthodox Protestant Christology: The churches of the Reformation (Lutheran, Anglican, and Calvinistic) adopted in their confessions of faith, either in form or in substance, the three ecu- menical creeds, and with them the ancient Catholic doctrines of the Trinity and of Christ's divine- human character and work. They condemned the old and new Antitrinitarians, and the peculiar doctrine of the Socinians — that Christ was raised by his own merit to a participation in the divine honor and dignity. The Unitarians, like the Ana- baptists, were everywhere (except in Poland and Transylvania) imprisoned, exiled, or executed; and the unfortunate Servetus was burned as a heretic imder the eyes of Calvin and with the approval of the mild Bullinger and Melanchthon. The following are the relevant passages from the principal Protes- tant confessions. The Augsburg Confession of the Lutheran Church (1630), Art. iii. {De FUio Dei): " The Word, that is, the Son of Qod. took unto him man's nature in the womb of the bleaaed Viisin Mary. >o that there are two natures, the divine and the human, inseparably joined together in unity of person; one Christ, true God and true man: who was bom of the Virein Mary, truly suffered, was crucified, dead, and buried." The Second Helvetic Confession, by Bullinger (1566), chap, xi.: *' There are in one and the same Jeeus Christ our Lord, two natures, the divine and the human nature; and we say that these two are so conjoined or united that they are not swallowed up, confounded, or mingled together, but rather united or joined together in one person, the properties of each nature being safe and remaining still: so that we do worship one Christ our Lord, and not two; I say, one, true, Qod and man; as touching his divine nature, of the same substance with the Father, and as touching his human na- ture, of the same substance with us, and * like unto us in all things, sin only excepted.' " The Thirty-nine Articles of the Church of England, Art. ii.: "The Son, which is the Word of the Father, begotten from everlasting of the Father, the very and eternal Ckxl, and of one substance with the Father, took man's nature in the womb of the blessed Virgin, of her substance; so that two whole and perfect natures, that is to say, the Godhead and Manhood, were joined together in one person, never to be divided, whereof is one Christ, very God and very man; who truly suffered, was crucified, dead, and buried." The Westminster Confession, chap, viii., § 2: " The Son of God, the seoqnd person in the Trinity being very and eternal (jk>d. of one substance and equal with the Father, did when the fulness of time was come, take upon him man's nature with all the essential properties and com- mon infirmities thereof, yet without sin, being conceived by the Holy Ghost in the womb of the Virgin Mary, of her sub- stance: so that two whole, perfect, and distinct natures, the Godhead and the Manhood, were inseparably joined together in one person, without conversion, composition, or confusion. Which person is very God and very man, yet one Christ, the only Mediator between God and men." The Westminster Shorter Catechism, which ifl famous for dear and terse definitions, says (Qu. xxi.): " The only Redeemer of God's elect is the Lord Jesus Christ, who being the eternal Son of God, became man, and so was, and eontinueth to be. God and man, in two distinct natures, and one person forever." VnL The Scholastic Lutheran Christology: On the general basis of the Chalcedonian christology, and following the indications of the Scriptures as the only rule of faith, the Protestant, especially the Lutheran, scholastics, at the close of the six- teenth, and during the seventeenth, century, built some additional features, and developed new aspects of Christ's person. The propelling cause was the Lutheran doctrine of the real presence or omni- presence of Christ's body in the Lord's Supper, and the controversies growing out of it with the Zwin- glians and Calvinists, and among the Lutherans themselves (see Lord's Supper; Luther; Zwin- qu; Brenz; Chemnitz; etc.). These new features relate to the communion of the two natures, and to the states and the offices of Christ. The first was the production of the Lutheran Church, and was never adopted, but partly rejected, by the Re- formed; the second and thinl were the joint doc- trines of both, but with a very material difference in the understanding of the second. 1. The Ooxnxnanlcatlo IdlomatnxxL: The com- munication of attributes or properties (Gk. uft^ mataj Lat. proprietates) of one nature to the other, or to the whole person. It is derived from the unio personalis and the communio naturarum. The Lu- theran divines distinguish three kinds or genera: (1) The genus idiomaticum (or idiopoiHikon), whereby the properties of one nature are trans- ferred and applied to the whole person, for which are quoted such passages as Rom. i. 3; I Pet. iii. 18, iv. 1. (2) The genus apotelesmaticum (koino- poiHikon), whereby the redemptory functions and actions which belong to the whole person (the apotelesmata) are predicated only of one or the other nature (I Tim. ii. 5-6; Heb. i. 2-3). (3) The genus auchem>aticum, or majestalicum, where- by the himian nature is clothed with and mag- nified by the attributes of the divine nature (John iii. 13, v. 27; Matt, xxviii. 18, 20; Rom. ix. 5; Phil. ii. 10). Under this head the Lutheran Church claims a certain ubiquity or omnipresence for the body of Christ, on the groimd of the personal union of the two natiues; but as to the extent of this onmipresence there were two distinct schools which are both represented in the Formula of Concord (1577). Brenz and the Swabian Lutherans main- tained an absolute ubiquity of Christ's him:ianity from his very infancy, thus making the incarnation not only an assumption of the human nature, but also a deification of it, although the divine attri^ 57 Ohristoloffy butes were admitted to have been concealed during the state of humiliation. Chemnitz and the Saxon divines called this view a monfitroaity, and taught only a relative ubiquity, depending on Christ's will (hence called voliprosaerUiaf or multivoliprcB- $entia), who may be present with his whole person wherever be pleases to be or has promised to be. (4) A fourth kind would be the genus kenoticum (from kenOsis)f or tapeinoticum (from tapeinOsia), Phil. ii. 7, 8; i.e., a communication of the prop- erties of the human nature to the divine nature. But this is decidedly rejected by the old Lutherans 98 inconsistent with the unchangeableness of the divine nature, and as a " horrible and blasphemous " doctrine (Formula of Concord, p. 612), but is asserted by the modem Kenoticists (see below, IX.). The Reformed divines never conunitted them- ■eU-es to the communicatio idiomatum as a whole (although they might approve the first two kinds, at least by way of what Zwingii termed aUaidttiSf or a rhetorical exchange of one part for another); and they decidedly rejected the third kind, because onmipresence, whether absolute or relative, is inconsistent with the necessary limita- tion of a human body, as well as with the Scrip- ture facts of Christ's ascension to heaven, and promised return. The third genus can never be fully carried out, unless the humanity of Christ U also eternalized. The attributes, moreover, are not an outside appendix, but inherent qualities of the gubstanoe to which they belong, and insep- arable from it. Hence a oommimication of attri- butes would imply a communication or mixture of natures. The divine and hiunan natures can indeed hold free and intimate intercourse with each other; but the divine nature can never be trans- formed into the human, nor the human nature into the divine. Christ possessed all the attributes of both natures; but the natures, nevertheless, remain separate and distinct. See Communicatio Idiomatum. 2. The ]>octri2ie of the Twofold State of Christ: This is the state of humiliation and the state of exaltation. This doctrine is based upon Phil. ii. >^, and is substantially true. The state of hu- miliation embraces the supernatural conception, birth, circumcision, education, earthly life, passion, death, and burial of Christ; the state of exaltation includes the resurrection, ascension, and the sitting at the right hand of God. But here, again, the two confessions differ very considerably. First as to the descent into Hades. The Lutherans regarded it as a triumph over hell, and made it the first stage of exaltation; while the Reformed divines viewed it as the last stage of the state of humiliation. It is property the turning-point from the one state to the other, and thus belongs to both (see Dbbcent of CUBIST imo Hkll). Secondly, the Lutheran Creed refers the two states only to the hiunan nature of Christ, regaiding the divine as not susceptible of any humiliation or exaltation. The Reformed di- vines refer them to both natures; so that Christ's human nature was in a state of hiuniliation as com- pared with its future exaltation, and his divine nature was in the state of hiuniliation as to its ex- ternal manifestation (ratione occultationis). With them the incarnation itself is the beginning of the state of humiliation, while the Lutheran symbols exclude the incarnation from the humil- iation. Finally, the Lutherans regard the hiunil- iation only as a partial concealment of the actual use (Gk. krypsia chriaeOs) of the divine attributes by the incarnate Logos. The proper exegesis of the classical passage, Phil. ii. 7 sqq., decides here in favor of the Reformed, and against the Lutheran theory. The kenOaitf or self-humiliation, con not refer to the incarnate Logos, who never was "in the form of God," but must refer to the preexistent Logos (the Logo$ asarkoa). This is admitted by the Greek Fathers, and by the best modem commentators, Lutheran as well as Reformed. (Cf. quotations in Schaff, Creeds, i. 328-329, and see Jesus Christ, Two- fold State of.) 8. The Threefold Office of Christ : (a) The pro- phetical office {munuSf or officium propheHcum) in- cludes teaching and the miracles of Christ, (b) The priestly office (munus scuxrdotale) consists of the satisfaction made for the sins of the world by the death on the cross, and in the continued interces- sion of the exalted Savior for his people (redemptio et intercessio sacerdotalis), (c) The kingly office (munus regium), whereby Christ founded his king- dom, defends his Church against all enemies, and rules all things in heaven and on earth. The old divines distinguish between the reign of nature (regnum natura sive potentioB), which embraces all things; the reign of grace (regnum gratia), which relates to the Church militant on earth; and the reign of glory (regnum gloriw), which belonga to the Church triumphant in heaven. The threefold office or function of Christ was first presented by Eusebius of Ceesarea. The theologians who fol- lowed Luther and Melanchthon down to the middle of the seventeenth century treat Christ's saving work under the two heads of king and priest. Cal- vin, in the first edition of his " Institutes " (1536), did the same, and it was not tiU the third edition (1559) and the Genevan Catechism that he fully presented the three offices. This convenient three- fold division of the office of Christ was used by the theologians of both confessions during the seven- teenth century. Emesti opposed it, but Schleier- macher restored it. See Jesus Christ, Three- fold Office op. IX. The Kenosis Controversy Between Giessan and Tiibingen: This is the last chapter in the development of the orthodox Lutheran christology on the basis of the Formula of Concord. It arose in the early part of the seventeenth century, be- tween the Lutheran divines of the universities of Giessen and Tubingen over the Kendsis and Kryp- sis ; that is, over the question whether Christ, in the state of humiliation, entirely abstained from the use of his divine attributes (kendsis, absHnentia ab U8U, Phil. ii. 7), or whether he used them secretly (krypsis). The divines of Giessen (Balthasar Ment- zer, his son-in-law Feuerbom, and Winkelmann) de- fended the Kenotic; those of TQbingen (Thunun, Hafenreffer, Osiander, Nicolai), the cryptic view. Both schools were agreed as to the possession of tbe Ohristoloffy 58 divine attributes by Christ, including omnipotence, omniscience, and omnipresence, during all the stages of his himiiliation, and differed only as to the use (chriais) of them — ^whether it was a krypais chrSaeiis (a concealed use), or a kendsis chreseds (a non-use). The cryptic view of Tubingen is logically (i.e., from Lutheran premises) more con- sistent, but carries the theory of the communicatio idiomaium to the very verge of Gnostic Docetism, which resolves the human life of Christ on earth into a magical illusion. The Kenotic view of Giessen is more in accordance with the facts of Christ's life, but agrees with the other in principle, and admits, after all, an exceptional use in the performance of miracles. The controversy was waged with violence, and threatened to weaken the Protestant cause at a very critical period. The Lutheran princes interfered. In their name. Hoe von Hoenegg (q.v.) , court preacher at Dresden, is- sued a Solida decisio (1624), essentially favoring the cause of the Giessen Kenoticists; but the Tubingen theologians defended their position till the con- troversy was lost in the disastrous events of the Thirty Years' War, without leading to any posi- tive result. The Kenotic controversy was renewed recently, but in a modified form, and on a new basis (see below, X., 4; see also Kesobib). X. Modem Christologies: The orthodox chris- tology emphasized the divinity of Christ, and left liis humanity more or less out of sight and, in the last stage of its Lutheran development, arrived at the brink of Gnostic Dooetism. Rationalism arose, toward the close of the eighteenth century, as a reaction against symbolical and scholastic orthodoxy, and ran into the opposite extreme; it ignored the divine nature, and fell back upon a purely human, or Ebionitic, Christ. Its worth, as well as its weakness, consists in the examination of the human element in Christ and in the Bible. With the revival of Evangelical faith in Ger- many, the divine element of Christ was again duly appreciated by theologians. Hegel and Schleiermacher mark a new epoch in christolog- ical speculation, with two tendencies — ^the one pantheistic, the other humanistic; and these, again, were followed by original reconstructions and modifications of the Catholic doctrine of the God-man. The pantheistic tendency of Hegel is more congenial to the maxim of the Lutheran Confession, that the finite is capable of the in- finite; the humanistic of Schleiermacher to the tendency of the Reformed Confession, which guards the genuine humanity of Christ against confusion with the divine. The former starts from the divine, the latter, from the human element; but both may imite, and often do unite when they proceed from naturalistic premises. Both Hegel and Schleier- macher gave impulse to orthodox as well as nega- tive and destructive tendencies. To most of his pupils Schleiermacher was a sort of John the Bap- tist, who led them to Christ. 1. The Humanitarian or Unitarian Ohrlstoloffy makes Christ a mere man, though the wisest and best of men, and a model for imitation. It is held in various forms, from the conmiimicated semi- divinity of the old Socinians down to the pure humanity of modem Unitarians and Humanitarians. Professor Bmce {Humiliation of Christ, Edinburgh, 1881, lecture v., p. 193) distinguishes five classes of Humanitarians. Kant may be said to have inaugurated the modem Himianitarian view. He regarded Christ as the representative of the moral ideal, but made a distinction between the ideal Christ and the historical Jesus. The conservative Unitarians admit the sinless perfection of Christ. William Ellery Channing (q.v.) was, at least in his earlier period, a firm believer in the preexist - ence of Christ, and is sometimes called an Arian by his nephew and biographer. He certainly rose above the mere Himianitarianism of Priestley. He saw in Christ the perfect manifestation of Grod to man, and the highest ideal of humanity, and paid one of the noblest and most eloquent tributes to Christ's character and inspiring example. With this school must be reckoned Prof. Levi L. Payne, who dissociates christology, or the person of Christ, from theology, or the doctrine of God, and joins it to anthropology. Christ is a man and to be judged as a man. It was '' not necessary that his moral consciousness should be divinized." He is separated by no miraculous act from the beings he came to save, and yet his moral consciousness has surpassed that of all other men {Critical History of ike Evolution of Trinitarianism, Boston, 1900, pp. 199, 281). 2, The Pantheistio Ohrlstoloffy, suggested by Schelling and Hegel, and best represented by Daub, Marheineke, and G6schel (of the right, or conservative, wing of Hegelianism), and by Baur, Strauss, and Bi^ermann (of the left, or radical, wing), starts from the idea of the essential unity of the divine and human, and teaches a continuous incamation of God in the human raoe as a whole, but denies, for this very reason, the specific dig- nity of Christ as the one and only God-man. This, at least, is the theory of the " left," or radical and negative, wing of the Hegelian School, although Hegel himself had no sympathy with rationalism, but despised it. " The infinite/' says Strauss, ** can not pour out its fulness into a single indi- vidual." The peculiar position of Christ, however, is that he first awoke to a consciousness of this unity, and that he represents it in its purest and strongest form. Under this view Biedermann {CkriaUiche DogmaHk, Zurich, 1869) places Christ highest in the scale of humanity, not only in the past, but for all time to come. Even Strauss was at one time willing to go so far; but he destroyed nearly the whole historic foundation of his life, and ended in the philosophical bankruptcy of materialism. 8. The Christoloffy of Sohleiennaoher (d. 1834) and his School represents the highest form of Hu- manitarianism with an important admission of the supernatural or divine element. He regards Christ as a perfect man, in whom, and in whom alone, the ideal of humanity (the Urbiid) has been fully realized. At the same time he rises above Humanitarianism by emphatically asserting Christ's essential sinlessness and absolute perfection {" we- sentliche Unsnndlichkeit " and " sMechtkinige VoU- kommenheit "), and a peculiar and abiding indweU- 59 OhrUtoloffy ing of the Godhead in him {"tin eigerUliches Sein Gottts in ikm "), by which he differs from all men. He admits him to be '' a moral 1. Schlcier- mirade," which means a great deal nBxihM. for a theologian of the boldest and keenest criticism in matters of his- toiy. He was willing to surrender almost every mirade of action in order to save the miracle of the person of him whom he adored and loved as his Lord and Savior. He adopts the Sabellian \iew of the Trinity as a tlireefold manifestation of <iod in creation (in the world), redemption (in Christ), and sanctification (in the Church). Christ I* Ood as Redeemer, and originated an incessant flow of a new spiritual life, with all its pure and holy emotions and aspirations, which must be traced to that source. Sabellian as he was, Schleier- macher did not hold an eternal personal preex- i<ttnce of the Logos which would correspond to the historical indwelling of God in Christ. His cunoeption of the abstract unity and simplicity of the Godhead excluded an immanent Trinity. Sot his christology, cf. his Der christliche Glauber H 92-99, vol. ii., Beriin, 1830, pp. 26-93; cf. also the nharp criticism of Strauss, in Die christliche GlaubmUehrey ii., TQbingen, 1841, pp. 175 sqq.) llhnann (d. 1865), originally a pupil of Schleier- macher, but more orthodox, wrote the best book on the important topic of the sinless- 2. Xmmann. nesB of Christ, which has an abiding doctrinal and apologetic value, inde- pendently of ail speculative theories {Die Siind- Uiigkeit Jesu, 7th ed., Gotha, 1863, Eng. transl., Edinbur^, 1870). Somewhat similar is the christology of Richard Rothe (d. 1866), one of the greatest speculative theologians of the nineteenth century. He wrought out an original system of ethics of the highest order, lie abandons the orthodox dogma of the Trinity and the Chaloedonian dyophysitism (which he thinks goes far beyond the simplicity of Biblical tvaching, and makes the imion physicid rather than moral), but fully admits the divine-himian charac- ter of the one personality of Christ, and lays great stress on the ethical feature in the development of Christ, by which alone he can become our redeemer and example. God, by a creative act, calls the second Adam into existence 8. Sothe. in the bosom of the old natural hu- manity. Christ is bom of a woman, yet Dot begotten by man, but created by God (as to \as humanity) » hence is free from all sinful bias, as well as actual sin. His development is a real, but normal and harmonious, religious moral growth, «ith a correspondingly increasing indwelling of God in him. There was not a single moment in liis conscious life in which he stood not in personal uiiicMi with God; but the absolute imion took place with the completion of the personal development of the second Adam. This completion coincided with his perfect self-sacrifice in death. Hence- forth he was wholly and absolutely God {gam und ^f'hleckthin Gcit), since his being is extensively and intensively filled with the true God; but it can not ^ *^d, vice versa, that God is wholly the second Adam; for God is not limited by an individual person. The death of Christ on earth was at the same time his ascension to heaven and his ele- vation above all the limitations of material exist- ence into the divine mode of existence (a return to the marphS theou), which, however, implies also his perpetual presence with his Church on earth (Matt, xxviii. 20). Here is the place also for the theory of Horace Bushnell (q.v.; d. 1876), which strongly resembles those of Schleiermacher and Rothe, but differs from them by adhering to the eternal preexistence of Christ (though only in a Sabellian sense). It was first annoimced in his Concio ad CUrumj at the aimual commencement of Yale College, New Haven, Aug. 15, 1848, and gave rise to his trial for heresy. Bushnell, one of the most independent and vigorous American thinkers, read 4. Koraoe Bushnell. Schleiermacher's essay on Sabellius as translated by Professor Moses Stuart in the Biblical ReposUaryy and said that " the general view of the Trinity given in that article coin- cides " with his own view, and confirmed him in the results of his own private struggles {God in Christ, New York, 1877, pp. 111-112). He main- tains the full divinity of Christ on the Sabellian basis. He rejects the theory of " three meta- physical or essential persons in the being of God," with three distinct consciousnesses, wills, and understandings; and he substitutes for it simply a trinity of revelation, or what he calls (p. 175) an " instrumental trinity," or three impersonations, in which the one divine being presents himself to our htmian capacities and wants, and which are necessary to produce mutuality, or terms of con- versableness, between us and 1dm, and to pour his love most efifectually into our feeling (p. 137). " (jod may act/' he says (p. 152), " as a human personality, without being measured by it." The real divinity came into the finite, and was subject to himian conditions. There are not two distinct subsistences in the person of Christ, one infinite and the other finite; but it is the one infinite God who expresses himself in Christ, and brings himself down to the level of our himianity, without any loss of his greatness or reduction of his majesty. At the same time, Bushnell holds to the full yet sinless humanity of Christ; and the tenth chap- ter of his work on Nature and the Supernatural is one of the ablest and most eloquent tributes to the sinless perfection of the moral character of Christ. 4. The Kodem Kenotlc Theory (see Kenosis) differs from the theories just noticed by its ortho- dox premises and conclusions as far as the dogma of the Trinity and of the eternal Deity of Christ is concerned; but it likewise departs from the Chal- oedonian dyophysitism, by holding to one divine- human Christ, with one consciousness and one will. It is chiefly based on the famous passage Phil. ii. 6-8 (Gk. heauton ekenosen, verse 7, " he emptied himself," A. V., " made himself of no reputation," the subject of the Kenosis being the preexistent, not the incarnate, Logos), and also on II Cor. viii. 9; Johni. 14 (Gk. egeneto, " became "); Heb. ii. 17, 18, V. 8, 9; and on the general impression which the gospel history makes of Christ, as a truly human, Ohzlatolo^T 60 yet divinely human being, speaking of himself always as a unit. It was suggested by Zinzendorf in the fonn of devout sentimentalism that brought the divine Christ down to the closest 1. Oeneral intimacy with men; it was Bcientif- Ontline. ically developed, though with various modifications, by a number of emi- nent German divines of the Lutheran Confession (Thomasius, Liebner, Gcss, Von Hofmann, Kahnis, Delitzsch, SchOberiein, KQbel), and several Re- fonned divines (Lange, Ebrard, Godet, Pres- ■ens^, in Europe, Henry M. Goodwin and Howard Crosby in America). It is hardly just to call it (with Domer) a revival of Apollinarianism and Patiipassianism; for, while it resembles both in some features, it differs from them by assuming a truly humanized Logos dwelling in a human body. It carries the Kenosis much farther than the Giessen Lutherans, and makes it consist, not in a concealment merely {krypsis)^ but in an actual abandonment of the divine attributes of omnipo- tence, omniscience, and omnipresence, during the whole period of humiliation from the incarnation to the resurrection; the differences between the advocates of this theory referring to the degree of the Kenosis. It substitutes a genus kenoHcum, or tapeinottcumf for the gentu majesticum of the Lu- theran Creed: in other words, a communication of the properties of humanity to the divinity for a communication of the properties of the divine na- ture to the human. Instead of raising the finite to the infinite, the Kenotic theory lowers the infi- nite to the finite. It teaches a temporary self- exinanition or depotentiation of the preexistent Logos. In becoming incarnate, the second Per- son of the holy Trinity reduced himself to the limitations of himianity. He literally emptied himself, not only of his <^vine g^ory, but also of his divine mode of existence (the morphS theou), and assumed the human mode of existence (the morphi doulou), subject to the limits of space and time and the laws of development and growth. The incarnation is not only an assumption by the Son of God of hiunan nature, but also a self-limitation of the divine Logos; and both constitute one divine- human personality. Otherwise the infinite con- sciousness of the Logos could not coincide with the himian consciousness of the historical Christ: it would transcend and outreach it, and the result would be a double personality. The self-limita- tion is to be conceived as an act of will, an act of God's love, which is the motive of the incarnation; and his love is absolutely powerful, even to the extent of the utmost self-surrender. This was the view of Thomasius, a Bavarian Lutheran. He and Liebner held, first, that the Logos actually became a rational human soul; but afterward they assimied a truly human soul along with the Kenosis of the Logos, and thereby they lost the chief benefit of the Kenosis theory. GesB, a Swabian divine brought up imder the influence of the school of Bengel, Oetinger, and Beck, and starting from a theosophic Biblical realism, carried the Kenosis to the extent of a Buspenmon of self-oonsciousness and will. He identified it with the outgoing of the Son from tlip Father, or his descent from heaven, which resulted in a temporary suspension of the influx of the eternal life of the Father into 2. GesB. the Son, and a transition from a stat« of equality with God into a state of dependence and need. Gess and Ebrard assume an actual transformation of the Logos into a himian soul, i.e., he a^isumed a human body from the flesh of the Virgin, but became a rational human soul so that he had no need of assuming another soul. Consequently the soul of Christ was not derived from Mary: it was the result of a volimtary Kenosis, while an ordinary human soul derives its existence from a creative act of God. It is very questionable whether such a soul, which is the result of a trans- formation which begins with divinity and ends with divinity, can be called a truly human soul any more than the Apollinarian Logos, who, remaining unchanged, occupied the place and exercised the functions of the human soul. Martensen, the Danish theologian, more cau- tiously taught only a relative, though real, Kenosis. The eternal Logos continues in God 8. Kar- and in his general revelation to the tansen. world as the author of all reason; while at the same time he enters into the bosom of himianity as a holy seed, that he may arise within the human race as a mediator and redeemer. He would, however, have be- come man even without sin, though not as redeemer. Martensen taught, with several of the Fathers and modem German theologians, that the incarnation was necessary for the highest revelation of God, and was only modified, not conditioned, by the fall. Kahnis and Lange limited the Kenosis sub- stantially to an abandonment of the use, rather 4 Kah 1 *^*"^ *^® possession, of the attri- andLanse. ^"*®®- Lwige's christology abounds * in fruitful and original hints for further and clearer development. Julius M tiller, one of the profoundest theo- logians, taught likewise in his lectures a moderate Kenosis theory. Paul contrasts the 6. Jollua earthly and preearthly existence of Miiller. the Son of God as poverty and riches (II Cor. vii. 9), and represents the incarnation as an emptying himself of the full possession of the divine mode of existence (Phil, ii. 6 ). This implies more than a mere assumption of human nature into union with the Son of God: the incarnation is a real self-exinanition {Selbstent- dusserung), and a renunciation, not only of the use, but also of the possession, of the divine attri- butes and powers. . . . The Church is undoubt- edly right in teaching a real union of the diviae and human nature in Christ. But in the state of humiliation this union was first only potential and concealed; and the unfolded reality belong to the state of exaltation. Only with the assumption of a self-exinanition can we fully appreciate the act of the self-denying condescension of divine love; while in the orthodox dogma God gives noth- ing in the incarnation, but simply receives and unites something with his person. Goodwin differed from the German Kenoticists by assuming that the Logos is the human element 61 Ohristoloffy in God which preexisted in him from eternity, and became incarnate by taking flesh, and occupy- ing the place of the soul. No incar- e. Goodwin nation is possible without a humani- uid Crosby, nation of the divine; and this implies a self -limitation » and true develop- ment from ignorance to knowledge and wisdom. Tbe incarnation is not a synthesis or union of op- posite natures, but a development of the divine in the form of tbe human. The Word did not assume flesh or human nature, but it became flesh. As tbe true idea of God includes humanity, so the true idea of man includes God. The divine and human differ only as the ideal differs from the ac- tual, or the prototype from the copy. This essen- tial unity is the basis of the possibility of the bcamation as a Kenosis. Howard Crosby held that, according to the Scripture, the Son of God reduced himself to the dimensions of hiunanity, to a state of " dormancy." His Godhead, there- fore, was in a state of quiescence during his humilia- tion and awoke with the resurrection, after which the divine overshadowed the human. A theory advocated by so many learned and pbus theologians can not be altogether false. The Kenotic theory has the merit of bringing out the tmth of the classical passage in Phil. ii. more forcibly than ever before. But it carries the idea of the self-limitation of the Logos to 7. Criti- the extent of a metaphysical impos- cism. sibility: it contradicts the essential unchangeableness of God. The hu- miliation of the Logos is an abandonment of the divine daxa and its enjoyment, but not of the divine being. The true Kenosis is a renimciation of the use {chrisis), but not of the possession (Arffois), of divine attributes. The fonner is possible, the latter impossible. God can do nothing that is contrary to his rational and moral nature. It is admitted by the Kenoticists that the Logos can not, in the incarnation, limit or suspend liis moral attributes of love and holiness, but reveals them mo6t fully in the state of hiuniliation. But his metaphysical and intellectual attributes belong just as much to the essence and nature of God afl his moral attributes, and all are inseparable from his nature; so that God can not give up any of his attributes without mutilating and so far destroying his own being. He can not commit wicide, nor can he go to sleep. He can not re- duce himself to the unconscious existence of an embryo, without ceasing to be God, and without destroying the life of the world, which without him can not exist a single moment. The illustra- tioQ borrowed from sleep proves nothing; for oun's identity continues undisturbed in sleep, *nd he awakes with the full exercise of all the faculties. Moreover, we can not conceive of such ft ielf-reduction of the Logos without suspending the intertrinitarian process, and also the Trinity ol revelation. It would stop for thirty-three vran, as Gess frankly admits, the eternal gener- ation of the Son, the procession of the Spirit from t^ie Father and the Son, and the government of (he world through the Logos. To say that the l^>go8 remained unchanged in the Trinity, while at the same time he went out of the Trinity and became man, is virtually to establish two distinct Logoi, which is no better than the orthodox theory of two parallel natures, one infinite, the other finite. The Father and the Son have but one es- sence; how, then, could the divinity of the Son be suspended, or almost annihilated for a time, with- out suspending the divinity of the Father ? It may be said, with Thomas Aquinas, that it was not the nature, but the person, of the Logos that became man. True, but a person without a nature is an impossible abstraction. If the Logos surrendered his divine self-consciousness, his omnipotence, and omniscience, how did he regain them ? Was it by a recollection of his preexistent state ? Or by a reflection on the Old Testament Scriptures? Or by a revelation from the Father? Or by the development of a native instinct? These and similar questions can not be satisfactorily an- swered by the consistent Kenoticists. Professor Paine {Critical History of the Evolution of Trini- tarianism, Boston, 1900, p. 281) pronounces the Kenosis theory '' only a metaphysical makeshift to cover the real contradiction which in the Chalce- donian theology stands visible to every intelligent eye." 6: The Bltschlian Theory is the product of Albrecht Ritschl (q.v.), the founder of the theo- logical school which goes by his name. It is set forth adequately in his Chriatliche Lehre von der Rechtfertigung und der Versohnung (3 vols., Bonn, 1870-74; 3d ed., 1888-89; Eng. transL, Edinburgh, vol. i., 1872, vol. iii., 1900), chap, vi., " The Doc- trine of Christ's Person and Work" (iii. 385-484 of Eng. ed.). The theory is an appreciation of Christ's ethical and religious unity with the Father and a denial of man's ability to find out the ** phys- ical origin" of the Person of Christ. Christ is " unique in his own order," that is, regarded as the revealer and bearer of religious and ethical truth. In this sense he is the Son of God; and his " appre- hension of himself as the Son of God is ever at- tained through his adoration of God as his Father.*' It is folly to attempt to explain the physical origin of the Person of Christ. Ritschl's theory is in accord with his discarding of the 1. The metaphysical element and his asser- Theory tion only of that which is truly re- Stated, ligious. In other words, all is to be set aside from the discussion of Christ's Person which can not be and has not been tested by the Church, or " the Christian community," in its experience. Ritschl says that the three offices of Christ — prophet, priest, and king — are a step toward grasping the significance of Christ for the Church, but they afford only a defective conception of him. Jesus was conscious of a new and previously unknown relation to God, as he testified to his disciples (p. 386). He esteemed himself more than a mere human being. He regarded his life as an instrument of God's com- plete revelation of himself. The theology of the Reformers adopted, it is true, the ethical mode of looking at Christ (p. 440); but all the older theologies in their doctrine of Christ failed to consider his religious activities, namely his habit of prayer and Ohrlstoloffy 62 his Bubmifision to the dispensations of God. Christ as the Word of God realizes in himself, that is in a human person, his vocation, which is the estab- lishment of the universal ethical kingdom of God. This kingdom is the supreme self-end of God in the world, so that the complete revelation of God is present in Christ, " in whom the word of God is a human person " (p. 451). The origin of the Person of Christ is not a proper subject of inquiry, for the problem transcends all investigation (p. 451). What ecclesiastical tradition offers in this respect is obscure in itself and is not fitted to make anything clear. Christ, as the instrument of the perfect revelation, is given that we may believe on him, and believing on him we find him to be the revealer of God. But the determination of the personal relation of Christ to God the Father is not a matter of scientific inquiry. Straining after explanations will prove fruitless. It will result only in obscuring the recognition of Christ as the perfect revelation of God (p. 452). The specific and complete revelation of God in Christ is ** the grace and truth" which dwelt in him. These are his divinity, and divinity does not reside in the will (p. 467). In the discharge of his vocation the essential will of God is revealed, which is love (p. 454). The only tests of the revelation of God in a human personality are ** grace and truth." In Christ the divine attributes of omniscience, om- nipotence, and omnipresence are not to be sought. To be sure, to Christ is ascribed power over the worid (Matt. xi. 27; etc.), but this power mani- fests itself chiefly as patience under suffering (p. 460). Christ's divinity is in his world-conquering power, in his own patience, and in the Christian community. It rests not in his physical origin, which has never yet been reconciled with his historic appearance and never can be (p. 467). In virtue of the love which inspired him and in view of the lordship which in his own estimate of him- self and by his patience he exercised over the world, he is equal with God (p. 483). It is Bitschl's merit that he emphasized the ethical element of Christianity and insisted upon human experience as a test of the great principles of the Gospel. He can preserve the Merit Mid *®™^ "equality with the Father" Lixni- ^^^ " preexistence " by exalting the tation. love which moved Christ and by exalting Christ's vocation, which was to advance the universal kingdom of God. In doing this he can not avoid metaphysical subtlety and he must leave out, or explain away, utterances of Christ which on their face refer to what he calls " his physical origin " and which he says the older theologies in vain attempted to solve. Theology will not be satisfied with formulas bearing on the ethical and religious relationship of Christ and God while so much is said in the New Testament about the "physical (essential) relationship," especially as this "physical relationship" seems to be the basis of the ethical and religious unity of the Son of God and the Father. 6. The Theory of a Oradnal or Proffresalve In- oamation is the last to be mentioned as promoting a solution of the problem. It carried the divine Kenosis, or the motion of God's love to men, through the whole earthly Ufe of Christ, instead of confi- ning it to an instantaneous act when the Holy Spirit overshadowed the Blessed Virgin. When John says that the " Logos became flesh," he spoke as one of those who " beheld his glory, the glory of the only-begotten of the Father," as it manifested itself in his whole public life. The impossible idea of an essential self-limitation of the Logos is discarded, and in Ms 1. The place is assimied the rational idea of Theory, a limitation of the self -communication of the Logos to humanity. There are various degrees in this self-communication. The being and actuality of the Logos remained meta- physically and morally unchanged; but Jesus of Nazareth possessed the Logos merely so far as was compatible with the truth of human growth and the capacity of his expanding consciousness. In other words, the eternal personality of the divine Logos entered into the humanity of Jesus, meas- ure by measure as it grew, and became capable and worthy of receiving it. There were two corre- sponding movements in the life of Christ — & descent of the divine consciousness, and an ascent of the human consciousness. There was a pro- gressive self-communication of the divine Logos to Jesus, and a moral growth of Jesus in holiness keeping step with the former. The process of imion began with the supernatural conception, and was completed with the ascension. The first act of the incarnation of the Logos was the beginning of the man Jesus, and both constituted one undivided personality. There was a personal unity and iden- tity throughout the whole period, the same life of the divine-human personality, but in actual growth and development from germ to full organization, from infancy to ripe manhood. Christ became conscious of his Godhead as he became conscious of his manhood; but the divine life always was the basis of his human life. The twelfth year of Jesus in the temple, and the baptism in the Jor- dan, mark two important epochs in the develop- ment of this divine-human consciousness. There was in connection with the gradual incorporation of the divine Logos into the humanity of Jesus an actual elevation of his humanity into personal union with the Godhead, as he grew in moral perfection: hence his exaltation is spoken of by Paul as a reward for his humiliation and obedience (Phil. ii. 9; cf. Heb. v. 7-10). This theory escapes the diflficulties of the Ken- otic theory, and is even better reconcilable with the orthodox christology of the creeds, 2. Its as far as the result is concerned. Kerits. Nearly all christologists admit now the genuine growth and development of Christ's humanity, to which the Kenoticists add the impossible growth of the divine Logos from unconsciousness and impotence to omniscience and omnipotence. This view teaches the former without the latter, and saves the continued integ- rity of the Logos. There still remains the specu- lative problem perceived by the Reformed divines- how the infinite consciousness of the eternal Logos can ever become absolutely coincident with the 68 OhriatoIosT limited oonsdousness of the man Jesus; but this difficulty attaches to every theory which holds fast to the strict divinity of our Lord 7. Conolnaion: In reviewing these various the- ories we can readily accept the elements of truth which they variously express. Christ is the ideal nun realised, the head of the redeemed race, the perfect model for universal imitation. So far, e\'en the Humanitarian theory is correct; only it does not go far enough, and it becomes a serious error when it denies the higher truth beyond. For Christ is also the et«mal Son of God, who in infinite love renounced his ^ory and S*of ™*J®sty> *^^ lowered himself to a Tmthis All ^^^^ race, entering into all its wants, Thaoriea. ^^als, and temptations, yet without sin, and humbled himself, even to the death on the cross, in order to emancipate men from the guilt and power of sin, and to reconcile them to God. He is the one undivided God-man, who, as man, calls out all our sympathies and trust, and, as God, is the object of true worship. In this respect we accept fully the faith of the Church in all ages, and consider the divinity of our Lord as the comer-stone of Christianity. We bold, with Ritschl and Paine, to the moral nature of the God-manhood of Christ, but without sacri- ficing his eternal divinity. We would go as far with the Kenosis theory as the unchangeable nature of God permits, and as the imbounded love of God demands. We dissent from the dyophysitic and dualistic psychology of Chaloedon, and hold to the inseparable personal unity of the life, and %t the same time to the genuine growth of Christ, without asserting, with the Kenoticists, a growth of the divine Logos, who is unchangeable in his nature; but we substitute for this impossible idea a gradual communication of the divinity to the God-man. This is, in substance, the Christ of the Catholic creeds and the Protestant confessions of faith. He is a mystery indeed to our intel- 2. The lectual and philosophical compre- Xystary hension, but a mystery made manifest of dhxist. as the most glorious fact in history — the blessed mjrstery of godliness, the inexhaustible theme of meditation and praise for all generations. How the whole fulness of un- created divinity can be poured out into a human being passes our understanding, but not more, perhaps, than the familiar fact that an immaterial and inunortal soul made in God's image, and ca- pable of endless perfectibility, inhabits and inter- penetrates a material and mortal body. And deeper and grander than both mysteries is the infinite love of God which lies back of them in the very depths of eternity, and which prompted the incarnation and the death of his only-begotten Son for the salvation of a sinful world. Yet this love of God in Christ, whose " breadth and length and height and depth passeth knowledge *' (Eph. iii. IS, 19), is more certain and constant than the light of the sun in heaven and the voice of conscience in man. It has been thought best not to discuss in this article the bearing of the denial of the virgin-birth of our Lord upon the problems of christology. Origen and other early Fathers, whose names have a prominent place in the development of chris- tology, emphasized the virgin-birth as an integral element of Christ's divinity. The purely human origin of Christ from a human father and mother favors strongly, if it does not necessi- tate, the view that Christ was only a 8. Limits of This -^j , man and precludes the view that he was either preexistent or essentially divine. Nor has it seemed necessary to take into considera- tion the view of the contemporary school of his- torical critics, Pfleiderer, Wemle, and others, who make a sharp distinction between Paul's theology and the much simpler claims Christ made for him- self, and who regard Paul as the inventor of the deity of Christ and other doctrines which the Church has always held. This article assumes the integrity of the four Gospels, and that the Pauline epistles interpreted but did not originate the doctrines concerning Christ's person. (Philip ScHAFFf) D. S. Schaff. XI. Additional Note: Certain questions which have come up in the recent dogmatic considera- tion of the person of Christ require an additional statement. That this problem engaged the early attention of the church is evident by the birth- stories of Matthew and Luke, the stories of the bap- tism, the Logos-doctrine of the Fourth I. Preez- Gospel and the Epistle to the He- istence. brews, and Paul's conception of preex- istence. In addition to the orthodox theory of the Logos, or the second person of the Trinity, who assumed human nature in Jesus Christ, and the speculations of those who have advocated the several Kenotic theories (see Kenosib), various attempts have been made to do justice to the New Testament teaching concerning preexistence. (1) The preexistence is ideal. According to a form of expression common in the time of Jesus, things of exceeding worth, as the ark of the covenant, the temple, Jerusalem, are conceived as already exists ing in heaven with God before they are manifested on earth. Thus the transcendent ground of the person of Christ was within God's eternal knowl- edge, so that in the divine idea and purpose of redemption Jesus had eternal existence (cf. Har- nack. Dogma, vol. i., Appendix I.). Or, the mean- ing of preexistence is that Christ in human form is the revelation of the eternal cosmic principle through which in creation and redemption God is disclosing himself (W. A. Brown, Christian The- ology in OiUline, pp. 179-180, 347, New York, 1906). (2) The " heavenly man " preexisting in the image of God (I Cor. XV. 47, cf. Col. i. 15-17; II Cor. viu. 9) does not assume human nature, but becomes incarnate in Jesus Christ. This interpretation, originating in Paul's antithesis of flesh and spirit, found a congenial soil in the religious ideas of the time — ^a logical deduction backward drawn from belief in the risen Christ (cf. O. Pfleiderer, Pavlin- ism, part I., chap, iii., London). Or, the " heavenly man " had a preexistent life, and this Ufe was divine not in the absolute sense, but as conferred upon him by God, thus identical in principle with the glorified life (C. H. von Weizs&cker, Apostolic Age, book II., Chzlstoloffy Christopher, Saint 64 chap, ii., §§ 10-11, New York, 1804). Or, again, in one aspect the Logos is to be regarded as the eternal Humanity in God, the ** Archetype of the not yet created Man," which became incarnate in Jesus Christ (T. C. Edwards, The God-Man, Lon- don, 1896). (3) W. Herrmann holds that the pre- existenoe was not ideal, but personal — a contra- diction indeed, to be removed only when the riddle of time in which we now conceive reality had been solved for us {Die Religion im Verhdltnias turn Welterkennen und zur SiUlichkett, p. 438, Halle, 1879) . As to theories of incarnation several tenden- cies are evident. (1) The ethical aspect of the incarnation is increasingly emphasized. The tra- ditional cb^tology has been based a. Incar- on the essential disparity of the divine nation, and human natures. This was held to be necessary in order to safeguard the integrity of the two natures. But however carefully the statement of the doctrine was pro- tected, it did not escape the force of the criticism in the preceding text (see VL, 2, { 2). To meet this difficulty, therefore, attention has been directed away from the two-nature doctrine on its purely metaphysical side to the ethical and religious as- pects of the incarnation. As in the traditiunal view, God and man are here affirmed in all the integrity of their spiritual being, but the point of view is changed. It is not so much a question of nature and essence and hypostasis as of psycholog- ical experience and character, of inner development and historical influence, i.e., of the moral and spiri- tual consciousness of Jesus Christ in which the pur- pose of God is revealed and realized, and the unity of God and man are disclosed. Accordingly, the proof of the incarnation is found in Jcsus's con- sciousness of his vocation, in his grace and truth, his dominion over the world, and his success in estab- lishing his community with attributes analogous to his own. This ethical estimate of Jesus results in a religious valuation of him. We call Christ God because he has for us the religious worth of God (Ritschl). (2) The incarnation is conceived of as an immanent necessity in the love of God to self- expression. Again, if man was created in the image of God, and his perfection was possible only in union with God, then an incarnation of one who should enable man to consiunmate this union was necessary apart from sin. Thus, incarnation for the sake of redemption, instead of being an afterthought of God, an accidental expedient in behalf of man, was involved in the essential ethical relation of God to the creation (B. F. Westcott, " Gospel of the Creation," in Commentary on the Epistles of St. John, London, 1885). (3) The proof of the divin- ity of Christ is becoming less external and dogmatic than internal and ethical. If in the earlier argu- ments the greater stress was on the application to Christ of Old Testament terms referring to God, the ascription to him of names, attributes, and works of God, the New Testament designation of him as Son of God in a metaphysical sense, and the fact that he was an object of religious worship, in more recent thought the principal emphasis is laid on the uniqueness of his moral character, the might of his moral appeal to the conscience and the will, the transformation in experience which follows obedi- ence to his leadership; in a word, in him is a revela- tion of that which is most real in God and most ideal in man — love. This ethical impulse to the interpretation of Christ, which among many recent attempts of the same kind was disclosed in Bushnell'b incomparable tenth chapter of Naivre and the Super- natural— " The Character of Jesus Forbids His Pos- sible Classification with Men " — ^has by no means lost its force, and every modem treatment of the person of Jesus pays tribute to this demand. (4) The incarnation is increasingly regarded in an essential relation to the redemptive work of Christ. Not, then, the atonement irrespective of the life of Jesus, but — a truth which was deeply voiced by Athanasius in The Incarnation of the TToni— <iod comes to man both to reveal and to realize the ideal oneness of God and man. Thus the incarmition is the atonement (cf. J. M. Wilson, The Gospd of the Atonement, London, 1899). (5) Further, the cosmic relations of the incarnation are receiving renewed attention. Here several cmrents meet and mingle: the Pauline conception of the univer- sal significance of Christ (Col. i. 15-17), the federal, based on the natural, headship of Christ, the pan- theistic trend which discerns in the particular the essence of the universal, and evolution which finds the goal and crown of the creation in the ethical and religious consciousness. Christ is, accordingly, the supreme expression and consununation of the Logos of God in which the whole creation finds its interpretative principle and end. C. A. B. Bibliography: I. For O. T. Christology consult the works dted under Mesbiah. For N. T. Christolocy consult the work* on N. T. Theology, especially: W. Beyschlsg. N. T. ThMtogy, 2 vols., Edinburgh. 1806; E. Reusa. U ThSolooie durHienne au nide apottoUgue, 2 vols., Stras- burg, 1864; J. J. Van Oostersee. Tkeology of N. T., Lon- don. 1870: B. Weiss, BiUucfu Theotogie de$ N. T., Stutt- gart, 1003, Eng. transl.. 2 vols., Edinburgh, 1882-83; H. H. Wendt. Lehn Jem, 2 vols.. Gdttingen. 1886-90. Eng. trans!., London. 1802; G. B. Stevens. Theotooy of N. r.. New York. 1800; E. P. Qould. BiUieat Theology of N. T., ib. 1000. Consult further: C. F. NoRgen, ChritiM der AfenscAen- und Gotteuohn, Gotha. 1869; W. F. Gess. ChriMii Person und Werk, 3 vols., Basel, 1870-78; H. Bushnell, Ood in Chriat, New York, 1877; L A. Domer, ChruUiehe QlavbenaUkre, ii. 257 sqq.. Ber- lin, 1880; P. Schaff, Pereon of Chriat, New York. 18S2; A. B. Bruce, Kingdom of Ood, Edinburgh, 1880; J. A. Beet, Throuah ChriH to Ood, pp. 215-301. London. 1892; J. Stalker, ChriMtology of Jeeue, ib. 1800; A. M. Fair- bairn, Philoeophv of the Chrietian Retiffion, pp. 356-379. ib. 1002; N. Schmidt, Prophet of Nazareth, New York. 1905. 1 1. -I II. The best detailed account of the devek>pment of doctrine with its environment is still Neander, Chrie- tian Church, i. 575-608, 630-640. u. 405-466, 478-504. Especially valuable are the histories of doctrine, par- ticularly: Hamack, Dogma, vols, i.-iii.; I. A. Doraer, History of the Devdopmeni of the Doctrine of the Person of Christ, Edinburgh, 1850; F. Nietasche, Dogmenge- ediichU, Berlin, 1870; A. ReviUe, Hiataire du dogme de la diviniU de Jisue Christ, 3d. ed., Paris, 1904. Eng. transl., Hist, of the Doctrine of the Deity of Jesus Christy London, 1870; K. R. Hagenbach, HisL of Doctrine, vol. i., Edinburgh, 1880; F. Loofs, Dogmengesdtiehte, Halle. 1803; R. Seeberg, Lehrbueh der Dogmengesdiithte, 2 vols.. Erlangen. 1805-08; G. P. Fisher, HisL of Christian Doe- trine, New York. 1806; Hefeie. ConeUiengesehidite, vol. 1., Eng. transl.. vols, i.-ii. Consult also: D. Petavius. De theologicis dogmatibus, 5 vols., Paris. 1644-50 (collects ante-Nioene and Nioene testimonies); G. Bull, Defensio fidei Nietsnee, Oxford. 1685 (a standard); E. Burton. Testimonies of Ante-Nieene Fathers to As Divinity of 35 Christoloflry Ohristopher, Saint Ckritt, Oxford, 1820 (also a elaosic); F. C. Baur. Die tkriatUcke Lekn von der Drneiniokeit und MenBchtoer- dung Gotta, 3 vols. TQbingen. 1841-43; H. Voigt. Dm Itkrt dta Aihanantu, Bremen. 1861; W. Maokintoah, Study of the Doctrine o/ Jeeue a» Developed from Judaiem end Converted into Dogma, Gla^ow, 1894; O. Pfleiderer, Eariif CkrieUan ConcepUon of Christ, London, 1905; B. B. Warfield, in Princetfm Theological Review, 1906. pp. 529-557. 1906, pp. 1-37, 145-168; &thnB,ChrietianChurdi, a. 544^560. iii 705-740. IV.-VII. Consult, beaidos the works on the history of doctrine dted above (especiaUy Hamack, Dogma, vols, iii.-iv.): Schaff. Chrieiian Church, vol. iv.; W. A. Arendt, Lm> der Groeae, Mains. 1835; J. Fulton, The Chalcedonian Decree^ New York, 1892; L. L. Paine, Critioal Hietory of Am BvohUion of Trinitarianiem, Boston, 1900; J. O. Dykes, in Expoeitory Timee, Oct., 1905-Jan., 1906; Hefele, ConeiHengeeehuAte, vols. iii.-iv., Eng. transl., vols. iii. -v. VIII. Oriicinal documents are, Lutheran: Formula Coneardim (convenient in Jacob's edition, vol. i., Phila- delphia, 1893); J. Breni, De pereonaU unione duarum no- turantm in Chrieto, 1560; idem, De majeetate domini nosfrt, 1562; M. Cbemnits, Deduahue naturie in Chriato, Frankfort. 1576. Reformed: Admonitio Neoeiadieneie, 1577; L. Dansus, I>€ dttabue naturie a Chemnitio, Geneva, 1581; H. Zanchi, De inoamatione filii Dei, HeidelberK. 1593; the christo- logical writioca of T. Bexa and Z. Ursinus. For spedfie difcuaeions consult. Lutheran: F. H. R. Frank. Theolo- g%e der Coneordienfonnel, iii. 166-396, Eriangen, 1865; C. P. Krauth. ConeervoHve Reformation and ite Theotogy, pp. 456 aqq., Philadelphia. 1872; H. E. Jacobs. Book of C&ncord, voL ii.. ib. 1893. Reformed: H. L. J. Heppe, fefarmirte Dogmatik, pp. 351 sqq.. Elberfeld, 1861; ^haSl, Creede, i. 285 sqq.. 317 sqq. Critical: M. Schneck- Durger, Zur kirchliehen ChrieUdogie, Pforsheim. 1861; .tj>[n« Vergleichende DareteUung dee lutheriechen und rtfarmirten Lehrbegriffg, Stuttgart, 1856. General works sre those already dted of Domer, Reville, Nietssche, See- berg, and Baur; R. A. Lipdus, Dogmatik, pp. 441-483, Hronswick, 1893. Consult also H. Schults, Die Lehre roit dcr Gottheit Chriati, Communicatio idiomatum, Gotha. 1881; A. Ratschl. Chrietian Doctrine of JueHfUaOon and Reconciliation, pp. 416 aqq.. Edinburgh, 1872. IX. On the G lessen side, the Saxon Solida deeieio, Leipsie, 1624; J. Feuerbom, Sciaffraphia de divino Jeeu CItriato .... 1621; idem, Ktymoiypa^ie xP*<rroA<ryuci9, Marburg, 1627; B. Mentser, Neceeearia et juata defeneio, Gieaen. 1624. On the TObiogen ude: L.08iander, De omnipnaeentia Chrietihominie, Tabingen, 1620; T. Thumm, Majeetatia Jeeu Chrieti $*«a^pmwnv, ib. 1621; idem, Taa-ci- mm9fipa4in eocra, ib. 1623; AetaMentxeriana, ib. 1625. On the Roman Catholic dde: BMum ubiquietieum vetue et no- rum, Dillingen, 1 627 ; A Iter und newer liiUuriadurKataenkrieg ton der Ubiquitat, Ingolstadt, 1629. Historical and critical: J. F. Cotta, Hietoria doetrinas de duplice atatu Chriati, in his ed. of Cierfaard's Loci theologici, iv. 60 sqq., Ttlbingen, 1762-88; J. £. I. Waleh, Einleitung in die Religionatrei- tigkeiten, L 206, Jena, 1733; F. C. Baur. ut sup., ii. 450; G. Thomadus, ChrieU Peraon und Werk, li. 391-450. Er- iangen. 1857; I. A. Domer. ut sup., ii. 788-809; R. Roeholl. Realpr^aem, pp. 198 sqq.. GQtersloh. 1875. X. 1. For the Racovian Catechiem (Eng. transl. by T. Rees, London, 1818) see Socinus; J. Priestley. Early Opinione concerning Jeeue Chriat, Birmingham, 1786; I. Kant, R^iffion innerhalb der Gremen der bloeaen Vemunft, Konigsberg, 1793, Eng. transl., Relioion teith^ in the Boundary of Pure Reason, Edinburgh, 1838; W. E. Cbanning. Worke, 6 vols.. Boston, 1874; T. Parker. Dieeouree of Mattera Pertaining to Religion, ib. 1847; A. Coquerel. Chrietologie, 2 vols.. Paris, 1858; J. Martin- eao. Siudiea of Chrietianity, London, 1858; idem, Eaaaya Pktioeopkieal and Theological, 2 vob.. New York, 1879; idem. Religion ae A ffected by Modem Maierialiem, Lon- don, 1874; idem. Seat of Authority in Relif/ion, ib. 1890; F. H. Hedge. Reason in Religion, Boston, 1875; M. J. Sarage. Out of Naeareth, ib. 1904. 2. D. F. Strauss, Die ehriatUdte Olaubenatdure in ihrer eetrkiehHichm Entwicklung und im Kampfe mit der mo- ^*mm Wir.nenechafi, ii. 193 sqq., Tflbingen. 1841 (a work V def>tnictiv<* of Christian dogmatics as his //«5en Jeeu » of thf evangelical history); A. E. Biedermann, Chriat- iirhe Dogmntik, Zurich, 1869 (more serious, but almost equally revolutionary in its results); £. Marius, Die ni.— 6 PeradnlichkeU Jeeu Chriati. Mit beaonderer Rllckaicht auf die Mythologien und Myaterien der alien V6lker, Lcipde, 1881 (a strange compound of the mythical views of Strauss and the mystical interpretation of Swedenborg). 4. On the Kenotie theory: J. L. Kdnig, Die Menadi" werdung Gottea, Mains, 1844; O. Thomadus, BeitrUge zur kirchliehen Chrietologie, Eriangen, 1845; idem, Chriati Peraon und Werk, ib. 1856; T. A. Liebner, Die chrialUdie Dogmatik, Gdttingen, 1849; J. H. A. Ebrard. ChriatUAe Dogmatik, Kdnigsberg, 1851-62; J. P. Lange, Poeitive Dogmatik, pp. 595-782. Hddelberg, 1851; W. F. Gess, ut sup.; H. L. Martensen, Chriatliche Dogmatik, Berlin, 1853. Eng. trand., Edinburgh, 1866; F. Delitssch, 8ya- tem der bibliec/ien Peychologie, pp. 326 aqq., Leipde, 1861. Eng. trand.. Edinburgh, 1865; J. Bodemeyer. Die Lehre von der Kenoaia, GOttingen, 1860; K. F. A. Kahnis, Die lutherieche Dogmatik, iii. 343, Ldpdc, 1868; L. Schdberlein, Die Geheimnieae dee Glaubene, Hddelberg, 1872; R. Kabel. ChriaUichee Lehrayatem, Stuttgart, 1873; J. J. van Oostersee, Chrietian Dogmatica, London, 1878 (moderately and cautiously Kenotie); F. Godet, in Studiee on the New Teatament, Edinburgh, 1876; idem. Commentary on . . . John, ib. 1881; E. de Pressens^, Jieue ChrUt, Paris, 1866, Eng. trand., London. 1866; idem. La Diviniti de Jieue Chriat, in Revue ehrStienne, iii. 641 aqq.; H. M. Goodwin, Chriat and Humanity, New York, 1875; H. Crosby, The True Humanity of Chriat, ib. 1881; F. J. Hall, The Kenotie Theory, London, 1898; J. Kunse, Die ewige Gottheit Jeeu Chriati, Ldpdc, 1904; W. Latgert, Gottea Sohn und Gottee GeUt, ib. 1904. For adverse criticism of the Kenosis theory consult: I. A. Domer, ut sup., Eng. transl., II. iii., pp. 100 aqq.; idem, in JahrhUcher fUr deutache Theologie, 1856, 1858; idem. Chrietliche Glaubenelehre, ii. 367 aqq., Berlin, 1880, Eng. transl., Edinburgh, 1880-82. The fulleat account in Eng. is in A. B. Bruce, Humiliation of Chriat, Ltd, iv., Edinburgh, 1881. Dr. Hodge, SyatemaUe Theology, ii. 439, New York, 1871, notices the Kenotie theories of Thomadus, Ebrard, and Gess, and oondemna them. In general. I. A. Domer. ut aup. The following Eng- lish works deserve notice, though mostly confined to an expodtion and defense of the Chalcedonian dogma: R. J. Wilberforoe, The Doctrine of the Incarnation of our Lord, London, 1852; H. P. Liddon, The Divinity of our Lord and Saviour Jeeue Chriat, ib. 1868. The ablest disousdon of Christ's person and work is A. M. Fairbaim, Place of Chriet in Modem Theology, London, 1893. Con- sult further : C. Gore, Incarnation of the Son of God, ib. 1891 ; J. Denney, Studiee in Theology, chaps. ii.-iii., New York, 1895: "Chrietologie" in Hauck-Heraog. RE, iv. 4-66; M. Braekner, Die Entetehung der pauliniechen Chrietologie, Strasburg. 1903; G. Krfiger, Dae Dogma von der Dreieinigkeitund Gott Menechheit, TQbingen, 1905 (dedicated to Hamack, written from the Unitarian stand- point) ; S. Faut, Die Chrietologie eeit Sehleiermacher, ihre Geaddchte und ihre BegrUndung, TQbingen, 1907.
CHRISTOPHER, SAINT CHRISTOPHER, SAINT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTOPHER, SAINT: A saint highly honored from very early times both in the Greek and Latin churches. According to the martyrologies of Ado, Usuard, Notker, and others, as well as the Martyro- logium Romanum, he lived at Samos in Lycia, converted many to Christianity, and died a martyr under the emperor Decius, or, according to some accounts, under an emperor (or king) called Dag- nus. No Samos in Lycia, however, is known, and Dagnus is otherwise unheard of; the name may be a corruption of Daza, the original name of the em- peror Maximin II, (305-314). The later forms of the Christopher legend are in the highest degree fantastic. For example, a manuscript of Fulda describes him as of gigantic stature, with the head of a dog, and decks out his life and death with most silly wonders. Somewhat more attractive and credible is another version, containing appar- ently elements of old Germanic mythology, accord- ing to which the giant Christopher at first served the devil, then in order to know Christ, one said Christopher, Saint Chromatius 66 to be stronger than the devil, undertook the duties of a ferryman. Finally a child, whom he was carrying across the river on his shoulders, disclosed himself as the Savior, forced the giant beneath the waves by his ever increasing weight and so baptised him, giving him the name of Christopher (" Christ-bearer '0- The veneration of Christo- pher was general in the East, in Italy, Spain, France, Germany, and other lands. Mention of his wonder- working relics is frequent, as of his head, said to have been carried from Constantinople to France after the capture of the city in 1204, and of his leg, said to have been kept in Constantinople till 1453. He was an attractive figure to medieval art and poetry, and is represented as a huge fellow wading through waters, carrying a child on his shoulders, and with a green staff in his hand. His picture is frequent in the vestibules of churches as a sort of guard. Brotherhoods of St. Christopher, es- pecially for the care of travelers, are mentioned up to the Reformation. His day in the Greek Churoh is May 9, and in the Latin July 25. (O. ZOcxLERf . ) BxBLioaBAPHT: The older Vitm ue to be found in A8B, July, vi. 125-149; in B. Pei, Themtunu aneodotorum novtMimiMt II. iii. 27-122. Augebuis, 1721; and in Arut- Utta BoOandiana, ed. C. de Smedt and others, i. 121-148, z. 303-^106. FmriB, 1882, 1801. AU the different elementa of the legend are combined by Jaoobua de Varagine (q.v.) in the Ociden Legend. Consult: J. Grimm. Deulaehe MvAoIoqU, pp. 406-600, GOttingen. 1844; H. P. Huot. VU de 8. Chrietophe, Soissons, 1861; A. Binemus, Die Leaende vom heilioen Chrietoph und die PUuHk und Ma- 2frm, Hanover, 1868; Le Grand 8. Chrieiophe de PaieeUne, eon Aufotrs authentigue ei ea popularitS dane iee deux mondee, par dee Lorraine bibiiophHeet Nantes, 1800; A. Muasafia, Zw ChriatopK-Legende, Vienna, 1803; K. Rioh> ter. Der deuteehe Chrieioph, BerUn, 1806. CHRlSTOPEffiR, DUKE OF WUERTTEMBBRO, aud the reformation in WUERTTEMBERG : Christopher, duke of WQrttemberg, 1650-68, was bom at Urach (22 m. s.e. of Stuttgart) May 12, 1515; d. at Stuttgart Dec. 28, 1568. When he was six months old, his mother, Sabma of Bavaria, fled to her native land, and in 1519 his father, Ulrie, was driven from his country. The boy came into the hands of Charles V. and his brother Ferdinand, but was well educated by Michael Tiffemus. At the court of Charles V., from which he fled in 1532, and in France, where he spent eight years, he grew up a statesman and soldier. His father, who in 1534 regained his country and re- formed it, made him governor at Mdmpelgard, and in 1544 brought about his marriage with Anna Maria, daughter of the margrave George of Bran- denburg-Ansbach. The reading of the Bible and the writings of the Reformers gave Christopher a firm and dear Evangelical faith, which he proved in filial reverence and love toward the often severe father and obstinate mother and in restless activity for his people and the Evangelical Church. On Nov. 6, 1550, he succeeded his father as duke and soon obtained a leading position among the Evangelical princes. He presented the Confessio Wirtembergica, prepared by Brens, to the Council at Trent, and sent Brens and other theologians to defend it, but they were not heard. He then prohibited the mass in the parish-churches, abol- ished the Interim, removed the images, altars, field- chapels, and all remains of the former religious serv- ice, turned the male monasteries into schools with Evangelical abbots, but allowed the nuns to die in their monasteries; those, however, who left were provided for. He gave a new discipline to the Evangelical Church of Wdrttemberg, introduced poor-boxes in 1552, and appointed four The Refor- district-physicians for the care of the mation in sick. The marriage-law was regulated Wiirttem- by act of Jan. 1, 1553; the activity of berg. the higher church-authorities by the visitation act. The religious service, in the simplicity given to it by Blaurer and Scimepff (qq.v.), and the catechetical instruction of the youth were regulated by the Kleine Kirchenardnung of 1553, which was superseded by the Groase Kvrchen- ordnung of May 15, 1559, including also school, sanitary, and poor regulations. The duke treated th^ chuit^hrproperty of the Evangelical Church with perfect disinterestedness, divided the large parishes for the better care of the congregation, established new parishes in the Blade Forest, cared for the repair of the churches, and enacted in 1559 that church-registers should be kept. He insisted that the teaching of the Confessio Wirtembergica should be maintained, and issued harsh injunctions against Schwenckfeld and all " sectaries." His harshness was felt especially by the Baptists and by Bartho- lom&us Hagen, preacher at Dettigen, who was suspected of Calvinism but was convinced of his error at the Stuttgart Synod in Dec., 1559. The university received new regulations in 1557. The scholarship founded by his father was s^plied to the education of theologians who had received a humanistic preparation in the monastic schools. Students of other faculties, who were prepared in the pedagogical schools at Stuttgart and Tubingen, were assisted from the funds of the church-property. By the school-regulation of 1559 popular education was promoted ; the sacristan now acted also as teacher. Christopher was anxious for the reunion of the different religious parties, proposed in 1552 a national council, and avoided all malicious fault- finding. Calvinism he disliked much, especially as it made its inroad into the Palatinate, but he re- spected the religious courage of the elector Frederick of the Palatinate and did not favor his exclusion from the religious peace. He promoted Protestant- ism in Austria by supporting the Slavic press at Urach under the former imperial captain Hans Ungnad. He offered a refuge at TQbingen to the former papal nuncio Petrus Paulus Vergerius. In 1557 he solicited the king of France for the op- pressed Waldensians, in 1559 for the Protestants; in 1561 he sent Beurlin (q.v.) and Andre& to Paris, and even went in 1562 with Brena to Zabem to attend a colloquy with the Guises to win France over to Protestantism, but saw himself at last shamefully deceived, though Catherine Chiisto- de Medici offered him the office of pher's In- a supreme viceroy. In the interest fluence of Protestantism his active mind was Abroad, long busy with matrimonial plans for the daughters of Renata of Ferrara and for Queen Elisabeth of Ehigland. He aided the Reformation by his advice and by sending theo- 67 Ohxistopher, Saint Ohromatius logians to the Palatinate, in the margravate Baden- Pfonbeim, in the domain of Count Helfenstein, in the country of Oettingen, in the free-towns of Rothenbuig, on the Tauber, and Hagenau, also in the remote duchies of Julich-Cleves and Brunswick- Wolfenbuttel, whose Duke Julius, his cousin, fol- lowed him implicitly. The ecclesiastical reservation carried through by Ferdinand at the Religious Peace of Augsburg (q.v.) Christopher opposed as an impediment to Protestantism and a denial of the principle of religious liberty. His hopes, however, in Maximilian II., the son and successor of Fer- dinand, his friend, who had been influenced by the spirit of the Reformation, were not realized. He helped exiled Englishmen in 1554-55, the Walden- sians in 1557, and in a quiet manner, not to excite the wrath of the emperor, in 1568 William of Orange in the war of liberation in the Netherlands. For his people and the Evangelical Church of Germany Christopher's death came too soon. His efforts for his people's welfare, his zeal for the Church and Protestantism, his pure intentions mark him as one of the ablest princes of Germany. His reign and that of his son Louis (1569-93) form the golden age of Wurttemberg. G. Bossert. BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. C. Pfii«ter, Hertog ChrUtoph von Wnrt- temimv, 2 vols.. Tflbingen, 1819-20; B. Kugler, Chria- tovk, Henog von WUrttemberg, 2 vols., 8tutt«art, 1868-70; C. F. SUUin, WartUmbergiache Oeachichte, vol. iv., Stutt- gart, 1873: E. Schneider, WUrttembergitehe ReformationB- geaekiehle, Stuttgart. 1887; WUrttembergiache Kirchmge- wthidOe, Stuttgart, 1893; E. Schneider. WiJtrUembergiache Geaekiehie, Stuttgart, 1896; V. Ernst. Briefwechad de» Henoga Chrialaph, 3 vols., Stuttgart. 1899-1902.
CHRISTOPHORUS CHRISTOPHORUS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHRISTOPHORUS: Pope 903-904. In the au- tumn of 903 he overthrew Leo V. and seized the papal throne; but a few months later he met the same fate at the hands of Sergius III. According to Herimannus, he became a monk; Vulgarius, on the other hand, says that he was murdered in prison. (A. Hauck.) Bibliography: Jaff^ Regesta, i. 443-444; Bower, Popes, ii. 306. CHRODEGANG (Hrodegandus, Ruotgang, Rug- gandus): Prankish bishop; b. in Hasbania {ex pago Hatbaniensit in the Belgian province of Lim- burg) early in the eighth century; d. at Metz Mar. 6. 766. He was the son of Sigramnus and Landrada, who belonged to one of the noblest families of the Ripuarian Franks, was set aside for the Church, admitted into the clergy of the court, and was raised by Charles Martel to the post of referen- darius, a position influential in secular as well as in spiritual affairs. In 742 he was made bishop of Metz by Pepin, and became the means of rees- tablishing the long-interrupted intercourse of his country with Rome. When Stephen II. was hard pressed by the Lombards, Chrodegang received from Pepin in 733 the commission to go to Italy and to accompany the pope to Gaul, which he accom- plished successfully; for this he was rewarded by the pope with the dignity of archbishop, the use of the pallium, the privilege of having the cross borne before him« and of consecrating bishops, although Metz was not an archbishopric. His property he gave to the needy, for the founding of church-establish- ments, particularly of monasteries (among which Gorze and the reestablished Lorsch were notable), and for the beautifying and renovating of churches. In 764 he journeyed to Rome in quest of relics, but his chief claim to be remembered is found in his exertions in behalf of ecclesiastical disdpline and morals, which were in a sad plight in the Gallic Church. This task Boniface had in part accom- plished. Chrodegang considered that the most proper means of accomplishing this end would be to carry over the discipline and mode of life of the regular clergy into that of the secular clergy. He enforced strictly the rule of Benedict of Nursia, strengthened the work begun by Eusebius of Ver- celli, Augustine, and his predecessors among the Franks, and drew up a rule of thirty-four chapters. This was in great part a verbal repetition of Bene- dict's rule (cf. Hauck, ii. 60), retaining even the term claustrum for his new institution, though exr changing episcopua and archidiaconua for abbas and prcepositus, and canonici for monacki. The vita canonicaf the keeping of the horcB canonical and so on, cue mainly the same, differing however in two places, necessarily so, since the complete identification- of the secular clergy with the regu- lars seemed hardly profitable. These differences were (1) the distinction between major and minor orders, with their interrelations, and (2) the vow of poverty, which was not required of the canonicals. The rule in its first form (cf. Mansi, Concilia, xiv. 313-314) is intended only for the cathedral of Metz. Later it was enlarged to eighty-six chapters and has now a more common form, in which it found a place in the RegtUa Aquisgranensis, 817 a.d. That Chrodegang thus helped to diffuse Roman customs through Germany was noted by Paul Wamef ried, who tells us also that Chrodegang was bishop of Metz for twenty-three years, five months, and five days. He lies buried in the monastery of Gorze, and his epitaph is to be found in Mabillon, Vetera Analecta, Paris, 1723, 377. (E. Friedbbrq.) Bibliography: Sources for a history are in Paulus Wame- fridus. Liber de epiacopia Mettanaibua^ ed. G. H. Perts, in MOH, Saript, ii (1829), 267; the EpUaphium, ed. £. DOmmler. in MGH, Poeta laHni cBvi Carolini, i (1881). 108-109; and the Vila by John of Gorse, ed. Perts, in MOH, Script, x (1852), 652-672, and in ASB, March, i. 352 sqq. (cf. G. H. Perts, Uiber die VHa Chrodegangi. Berlin, 1852). Oinsult: Rettberg, KD, i.. H 87-88; Hauck, KD, ii. 48 sqq. CHROMATIITS, crd-m^'shius: Bishop of Aqui- leia from 387 or 389; d. 406 or a little later. He was a highly respected and much revered contemporary of Ambrose, Rufinus, and Jerome, who owed to him many encouragements in scientific endeavors. In the dogmatic contro- versies of the time he was a bold defender of orthodoxy. The destruction of Arianism in Aqui- leia was his work. To the emperor Honorius he presented an opinion on Chrysostom, who was suspected at the Byzantine court, and Honorius officially transmitted it to his brother Arcadius. His exegetical writings include a treatise on the Gospel of Matthew, seventeen short writings, and an excellent popular homily on the beatitudes. The best edition of his works is that by P. Braida (Udine, 1816),reprintedinAf PL, xx. 247-368, where the literature is also given. G. KrCobr. Ohronloles, Books of 68 CHRONICLES, BOOKS OF. I. Name. II. Range and Divioions. III. Place in the Canon. IV. The Text. The Aramaic Targum (f 1). The Ssrriac Translation of the London Polyglot ({ 2). The Septuagint ({ 3). The Latin Translation of Jerome (f 4). The Masoretio Text (S 6). V. Contents and Purpose. VI. The Author and His Sources. L Name: The Hebrew title, Dibhre hayamimt of the two hlBtorical books standing, in the English Bible, between II Kings and Ezra may be translated ''the occurrences of the times"; for the first word expresses the content (history), the second the form (chronological). As this refers to time, the content can be only the sum of deeds or fortunes of men. But this meaningless general title can be but the practical abbreviation of a longer one, which either added the subject referred to (as in I Chron. xxvii. 24, " of King David "), or named a particular period within the whole time. In view of the greater part of the subject-matter, the (lost) explanatory clause could be only " of the Kings of Judah." Indeed, the Syriac gives the name " The Book of the* Reign of the Days of the Kings of Judah, which Bears the Name Sepher D'baryamin " ; the Arabic title is similar; and the Septuagint reads in Codex Alexandrinus and else- where "Deeds (?) of the Kings of Judah." Strangely enough, the Arabic, after translating the title adds, " the Hebrew is dibra hayyamim*^ ; in the Syriac the title is followed by the Hebrew name in the Syriacized form D*baryamin. The title " Chronicles " dates back to a conmient by Jerome in his " Preface to the Books of Samuel and Kings " (translated in NPNF, 2d series, vi. 490). n. Range and Divisions: The Masoretic notes at the end of Chronicles reckon 1,656 divisions, evidently meaning verses separated by a colon; actual count in the editions of Opitz and Michaelis gives the number as 1,764. Computations based upon smaller "commata" are as follows: the Talmud gives 6,880 (cf. H. L. Strack, Prolegomena criiica in Vettts Teetamentum Hebraicum, Leipsic, 1873, p. 11), the Syriac 5,603, Nioephorus 5,500, codices of the Septuagint and Synopsis (cf. E. Klostermann, Ana- lekta zu Septuaginta, Hexapla und Patristiky Leip- sic, 1895, pp. 45, 81) 5,000, the Canon Monmisen only 4,140. The division into two books is com- paratively modem, unknown to the Masora and the canon-catalogues. Origen (cf. Eusebius, HUt eccl.t VI. XXV. 2), Epiphanius, Synod of Laodioea, Athanasius, and Rufinus state expressly that Chronicles, given by the Septuagint as two books, is to be looked upon as one. The Septuagint divides it after the death of David, a principle adopted by the Syriac and Arabic; the former has, however, another division after II. v. The codex AmiaHnus of the Vulgate has blank spaces after I. ix. and I. xxix., and writes I. x. 1 and II. i. 1 m red ink, suggestive of early division at those points. m. Place in the Canon: Tradition has two places for Chronicles among the Kethubhim (see Canon of Scripture, L). The order fol- lowed by the German manuscripts and by the printed Hebrew Bibles is: Ps., Pro v., Job, the five Rolls (arranged according to the Jewish church-calendar), Dan., Ezra^Neh., Chron. The position of Chronicles, following Ezra, suggests to the memory the remark of the Mishnah: ''Chron- icles is given only for investigation "; Daniel and Ezra were edifjring to the congregation, whereas Chronicles was rather scholastic in character. More likely, however, is it that Daniel and Ezra- Nehemiah seem to belong together, as on the one hand, a statement of the divine programme and the story of its partial fulfilment, and, on the other hand, as possessing literary kinship, since both belonged to the time of Cyrus, and both were largely transmitted in Aramaic. The Tahnudic order is similar: Ruth, Ps., Job, three RoUs, Dan., Esther, Ezra-Neh., Chron. The other arrange- ment is the totally different one of the Masora: Chron., Ps., Job, Prov., the Rolls, Dan., Ezra- Neh.; as though Chronicles together with Ezra, ranging from Adam to Jaddua, furnished the historical setting for the rest of the Kethubhim (cf. Augustine, ChrisHan Doctrine, II. viii. 13, in NPNFf 1st series, ii. 541). According to a Mas- oretic codex TschuftUe (13 *Adath dibburim, cf. H. Strack, in G. A. Kohut, Semitic Studies^ London, 1897, p. 570) this order is that of the Land of Israel, and is the only correct one, to be adopted ulti- mately by all scribes; whereas the other, in which Chronicles or Esther stand at the end, is called a corruption by the people of the Land of Sinear. Among the old translations of the Christian Church is the fanciful order given by Junilius and by Epiphanius. The other transmitted catalogues either join Chronicles to Ezra, to Kings, or separate them. That gives four arrangements: (1) Kings, Chron., Ezra (so Origen, Cyril of Jerusalem, Canon of the Apostles, Apostolic Constitutions, Council of Laodioea, Gregory Naziai^zen, Amphilochius, Atha- nasius in his " Easter Letter,*' Vulgate, Rufinus, Ethi- opic Bible); (2) Kings, Chron., . . . Ezra (Melito, Augustine, Codex Alexandrinus, Codex Amiatinus, Canon of Hippo, Decreta Gelasii, Canon of Monunsen, the Second Order of Cassiodorus); (3) Kings, . . . Chron., Ezra (First Order of Cassiodorus, Jerome in "Preface to the Books of Samuel and Kings"); (4) Kings, . . . Ezra, Chron. (Rescript of Inno- cent I.). In general, it seems that where Jewish scholasticism did not influence the Christian Church the latter's arrangement was ruled by the con- viction that Ezra-Nehemiah was intended to be the continuation of Chronicles, which latter in its relation to Kings bore in the Septuagint correctly the name " Deeds (?) of the Kings of Judah." IV. The Text: For the verification of the Mas- oretic text there are excellent means in the trans- lations from the early Hebrew. The Aramaic Targum is a translation which shows, 1. The on the one hand, a close following of Aramaic the letter of the text and an endeavor Tarsmm. to reproduce it correctly; and, on the other hand, an attempt to satisfy the spiritual hunger which mere names and brief statements must create in the hearers 69 Chronicles, Books of aaxious for edification and entertainment. This could be brought about by etymological interpre- tation (as in I Chron. viii. 33: " He was called Ner because he lighted the lamp, Hebr. Ner, in the synagogue "); or by an interpretation of the text more in harmony with the spiritual vision of later Judaism, to which the war-heroes of old had become ilocton of the Law. The zeal of late Judaism for interpretation recognizes no limits; it knows how to harmonize, to combine, to do away with dif- ferences and contradictions. The spirit which beguiled the prophets of Ahab is Naboth's (II Chinon. xviii. 20); the Syrian archer (II Chron. xviii. 33) is Naaman; Jabez is identified with Othniel (I Chron. iv. 9); Ner's original name is said to have been Abiel (I Chron. viii. 33). On II Chron. xxviii. 3 it conunents that Hezekiah's life was saved from the fire by divine intervention. But the Midrash-additions do not hinder in most eases from recognizing the text which lay before the authors of the Targum. Hence it is worth while for the textual critic to consult this earliest translation in restoring the text. A Syriac translation, not found in the Peshito, with a translator other than he who rendered Ezra, is found in the London Polyglot alongside of itii Arabic translation. This latter is an excellent help in correcting the many textual mistakes of 2. The **^® Syriac; but where both have the Syriao same omission, it is difficult to deter- Transla- mine whether the omission is purposed tionofthe by the translator (as perhaps in I London Chron. xxvii., xxvi. 13-32; II Chron. Polyglot, xvi. 12) or whether it is due to a corrupt Syriac text, or to a shorter Hebrew text (II CJhron. xxvii. 8, also wanting in Codex Vati- eanus, cf. II Chron. x. 2). The nimierous agree- ments of the Syriac with the Targum show a thorough acquaintance with Jewish traditional interpretation. While the translator tries to apply the lesson of history to his time, makes blunders on account of his deficiency in historical knowledge, and takes delight now and then in etymological dallying, he supplies few of the Midrashic excur- suses BO characteristic of the Aramaic. The ad- ditions to the text are either helps to a correct understanding (as in II Chron. xviii. 6, xvi. 10), do away with apparent contradictions (so in II Chron. X3d. 6, xxii. 3), are ba^ed upon scholastic theories (as in I Chron. viii. 33, 34, 39, 40, ix. 2), or attempt to give to the story a greater definite- ness and completeness, using for that puipose not legend but Biblical lore (II Chron. xxi. 11, xxxii. 1, 9, xxxiii. 20; I Chron. vi. 13, xix. 16). The longest addition is found in II Chron. xi. where w. 4-17 are taken from I Kings xii. and xiv. For the rest, the translator followed very closely his Hebrew copy and was very anxious to give the idiom of the Hebrew, but here the sparseness of tradition as to the meaning of technical expressions led him into many queer errors (as in I Chron. xv. 16, XX. 3, xxix. 19; II Chron. viii. 5, ix. 27, XXX. 3, etc.). Many of his odd mistakes are due to a misreading of the Hebrew text (I Chron. xi. 8^: II Chron. xxiv. 4, xxv. 13, 16). But because be peraiits himself to be influenced by the Hebrew letter his translation deserves to be considered wherever it differs from the Hebrew. Of the Greek translations, since remarkably few variants of Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion have come down (Field, in his Hexapla, Origenis Hexaplorum quoB superauntf London, 1867, gives also those of Lucian), only the Septuagint requires attention. It is a most important witness, since it has no other object in view than to render the Hebrew text into Greek, which it generally does in such a way that the Greek can with certainty be reconverted into the original. Seldom is there an un-Hebraic sentence (like II Chron. xxxvi. 13). There is abundant proof that Chronicles had a translator different from Kings (cf. A. Klostermann, Die Biicher Samuelis und der K&nige, 8. The Munich, 1887, on II Kings xxiii. 7). Snt*" Unfortunately, with the mass of '^ * names appearing barbaric to the copy- ists such a confusion has been imported into the genealogical tables that, as Origen and Jerome complain, it is difficult to decide how the original read. Moreover, the many recensions underly- ing the codices used by Swete differ so much that the exegete, in spite of the many editions of the Septuagint, is still obliged to reconstruct for him- self its original readings by comparing the different recensions. In parallel passages that reading is preferable which in the context gives the better sense while differing most from the Hebrew, since the Greek has often been brought by Jews into harmony with the text of their times. Consequently where there is an excess or a deficiency in the text, the one which has it is to be considered nearer the original than the one which agrees more closely with the Hebrew. But it does not follow that the Hebrew should always be corrected by the Sep- tuagint, though it may be that the aberration can be detected through the Greek as due to purpose or mishap on the part of the Hebrew. As already noted, it was the habit of the scribes to seareh for parallels in other Biblical books, and to write any addition either in the margin or in the text; in such cases, the recension which has the shorter text is to be preferred if the Hebrew text contains the longer text. Again, it may happen that the inferior Septuagint text which has the shorter reading is still to be preferred to the better Sep- tuagint text with the longer reading, if this reading can be shown to have its parallel elsewhere. In his preface to Chromatins Jerome asserts that it was his purpose in his Latin translation to correct the many variations in the Septuagint by means of the Hebrew; in the preface to Donmio and Rogatianus he makes evident that he used the old Latin translation of the Septuagint. To be abso- lutely sure in the use of his Hebrew authority he had the help of a Jewish rabbi of Tiberias, with whom he went over the entire book. 4. The In using Jerome's translation one has _^^*^J. therefore to bear in mind, in the of JeromeT ^*' place, that his endeavor was to give an intelligent Latin translation, and, secondly, that in spite of his own higher cul- ture and better taste he permitted himself to be influenced by the Jewish interpretations of his Ohronioles, Books of ChryBologns, Petms 70 teacher. He has the good sense to follow Lucian's Septuagint in I Chron. iv. 22 rather than the Jewish fiction of the Targum. But when, contrary to his custom, he translated in the same verse the proper names Jokim, Kozeba, Joash, and Saraf , his action can be explained only as due to the influence of his Hebrew teacher. When one tries, with the help of the versions, to solve the many riddles found in the Masoretic text, the latter proves to be a descendant of an older type which has come to its present condition through omissions or additions, misreadings or scribal errors, corrections or interpretations. But even this older type is not the text written by the author. It bears like marks of change, but for want of older witnesses it is less frequently pos- sible to bring proof of the fact. For example, I Chron. i. 11-16, 17^-23 according to the Septuagint are very likely additions; similarly I Chron. i. 4-10, 30-34', 35-54; I Chron. ii. 3** are transferred from Genesis; I Chron. xi. 10-41'* from II Sam. xxiii. (cf. A. Klostermann, Oeschichte IsraeU, Munich, 1896, p. 157). Against such designed augmentation exists another kind due to scribal errors, as when, owing to the identity of I Chron. viii. 28'* and ix. 34^*, the copyist repeats viii. 29-38 in ix. 35-44. It is natural that to such *rj^* additions correspond omissions, as f^J^ ^ when a scribe having copied out of the wrong column, noticing his mistake, skips as much of the right as he copied from the wrong. For it is certain I Chron. x. 1 is the con- tinuation of a story which had begun a new book, the beginning of which was lost and thus the story became unintelligible. How much confusion may be created by the omission of a single word may be seen in I Chron. iv. 7-10, where the student is at a loss what to make of Koi (verse 8) and Ja^be^ (verse 9) until he adds with the Targum weko^ at the end of verse 7. Similarly the Lucianic codices still retain in I Chron. ix. 18 the two words which were lost in the Hebrew. In these cases the claim of antiquity is with the versions. In other cases the right reading exists alongside of the wrong one, as when in I Chron. vii. 5 one copyist wrote a meaningless word, and another put the correct reading in the margin, whence it found its way again into the text, where both stand to-day. These few examples suffice to show that the original text of Chronicles was written in a more careless orthog- raphy than that of the books generally used in the community. For that reason it was misunder- stood and misinterpreted by punctuators and translators. In very early times it had already undergone correction and variation, had been ex- tended by interpretations and quotations of parallel passages, and had lost its original form through additions and omissions. The consequence is that it, more than any other Biblical book, needs a thorough revision before it may be used as a witness or its claims denied. V. Contents and Purpose: To tmderstand these, use must be made of Ezra-Nehemiah, which con- stitutes the second half of Chronicles. Examina- tion of Ezra i. 1-3* (=II Chron. xxxvi. 22-23) proves the unity of Chronides-Ezra-Nehemiah. For the meaning of the repetition is (cf. Nestle, TSK, 1879, p. 517) that the author thereby indicates that the story of Chronicles is continued in Ezra- Nehemiah. Just as Ezra-Neh. falls into three sections (cf. A. Klostermann, Geschichte IsrtuUf Munich, 1896, pp. 215-216) so with Chronicles, as follows: (1) I Chron. i.-ix., the Book of Genealo- gies, gives the place of Israel in the Adamic family of nations, a tabular ramification of its tribes, mostly of Judah and the Davidic family, of the Benjamites of Saul's family and of Jerusalem, of Levi and Aaron, and of a few families of Josephites. (2) The second section, I Chron. x.-II Chron, v., ends (as the Syriac correctly surmises) not with the death of David (I Chron. xxix.) but with the dedication of Solomon's temple. It describes how David became Israel's sole king, how he prepared the way for the temple, selected its site in Jerusa- lem, and collected the means for its construction; how the personnel of its service was organized and how Solomon became the divine means for the accomplishment of David's purpose. (3) The third section, II Chron. vi. to the end, narrates the history of the temple till its destruction, tells of good days and evil, of pious and godless kings, of faithful and neglected temple-service, of obedience and disobedience of prophetic teaching, and ends with the edict of Cyrus. It was evidently the purpose of the historian to bring before the little, politically dependent congregation of the insig- nificant second temple, which had been built by self-sacrificing religious zeal in obedience to the prophetic word, the ideal of ancient Israel as the adopted congregation of the h'ving God, revealing in its history both a stimulus and a warning. VI. The Author and His Sources: The Talmud says {Baha Batkra i. 14-15), "Ezra wrote his book (Ezra-Nehemiah) and the genealogies in Chron- icles." Modem critics conclude from doubtful in- dications that the author wrote in the beginning of the Greek period and, from his full description of cult and clergy, that he was a priest oraLevite. Certain it is that he wrote at a time when the mem- orabilia of Ezra and Nehemiah were consulted for the understanding of their time. Of high im- portance are the questions, what the author accom- plished, and how he obtained and handled his material. From the second half of his work (Ezra-Nehemiah), where he contents himself (cf. A. Klostermann, Geschichte Israels, pp. 216-217) with giving extracts from the autobiographies of Ezra and Nehemiah and from other official documents, the student may conclude that he used a similar method elsewhere. For I Chron. i.-ix. there was a multitude of genealogies valued the more highly the more the Dispersion and the little colony at home attempted to figure as the continuation of classic Israel. From the Lucian Codex (I Chron. V. 17) one receives the impression that the genealo- gies existed in the Book of Kings; so in I Chron. ix. 1, according to the Syriac. The same is true of the other two sections. The author knew the Book of Isaiah (II Chron. xxxii. 32), in which at this time stood already chapters xxxvi. and xxxix., also Samuel and Kings (II Chron. xx. 34, xxiv. 7, 23, XXV. 26, etc.), and the hymns of David and 71 Ohronioles, Booka of Ohrysoloffus, Petnia his chief musician. To appreciate our author rightly it is important to have a clear conception of this extensive Book of Kings. It is certain that it was finished only in the days of the Restoration, that it treated in the same manner as the canon- ical Books of Kings the history of both kingdoms. From this one may infer that Chronicles was in- tended to be a revised, enlarged edition of Kings, for the use and benefit of the new congregation, to pave the way to a theodicy. As the new Israel renewed its life around the new temple and wished to know of the past and of its organization, there were written books about the first years and the last yean of David, one about Solomon, one about the Judaic IdngiB, and one about the Israelitic kings. The last three still existed in 560 B.C. Besides these there was a collection of Judaic prophetic narratives. Then grew up the traditional inter- pretationa of the schools, vitalizing dead names, and finally the traditions of priests and Levites and important families. While it is true that imagina- tion has here a wide field, and that not all epochs received equally careful attention, nevertheless both author and editor acted in good faith, for the latter only arranged the matter which he extracted from the former, where he employed new material, cited his sources, and his statements could be veri- fied. The picture of the beginning of the cult which the chronicler and his forerunner carried in their soul may be totally different from that of modem critics, but the material which underlies that picture they neither invented nor did they purposely change its meaning. The historical books of the Bible, including Chronicles, were writ- ten for the practical need of the community, and the test by which they are to be judged is whether they satisfied it or not. Just here lie the limits of their value to the modem historian who would like to reproduce out of authentic docimients a picture of persons and events as the immediate eye-wit- neaaes had it. Like all historical books, even more ■0, because of its origin. Chronicles demands an able and cautious examination , if one would not sin against the Biblical book, nor against the sdenoe of impartial historical investigation. (A. Klostermakn.) BnuocmAPHT: Tbe best editioxiB of the Hebrew text are by 8. Beer And F. Delituch, Liber Chronicorum, Leip- aie. 1888, «ad by R. Kittel. in SBOT, New York. 1806. CritioJ diflcuasiiODs are by: A. Kuenen, HiMioriath-krir ImA Ondenodc . . . dM ouden VerboruU, i. 433-520, Leydta. 1887 (very thorough); K. H. Graf, Die geBchich^ luhem BUeiur dee Alien Teetamenie, pp. 114-247, Leipsie, 1866 (important); J. Wellhauaen, De ffeniibtte et famUiie Judaia q^a tn I Ckron. \i.-iv. enumerantur^ G^ttingen, 1870; idem. Proleoomtna, pp. 176-237, Berlin, 1883, Eof. traud.. pp. 171-227, London, 1885; G. T. Ladd, t>otlb\ee of Sacred Scripture, vol. i. passim. New York, 1883; W. E. Barnes, Reliaioue Standpoint of the Chroni- der, in American Journal of Semitic Lanouageet Oct., 1806; G. B. Gray, Studtee \n H^trew Proper Namee^ ehap. iii., LoodoB. 1806: W. Sanday, Bibhcal IneptraHon, ib. 1806; books on Introduction, notably Driver, Inibroduciion, ebap. XXL, and C. H. Comill, Einleitung, pp. 268-276, Freiboii. 1801. Among the best of the oommentariee »e. C. F. KeU. Ldpdc, 1870; 8. OettU, In Kurtoefauier Knmmtntar, Munich, 1880; and W. H. Bennett, in the Bxpoeilcr'B Bible, London, 1804. Very thorough di»- CQMons are in BB, 1. 763-772. and DB, i. 380-307. The Gvm. transl. in Kautieeh*s Die hea%oe Sckrift dee AUen TeHamentB, pp. 037-1012, Leipsie, 1806, is very useful for its pengraphing and indication of sources of the text. CHRONICON PASCHALE, cren'i-con pas-ca'le C' Easter Chronicle," also called Chronicon Alex- andrinum, or ConstarUinopolitanuin): A chrono- logical work, probably composed by a cleric who belonged to the entourage of Sergius, patriarch of Constantinople, 610-638. It extended from the creation of Adam to the year 629, but the beginning and end are lost, and, as preserved, it stops in 627. The name '' Easter Chronicle " is derived from the computation of the Easter canon, which forms the basis of Christian chronology. The author, except for his own time, confined himself to copying the sources (Eusebius, John Malalas, and others). The so-called Byzantine or Roman era is used for the first time as basis of the chronology. The Chroni- con paschale was edited by L. Dindorf in the Cor-' pus Scriptorum hiatoricorum Byzantmarum (2 vols., Bonn, 1832), reprinted in MPO, xdi. 69-1028. G. KrCqeb. BiBLioaRAPHT: H. Gelser, Sexhte Juliue Africantu und die bytanHniache Chronooraphie, ii. 1, Leipsie, 1886; K. Krumbacher, Oeechiekte der bytantinieeKen Literaiur, Mu- nich, 1807 (whera the literature is given). CHRONOLOGY. See Time. Reckoning op. CHRYSANTHOS, cri-san'thos, NOTARAS, n6- td'ros: Patriarch of Jerusalem; b. in the second half of the seventeenth century; d. at Jerusalem 1731. He was the nephew of the celebrated Do- sitheos (q.v.), patriarch of Jerusalem; having completed his studies at Padua and Paris, in the year 1700 he was created bishop of Csesarea in Palestine by his uncle, whom he succeeded in the patriarchate in the year 1707. He was a man of scientific culture and also a strong, energetic church- man. With force and success he applied himself to church reform in Palestine, by wbich he made bitter enemies of the Roman Catholics while doing much for his own monasteries. He encouraged theological science, to which he contributed by hif own writings, such as the " Histoiy and Descrip- tion of the Holy Land " (Venice, 1728) and " On the Mysteries of the Great Church *' (last ed. Venice, 1778). For the Greek Church he did great service through his edition of the *' History of the Patriarchs of Jerusalem" by Dositheos. Le Quien in his Ortens Chri8tianu8 has borrowed liberally from Chiysan- thos. (Phiupp Meter.) Biblxoorapbt: J. A. Fabridus, Bibliotheoa Qrctea, to, 702, xiii. 470 sqq., 14 vols., Hamburg, 1718-54. CHRYSOLOGUS, cris"o-l6'gU8, PETRUS, pfi'trus (*' Peter the Golden-worded ") : Archbishop of Ra- venna; b. at Imola (22 m. e.s.e. from Bologna) 406 (7); d. at Ravenna 449 or 450. He was a contem- porary of Leo the Great, and stood at the head of the Church at Ravenna at the time when that dty was the capital of the Western Empire. As a patron of art he is still remembered (cf. V. Schultze, Archaeologie der altchristlichen Kunstf p. 85, Munich, 1895). He is still more famous as an orator: his sermons betray everywhere that they dealt with a select and pampered public, which listened leisurely and " delighted in being startled," and they show a continuous striving for the sensational and the unusual. They are better written than most ser- mons of those times, bear witness to religious ex- perience and moral earnestness, and at times carry Ohrysolog^s, Petrus Chrysostom 72 one away with their pathos and the energy of their condensed diction. But finally the sententious un- rest, the compression, the avoidance of the simple, and the presence of much that is obscure or gro- tesque induce tedium in the reader. Yet through- out a great talent is recognizable, and much which would otherwise be repulsive is useful to the his- torian. In his sermons, gathered by Felix, arch- bishop of Ravenna (d. Nov. 25, 724), his by-name does not appear; it is found first in Agnellus (chap. 47), and seems to have been given him in order that the Western Church also might have its Chrysos- tom. What Agnellus knows of his life is taken partly from local tradition; how imcertain this had become in 400 years is proven by the mass of chronological errors and the confusion among the Peters, the bishops of Ravenna. That modem biographers know as much of Chrysologus is due to the fact that they take the Roman Breviary (Dec. 4) as a reliable source. The year of his birth and that of his death are equally uncertain (by Oct. 24, 458, Neo, bishop of Ravenna, appears). He was named Peter by his parents in anticipation of future greatness (cf. MPL, lii. 497), but that he was educated in a monastery can not be inferred from sermon 107. Agnellus says that Sixtus III. (432- 440) made him bishop contrary to the wishes of Ravenna. It is doubtful whether all the sermons in the edition by Felix are genuine. The title " «. Joannis epiacopi " which some of them bear in various manuscripts is strange, and may have been due to the copyist's confounding Chrysologus with Chrysostom, and a help to the confusion is the fact that the former used the tatter's sermons liberally. Sermon 149 is undoubtedly a translation of the speech of Severianus of Gabala delivered in the year 401 (cf. MPL, lii. 599a, with Neander, Chrysoa- tomuSf ii., 3d edition, Berlin, 1848, p. 1 14). How much of this absorption of foreign matter into his sermons is due to Chiysologus himself is impossible to deter- mine; but the principal matter is undoubtedly authentic. As a dogmatidan, Chrysologus wrestled with the problem of a theodicy (sermon 101); in spite of his letter to Eutyches, he leaned strongly toward Monophysitism, attacked Pelagianism,- was dependent upon Augustine (sermons 11 and 30), sympathized with Paulinism (sermons 108-116), " and at the feasts of the Saints preached more of faithful endurance than of works " (sermon 128). In his polemics he never named his adversary, but combated Arians, Pelagians, Nestorians, Novatians, and Manicheans. Sermon 6 was highly prized by the ancients, sermon 35 seems to have been used by Fulgentius, sermons 50, 142, 143 found a place in the Roman Breviary, while sermons 67-72 are valuable for the history of catechetics. In sermon 34 (MPL, lii. 299a) Chrysologus combated the conditional immortality of the Stoics from the text I Cor. XV. 52; in sermon 61 he touched upon the same subject, and the conclusion of sermon 62 asserted that the resurrection has the character of eternity because it is accomplished through the eternal Christ, which is better rhetoric than logic. (F. Arnold.) Bibliography: The SermonM, together with the authorita- tive bfe by Agnellus. were pubhshed Venice, 1750, re- printed in MPL, lii.; German lelect transl. by M. Held, Kempten, 1874. The life is also in MGH, Script, rer. Langob., 1878, pp. 307-375. New material is gathered by F. Liverani, in Spicileoium Liherianum, pp. 125-203, Florence, 1863. Consult: H. Dapper. Der heilioe Peinu Chryaologua, Coloffne. 1867; the biographical sketch by Held is in his tranal.. ut sup.; L. 8. Tillemont. Memoim . . . eecliaiiutiquM, xr. 184-195. 864-867; Ceillier. Au- tettn aeurit, x. 6-16; J. Feaeler, InatitutioneB pairologia, ed. B. Jungmann, ii. 2, pp. 240-256. Innsbruck, 1896; DCB, i. 617-518; KL, ix. 1898-1900. CHRYSOSTOM, cris^es-tem. Life to 398 (S 1). Patriarch of Constantinople. 398 (S 2). His Opponents and Controversies (S 3). The Synod ad Quereum (f 4). Chrysostom Banished (f 5). Writings (5 6). His Significance and Doctrine (S 7). John Chrysostom {Joannes ChrysastomoSf " John the Golden-mouthed ")» patriarch of Constanti- nople, was bom at Antioch, probably c. 345 or 347; d. near Comana, in Pontus, Sept. 14, 407. The name " Chrysostom," borrowed from Dion of Prusa, was given to him soon after his death. He came of a rich patrician family, and his father, Secundus, died soon after his son's birth; the boy was brought up by his mother Anthusa. At twenty he was among the pupils of the rhetorician Libanius at Antioch, and attended the lectures of the philoso- pher Andragathius. He intended at first to follow the law, but the details of the life displeased him, and he decided to leave the worid entirely, finding a companion in his fellow student Basil, of whom nothing more is known. He busied z. Life to himself now with the Scriptures, and 398. prepared for baptism, which he reoei\'ed three years later from Meletius, bishop of Antioch (c. 368, certainly before 370, in which year Meletius left Antioch). Almost inmiediately after, he seems to have been ordained as a reader. His teachers in this period were Diodorus of Tarsus and a certain Karterius, of whom nothing more is known; his friends were MaxLmus, later bishop of Seleucia, and Theodore, bishop of Mopsuestia. He himself tells of the strictness of the aacetic life which he now led in his mother's house. Declining a bishopric about 373, on his mother's death a year or two later he betook himself to a moimtain soli- tude near Antioch, where he spent four years in asoetic exercises with an old Syrian monk, and two more alone in a cave, imtil need of medical treat- ment brought him back to Antioch about 380. Probably in the early part of the next year, he was ordained deacon by Meletius, and priest by his successor Flavian at the beginning of 386. In this capacity he labored in Antioch for twelve years, laying the foundations of his fame as a preacher and teacher and distinguishing himself by the holiness of his life. When Nectarius, the successor of Gregory Na»- ianzen in the episcopal see of Constantinople, died on Sept. 27, 397, intrigue was busy with the new choice. The weak emperor Arcadius was entirely in the hands of his chamberlain Ehitropius, for whom the choice was interesting only as subserving his political plans. Theophilus, patriarch of Alex- andria, more diplomat than bishop, endeavored to 73 REUGI0U8 ENCYCLOPEDIA ChryBoloffus, Petrus Ohrysostom fill the place with one of his creatures, Isidore by Dsrae; but Eutropius, pursuing the policy in- augurated byTheodosius the Great in 381, was not disposed to support the Alexandrian influence in this manner, and gave Theophilus his 3. Fttriaich choice between consenting to the of Constan- elevation of John or facing serious tinople, 398. charges. He chose the former course, and John was consecrated on Feb. 26, 398. He threw himself with energy into the task of reforming manifold abuses, especially among the clergy. He drove out the "spiritual sisters,'' with whom many of them were living in a nominally spiritual marriage, and checked the parasitic habits of others who were mere hangers- on to the rich; he cut down the ecclesiastical ex- penses, and applied the saving to hospitals. Nat- urally his reforms made enemies for him, but they were poweriess as long as the court was on his side. Before long, however, he came into conflict with the all^x>werful favorite, whose shameful conduct he fearlessly rebuked; but before Eutropius could avenge himself, he fell from power (399), and was obliged to take refuge in the very church where he had himself violated the right of asy- lum to others a few years earlier. Chrysostom prote'Tted him from the soldiers who rushed in to seize him. Meantime the number of the devoted prelate's enemies was growing. Among them are named various ecclesiastics who were dissatisfied with his strict rule, and a number of rich and woridly women whose lives he had rebuked. He made fresh ene- mies at a council held at Ephesus in 400, where he dqxned six bishops who had obtained their office by simony. The empress, however, who now held the reins of government, still upheld 3. Hif Op- him, and when a male heir to the poncnts and throne was bom (401), he seems to Controver- have officiated at the child's baptism, sict. His position was none the less insecure, as was shown in the course of his con- flict with Severianus (q.v.) of Gabala who had gained a footing in Constantinople and was push- ing his ambitious plans there. Chrysostom for- bade him to preach; Severianus yielded and retired to Chaioedon, but Eudoda forced Chrysostom to recall him. A more dangerous foe was Theophilus of Alexandria, who had by no means given up his designs for the aggrandijsement of his see. He fomid a new occasion to press his claim that the bishopric of Constantinople belonged to his pa- triarchal jurisdiction. In the Origenistic contro- versy which then agitated the Egyptian Church, Theophilus found many of the monks of the desert recalcitrant and unwilling to give up their beloved teaeher Origen. Four among them of special influence, the " long brothers " Dioscorus, Ammo- iiius. Eusebius, and Euthymius, were banished by Theophilus, and went first to Palestine; pursued thither by the enmity of Theophilus, they went on to Constantinople. Chrysostom behaved guard- «fly and sought to effect a reconciliation. The- ophilus at first did not answer, and then adopted a hsughty tone. When it appeared that Eudoda took the side of the monks, be bent all his energies to their destruction and that of Chrysostom, who, he thought, stood behind them. He did not go himself to Constantinople, but sent Epiphanius of Salamis, whose narrow zeal was easily enlisted, to carry on the campaign against the alleged Origen- ism of Chrysostom. Epiphanius departed in ill humor without accomplishing an3rthing, and died on the way home. Chrysostom now ruined himself with the empress by preaching vehemently against the luxury of women's dress, in a way which she and others thought was aimed directly at her. Theophilus came to Constantinople at her summons, and found the train laid. He had assembled the bishops on whom he could count in a church in a suburb of Chaloedon, on the imperial estate called " The Oak *' (whence the gathering is known by the Latin name, Synodua ad Quercum), in the autiunn of 403, and began his synod when all was ready. There were thirty-six present, of whom twenty-nine were from Egypt (Photius, who has preserved a part of their proceedings, says forty-five, but perhaps some signed after- ward). The charges brought against 4. The Chrysostom, by some of his own Synod ad clergy, were for the most part of no Quercum. importance, and showed nothing but the eiunity of the accusers. Yet he felt, as he sat with forty friendly bishops in his palace in Constantinople, that the situation was a very dan- gerous one. Summoned to appear before the hostile synod, he made the condition that those who had expressed their intention to destroy him — ^The- ophilus, Acadus, Severianus, and Antiochus — should be excluded. Meantime application had been made to the emperor to compel his attendance in case of hesitation; when he still delayed, he was condemned in his absence and deprived of his bishopric. The emperor was notified and requested to enforce the sentence. Although it was obviously illegal, Chrysostom yielded to force and, when the emperor had confirmed the deposition, went into exile at Prsenetus (or Pronectus), in Bithynia (28 m. n.w. of Nicsea), after he had sought to calm the excited people in a wonderful sermon. The next night something alarming happened in the imperial palace — Theodoret spesJks of an earth- quake, but neither Socrates nor Sozomon give this — and it was put down to his banishment. The temper of the people, too, was threatening. The- ophilus thought it best to depart in haste, and a few days later an imperial messenger was sent to recall Chrysostom. The peace, however, was not of long duration. Two months later the strife broke out afresh, on a fresh affront to the empress's vanity. The prefect Simplidus had erected a silver statue of her on the south side of the great church, which was dedicated with loud rejoicings; and Chrysostom complained, in a sermon, of noisy popular festiv- ities which disturbed the devotions of the faithful. Again he was accused of intending to insult the empress i and once more she set herself to effect his downfall. A synod assembled in Constanti- nople, instructed by the absent Theophilus, and the pliant bishops, with but few exceptions, followed Ohrysostom Ohur, Blflhopiio of THE NEW SCHAFF-HERZOQ 74 the imperial will. The method to be employed gave rise to lengthy discussioius, until shortly before Easter, 404, the emperor or- 5. Chiys- dered Chrjrsostom to leave his church ostom since he had been condemned by two Banished, synods. The bishop said he would yield only to force; and force was em- ployed on Thursday in Holy Week, the adherents of Chrysostom being driven out of the church by a violent onslaught. He himself remained in the suburbs, strengthening his party, until on June 10 his enemies moved the emperor to further meas- ures, and on the 20th, after an affecting farewell, he took ship for Asia Minor, the country indicated for his banishment. The same night a fire broke out in the cathedral church, for which his adherents were blamed, and they were severely repressed. A feeble old man named Arsacius, the brother of his predecessor, was put in his place on June 26. But while Chrysostom was on his way to Cucusus in Armenia, his friends were not idle. Four bishops went to Rome with a letter from him, to move Innocent I. in his favor. The acts of the synod which had first condenmed Chrysostom were sent to Innocent shortly after by the opposite party, and he saw that the sentence had been illegal. He wrote to Theophilus that the affair should be brought up before a general council, and exhorted Chrysostom and his adherents to steadfastness. Honorius, the Western emperor and brother of Arcadius, also wrote to the latter in favor of the banished bishop, but without success. The out- come was a breach of conmiunion between Old and New Rome. After the death of Arsacius (Nov. 11, 405), Atticus became bishop in the fol- lowing spring, and persecuted the " Johannites " with renewed severity. Chrysostom himself was ordered transferred from Cucusus to Pityus, a still more desolate place; but the hardships of the journey were too much for him, and he died near Comana, the modem Tokat, in Sivas, Asia Minor. Thirty years later his remains were solemnly trans- lated to Constantinople and buried with honor in the church of the Apostles, Theodosius II. thus atoning for the deeds of his parents. The writings of Chrysostom may be divided, according to his biographer Palladius, into " homi- lies, treatises, and letters." The list known as the CaUUogus Augustanua (from a lost Augsburg MS.) numbers 102 separate titles, including none which is not genuine. His sermons cover practically the whole Bible, including, for example, seventy-six on Genesis, ninety on Matthew, eighty-eight on John, fifty-five on Acts, and 242 on the Pauline epistles, without counting those on Galatians, which are preserved only in the form of a connected com- mentary worked up from the sermons. 6. Writings. There are also discourses for all the principal festivals, and a large number on various saints, of which the most notable are the seven on Paul. The " treatises " are partly apolo- getic and partly practical, the latter being the more numerous. The earliest we have are two letters to Theodore, afterward bishop of Mopsuestia, who, on account of a love-affair, was thinking of returning to the worid. To justify his declination of a bishopric, about 373, he addressed to his friend Basil the six books " On the Priesthood "; according to Socrates, the composition of this work falls in the period after his ordination as deacon, i.e., after 381. To this period probably belong also the two books " On Penance," and the three against the enemies of the monastic life. The superiority of the single life is dealt with in a work on virginity, written about 380, and two smaller works of about the same period, ** To a Young Widow " and " Against a Second Marriage." With these may be classed the two pastoral letters of his early Constantinople days, directed against the abuses in clerical life already referred to. His letters, about 245 in nimiber, are almost all from the period of his second exile, and give an interest- ing picture of his life and his cares. Of works im- properly attributed to him there is no lack. The liturgy bearing his name is not his, though its relation to that of Antioch deserves a closer in- vestigation than it has yet received — as does the " Synopsis of the Old and New Testaments." The " Incomplete Work on Matthew," consisting of fifty-four sermons, is a Latin original composed by an Arian toward the end of the sixth century. The significance of Chiysostom's work does not lie in the domain of scientific theology, on the development of which he had but little influence. He was preeminently a practical man, and it was through practical teaching that he left his mark. A disciple of the school of Antioch (q.v.), he dis- played throughout his life the characteristics of that school. The pupil of Diodorus of Tarsus is easily to be recognized in his sober exegesis, occu- pied with determining the literal sense of his text. Constantly bearing in mind the needs of his flock, he naturally did not carry the exegetical prin- ciples of his school to the extreme which is found in the commentaries of Theodore of Mopsuestia; but he was a master of the art of developing prac- tical truths for every-day life from the Scripture. Thus his sermons surpass Origen's in practical value as far as they are inferior to them in speculative insight. His was not, in any case, a systematic mind; the logical development of dogma from point to point he left to others. Where the Church had decided, the question was settled for him. He took his stand on the Nicene theology, and was ready to defend it against all comers. In order fully to understand and respect this position, one must remember the difficulties in which the church teachers of Antioch were placed — how they had to contend not only against pagans and Jews, but against Christian sects of eveiy description, the various kinds of Gnostics, Novatians, 7. His Sig- Arians, Manicheans, and many others. nificance In his anthropology and soteriology and ChryBostom faithfully represents the Doctrine, teaching of Diodorus. Man, consist- ing of body and soul, is disposed both to good and to evil, and thus there is no room for Manichean dualism. For the development of the first man, as he was created perfect and immortal by God, the possession of free will proved fatal. Not knowing how to use his freedom, man rebelled against God and brought on himself all the ooxnq>- 75 Ohrysostom Chur, Bishopric of tion of mortality. Thus sin spread from our first parents to the whole race. He expressly contro- verts the view, however, that sin is an integral part I of our nature. Then death -followed as a conse- quence of sin. From tlus'position man attains the good by means of his free will, which can turn away from evil; but this is only possible by means . of dime grace. Yet the operation of grace does not impair our free will; our own decision must come first, and then God begins to do his part. Tliat the East took so little interest in the contro- % ^Tfsy about graoe is due largely to the position assumed by the school of Antioch and especially by duysostom. His ascetic inclination is shown not only in his early writings, but in many passages of his sermons. His Eucharistic doctrine is spe- cially noteworthy; he asserts emphatically the identity of the bread and wine with the body and blood of Christ, going so far as to say that Christ ) drank of his own blood at the Institution. The change is caused by the words of institution repeated by the priest; their operation is analogous to that of the words of creation spoken by God. The consequence of this view for his conception of his office is obvious, and in this point his influence on succeeding ages is important. It should be added that he never had an opportunity to develop his , thoughts carefully; they were uttered in sermons of which only a small part probably was ppepared beforehand, and perhaps received no very thorough revision after they had been taken down in short- hand. What made his preaching so powerful was not only the native rhetorical force which he un- doubtedly pn«ae«acd^ hut his gjc^^ in illimunating the questions of daily life from the Scriptures, in guiding men in their path through the world. He could venture to preach in his own way, " and not as the scribes." He boldly rebuked the rich, to Fuch an extent that he WaS^rometiineisTjIamed for it, and no fear of the displeasure of the powerful ever restrained him from declaring the truth of God. (Ebwin Preuschen.) Bibliography: The Ojmra wen publiahed in 13 vok., Paris, 1718-38, and Veniee, 1 734-41 . SeleetionB are translated in NPNF, 1. acr., voto. ix.-xiv. The beet account of the life and activities is in L. 8. TiUemont, MimoireB . . . eccUn- •itiipu9. xi. 1-406. 547-626. Paris. 1706. In English the best nnsle work is W. R. W. Stephens. St Chryoutam, hia Life amd TimM, London, 1883. On the life consult further: A. Neander, Der heUi{fe Chryaoatamuat 2 vols.. Berlin. 1848. Eng. transl., London. 1845; E. Martin. S. Jmn CkryaoaUmu, 3 vols.. MontpeUier. 1860; R. W. Bush. U/t and Timea of Chryaoatom, London. 1885; F. H. Chase. CKryaoatom, a Study in iKe HiaL of InUrpretaUon, Gambridce. 1887; A. Puech. 8. Jean Chryaoalome, Paris. 1891; Schaff. ChriaHan Church, iii. 033-941 et passim; idem. St Chryaoatom and St AuguaHna, New York. 1891; DCB, L 518-535; J. H. Willey. Chryaoatom the Orator, Cincinnati, 1906. On special subjects connected with Chryvoetom consult: F. Ludwig, Johannea Chryaoaiomua in aeinem VerhAltnia sum byaaniiniachen Hof, Brauns- berg. 1883; C. Molines. Chryaoalome orateur, Montauban. 1886: L. Ackermann. Die Beredaamkeit daa . . . Jo- hannea Chruaoatomua, WOrxbuig. 1889; S. Haidacher. Die Uhre dee . . . Johannea Chryaoatomua Hber dia StArift- Mspirafum, Salzburg. 1897; G. Marohal, St Jean Chryaoa- InacP^tfis. 1898.
CHUBB, THOMAS CHUBB, THOMAS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHUBB, THOMAS: English Deist; b. at East Harnham, near Salisbury, Sept. 29, 1679; d. in Salisbury Feb. 8, 1747. He was a tallow-chan- dler's assistant all his life, and had only a most ele- mentary education. After Whiston published his Primitive Christianity Revived (1710) Chubb wrote for his own amusement a defense of the idea of the supremacy of the One God and Father expressed in the preface; the manuscript was shown to Whiston, who corrected it and had it published under the title The Supremacy of the Father Asserted (London, 1715). This brought Chubb into notice, he obtained patrons, and wrote many tracts which were much read and talked about, and Jonathan Edwards noticed and criticized his doctrine of free will; lack of knowledge and training, however, impair the value of his work. His principal wri- tings were A Discourse concerning Reason (London, 1731), in which he undertook to show that reason is a sufficient guide in matters of religion; The True Gospel of Jesus Christ Vindicated (1739), in which he advocates the pregnant idea that Chris- tianity is not doctrine, but life; and The Author's Farewell to his Readers^ published in Posthumous Works (2 vols., 1748), which is the most complete summary of his opinions. He denied special providence, miracles, literal inspiration, and appar- ently the resurrection of Jesus. He was a man of exemplary life, attended church faithfully, and con- sidered himself a Christian. See Deism, I., § 6. Bibliography: L. Stephen. Hist. of English Thought in the 18th Century, i. 163. London. 1880; J. Cairns. Unbelief in the 18th Century, ib. 1881; DNB, x. 297-298.
CHUR, BISHOPRIC OF CHUR, BISHOPRIC OF

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHUR, BISHOPRIC OF: A bishopric named from the capital of the Swiss canton of Grisons. The valley of the upper Rhine was incorporated with the Roman Empire in 15 B.C., after the sub- jection of the Rhaetii. Communication with Italy was provided by two great roads, one over the Septimer, the other over the SplQgen. Where the Rhine bends to the north, a casteUum was erected for their defense, and this was the origin of the town of Chur. When Christianity penetrated this region is uncertain. The oldest information shows a Christian community already fully organised. In 452 Bishop Abundantius of Como signs the decrees of a Milanese synod for himself and for the bishop of Chur, who is absent. The only notice going further back is the fantastic legend of the British king Lucius (see Eleutherub), who is said to have labored as a missionary under Marcus Aurelius, at first in Germany and finally in the vicinity of Chur; but this is mere legend, though relics of a certain Lucius are mentioned in a petition of Victor II. of Chur to Louis the Pious in 822. The Roman bishopric of Chur seems never to have gone out of existence; its continuance in the sixth century is attested by an inscription (of later date, it is true) in the monastery of St. Lucius, conmiem- orating Bishop Valentinian, who died in 548; and in the seventh by the signature of Bishop Victor at the Council of Paris, 614. This is explicable by the fact that the Roman population was never exterminated. The Alamanni settled in eastern Switzerland, but Theodoric maintained peaceful relations with them, and the old institutions were not disturbed. The connection with Milan still continued in 842, but was dissolved not long after- ward, and Chur was incorporated with the ecde- Church Army Church, The Christian 76 siastical province of Mainz. In the Frankish pe- riod the diocese was practically coterminous with the present canton of Grisons. Under Louis the Pious the diocese had more than 230 churches. The principal monasteries were Disentis, first men- tioned in 736, and Pfeffers, founded about 731. The diocese was maintained through the Refor- mation changes, though most of its inhabitants became Protestants. At present its jurisdiction embraces the Roman Catholics in the cantons of Grisons, Zurich, Glarus, Schwyz, Uri, and the prin- cipality of Liechtenstein. (A. Hauck.) Bibliography: T. von llobr, Codex DipZomoiiciM, Samm- lung der Urkunden tur Oeachichte Cur-ROtiena, 3 vols., Chur. 1848-«1; Rettberg. KD, i. 216, ii. 132; P. C. Planta, Das aUe RiUien, Berlin, 1872.
CHURCH ARMY CHURCH ARMY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH ARMY: An organization of laity in- side the Church of England for aggressive mission efforts, founded by Rev. Wilson Carlile (q.v.) in 1882. It is the resultant of four similar move- ments started simultaneously and independently at Kensington, London, by Mr. Carlile ('* The Church Militant Mission "), at Richmond, London, by Rev. Evan Hopkins (" The Church Gospel Army ")» at Oxford by Rev. Francis Scott Webster (" The Church Salvation Army "), and at Bristol by Rev. Charles Isaac Atherton, canon of Exeter (" The Church Mission Army "). The present head- quarters are at 55 Bryanston Street, Marble Arch, London, W. In 1883 the first army organ, The Battleaxe was begun, and the first army training home was opened at Oxford, which in 1885 was moved to London. In 1885 the first conference of officers and workers was held, at which the report was made that whereas in Jan., 1884, the Army had only fifteen lay officers, then it had forty-five, and that its income was £2,500 in regu- lar subscriptions and £4,000 in working people's pence. The Church Army Blue Book for 1906 shows that at the end of 1905 the Army had 318 evangelistic officers, eighty-four men's labor home managers and assistants, forty-six associate evan- gelists, 285 mission-nurses, and twenty-three asso- ciate mission-nurses. The great object of the Army is to reach the unchurched and submerged masses with all agencies which tend to uplift soul and body. It differs from some similar movements in that it works inside the Anglican Church. It never begins opera- tions in a parish without being invited by the vicar, works under his direction, and stays as long as he thinks it desirable. Its converts, therefore, help to increase the number and efficiency of the church agencies. At first there was prejudice against its name and its utterly unconventional methods for gathering a crowd, its out-of-door preaching and testifying, and to its employment of laity, both men and women, generally of very little or no culture and often of past lives of vice and crime, to speak on Christian themes and win new hearers and professed Christians to a deeper religious ex- perience. There was also considerable disorderly conduct on the part of its audiences. But now the Army is accepted both by the Church, whose errant children it recalls, and by the classes bene- fited as an accredited helper and friend. It has now much to do with the body, having " labor homes, work test shelters, labor relief depots for men, women, and youths who are unemployed. criminal, inebriate, unfortunate, outcast; coffee taverns, lodging homes, boarding homes, employ- ment agencies, fresh air homes, old clothes depart- ment; test farms for emigrants and others "; and undertakes to send emigrants to Canada. But spiritual work, after all, commands the first place, and " the Church Army works in town and coun- try parishes by trained evangelists and mission- nurses working under the clergy; in country places by vans continually itinerating; in crowded slums by pioneer tent evangelists; in workhouses and reformatories by sp>ecial missions; in convict estab- lishments and local prisons by special services, personal interviews, and aid to discharged pris- oners." Its lay workers are largely recruited from the working class, but they are carefully trained and under strict discipline. The Church Army is a limited liability company; each member of the executive is responsible up to £100, and each patron or president up to ten shillings, in the event of the winding up of the Society. Bibliography: £. Rowan, WiUon Carlile and the Church Army, London, 1905; The Church Army Blue Book (an- nual).
CHURCH BUILDING, TAXATION FOR CHURCH BUILDING, TAXATION FOR

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH BUILDING, TAXATION FOR: Orig- inally (see Taxation, Ecclesiastical) all the property of each diocese was vested in the bishop, who had, accordingly, to provide for all necessities, including church-building. The Roman decrees of Simplicius (475) and Gelasius (494) prescribe a division of this property into four parts, one to serve for the Fabricaecclesice (q.v.), i.e., both build- ing and the maintenance of public worship. Simi- larly, in Spain one-third was set apart for this purpose (Synod of Tarragona, 516). A different principle came up in the Teutonic law, by which, since the church in a sense belonged to the land- owner, he was required to provide for keeping it — unless, indeed, he chose to let it fall into decay. The church authorities strove against this con- ception; e.g., the Synod of Frankfort (794) con- ceded this kind of ownership only on condition that the church should not be allowed to fall into decay. Nevertheless, the later ecclesiastical prin- ciples are really founded on Prankish law. After the development of the system of benefices (see Benefice), the holders of benefices were required to contribute for this purpose from what they had over their necessary living (congrua). And in case of necessity the parishioners were obliged, as had been the case in the Frankish law, to bear their part of the burden. There is evidence that this provision was sometimes enforced in the Middle Ages, though the wealth of the Church and the generosity of benefactors made it seldom necessary. There was great local diversity in the laws on this whole subject; and the Council of Trent, which settled the standard of modem Roman Catholic practise, failed to unify them, lea\'ing plenty of room for local traditional customs and laws. According to its decree (Sess. xxi. 7, de reforma- Hone), a distinction is made between patronal and other churches. In the case of the latter, the bur- 77 Church Army Churoh, The OhrlstlAa den falls primarily on the building-fund, though usually the capital is not to be touched, nor even the income entirely exhausted. Appeal is rather to be made to the classes who are bound to con- tribute bjT local law or custom; to all who receive income from the church, the holders of the benefice and tithes in particular, in a proportion to be judicially determined; if there are not enough of these, to the parishioners, including non-resident Iindowners, in case the tax is real and not personal —and only in this last case is the exaction independ- ent of the taxpayer's personal belief. In patronal rhurches the patron is included among those who ('hare this obligation; but only (by the present interpretation) when he receives a portion of the " fruits " of the benefice. In cathedrals the burden T?<B first on the building-fund, if there is one; if not. upon the bishop and chapter, then upon the cathedral clergy, and finally upon the diocesan dergy. In some places, as in Prussia, a certain percentage of the fees in each church is levied for the support of the cathedral. In the Protestant churches of Germany, the obligation comes pri- marily upon the building-fund and next upon the congregation, and is frequently a land-tax. (E. Frisobsbg.) CHURCH CHEST (Ger. Kirchenkasten, Lat. Area ecclesice): Properly a receptacle for church funds, but applied also to the funds themselves. Then it signifies the portion of the revenues appropri- ated for the expenses of divine service and for the maintenance of the church building (see Fabrica EccLEsiiE). In a narrower sense it is a box (Lat. truncus, Ft. tronc) put in a church to receive offer- ings of money, which seems to have originated in connection with the Crusades. Innocent III. (1198-1216) ordered that one should be put in every church, and, in spite of opposition and mocking jibes, the custom persisted. I. Iieuui« and Uoe of the Word. II. The Ckiireh in th« New Testament. The lotentions of Jeeus (SI). The Sock Apoetle (| 2). Rdayov of the Twelve (S 3). The Kiosdom and the Church (S 4). Memberahip of the Churoh (S 5). Church Offices Determined by Church Needs (| 6). ill The Church in Traditional Chria- tianity. 1. Id PrimitiTe Catholicism. CHURCH, THE CHRISTIAN. Tendency toward Legalism (S 1). Bignifioance of " Catholic Church" (8 2). The Ignatian Episcopate (S 3). The Cyprianic Episcopate (8 4). Views of Augustine (S 5). Later (or Roman) Catholicism in East and West. Eastern Church Mystical (SI). Western Church QovemmentaI(S 2). " Papal " and " Episcopal " Sys- tems (S 3). IV. Protestant Doctrine of the Church. WycUf's Teaching (f 1). Luther's Teaching (f 2). Questions Left Unsettled by the Reformers (S3). CAlvinistic Doctrine of the Church (8 4). Post-Reformation Doctrines of the Church (S 5). Pietistio and Rationalistic Doe- trines (S 6). L Heaning and Use of the Word: The word "church" (from Greek hfriakon, "the Lord's," ic, " bouse " or " body ") meant in original Christian usage either the universal body of Christian be- YKYtn or a local congregation of believers. In the Komanoe languages the idea is expressed by a word from another root (Fr. ^glise, Ital. chiesa, from Greek ekklisia '* the [body] called together " or " called out "). The Old Testament had two wordfl to express the idea, ^edhah and kahal (Lev. iv. 13, 14), both meaning " assembly," the latter implying a distinctly religious object. In modem usage the term is employed to denote also the build- ing in which a body of (Christians meets for worship. An extension has taken place in recognised usage in accordance with which men speak of the Bud- dhist or the Jewish Church, meaning the whole body of believers in Buddhist or Jewish teaching. tL The Church in the New Testament: It has been disputed whether Jesus intended to found a church, i.e., a particular, organized association of his disciples, differing specifically from the existing national unity of Israel. He proclaimed the near- ness of the kingdom of Ciod, and then announced that it was already present. His discourses dealt with tl^s kingdom, with the con- 1. The ditions for membership in it, and with latsattons the blessings to be enjoyed within it. *"••"•• The question is whether there is a connection between the foundation of fioch an organised body of believers as has been mentioned and the heavenly kingdom which is to be ttt l^> in the world by divine power. The state- ments and parables in the Gospels do not, with the exception of Matt. xvi. 18, 19, bear on this question. In the parables, for example, of the sower, of the wheat and the tares, of the net, there is no word of any binding connection among those who enter the kingdom. In that of the leaven there is indeed the idea of the spread of the kingdom as a body with an objective unity; but we are not told how or to what extent an organic form is destined for it, nor how far it is to be distinguished from the or- ganic association of Israel. But in truth the disciples were actually, by the very fact of their adherence to Jesus, connected with each other. They formed the flock of the (xood Shepherd (Luke xii. 32; John x. 1-15).. They were associated by the fact that they and they alone were the children of the kingdom which had already made its appearance in the world. The opposition and hatred which they, as well as their Master, were to find on the part of the Jewish people and the world plainly made it necessary that they should exhibit an external imity, and herein dissociate themselves from their former fellows in nationality and religion. There is thus nothing surprising in the fact that Jesus speaks in two places of a community of his own which he is to found; it is surprising only that there are no more definite or detailed statements on the subject. It is significant that the first time that he spoke of this was when he had just received the first clear, divinely inspired confession of faith in iiim, and when he was beginning to prepare his disciples for his death. In that place (Matt. xvi. Ohuroh, The Ohristlan 78 18) he spoke of that oommunity in a general way; but in the other (Matt, xviii. 17 sqq.) he referred more definitely to the association of his followers as met together to deal with eyents and needs affecting their inner life. According to the former passage, he intended to build his i iT church upon the rock Peter, who just Apostle. ^^^^ ^^ taken the lead among the disciples with his confession. The word and its historical fulfilment must be con- strued by the context. It will not do to interpret the rock as faith in Christ. Peter is not the founda- tion in the sense in which Christ applies the term to himself (Matt. xxi. 42). But the church was originally built, as the Acts testify, upon the preach- ing and work of this " rock-man," though other apostles were joined with him (Eph. ii. 20; Rev. xxi. 14; Gal. ii. 9). Whether the promise in re- gard to the foundation had anything to do with a continuous government of the church, or with a line of successors to Peter, is one of the funda- mental points of controversy between Protestants and Roman Catholics. The twelve apostles were indeed designated for a position of prominence in the future organization by the status which they acquired in relation to Jesus during his earthly ministry, as witnesses of his deeds and the hearers of his words (John xv. 27 ; Acts i. 21, 22). But no definite difference in authority was provided between them Jj *«1*^ and other disciples; and their work ^* seems to consist not in the internal ^^f^^^ direction of the churches, but rather, as soon as these were once established, in further dissemination of the message. Christ spoke of sending " prophets and wise men cmd scribes " to give this message (Matt, xxiii. 34); but nowhere did he smn up such activities as are thus indicated into the terms of a fixed and limited office, or prescribe the manner in which any per- sons were to be appointed to discharge them. The names here used recall the pre-Christian dispen- sation, when such lii&its and external ordinances did not exist. To the preaching of the gospel of the kingdom and the cultivation of a religious and moral life in the power of that gospel, bap- tism (q.v.) was added by Christ's own ordi- nance, as would be known even without the gospel record by the way in which the rite at once took its place and in which it is spoken of by Paul as an essential element of Christianity. The act of baptism in itself had, as the baptism of John shows, no necessary connection with entrance into an organized society; but as soon as there was a society of Christians, it imdoubtedly belonged to that. Finally, the Lord's Supper (q.v.) , as he had instituted it for his disciples, was celebrated by them as a main element in their corporate edifica- tion. Evidently, therefore, the foundations already discussed were laid not only for a wider extension of the kingdom of God and for the development of the new life in its individual members, but for a corporate connection between them. Yet so far no reason has appeared for the negation of a theory upon which the new Christian conununity, spread- ing throughout Palestine and thence among the heathen, might still live under the external insti- tutions of the old covenant, until the great reve- lation of the kingdom which w^as expected at the return of its Lord. The working out of the truth expressed in the saying about putting new wine into old bottles was left to the increasing knowl- edge of the disciples, as conditioned by their wider experience. The existence and development of the church is inextricably interwoven with the realization of the kingdom of God in the worid. It would be wrong to press such differences as appear between the two conceptions as though the kingdom were the inner or ideal, and the church the *• ^® external or real. The kingdom lias andthe^ a real existence in its subjects and Church. ^^^^^ actual relations; it accom- plishes its destiny by means of the external preaching of the word, and announces itself by external fruits. The church, on the other hand, although like other associations of men it is an external union, is what it is only by virtue of its inner connection with Christ, who remains in the midst of it. There is nothing of an external nature which (if the words of Jesus are the only criterion) is necessary to the existence of the church which does not also belong to the realization of the kingdom. It is commonly said that the church was defi- nitely founded with the descent of the Holy Ghost on the day of Pentecost, and in fact it did on that day enter upon its career with full powers. But it must not be forgotten that the gathering was com- posed of the disciples who had already formed a coherent body in the name of Christ; to whom he had already said " Receive ye the Holy Ghost " (John XX. 22);' and from whose number, by a cor- porate act, the number of the apostles had been filled out after the fall of Judas. It had thus already been living and working, at first as an association within the larger one of Israel, though with its own meetings for worship and its own officers. The name ekklesta was undoubtedly applied to it very early, before the beginning of Paul's ministry, since he uses it as the universally current title for both Jewish cmd Gentile asso- ciations. It is commonly applied to the separate local bodies of which he spoke, but he used it in the same way for the whole body of Christians whenever he had occasion to mention it, in the older epistles (Gal. i. 13; I Cor. x. 32, xii. 28, xv. 9) as well as in that to the Ephesians, which some have tried to separate in this particular from the others; and it is so used in Acts ix. 31. Whether general or local, the church consisted of those who were " sanctified in Christ Jesus " (I Cor. i. 2) or " called to be saints " (Rom. i. 7), with a possible allusion to the etymological con- nection between kletoif ** called," and "h* hi™" f ^*^^**^* Paul's conception was charac- *'the^ ^ terized by a deep sense of the unity Church, constituted by the possession of " one Lord, one faith, one baptism " (Eph. iv. 5); and elsewhere the entrance into this united fellowship, both with Christ and with each other, was attached to baptism (Gal. iii. 27; I Cor. xii. 13). If the question is asked whether the church as an 70 Church, The Christian institution stands outside and above those who compose it, or simply consists of them, the answer must be that in the apostolic use of the word it is regarded as having its existence wholly in those who are called, not as though it had come to them from without but as though they were, by their calling and reception of the message of salvation and baptism, united with each other and with Christ into one body. Paul indeed spoke once of a " Jerusalem which is above " (Gal. iv. 26) as the mother of Christians, and therefore as preexistent; but this is not the same thing as the earthly church. He had in mind a common Jewish and apostolic conception, difficult now to realize, of a reality preexistent in heaven which was the prototype of the Old Testament theocracy, which had for its offspring the membere of the church on earth, who were bom from above, which, finally, was one day to descend in its completeness when the full reve- lation of the kingdom takes place (Heb. xii. 22; Vhil. iii 20; Rev. xxi. 2). The name *' church *' was applied solely to the earthly fellowship, not to the company of the departed saints (as in the later conception of " church triumphant ") — though in a Fense to them, as to the heavenly Jerusalem, the faithful on earth " are come " already. The vari- ous vital functions and activities of the church relate to mutual edification in God, whose word is to '' dwell in them richly " (Col. iii. 16); to the promotion of the moral and religious life in the individual members by loving admonition, en- couragement, and care. All the members of the church were regarded as having Qust as under the old covenant, Ex. xix. 6) a priestly position before God (I Pet. ii. 6, 9; Rev. i. 6, v. 10); they were to offer to him themselves, their bodies, their acts of praise, thanksgiving, and brotherly love as a sacri- fice (Rom. xii. 1 ; Heb. xiii. 15, 16). Each mem- ber had his own part in the common work of edi- fication; but the special gifts which enable him to perfomi it varied (see Charismata). This leads to the question of offices in the aposU^c church. The word diahoniai, ** minia- tries,'' in I Cor. xii. 5, denotes special functions incumbent upon definite members of the body in the service of the whole. While the word " office " is generally applied more strictly to functions com- mitted to a particular man, whether by church or state, the New Testament has no word for offices in this sense. The functions coming under this head would naturally cover the external direction of the church, in so far as this required definite institutions and formally i^pointed and recognized offioen. So the elders, or epiacopoi, stood at the head of the churches, and deacons were charged with the care of material needs and especially of the poor. Formal appointments or election and formal installation occurred; but the 6. Church New Testament nowhere gives a law T^^ ^^ prescribing this course. The needs of by Church ^^ church determined the arrange- If^Q^^ ment. Thus the apostles, originally i^pointed by Christ to the headship of an his disciples, were obliged to abandon first the detailed care of the poor, and then, under the pres- •we of their wider taaks and frequent absence from Jerusalem, the regular direction of the internal affairs of the church there. Besides the offices mentioned, prophecy was allowed to work freely under the impulse of the Holy Spirit. For the exercise of the function of teaching or admonition, the possession of the necessary charisma was held to suffice. The elders naturally took a prominent part in the instruction and exhortation that found place in the gatherings (I Tim. iii. 2, v. 17), but participation in it was by no means confined to them. The office of the apostles was imique, rest- ing upon its special institution by the Lord, con- cerned with the establishment of his kingdom and the original spread of the Gospel, and thus inca- pable of transmission to others. There was a notable difference between the churches of Jewish and those of Grentile origin, the former desiring to give the latter only such a position in the chiu*ch of God as the proselytes of the gate held under the old dispensation, while Paul, on the contrary, regarded both classes alike as saints and members of the body of Christ. The association of the various local communities into one church was not expressed by any formal con- stitution, but by the free conununion of fraternal love. At the close of the apostolic period, the epistles of John, while insisting strongly on the necessity of this loving union, laid down no rules governing external unity and said nothing of eccle- siastical forms. Nor is there any warrant [accord- ing to the views of some modem scholars] for see- ing in the " angel " of Rev. ii., iii. the early stage of an episcopal office; they are not the heads and rulers of the seven churches, but rather represent in each case the characteristic spirit of the particular church. See Organization of The Early Church. m. The Church in Traditional Christianity. — 1. In Primitive Oatholioism: Out of the ekkUaia of the apostles, and principally on the territory covered by Jewish Christianity, grew up a post- apostolic development which is called the Catholic Church. From the Evangelical standpoint we can but recognize in its conception of the way of salva- tion and the nature of the church a notable declen- sion from the original principles, which continued progressively down to the Reformation. Chris- tianity maintained itself, indeed, as an organic whole against the assaults of persecution on one side and heresy on the other; it set up as a per- manent standard for its religious belief the New Testament writings admitted to be apostolic, together with the canon of the Old Testament; and it undertook on the basis of these to formulate a summaiy of the common faith in its Rule of Faith (q.v.). But even in the subapostolic period there is evident a general weakening of the original spirit, a lack of vital comprehension of the plan of salva- tion as at first revealed, and a tendency toward a legalistic conception and regulation of Christian life, as well as to a conception of the church 1. Tend- which found its essence in external ^^^Za o"liii*^ces. And these ordinances, es- Leffl^sm P^^^^^ly ^ pertaining to the govern- ment of the church and the priest- hood, continued to develop until they ended in what is known as Roman Catholic Christianity. The OhUiToh, The Christian 80 explanation of this early development is not to be found, as the Ttibingen school attempted to show, in a fusion of Jewish and Pauline Christianity. It is rather to be sought in the fact that with the decay of the apostolic spirit and the wide expansion of Christianity the forces prevalent among men be< fore Christ's coming, which had been for a while held in check, resumed their sway as primitive fervor decayed. The postapostolic church needed, in view of its p>osition in the world, a more definite external organization; it is in the meaning and form given to this that a perversion of primitive Christi- anity is discerned. In the first stage of this de- velopment there was a diversity of tendencies in regard to the doctrine concerning the church. Clement of Rome, admonishing the Corinthians to unity and subjection to those who are over them, drew a parallel between the organization of the ruling office in the church (i.e., of an episcopate as yet identical with the presbytery) and the di- vinely appointed ordinances of the old law; between the gifts which the presbyters brought to God in prayer and the sacrifices of the Jewish priests. Somewhat later, however, a free prophetic voice was heard in the Shepherd of Hennas, which ven- tured to rebuke and warn the officers of the church. Its main subject was the purification of the church by repentance. The high place which the church had taken in the minds of Christians is shown by the idea that (recalling Paul's " Jerusalem which is above") it existed before the world, and that the world had been created for it. Presently, in Ignatius and in the Muratorian Fragment, a "catholic church" appears. The original significance of this phrase has been much discussed, and is still imcertain. Even at the date of these passages, it had already developed more than one sense. The church was called catholic when it was spoken of as constituting a united whole made up of different parts; and these parts were both local churches and single members. Ignatius compared the relation of the local church to its bishop with that of the catholic 2. Siffnifi- church to Christ; and similarly the canoe of Muratorian Fragment speaks of a " Oatholio catholic church whose edification the Ohnroh.** writers of the epistles had in mind even when addressing local churches or individuals. But the idea of a universal church comes out most strongly in contrast with the here- tics who by their personal beliefs and practises separated themselves from the great body of Chris- tians. With this catholicity was connected the idea that this church alone had the necessary character of embracing all true believers, the love that holds fast to unity, and the primitive Christian truth. The epithet " catholic " designates here not its extension throughout the whole world, but the inclusion within it of all Chrif«tians, whereso-. ever they dwell. As yet the definite sense applied to the term by Roman Catholicism was not ex- pressed by it. This is met first in the question of what constituted valid membership in this church; and according to the Catholic conception there was required the recognition of a definite exter- nal organization, ordained by God, and the ac- ceptance of a confession of faith sanctioned by the church. The idea of the episcopate comes out with remark&ble definiteness and dignity in the Ignatian epistles. Each local church was subject to its bishop, who stood in the place of Christ, with his presbyters about him like the apostles. Ignatius left imanswered the questions how the bishops as a class reached this position, how individual bishops were raised to it, how far they were endowed with special spiritual gifts and the churches assured against error on their part. The extent to which the elevation of the episcopate to 3. The such a position met a felt want of the Ignatian times is shovm by the calmneas with Episoopate. which it was accepted imiversally, with no record preserved of any dis- cussion on the subject. [This circumstance is naturally urged by Roman Catholic apologists, together with other arguments, as proving the apostolic and consequently divine origin ^ the episcopal office.] In the general view (cf. es- pecially Irenteus and TertuUian), the bishops stood in the place of the apostles, whose teaching office they continued, and thus guaranteed the preservation of the truth. Their succession from the apostles involved a second " note " of the church — ^apostolicity. From the idea of a specially guaranteed possession of the truth by the bishops in virtue of their historical connection with the apostles grew the belief in a particular charisma attached to their office. From Tertullian can be seen how the priestly title was attributed to the rulers of the church, and especially to the bishops, although the mediatorial fimctions later attributed to them were of gradual development. The church thus possessed a sacerdotal order, and the bishop stood out as high priest, pontifex maximiu (Ter- tullian, Hippolytus, Apostolic Constitutions). The Alexandrian theology, as in Clement and Origen, did nothing to check this development. It did, indeed, insist on the inner and spiritual side of the church, and claim independently to recognize, in its Christian gndsiSf the truth of the doctrines handed down by the apostles. But it had no word against the authority of the episcopal office, in which it recognized the inheritance of the apostolic pastoral function. Its philosophic and aristo- cratic gndsis was not fitted to contend for the spiritual character of true Christianity in the New Testament sense. A vigorous reaction did set in with the rise of Montamsm, which attempted to purify the church by casting out such members as were stained with mortal sin and holding those who remained to a high standard, in virtue of a spirit from above which was not subject to these ex- ternal offices. Thus Tertullian said, "The church is essentially and chiefly spirit," and contrasts this " church as spirit " with the " church as the body of the episcopate." But the spirit of Mon- tanism was not that of the New Testament; and it could not alter the course of the Catholic Church, which was then hard at work building up in the world its well-organized kingdom. A powerful representative of the progress of the latter is found in Cyprian, for whom the bishops are 81 Ohnroh, The Ohrlstias now essentially and without distinction the rulers of the church, endued with divine authority. The gpverament of the whole church belonged to the episcopate as a whole. Such strong statements appear as " the bishop is in the church and the church in the bishop/' " the church is a people united with the priest," " he can not have God as father who has not the church as mother/' The last was uttered against Novatianism, 4. The ^ whose members Cyprian denied the Cyprlanio possibility of salvation on the ground Episcopate, of their schism, and the validity of whose baptism he refused to admit. In regard to the conception of priesthood, which for him was centered in the bishop, it is observed that in the Lord's Supper the priest stood in the place of Christ, did what Christ did, offered the body of Christ (see BfASs). Even if all his expres- sions, like those of Augtistine, can not be taken in the sense in which the later Catholic Church would understand them, they still lead up to the highest function attributed by the latter to its priests. But Catholicism owes to Augustine the most and the deepest of the statements which express its mind on the subject of the church. Their occasion was a new separatist movement in favor of enforced sanctity, that of the Donatists. Augustine had a deep and vivid conception of the inner, spiritual being of the church, of the operation of the Spirit of God in it and in its members, of Christ living in it and them, of all-pervading and all-uniting love. Consequently it was not a mere controversial argu- ment against the Donatists when he distinguished in his doctrine of the church as the body of Christ between " the true body of the Lord " and a " con- fused " or " pretended " one, a distinction misinter- preted by his opponents as though he believed in - «-, two churches. According to his view ^ of grace, it is entirely a matter of the AuffuBtine. ^"® g™ce of God who among the mem- bers of the visible church is a member of the true body; and those who are predestined, evicn though they are outside the visible unity, vet belong to the invisible church. Still, it is the will of God to bring these into external communion, and participation in the blessings of salvation and real Christian love are possible only within this. He did not lay as much stress as Cyprian upon the divine right of the episcopate; but this was ad- mitted by his opponents and by himself, and against the Manicbeans he did appeal to the " succes- non of bishops " in the apostolic sees. The ques- tion then arose which of the two organizations, both provided with sacraments, priesthood, and episcopate, and both appealing to apostolic tra- dition, was the true Catholic Church. Augustine answered it by saying that the church had spread, according to the purpose of Christ, throughout the whole earth; and thus only that communion from which the Donatists had severed them- selves could daim the title of Catholic — ^as- f^uredly not their small sect, confined to a few districts in Africa. He made the belief of the individual Christian depend upon the authority of the church aa catholic in this sense of the word, God having confirmed it '' partly by miracles, III.— 6 partly by the multitude of adherents"; indeed, he went so far as to say " I could not believe in the Gospel if the authority of the church catholic had not forced me." How the authoritative judgment of this Catholic Church upon questions of doctrine and the Christian life was to be expressed Augustine did not definitely state; he regarded the Church as represented in its episcopate, but did not name any constituted organ for a declaration of the truth by this episcopate as a unit. Besides Augustine's statements, there is another important definition in the Commonitorium of Vincent of Lerins, which is in substantial agree- ment with them. According to him, there is a ** test of universal understanding," by which we are bound to believe quod semper, quod ubique, quod ab omnibus creditum est. Here, instead of an authority of the Church as one whole, an over- whelming majority must suffice, which comes more definitely to a majority of the " sacerdotal orders " and " rulers." Vincent contemplated further definition of the traditional doctrine; and this led to the questions how such a consensus is to be attained in order to assure people of the truth of such later definitions, and how far what is sup- posed to have been contained implicitly in the original deposit may be elevated to the rank of an article of faith. The Church as itself an object of faith requiring formal recognition was made a part of the formula of the African baptismal confes- sion, and directly introduced into the Con- stantinopolitan supplement to the Nioene Creed (381), ''in one Holy, Catholic, and Apostolic Church," and into the Apostles' Creed. 2. Later (or Boman) Oatholioiem in East and West: The foregoing has traced the development of the idea of one. holy, catholic, and apostolic church, with its priesthood and episcopate, which was common to both Eastern and Western Christi- anity. But the East laid much less stress upon the sacerdotal and episcopal office as a system of gov- ernment analogous to the legal discipline of the state; and it is noteworthy that both the schisms which arose out of questions relating to such or- ganization (Novatianism and Donatism) were of Western origin. The Greek Church 1. Eastern dwelt more on the idea of communion Ohoroh with the Incarnate Savior in devout Uyetical. contemplation and knowledge, and upon the representation of the work of redemption in the rich mysteries of the liturgy. Thus the priestly and episcopal organization never attained an established external unity for the whole church; and, without objection from the East, the *' one Catholic Church " developed there into a number of communities belonging to various states or countries and closely allied in their supreme government with the secular polity. To the Ro- man claims it opposed the idea of Christ as the sole head of the Church; and it developed no infal- lible organ for the decision of questions of faith. The possibility of development of the original sacred deposit, as maintained by Vincent of Lerins, was no longer strongly affirmed, and ultimately stagnation overtook any attempt at dogmatic inquiry. In the West, on the other hand, the definite or- OhoToh, The Ohristian 8S ganisation of the church at large took shape in the papal monarchy; the further history of Catholidfim and its idea of the church is really a histoiy of the Roman primacy (see Pope, Papacy, and Papal Stbtxii ). IrensuB had placed the Roman church, as founded by Peter and Paul, in the forefront of his appeal to apostolic succession and tradition, finding in it the preeminent survival of primitive leadership, and on this ground requir- *• 1^***^"^ i^g ^rom the other churches agreement Go^nna- ^^^ ^*' "^^ purely historical basis mental." ^^^ <i®^crM^06 to Rome developed into dogmatic insistence on the supremacy and infallibility of the church founded by Peter; just as Cyprian's view of the unity of the church as represented by and summed up in Peter and the authority given to him grew into the assumption and the dogma that this unity must have its per- manent visible representatives in the successors of Peter, each of whom becomes the visible head of the church, the representative of Christ. Pope Le6 I. claimed for his see the " cure of the church univer- sal," making it the head of the body from which the other members can not be separated and live. Though he thought of discipline and polity, not of the communication of grace or of the establishment of doctrine, his statements are strong enough to afford a basis for all the later claims of the papacy. It found powerful support in the recognition of its primacy by the emperors (cf. especially an edict of Valentinian in 445), and in the political position of Rome, while the German emperors in their day built up their whole ecclesiastical fabric on the as- sumption of subordination to one central authority. The process was a logical continuation of the im- pulse which had early endeavored to bring Chris- tianity to expression and to a firm position in the worid by a solid constitutional organization. More- over, the medieval nations, both Latin and Teu- tonic, had a marked craving for a representation of the divine and the heavenly by visible and tangible things — of the one heavenly Lord by the one Roman vicegerent, the crucified Savior by the host in the mass, the blessings of salvation by the sacraments. In its way the papacy did indeed, in its greatest representatives, a Gregory VII. or an Innocent III., accomplish much to fulfil this ideal. They held the church together amid all the wild tumults of the life of their day; they protected true moral and religious interests against the invasion of the world, and they stood for the maintenance of ethical discipline — ^though it is also true that they identified these interests with their own claims, that human ambition and avarice was not always excluded from their acts, and that finally the eternal commandments of God were subordinated to human decisions. The high papal conception of the church's con- stitution was not yet, however, a dogma sanc- tioned by a formal decision on the part of the church. Against its prevalence were not only the secular power (which endeavored to reverse the process and subject the church to itself) and the national spirit on which that power could rely (as in France against Boniface VIII.), but also the consciousness on the part of the bishops of the meaning of their office and a recollection of the earlier histoiy of the church; while the inequalities of papal clumicter and the great schism tended to stir up a spirit of protest and rebellion. Thus the so-called 3. 'Papal ""episcopal system" (see Episco- "»d? pact) was worked out mainly by oo^kl^ French theologians, such as Gerson and Systems. I^'Ailly, and represented in the great councils, where the theoiy was heard of a " universal catholic church " distinct from the Roman. The latter, consisting of pope, cardinals, bishops, and clergy, might err, and was subject to the authority of general councils, which represented not only the classes named, but also all true mem- bers of the body of Christ, and in which Christian princes and delegates of the universities were to have a voice. But the papal theoiy raised its head once more when the councils had succeeded in restoring unity, and dominated the Lateran Council under Leo X. The Thomist Sylvester Prierias (q.v.) maintained against Luther the proposition '' The Church uni- versal is essentially the assembly of all believers, practically the Roman Church and the pope; repre- sentatively the Roman Church is the college of cardi- nals, practically it is the pope." Of this view the Jesuits were Uie principal upholders. Bellarmine maintained against the Protestants the definition of the churoh as " the company of men bound together by confession of the same Christian faith imder the rule of legitimate pastors and especially of the one vicar of Christ on earth." The Council of Trent did not venture to make an outspoken decision between the papal and episcopal theories; and such a decision was expressed oxily after the latter had repeatedly tried to enforce its claims (see Gallicanism; Ems, Congress of; JANBiansT Church), in the Vatican Coimcil of 1870. IV. Protestant Doctrine of the Chuxch: The first medieval Christian body which, while holding fast to the general Christian faith, abandoned that doctrine of the church sketched above was the Waldenses. They considered themselves members of the church of Christ and partakers of his salva- tion, in spite of their exclusion from organised Christendom, recognizing at the same time a " church of Christ " witbjn the organization whose heads were hostile to them. There is not, however, in their teaching any dear definition of the nature of the church or any new principle in reference to it. The first theologian to bring forward a conception of the church radically opposed to that which had been developing was Wyclif; and Huss foUowed him in it. According to him the chureh is the "totality of the predestinated"; ^' y^^h*** ^^^'^j as in his doctrine of grace, he ^^^ " followed Augustine, but took a stand- point contrary as well to Augustine's as to that of later Catholicism in his accoimt of the institutions and means of grace by which God communicates the blessings of salvation to the predestined, excluding from them the polity of priest, bishop, and pope. He denied the divine institution both of papal primacy and of the epis- copate as distinct from the presbyterate, and attrib- uted infallible authority to the Scriptures alone. 83 Ohuroh, The Ohrtstiaa The idea of both Wyclif and Huss was thus not of an actually existing body of united associates, but merely the total of predestined Christians who at any time are living holy lives, scattered among those who are not predestined, together with those who are predestined but not yet converted, and the faithful who have passed away. Luther defended Wyclif's definition at the Leip- sic Disputation of 1519, in spite of its condem- nation by the Coimdl of Constance. But his own idea was that the real nature of ihee^' the church was defined by the words Teaching following its mention in the creed — " the communion of saints," taking the word " saints " in its Pauline sense. These (al- though sin may still cling to them) are sanctified by God through his word and sacraments — sacra- ments not depending upon an organized, episco- pally ordained clergy, but committed to the church as a whole; it is their faith, called forth by the word of God, which makes them righteous and accepted members of Christ and heirs of eternal life. Thus the Lutheran and, in general, the Calvin- ist conception of the church depended from the first upon the doctrine of justification by faith. In harmony with Luther's teaching, the Augsburg Confession defines the church as "the con- gr^ation of saints in which the Gospel is rightly taught and the sacraments are rightly adminis- tered." In one sense the church is invisible, since the earthly eye can not tell who has true faith and in this sense is a '' saint," but in another it is visible, since it has its being here in outward and visible vital forms, ordained by God, in which those who are only " saints " in appearance have an external share. The church, too, always has need of some sort of external forms, of human ordinances, in which to clothe the administration of the means of grace, the preaching of the word, and public wor- ship; but these must not claim divine sanction or unconditional obligation. There was, however, one thing on which Luther insisted as essential — that the public administration of the means of grace entrusted to the church by God should be performed only by persons duly called to that function, who were to feed the flock with the word of God. His conclusion of its necessity is drawn not from any divine revelation or law, but from the nature of the case and the need of a settled order. The division of offices, the placing of superintend- ents or bishops over the pastors of the local churches, was considered a matter of variable human arrangement. While Luther rejected the papal claim to condition salvation by its forms and ordinances, declaring them anti-Christian and opposed to God's will, he recognized the possibil- ity of sanctified believers and true members of the body of Christ living within the Roman Church, because even there, in spite of all corrup- tion, the power of the word and sacraments was still working. Here is a difference between the Reformation view and other postapostoUc con- ceptions of the church. For the first time there were two bodies with opposite religious principles, each accushig the other of grievous error, and yet one of them admitting a communion in grace with the other, and indeed with all Chiii»- tians of whatever name who cling to the funda* mental elements in the message of salvation. It was in this sense that the Reformers taught one catholic church, spread throughout the Christen- dom of all times and places, the unity of which lacked external organization, but was sufficiently established by its possession of one invisible head, one faith, one baptism. Its holiness is shown by the fact that Christ is its head, and that the sancti- fying grace of God works within it; its apostolidty, by its original foundation at the hands of the apos- tles and its continued resting upon their word. The view here set forth left unsettled a number of questions which then came up for the first time and influenced later theological movements. To what extent the pure preaching of the Gospel and due administration of the sacraments was necessary; how far the name of a church of Christ might be given to a particular church which was lacking in these requisites; how far an effort should be made to attain a pure expression of Evangelical truth in the shape of creed and dogma — these were some of the questions. The last led to the distinction be- tween essentials and non-essentials, and to that between the Gospel, or the simple preaching of the word of God as a source of life and grace, and theo- logical dogma. Another question was the external government of the church. If it was not regarded as a matter of divine institution, who 8. ^^^ was to establish and exercise it ? Who ^"mi ^^ ^ organize the churches that tied by the ^^^ springing up outside the andent Beformers. ^^ traditional Christendom? Luther seems to haveoontemplated originally a free organization by these true believers them- selves into a church with simple. Evangelical wor- ship and disdpline; but historical drcumstances led to this function, as well as the continued direc- tion of the church, being left largely to secular princes and magistrates, as charged by God with the maintenance of morality and order among Chris- tian people and with the enforcement of the fiist as well as the second table of the decalogue. This result was brought about partly by the fact that for years a hope was cherished of a reunion with the old episcopate, and such institutions as were set up were regarded as to some extent provisional. So by degrees the organ of the supreme direction of the Lutheran Church came to be in the hands of consistories appointed by the local secular govern- ment, and the share of the other members of the church was reduced to an assumed tadt consent to legislation. Melanchthon's later teaching differed somewhat from Luther's. He was influenced by a fear of spiritualistic fanatidsm and a desire to see the Evangelical religion firmly and practically established. He considered the Christian church visible on the ground of its self-expression in the preaching of the word and administration of the sacraments; and he emphasized its institutional character much more than Luther. He dung as long as possible to the desire for reunion with the great, firmly established traditional church. Among Lutheran theologians it was not till after Chemnitz that the doctrine appeared and prevailed which Ohuroh, The Ohristian Chnroh Diet 84 distinguished between the visible church as the ** assembly of the called " and the invisible church existing within this, as the sum of all the really faithful or sanctified or regenerate. This distinc- tion belonged originally to the Calvinists (see below); though, unlike them and Wyclif, the Lutheran theologians had in mind not the predes- tined, but all who were within the real, existing inner body. The idea of the objective and external use of the means of grace is thus no longer connected, as by Luther, with the idea of a church which is still proclaimed invisible, but with that of a visible church within which the saints also partake of those means of grace. The Lutheran Church is thus in its essence an institution existing for the conmiunication of grace by these means, in relation to which the individual members assimie a receptive attitude. The Reformed leaders also designated the church as the congregation of believers or saints, and made the preaching of the pure word of God a condition of its existence. But they laid stress on the dis- tinction between the visible and the invisible church, taking their conception of the latter from Wyclif and Huss. Zwingli not only allowed the significance of the sacraments to drop out, but even minimized that of the revealed word, outside of the sphere of influence of which he believed that there were elect among the heathen. Of this last belief Calvin knew nothing, though he, too, considered the church as the invisible fellowship of the predestined; and he emphasized much more than Zwingli the neces- sity of the word and sacraments, laying besides a peculiar stress on the exercise of government and discipline, through teachers, pastors, and elders. The definite Calvinistic conception found ex- pression more or less in the various confessions. Thus . the Heidelberg Catechism de- 4. Oalvin- gjjgg ^jj^ church generally as " a J^^^^r company elected to life," assembled ^Tu^ohf* by God through his Spirit and his word. That of Geneva has the phrase " body of the faithful whom God predestinated to eternal life "\ but besides this church, which is recognized by faith alone, it speaks of a visible church with definite signs. The Westminster Con- fession mentions both visible and invisible side by side. The great difference between Lutheran and Calvinist views lay in their attitude toward the means of grace. The church could not be to the Calvinist an institution for conveying grace, on accoimt of his idea of the absolute sovereignty of God and the operation of the Spirit as entirely independent of created means. Again, the ener- getic effort to sanctify God's people for his service led to a sort of new legalism in both corporate and individual life among the Calvinists; while Luther- anism tended either to a Quietism in which the church contented itself with offering the means of grace and the individual with receiving them, or to a worldly spirit which abused the liberty of the chilli r-^n of God. As t;) the question of external organization and governnunt, Zwingli wished discipline to be exer- cised not by special ecclesiastical organs, but by those who stood in general at the head of the Chris- tian people, thus leading to Erastianism (see Erastus). The theory of necessary independence of the state was a later growth. As for organiza- tion, different theories were held. Presbyterianism developed its teaching and ruling elders, and its general synodal constitution based on the local presbyteries; the Independents or Congregational- ists erected no general organization, identified the functions of pastor and elder, and put discipline and the decision of questions affecting the church into the hands of the local churches; Quakerism denied that any such forms or laws 6. PoBt- ^ere permissible, appealing to Scrip- ti ]So' ^^'^ ^ support of its contention. The trines of P^**®^ ^^ *^® Church of England is a the peculiar one. While the doctrine of Ohnroh. i^ Articles on the Lord's Supper is distinctly Calvinistic, it defined the church, imder the influence of Melanchthon's later teaching, is '' a visible congregation of futhful men " with the pure word of God and due administration of the sacraments. With its episcopal organization, it preserved more the character of official Christianity than any other Protestant body; but the doctrine of the necessity of the apostolic succession supposed to be there preserved was not stated in the Articles, and did not become influential imtil a later period. After the dominion of Protestant orthodoxy, which marked the period with both its strength and its weakness, followed another in which the newly aroused subjective piety departed more or less from the rigid forms of corporate church life. The tendency of Pietism was rather to erect " little churches" for the satisfying of spiritual needs; and the devotion which thus found e. PletiBtio Q^pgggJQQ took on a narrow, legal- ^^*^ istic, and rather Calvinistic character, alistio^oo- "^^^ came rationalism, with its reUg- trines. " ^^^^ indifferentism and lack of belief in the importance of the church, as that importance had been understood in both eariy and Reformation times. To it the church was merely an association on a par with other human and earthly societies, and it asserted with great positiveness that Christ himself had no intention of foimding a church in the received sense of the word. But it would require far too much space to trace in detail all the later variations of local or individual attitude toward the complicated ques- tions which have been here discussed. It may, however, be remarked that the tendency to form churches wholly independent of the state and receiving no support from it is characteristic espe- cially of the Reformed bodies, though, as we have seen, it can not be traced back to Zwingli or to Calvin. Connection of any kind with the state was felt to be prejudicial to the liberty of self- expression claimed for the Christian Spirit. The " free church " movement manifested itself first and most forcibly in Scotland, in the Secession Church of 1733, the Church of Relief of 1752, the union of both under the name of United Presby- terian Church in 1847, and particularly the Free Church of 1843, the two last having effected a further imion in 1900. See Church and State. (J. KesTUNt.) 85 Ohnroh, The Christian Ohuroh Diet Bibliography: Od the early church and its const! tation the best book is E. Hatch. The Growth of Church Institu- tvoiu, London, 1887. Consult further: W. Sclater. Orig- inoi Draught of Ike Pnmitive Churdi, Oxford, 1840; 8. Davidson. Ercienaetuat Polity of the N. T., London, 1850; L. Colenuui. Ancient ChrieHanity Exemplified, Phil- sdelphia. 1862; T. Witherow. The Form of the Chrie- tian Chtirek , . . the Conetitution of the N. T. Churdi, Edinbuish, 1888; C. J. Vaushan. The Church of the Fir»t Day*, London, 1890; J. Hammond. What doee the Bible •ay about the Church, ib. 18M; O. Pfleiderer. Chriatian Origina, New York. 1906; J. C. V. Durell, The Historic Church. An Eeaay on the Conception of the Chriatian Church . . . in the eub-ApoUolic Age, Caxnbridgfi, 1906; K. Adam, Der Kirchenbegriff TertuUiane, Paderborn, 1907; DCO, I 324-330. On the idea of the church: K. Hackenschmidt. AnfAnge dee katholiechen Kirehenbegriffa, Straaburg. 1874; R. See- berg. Studien tur Oeeehiehle dee Begriffa der Kirche, Er- lan«rn, 1885; W. Palmer. Treatiae on the Churdi of Chrut, 2 vob.. London. 1842; W. G. Ward, Ideal of a Chriatian Church, ib. 1844; E. Sch^rer. Eaquiaae d'une thforie de Vi^iae ckrHienne, Paris. 1845; J. J. White, Bxpoaition of the Church and ita Doctrine, Philadelphia, 1855; R. Whately. Kingdom of Chriat Delineated, London. 1860; J. Bannennann. T*he Church of Christ, . . . Nature, Pavers, Discipline, and Government, 2 vols., Edinburgh. ISfi8; idem. Scripture Doctrine of the Church, ib. 1868; Eree Eceiesia, . . . the Essential Unity of the Church in aU Agee. New York, 1868; H. R. Reynolds, Eceiesia, Church Problems, London, 1870; 8. 8. 8chmucker. Unity of Christ's Church, New York, 1870; J. J. McElhinney, Doctrine of the Church, Philadelphia, 1871 (with bibliog- rapby); J. Kdstlin. Das Wesen der Kirche nach Lehre und Gesehichte dee N. T.'s, Gotha, 1872; E. M. Goulbum, The . . . Church; its divine Ideals, Ministry and Inatitu- tinna, London, 1876; A. de Gasparin, L'£gliae adon nTcngiie, 2 vols.. Paris. 1878-79; H. Schmidt. Dm /CircAc, I^eipflic 1884; £. D. Mozris, Eedesiology, New York. 1S85; W. Bomemann, Kirchenideale und Kirdienrefor- men, Leipnc. 1887; H. J. Van Dyke. The Church, her Ministry and Sacraments, New York. 1890; F. A. Milne. Eetlesiolcgy, Boston, 1894; A. Westphal. Qu*eet^ce gu'une f^ise. Pans. 1896; J. B. Johnson, The Church and the Sacraments, London. 1898; E. A. Litton, Church of Christ in its Idea, Attributes and Ministry, ib. 1898; P. F. Jala- guier. De Vigliae, Paris, 1899; C. Gove, The Church and the Ministry, London. 1900; G. D. Boardman. The Church ieceUeia), New York. 1901; J. Ireland, Churdi and Modr- em Society, 2 vols., ib. 1903-04; H. Gallwits, Die Orund- lagen der Kirche^ Leipsie. 1904; G. Vos, Teadiing of Jesus eoneeming the , . . Church, New York, 1904; A. H. Charieris. Church of Christ, its Life and Work, London, 1905; E C. Daigan, Eedesiology, Louisville, 1905; J. W. Leoe. Ecdeeiologieal Essays, London, 1906; J. A. Kern, The Idea of the Church, Nashville, 1907. On the constitution of the church: R. Parkinson, The Constitution of the VieiUe Church, London, 1839; F. D. Maoriee, The Kingdom of Christ: . . . Principles, Con^ stitmtion and Ordinances of the Catholic Church, 2 vols., ib. 1842; F. Brandos, Die Verfassung der Kirche nach erangdisehen GrvndsAlzen, 2 vols., Elberfeld, 1867; G. A. Jacob. Ecdeeiastical Poli^ in the New Testament, New York. 1874; J. Cunningham. The Growth of the Church in its Organiaations and Institutions, London, 1886; J. H. RiSX. Comparative View of Church Organisations, Primitive and Protestant, ib. 1887; W. D. Killen. Framework of the Church, Edinburgh, 1890; J. Jebb, Divine Economy of the Church, Phihuielphia, n.d. On the aim and mission of the church: J. Harris, The Great Commission, London, 1852; J. Sanford, Mission and Extension of the Church, ib. 1862; W. H. Fremantle, The World ae the Subject of Redemption, . . . the Func- tions of the Church, ib. 1885; J. M. Lang. The Church and Us Social Mission, New York, 1902. CHURCH COUNCIL (cancUium ecclesicB, Kir- ckenrat): A meeting of the authorities of the Church to take counsel and make decisions in re- gard to church affairs. Councils may be ecumen- ical, of the whole Church, or of the Church of a single countiy, or of a province, or even of a single church, in which case it is a committee chosen from a congregation to represent it (see Councils and Synods). In the Roman Catholic Church origi- nally the laity had no share in the councils, but in the course of time assistants had to be found among them for the clergy, especially in financial matters. These assistants were at first chosen by the church authorities; only in the nineteenth century have the laity had a right to take part in the selection. In regard to councils in the Evangelical churches, see CoNGREGATiONALiSTs, IV.; and Polity. (F. H. JACOBSONf.) CHURCH DIET, GERIIAN EVANGELICAL (DEUTSCHEREVANGELISCHER KIRCHENTAG) : A convention of delegates from the Evangelical churches of Gennany — the Lutheran and Re- fonned, the churches of the Union, and the Moravians. Originating in 1848, its chief aims were : (1 ) to imite the Gennan Evangelical churches ; (2) make provision for the Church in case of a sep- aration of Church and State; (3) to oppose the imbelief'of the time; and (4) to ameliorate the mis- erable condition of the people. The real conductor of the whole imdertaking was Von Bethmann- Hollweg, professor of law at Bonn, who presided over the first session and was the leader until the last meeting. In 1848 he published a treatise, Vorachlag einer evangelischen Kirchenveraammlung im laufenden Jahre 18J^, in which he advocated a call to all Evangelical Christians of the Gennan nation. Simultaneously and independently, the idea occurred to Philipp Wackemagel (q.v.), of Wiesbaden, and two of his friends, P. Heller, pastor of Kleinheubach-on-the-Main in Bavaria, and Dr. Haupt, then pastor of Rimhom in the Hessian Odenwald. Their ideas found ready acceptance at a conference of ministers from Frankfort and the neighboring states, Nassau, Hesse, and a part of Bavaria; and a commission was appointed to " dis^ cuss and prepare the convocation of a general eccle- siastical convention of Evangelical Germany." The first general convention was held Sept. 21, 1848, at Wittenberg. Five hundred participated in it, the leaders being such prominent men as Von Bethmann-Hollweg, Stahl, Wackemagel, Schmie- der, Domer, Nitzsch, Mtiller, and Krummacher. Of the resolutions adopted the following are the most important: (l)The Evangelical commimities of Gennany meet for the purpose of forming a church alliance. (2) The Evangelical Church Alli- ance is not a union which obliterates the confes- sional churches, but a confederation of churches. (3) The Evangelical Church Alliance comprises all ecclesiastical communities which stand upon the basis of the Reformed confessions, especially the Lutheran, the Reformed, the Union, and the con- gregations of Brethren. (4) Each commimity which joins the Alliance retains its relations to the State and its independence in matters of teaching, service, and constitution. (5) The aim of the Evangelical Church Alliance is the care and advancement of all common interests of the church commimities be- longing to it. The Eisenach Conference (q.v.), which was called into life in 1851, did not come up fully to the idea of the church alliance, but the Congress for Home Missions was an immediate Ohuroh Disoipllne 86 result of the efforts for a church alliance. The Church Diet was at first held every year, later every second year. In 1872 the last Diet was held at Halle. Although it did not bring about church alliance, it was for a quarter of a century a rally- ing-point of Uving church forces. (WiLHELM BAUBf.) CHURCH DISCIPLINE. I. In the Apostolic and Postapostolio Periods. II. In the Roman Catholic Church. III. In the Lutheran Churches. Methods and Results (§1). Modem Requirements (§ 2). IV. In the Reformed Churches. The Zwinglian System (§1). Calvin's Basal Principles (§ 2). Genevan Ecclesiastical Tribunals (| 8). In France (§ 4). In Great Britain (§ 6). In Holland and Germany (§ 6). Modem Modifications (§ 7). V. In the United States. Church discipline is a means of securing and maintaining the spiritual purity of the Christian Church. This exercise arises from the fact that the Church is a human institution, the members of which are subject to the limitations and weaknesses of humanity. The Christian congregation, there- fore, like every other community, needs a means of self-protection in order to suppress or eliminate whatever might impair or destroy its life. But, from the constitution of the Church, the character of its discipline is purely spiritual. Therefore the only means which can properly be employed is exclusion, partial or total, of those whose acts jeopardize it. L In the Apostolic and Postapostolic Periods: The center of the Scriptural doctrine of ecclesi- astical discipline is Matt, xviii. 15-18; and its practical application in the apostolical church is learned from I Cor. v. and II Cor. ii. 4-8. A mem- ber of the Corinthian congregation had married his stepmother, and the congregation had suffered the deed. Paul then wrote to the Corinthians that the offender should be exoommimicated, and "delivered unto Satan." His words produced such an impression, not only on the congregation, but also on the offender, that, when he wrote again to the Corinthians, Paul could recommend mercy. It is, however, not only for such flagrant offenses as the above that Paul demands punish- ment, but also for minor failings by which a man is made a burden to his fellow men (II Thess. ill. 6); and he warns the congregations against heresy, for it cats like a canker (II Tim. ii. 17). A heretic, after admonishing him once or twice in vain, avoid (Tit. iii. 10); do not even bid him Godspeed (IlJohn 10, 11). The punishment, however, must never be administered in a spirit of retaliation. Church discipline, though necessary for the self- protection of the church, has as its aim the recla- mation and reconciliation of the offender; hence in the spirit of love it must dictate its punishments (II Cor. ii. 6-8). That the discipline is exercised by the Church is indicated in all the passages cited except that from Titus, where the direction is given for personal guidance alone (cf. verse 9). The apostolical institutions of Excommunication (q.v.) and reconciliation lived on in the postapostolic church, and during the period of persecution be- came even more peremptory. Under Decius, whose goal seems to have been the total destruction of Christianity, there occurred, by the side of the most admirable examples of faithfulness, so frequent instances of defection that a special regulation for the reconciliation of the lapsed became a neces- sity. This regulation, which continued valid down to the fifth century, established a course of penance which ran through various stages, and comprised a period of several years; but its severity naturally called forth devices of evasion and subterfuge, such as the Ubelli of the con- fessors (see Lapsed), and church discipline became somewhat lax. A reaction toward greater severity followed, and the Montanists declared that the excommimicated ought to remain for their whole life in a state of penance, while the Novatians affirmed that the Church had no right at all to forgive the lapsed, though the Lord might be willing to do so. MeanwMle the developing organization of the Church had reached the department of discipline, and the penitents, who had been excommunicated and desired to be received back into fellowship, were divided into four classes and compelled to pass through as many stages of penance (see Excom- munication). n. In the Roman Catholic Church: The union of Church and State led to developments in dis- cipline, the most important of which was the im- position of civil penalties for spiritual offenses. This was carried to the extreme of capital punish- ment, inflicted for heresy in the case of the Spanish bishop Priscillian and six companions, 385 a.d. The many sentences of deposition from office accompanied with exile during the controversial period attest the alliance of Church and State in the infliction of church discipline. Penitential disci- pline in its four grades was continued from the earlier period and was sanctioned by the councils of the fourth century. Yet the alliance of Church and State and the controversial activities produced a concentration of disciplinary attention upon her- esy which allowed grave offenses against morals to go unpunished. A noteworthy exception to this was the refusal of Ambrose of Milan to administer the communion to Theodosius I. because of a mas- sacre by the latter's soldiers in Thessalonica. In the early Middle Ages the extension of the Church among the barbaric races brought about further systematization. Discipline was administered by the bishops through synodical courts. The Peni- tential Books (q.v.), particulariy the Liber pomi- tentialis of Halitgarius of Cambrai, were written for the guidance of confessors. Besides excom- munication, the penalties of the Anathema and the Interdict (qq.v.) were developed. Penance (see Penance, Repentance), including auricular con- fession (see Confession of Sins) and priestly abso- lution, became a sacrament, and the system of Indulgences (q.v.) was originated which later be- came so great a scandal and was one of the primary causes of the Reformatjon. Geo. W. Gilmore. in. In the Lutheran Churches: According to 87 Ohuroh Diadpline the Evangelical Lutheran conception, exclusion from the sacraments forms the core and center of church discipline. The employment of this disci- pline (the power of the keys) is a part of the prac- tical duties of the pastor. The pastor who admin- isters the sacrament dare not knowingly admit an unworthy person, since to do so is to participate in the sin. But on the basis of Matt, zviii. and I Cor. V. the congregation has a right to I. Methods cooperate in church discipline since it and may not tolerate offense in its midst. Remlti. The ban, even if uttered by the pastor, always proceeds in the name of the congregation; but participation by the congrega- tion in church discipline is little developed in Lu- theran state churches in consequence of the peculiar organiiation of the congregations. Instead of the congregations, the consistories received authority to assist the pastor in this exercise. The early practise was that a member of the congregation, charged with public sins, was at first admonished by the pastor as his confessor, and if he did not change his conduct, he was excluded from the Lord's Supper; this was called the small ban. If the sinner remained stubborn, he was excluded from churchiy oonmiunion altogether, was put under the so-called great ban. If he were in any way com- promised before the congregation, the permission of the consistory had to be obtained, and the so- called great ban could be pronounced by the con- sistoiy or the state only aiter investigation. The whole procedure was looked upon not as a real punishment, but as a means of discipline. The ban could be nullified when the sinner showed repentance. He was readmitted on condition of pubiidy asking the forgiveness of the congregation. This procedure was called church penance, which is eonsequenUy not an act of punishment, but of reconciliation. If the sinner died without church penance, he was buried in a separate place without the services of the minister and the congregation. Church discipline so conducted was doomed to failure because it was not rooted in the conscious- ness of the congregation. During the seventeenth century, from an act of reconciliation church pen- ance degenerated into an act of punishment which at first was imposed by the consistories and then by secular courts. Attempts were made by men like Johann Valentin Andre& and Spener to restore the dd church discipline, but without success. Pietism produced no changes in this exercise, and rationalism completed its destruction. In most states church discipline was expressly abolished, and to-day there are only sporadic instances of it. With the reawakening of churchiy life a desire for the reintroduction of church discipline made itself felt. Schleiermacher's draft of a church constitution contained propositions to this effect; during 1840-60 the question was earnestly dis- 2 XodAm ^^^^"'^ because of the reproach which ^j^^^^j^ the lack of discipline caused the ^^^^ churches and sects, also because of the social element which crept into the oki church constitutions. Since the intro- duction of civil marriage and the abolition of com- pulsory baptjpn^ there has been felt anew the need of measures against such as despise ecclesiastical marriage and baptism. The state does not oppose the imposition of church discipline as long as it is of a purely religious nature and is not public. (G. UHLHOBN.t) IV. In the Reformed Churches: The Reformed Church has always emphasized that faith without moral submission to the law of God is inconceiv- able, but it was only Calvinism that laid the re- sponsibility for the regulation and discipline of the moral life of the members upon the church. Accord- ing to the common Evangelical view, the power of the keys was exercised by the preaching of the Word, but Calvinism found it expressed chiefly in Chris- tian penitential discipline as divinely ordered. The German-Swiss Reformation brought about not only religious knowledge, but an inunediate ethical renovation of popular life. There existed, however, as yet no churchiy discipline. Zwingli tried to preserve it from the medieval 1. The Church in so far as it did not conflict g " _ with the new doctrines, but the secular X^gg^ authorities were much more successful in influencing the moral education of the people. An authoritative position in regard to matrimonial matters only was assumed apart from the civil authority in 1525. A tribunal was created consisting of two secular priests, two members of the larger council, and two members of the smaller council; but this institution was still far removed from an organization of the ecclesiastical congre- gation, it simply reported its findings to the secular authority. Although there existed a desire for an independent church discipline also in the sphere of the German-Swiss Reformation, Zwingli was satis- fied with the discipline carried through by the Christian secular authorities, as he deemed the discipline itself of more importance than the method by which it was attained. The sermon, he thought, gave the idea, while the dvil authority was the executing organ in the union of State and Church. In strong contrast with this surrender of eccle- siastical independence, there reappeared in Geneva imder the guidance of Calvin the original type of strict moral discipline, based entirely upon the church. Calvin laid down his dogmatic views con- cerning ecclesiastical organization and discipline in his InstUutio, especially after 1543, in great de- tail, and they form the basis of his practical efforts. The normal form of the church must be shaped according to Scripture. The body of Christ (" In- stitutes," IV. iii. 2) must be governed according to that political order and form which Scrip- ture prescribes (IV. vi. 9; cf. x. 1, i. 15, iv. 1; ** Gal- ilean Confession," 29). Thus discipline or govern- ment becomes the third constituting function of the right church (Operay xiii. 283; " Belgic Confes- sion," 29). But apart from depend- 8. Oalvln*B g^ce upon Biblical forms, Calvin had 5*[^ the conviction that the church could ^^ not exercise her educational function * without a corresponding organization. Discipline aims primarily to prevent desecration of Christ's congregation and Yaa holy sacrament, the betterment of the individual is considered second* Ohuroh Discipline Ohnroh Extension Society 88 aiy. If the interest of Calvin had been confined to individual discipiine, he would have been satis- fied, like Zwingli, with the moral surveillance which was zealously and often rigorously exercised by the magistrate. But as the honor of Christ seemed to him to demand the independent exercise of eccle- siastical fimctions, he coidd not tolerate the refusal of a parochial organization. The church can solve her ethical problem only if she forms herself accord- ing to her own principles. Calvin realized his plan only after his expulsion from Geneva, in bis in- dependent congregation at Strasbiu^, and thence brought it back to Geneva. Immediately after his return in 1541, the Ordon- nances eccUsvastiquea were drawn up and approved by the two councils and the assembly of citizens. The church order establishes as a basis the four offices (pasteurSf docteura, anciena, diacres) which the Lord instituted for the government of his church. It is the task of the people to create a congregation that enjoys the blessings of God in a becoming manner and with a mature consciousness, especially in the sacraments. For the regular supervision over the congregation, the college of elders is instituted (officially called Consiatoire), consisting of the clergymen and twelve members of the dif- ferent colleges of council. The lay elders are elected by the smaller council on the initiative of the pastor. Their discipline covers 8. Genevan matters of faith and morals. Smaller Ecolesiasti- offenses were adjusted by the personal calTri- admonition of an elder; obstinate bnnals. sinners were simmioned before the college which met every week. If they remained in their rebellious disposition, they were excluded from the Lord's Supper or the congregation of believers. Obstinate opposition against the religion of the state and its institutions was reported to the secular authorities, who in- fficted their own penalties. There resulted an intolerable confusion of ecclesiastical and secular power; these conditions, however, were due not so much to the peculiar ecclesiastical theories of Calvin as to the spirit of the time, which could not conceive the possibility of different religions exist- ing side by side in one single State. It is rather due to Calvin that, in spite of this general view, the Church was not absorbed altogether in the State. The spirit of the ordinances of Geneva rules in all later Reformed church orders. In the French Protestant Church the purely ecclesiastical char- acter of discipline foimd a clearer expression, owing to the fact that this church had to be *• ^ built up independently of the State and even m opposition to it. It is the difference between theocracy and free church- ism. The degrees of discipline were the same as in Geneva. The discipline of the Church extends not only over gross vices, but strives after honesty and modesty in the whole conduct of life. It was also earnestly intent upon the preservation of the right confession. The church order of Lasco in London dates from 1550. It shares the view of Calvin that the Church, according to the word of God, needs a special government and discipline with a presbyterial constitution, but it embodies a freer democratic spirit. Puritanism in England received its char- acteristic stamp from Scotland. The congregation of strangers, formed by John Knox 6. In Oreat in Geneva, followed closely in the Britain, wake of Calvin, and their Book of Common Order (1558) took whole pages from the "Institutes," but after their re- moval to Scotland the fear of hierarchism led them into the paths of Lasco. Under its king Christ and according to his word in Matt. xvi. and xviii., the congregation rules itself by its officers: minis- ters, or teaching eldere ; ruling elders, including the pastor, for the supervision of morals in the con- gregation; and deacons. Presbyterial Puritanism foimd its completion in the Westminster Stand- ards of 1647, the discipline of which exerted great influence upon the whole non-episcopal English- American Protestantism. Another group is formed by Holland, East Friaia, and the German Lower Rhine, the ecclesiastical discipline of which was based upon the orders of the Wesel Convention (1568) and the Emden Synod (1571). Here the chief stress is laid upon the moral and social organization. The Lord's Supper be- longs only to members of a constituted church. Each elder possesses his own district, 6. In Hoi- *^d ^ duty is chiefly pastoral. The land and elders are to visit the members of the Germany, congregation regulariy, together with their pastor. Upon this solid sub- structure the different degrees of discipline were built up. In the other German territories which received their Calvinism from their rulers, efforts to introduce church discipline were made, but in many cases they were obstructed by unfavorable conditions. Hesse-Cassel derived its order of dis- cipline from the time when it was Lutheran, but the Palatinate furnished the example for other territories. Here it was only in 1750 that the congregations received presbyteries, and not till s century later was a presbyterial order thoroughly worked out and put into operation at the time when in other territories the Reformed Church was reconstructed, after the Thirty Years' War. The organization of the college of elders and the degrees of discipline correspond exactly to the French church onier, but the whole is put into the frame of the State, the presbyteries being depend- ent upon the secular authorities. Modem times have greatly modified or in part abolished the old orders of discipline, not only in Germany, but also in France and Switzerland. The principle of alliance superseded the order of individual congregations. The Dutch Church has preserved considerable remnants of the 7. Uodem old discipline, but the firmest oon- Uodifica- nection with their historical origin tions. has been maintained by the Pres- byterian churches — ^their strict order of church-membership forms still a soUd basis of discipline. The Scottish Free Church returned even consciously to the old traditions. In Ger- many the old remnants of Reformed discipline are being met with the beginnings of a general Evan- gelical reorganization. (E. F. Earl MOller.) 89 Ohnroh Disolpllne Ohuroh Bxteasion Sooi«ty V. In the United SUtes : In the Episcopal Church the discipline is laid dovm in the canons. It relates mainly to the dergy; but laymen can be kept from the Bacrament of the Lord's Supper on conviction of serious offenses. In the Presbyterian Church discipline is in the bands of the sesnon, or the governing board of each local church, consisting of the pastor and elders; but, if the party feels aggrieved, an appeal can be made to the next higher court, the presbjrtery, thence to the synod, and thence to the general assembly. The method of trial in all such cases is minutely laid dovm in book ii. of the Form of Gov€nunent. In the Northern Presbyterian Church, reference to the highest court can only be made when the points involved are doctrinal or consti- tutional. Discipline is defined to be " the exer- oae of that authority, and the application of that system of laws which the Lord Jesus Christ has appointed in his church." The subjects of dis- cipline are " all baptised persons." The offense must be public, or such as demands the cognizance of the church judicatory; but private exhortation must first be employed. Similar in definition and practise of discipline are the Dutch Reformed and German Reformed churches. Cf. The Constitution of the Reformed Churdi in America, articles xi.~xiv., and Consti- tuiion of the Reformed Church in the United States, part iiL In churches holding the Congregational polity discipline is a matter for the local congregation, which may be advised by a council composed of ministers and delegates from other congregations, though the recommendations of the council are not obligatory upon the local chimdi. Cf. H. M. Dex- ter, Congregationalism, pp. 188-195, Boston, 1876. In the Methodist Church " an accused member shall be brought to trial before a committee of not less than five, who shall not be members of the quarteiiy conference (and, if the preacher judge it neccanary, he may select the oonmiittee from any part of the district), in the presence of the preaeher-in-charge, who shall preside at the trial, and cause exact minutes of the evidence and proceedings in the case to be taken. In the selection of the oonmiittee the parties may chal- lenge for cause." The various causes of such action are stated. " The accused shall have the right to call to hia assustanoe as counsel any m&mr b^ in good and regular standing in the Methodist E4>iacopal Church." If the pastor-in-charge dis- ■ent from the finding of the committee, he may ^ipeal to the ffFV"""g quarterly conference. £bc- pulaion is the penalty for unworthy conduct on the part of accused members. Cf . The Doctrines and THadftme of the Methodis^Episcopal Church, 1880, pp. 144-151. For further discussion see Dboradation; Dep- osmoM; Crubch Qovbrniobnt; JiTBisoicnoN, EccLBnASTicAi.; and Inquisition. BauooBAFsr: The history of diMsipliiw may be tnoed in MaE. Ckriatian CJkurdk. i. 001^603. ii. 187*192. iii. 866- 3». iv. 371 aqq.. and Neeader, CkrisUan Chwrt^, i. 217- 221, iL 213-216. iii. 187 aqq., 4^1 •qq.. iv. 347 aqq. Con- ■oH aho: DCA, i. 666 aqq.; RL, ii. 1661-00. For the hMory of diadptine in the eaxly Church the •ouroes are the Didaehst the works of Tertuliian (especially De p<gni- tenOaX Hippoljrtua, Csrprian (especially De lapHe), the Apostolical Constitutions, and the Canons of the early councils. Consult: N. Marshall. PeniienHal Digeipiin* of Oia PrimiHve Chtwch, reprinted in the Library of Anglo- Catholic Thsolcffu, Oxford. 1844; J. Kaye. Extomal Oov ommerU and DiBciplino of the Church of ... the Firet Three Centuriee, London, 1866; G. N. Bonwetsch. Dm Oeedtiehie dee Montaniemue, pp. 108-118, Erlangen, 1881; Hefele. ConeUienoeeehiehte, i. 226 sqq., 246. For the Catholic Church consult: F. W. H. Wa»er- schleben, Bueeordnungen der abendldndied^^n Kirehe, Halle. 1861; F. Frank. Die Bueedieeiplin der Kirehe, Blains. 1868; T. L. Green, Ittduloeneea, Saeramenkd Ab- eoluHona, and the Tax Tablee of the Roman PenitenHary, London, 1872 (Roman (Catholic apologetic); R. Gibbings. The Taxea of the Apoetdic Penitentiary; or the Prieet of Sine in the Church of Rome, Dublin, 1872 (Protestant polemic); F. Probst. SacramentaU und Saeramenialien, TQbingen, 1872; Vacandard, The InQuieUion, London, 1008; and literature under iNQunmoN. For the Lutheran Church consult: O. Qoesohen, Doo^ Irina de dieciplina ecd Halle, 1860; A. L. Riehter, OeedtidUe der evangeliedien Kirchenverftueung in Deutaehr- land, Leipsie. 1861; idem, Kirchenreeht, ed. Kahl. § 227, ib. 1886; F. A. Tholuck, Vonteechichte dee RaOonalit- mue, II. i.. pp. 100 sqq.. Halle. 1863-62; G. K. E. F. Fabri, UAer Kirchentucht, Stuttgart. 1864; O. Mejer. Kirehmsuchi, Rostock, 1864; idem, Lehrbuch dee dmO- echen KirthenrechU, GOttingen, 1860; C. I. Nitssch. PrakHeOte Theologie, i. 221 sqq., Bonn. 1860; Schaff. Creede (for the standards); H. £. Jacobs, Book of Con- cord, 2 vols., Philadelphia, 1803. For the Reformed Churches consult on the genera] ques- tion, besides the works of Goeschen and Riehter above: A. L. Riehter. Die evangeliechen Kird^enordnunoen dee 16. JahrhunderU, Weimar. 1846; 8. MUler. Manual of Free- bytery, ed. J. G. Lorimer. Edinburgh. 1842; G. V. Lechler. Oeednehte der Preebyterial- und SyiuxUdverfae- euno, Leyden, 1864; C. B. Hundeshagen, BeUrdge nw Kirehenverfaeeungeoeechiehie, Wiesbaden. 1864; Q. Oalli, Die hUhefiechen und ealviniechen Kirehenelrafen, Bres- lau, 1870; K. Rieker. OrundeOiae reformirter Kirchen- verfaeeuno: R. Btaehelin. H. ZwingU, i. 446 sqq.. iL 137 sqq.. 440 sqq.. Basel. 1806-07; E. Eftli, Analecta reformatoria, i. 00 sqq.. Zurich, 1800; F. W. Kampf- sohulto, Joh. Calvin, i. 386 sqq., ii. 364 sqq.. Leipsie. 1800; La Diedidine eecUeiaatigfue dee ijflieee rifor- mSee de France, ed. D'Huisseau, Charenton, 1667; J. Asrmon, Totte lee eynodee neUionaux dee fglieee riformSes de France, The Hague. 1710; [W. Dunlop], A CoUecHon of Confeeeione of Faith, Caiedtieme, Direetoriee, Booke of Dieeipline . . . , Edinburgh, 1722; J. Bannermann, The Churdi of Chriei, ib. 1868; J. Cook, Stylee of Write, Forme of Procedure and Practice of the Church Courte of Scot- land, ib. 1870; W. Pierce. Ecdeeiaetical Prineiplee . . . of Ae Weeleyan MelhodieU, London. 1873; T. B. Har- dem. Chwreh Dieeipline, ite HieL and Preeent Aepeet, Cambridge, 1802; Reitsma en van Veen, Ada ... en partieuliere eynoden, Qroningen, 1802-00. For the United States, besides the works mentioned in the text, consult: T. C. Upham, Ratio diedplina, Port- land, 1844; F. Wayland. Prineiplee and Practice of Bap- tiet Churchee, New York, 1857; R. Emery, hiet. of the DiacipUne of the Methodiet Epiecopal Churdi, ib. 1864; R. H. Tyler, American Ecdeeiaetical Law, Albany. 1866; T. B. MoFalls and B. Sunderland. Manual of Predtyterian Law and Ueaoe, Washington. 1873; A. T. McGill. Church Oovemment, Philadelphia. 1800; J. Fulton. Index eano- num. New York. 1802; J. Andrews. Church Law, ib., n.d. Vol. iii. of Schaff's Creede contains the texts of the prin- oipal standards. CHURCH OF ENGLAND. See England,
CUUHCH OF. CHURCH EXTENSION SOCIETY CHURCH EXTENSION SOCIETY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH EXTENSION SOCIETY: A society founded in Chicago in 1905 for the purpose of as- sisting Roman Catholic home missionary work in the United States. The movement was in- augurated and organized by Rev. Francis C. Kelley, then pastor at Lapeer, Mich. The object of the society is to raise funds for the erection and main- tenance of churches and chapels in those numer- ous Western and Southern districts where the Cath- olic population is so small and scattered that self-supporting parishes are either an impossibility or, at least, can subsist only in distressing conditions. The means adopted to this end is a systematized contribution of two cents per week from all Cath- olics in the United States. The movement soon became popular, and at present it counts among its governing officers many of the most promi- nent bishops and archbishops of the country. A monthly paper, Extension, the official organ of the society, is published in Chicago under the direction of Father Kelley. James F. Driscoll.
CHURCH FATHERS CHURCH FATHERS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH FATHERS: A title of honor applied to the early writers of the Christian Church. It was originally given to the bishops; when appeal was made to their testimony as representatives of the teaching office of the Church, it was an easy transition to the inclusion with them of venerated writers of an earlier period, even though they had not held the episcopal office. Thus by the fifth century the term " Fathers " is found used in very much its modem sense. Antiquity alone, how- ever, is not held sufficient to confer this title, as Vincent of Lerins clearly states (Commonitorium, li. 24); Hilary of Poitiers (on Matt, v.) says that Tertullian " by his subsequent error destroyed the authority of his approved writings." Accordingly modem Roman Catholic theologians, among whom the title is most strictly used, are accustomed to require four qualifications — orthodoxy of doctrine, sanctity of life, the approbation of the Church, and antiquity. For the Latin Church the line of the Fathers closes with Pope Gregory I. (d. 604); for the Greek Church with John of Damascus (d. 754). See Apostolic Fathers; Doctor; Patristics. Bibliography: Q. R. Crooka and J. F. Hunt, Thgotogieal Bncjfdopimiia and Mtihodoiogy, pp. 30d-309, Now York, 18M. CHURCH FEDERATION. I. The United SUtee. The National Federation of Churches (§ 1). Ita Aims and Achievements (S 2). II. Great Britain and Other Lands. The term ** church federation " has come into use in recent years to designate the spirit and methods of cooperation and unity that in varied ways are bringing Protestant Churches and Chris- tian bodies into organized afi&liation and united action in matters of common interest and service. As a movement it is for the most part confined to the fellowship of the Churches that hold to his- torical and Evangelical Christianity. As a prac- tical working force it has found expression espe- cially in the United States and Great Britain and in countries where foreign missionary work is caiv ried on by societies supported by these nations. I. The United States: Historically the federa- tion movement in the United States is linked with the development of the spirit of unity which found expression in the nineteenth century through the American branch of the Evangelical Alliance (q.v.). A conference held in New York, Dec. 3, 1899, took steps which resulted in the oi^ganization of the National Federation of Churches 1. The Na- and Christian Workers. A letter was tional Fed- then prepared and sent out by the Ex- aration of ecutive Committee expressing the hope Ohurohes. that it might be the forerunner of a " National Federation of all our Protestant Christian denominations, through their official action." At the annual meeting held in Washington, Feb., 1903, action was taken requesting '' the highest ecclesiastical or advisory bodies of the Evangelical Churches to appoint representative delegates to a National Conference." Thirty de- nominational bodies having an aggregate membei^ ship of over seventeen million members responded and were represented by nearly five hundred dele- gates in the great Interchurch Conference on Federation held in New York, Nov. 1&-21, 1906.* By a substantially unanimous vote a Plan of Fed- eration was adopted and recommended ''to the Christian bodies represented in the Conference for their approval." This plan created a " Federal Council of the Churches of Christ in America " and became operative when approved by two-thirds of the constituent bodies. Such approval having been received, the council was organized and its first meeting was held in Dec., 1908. The preamble to this Plan of Federation expresses the conviction that " in the providence of God, the time has come when It seems fitting 8. Ita AfwT« more fully to manifest the essential and oneness of the Christian Churches of Achieve- America, in Jesus Christ as their menta. Divine Lord and Savior, and to pro- mote the spirit of fellowship, service, and cooperation among them." The object of the Federal Council is stated in the Constitution to be: '' (1) To express the fellowship and catholic unity of the Christian Church. (2) To bring the Christian bodies of America into united service for Christ and the world. (3) To encourage devotional fellowship and mutual counsel concerning the spiritual life and religious activities of the Churches. (4) To secure a biiger combined influence for the Churches of Christ in all matters afifecting the moral and social condi- tions of the people, so as to promote the application I The following is the list of Churohes ropreeented: the Baptist Churohes of the United SUtes; the Free Baptist General Conference; the Christians (Christian Connection); the Concregatlonal Churches; the Disciples <^ Christ; the Evangelioai Association; the Evangelical Synod of North America; the Friends; the Evangelical Lutheran Church. General Synod; the Methodist Episcopal Church; the Meth- odist Episcopal Church, South; the Primitive Methodist Church; the Colored Methodist Episcopal Church in Amer- ica; the Methodist Protestant Church; the African Meth- odist Episcopal Church; the African Methodist Episcopal Zion Church; the General Conference of the Mennonite Church of North America; the Moravian Church; the Presbyterian Church in the United States of America; the Cumberiand Presb3rterian Church; the Welsh Calvinistio Methodist or Presbyterian Church; the Reformed Presbyterian Church; the United Presbyterian Church; the Protestant Episcopal Church; the Reformed Church in America; the Refonned Church in the United States of America; Uie Reformed Episcopal Church; the Seventh-day Baptist Churches; the United Brethren in Christ; the United Evangelieal Church. 01 Chnroh of Bnff] Ohurohof Qod of the law of Christ in every relation of human life. (5) To aasist in the organization of local branches of the Federal Council to promote its aims in their communities." The difference between federated union and organic church union is clearly defined in the stipulation that " this Federal Council shall have no authority over the constituent bodies adhering to it: but its province shall be limited to the expression of its counsel and the recommending of a course of action in matters of common interest to the Churches, local councils, and individual Chris- tians." The Council " has no authority to draw up a common creed or form of government or of worship, or in any way to limit the full autonomy of the Christian bodies adhering to it." Historically this national movement '' for the prosecution of work that can be better done in union than in separation" has found initiative and en- couragement through federated activities, State and local. The Interdenominational Commission of Maine was organised in 1892, and is composed of membere appointed by official State bodies repre- senting the Baptist, Free Baptist, Christian, Con- gregational, and Methodist Churches. The prin- ciples under which this Commission acts seek to secure practical reciprocity among these denomina- tions, both in the planting of new churches and in the readjustment of forces when through overmultipli- cation of churches or decrease in population con- ditions exist that demand consolidation through union and comity of action. The plans of the Com- mission aim not to organize so-called ** union churches/' but to consolidate religious forces, still leaving them within the limits of denominational fellowship. The secretary of the Commission, who has held this position since its work began in 1905, bears testimony " that in thirty-seven of the fifty- one cases entered on the records of the Commission consultation respecting the clash of interests has sufficed to relieve the strain: mere friendly con- ference has led to an adjustment of the difficulties. Many other cases, without such mention as would justify entrance on the records, have been adjusted by the same friendly means, and in a great many other instances still an effective influence has been exerted in ways that have maintained an ideal ci fraternal cooperation which has tended to ele- vate very much of the church work of the State from the low level of partizan and sectarian strife." C<Hnmiaaions similar to that in Maine exist in other States, but their work as yet has not been as effect- ive in its results. In the aggregate, however, consul- tation and comity are increasingly taking the place of competitive action in home mission and church extension work. The State Federations organized in Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Wisconsin, and other conomonwealths have already proved the need and effectiveness of imited effort. In their pur- poses they have a common aim, but in methods they are working along lines suggested by local enviroDment and limited by executive resources. IL Great Britain and Other Lands: Church federation in England and Great Britain is largely a movement unifying the activities of Nonconform- ist Churches in matters of common interest. Its orgaoizing center is the National Council of the Evangelical Free Churches which was founded in 1894. Membership in this Council comes through local Councils. " The Churches constituting the local Councils are the Congregational, the Baptist Churches, the Methodist Churches, the Presbyterian Church of England, the Free Episcopal Churches, the Society of Friends, and such other Evangelical Churches as the National Council may at any time admit." The total number of Councils in 1906 was 897 with more than fifty District Federations. The latest report says: " The aim of our Movement has from the beginning been preeminently spiritual, and the main work of the local Councils in all parts of the country has been United Missions." The relation in which the Free Churches stand to the Established Church of England has been a powerful factor in drawing them into close and effective fellowship. The work of the local Councils includes activities not only evangelistic, but social and philanthropic. In other lands church federation is already a potent factor in the unifying of Christian forces represented through missionary organizations. The Standing Committee of Cooperating Christian Missions in Japan is made up of representatives from nearly aU the different missions. Since its organization in 1902 it has exerted a notable influ- ence in advancing plans of comity and cooperation. At the great China Centenary Missionary Confer- ence held at Shanghai in May, 1907, steps were taken to federate all of the Christian forces in the empire. In India the missionary workers are laboring not only to federate their activities, but achieve definite plans of organic church union. This spirit of unity and desire for closer fellowship is illustrated in action that is being taken in every part of the world by those having in charge the missionary work of Protestant Churches. The indications multiply that church federation stands for a movement of profound significance in its relation to the present and future history of Christianity in its institutional life and fellowship. E. B. Sanford. Biblxoorapht: E. B. Sanford, Chwdi FederaHon, New York, 1006 (contains reports of the Interchuroh Con- ference on Federation); Federation (the quarterly pub- lished in New York by the Federation of Churches in New York City); the Annual Reports of the National Federa- tion of Churches, of the Committee of Cooperating Mis- sions (Japan), and of the National Council of Free Churches (England). CHURCH (CHURCHES) OF GOD: The name of several religious bodies in America. 1. The Church of God in North America, popu- larly known as Winebrennarians, is a Baptist de- nomination founded by John Winebrenner in 1830. The founder was bom at Glade Valley, Frederick C5ounty, Md., Mar. 25, 1797; d. at Harrisburg, Pa., Sept. 12, 1860. He studied at Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa., and learned theology under Dr. Samuel Helfcnstein. Called to the pastorate of the German Reformed Church at Harrisburg, Pa., he was ordained at Hagerstown, Md., Sept. 24, 1820. His earnest preaching resulted in a revival, in which he opposed theaters, dancing, gambling, lotteries, and racing, thus causing opposition which resulted in official charges against him« He severed his Ohnroh of Qod Ohuroh Government 92 relatioDB with his charge and with the Reformed Church in 1825, but continued his ministry in and around Harrisburg, extensive revivals of religion following. His theological views gradually changed as the result of his study of the Bible. Congre- gations were formed at a number of points, and several ministers were ordained. In Oct., 1830, six of these ministers met in Harrisburg and agreed to form a body to be called the General Eldership of the Church of God, the term " general elder- ship " being used to distinguish this body from the eldership of the local church. In doctrine the Church is prevailingly Arminian and orthodox. It is largely premillenarian, and practises three ordinances: baptism, by inmiersion; the Lord's Supper, observed in the evening; and washing of feet. The local church polity is pres- byterial, each church having its own boaixl of elders and deacons. The churches within a given district are associated together for cooperation in general work. The pastors and other ordained ministers within a district, together with an equal number of lay elders, constitute an annual eldership which appoints the ministers to the various charges. These annual elderships elect an equal number of ministerial and lay delegates, who con- stitute the general eldership, changed in 1905 from a triennial to a quadrennial body, the highest judicatory of the denomination. The Church now reports two annual elderships in Pennsylvania, two in West Virginia, two in Okla- homa, and one each in Maryland, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Iowa, Nebraska, Missouri, Kansas, Arkansas, and Oregon. A general elder- ship, composed of delegates from the annual elder- ships, was organized in 1845, and the General Eldership of the Church of God organized in 1830 became the East Pennsylvania eldership. In 1866 the title of the general eldership, as also those of the annual elderships, was changed to the form. The General Eldership of the Churches of God. The total membership is estimated to be about 40,000, with 500 ministers. The general eldership controls the institutions of learning, of which there are three (Findlay College, Findlay, O.; Fort Scott Collegiate Institute, Fort Scott, Kan.; and Barkeyville Academy, Barkeyville, Pa.), and the publishing house and book store at Harrisburg, Pa. Each an- nual eldership is engaged in missionaiy work in its own territory, and frontier mission work is carried on by the general eldership in Missouri, Kansas, Nebraska, Colorado, Oklahoma, Arkansas, Oregon, and Washington. There is a Woman's Gen- eral Missionary Society, which, through the Board of Missions of the general eldership, supports four American missionaries, ten or twelve native workers, and a number of Bible readers in Ulubaria and Bogra Districts, Bengal Province, India. C. H. Forney. Bibliography: J. Winebrenner, Brief View9 of tKe Chvrch of Qody HarriBburg, 1840; idem, A TreaUte on Regtnera- Hon, ib. 1844; idem, Practical and Doctrinal Sermon; ib. 1860. The church paper is the Church Advocate, Harris- buxv. F^. fl. The Church of God and Saints of Christ (the "BUck Jews") are chiefly negroes who claim to be the descendanta and representatives of the true Jews; it is held that the latter were originally a black people and that the descendants of the lost tribes have changed color through mixture with the Gentiles. The Church was founded at Topeka, Kan., in 1897 by William S. Crowdy, who claimed to be called " to be a prophet of God sent to the whole world." The Saints respect both Jewish and Christian law and ritual, and interpret the Scriptures literally. Their system of doctrine is presented in Crowdy's manual. The Bible Story Revealed (Philadelphia, 1902). Among the princi- pal points of belief are: repentance the first step to the kingdom; the seventh day the Sabbath; absti- nence from wine and strong drink; foot-washing; prayer in the words of Jesus; the holy kiss; religion the exercise of love, charity, and hospitality; the law of Moses completed, supplemented, or abolished by the law of God in Christ. The ministry con- sists of the Prophet Crowdy, two bishops (one in Africa), evangelists (whose functions are those of visitation), and elders or pastors of churches. The polity is presbyterial, with an annual " Board Meeting," and a quadrennial General Assembly. There is also an annual celebration of the Passover with mingled Hebrew and Christian rites. The organization reports about one hundred churches (seven in Africa) and 8,000 to 9,000 members. The largest church and the denominational head- quarters are in Philadelphia. Business enterprises are conducted in connection with many of the churches, a farm colony is located at Belleville, Va., and the establishment of a widows' and or- phans' home and a training-school there is con- templated. W. H. Larrabee. Biblioorapht: The organ of the denomination is the Weeklv Prophet, Philadelphia. 3. The Adventist Church of God, a branch of the Seventh-day Adventists. See Adventists, 5. 4. The Churches of God in Christ Jesus, popularly known as the Age-to-come Adventists. See Ad- ventists, 6. 6. The Mennonite Church of God in Christ. See Mbnngnites. CHURCH GOVERNMENT. Meaning of the Expression (§1). The Refonned Church Government (S 2). Fundamental Differences of Lutheran View (f 3). German Reformers not Opposed to State Qovera- ment (S 4). State Government Accepted in Luther's Time (§ 6). Actual Views of Luther and his Contemporaries (§ 6). Influence of the Idea of the Common Priesthood ($ 7). Modem Development of German Church Government (§8). [The following article is a condensation of the article Kirchenregiment in the Hauck-Herzog RE ; for more general discussion of the subject see Polity.] Church government in the speech of to-day denotes that particular conduct of the ecclesiastical community which is not effected by means of the spiritual administration of word and sacraments, but by means which on occasion may be of civil constitution. Prior to the Reformation the pastor was called rector, and regere ecdesiam (" to gov- ern the Church ") indicated his spiritual care over 93 Ohuroh of Qod Ohnroh Government the congregation through the word and sacra- ments. Church government is thus, originally, the pastoral, though logically also the epis- I. MiMining copal, and, in the last resort, the par of the Ez- pal cure of souls; because the bishop prenon. is properly the pastor of his diocese, and the pope — ^at all events according to the doctrine of the curia — pcarochtta mundi (see Cure or Souls). However, the divinely given authority for the spiritual control (potestas eccle- tiadica; see AuTHORrrY, Ecclesiastical) em- braces, according to the theory then in vogue, every regulative function, whether in a proper sense spiritual or not; that is, certain fimctions not within the direct sphere of word and sacrament, provided only the same appear expedient to the bishop or pope, as the case may be, with relation to the cure of souls. Hence prior to the Refor- mation church government was regarded as part and parcel of the episcopal, or ultimately papal, cure of souls. It was only after the establishment of the Reformers' principle, that this theory con- flicts with Scripture, and that the ecclesiastical authority which is to be exercised by the spiritual office in virtue of divine commission comprises rather the sole administration of word and sacra- ments, and not, in addition, external control, that the institution of church government as a power by itself could become developed and was actually developed. The idea of church government in this sense is Protestant; the Roman Catholic Church, in 80 far as it has continued upon the pre-Refor- mation basis, still construes the matter as falling within the spiritual province of ecclesiastical authority. Of the two Protestant Church bodies in which, upon the basis of the aforesaid Reformation doc- trine, a scheme of church government has taken f^hape distinct from the spiritual economy it is pertinent to consider first the Reformed Church; and in fact its Calvinistic branch is of exceptional interest in this connection. The task of organizing the Protestant Church in France was 3. The Rfr- complicated at the outset by the hos- formed tiUty of the government. In the Church face of this enmity, the Church had to Govern- organize as an independent association, ment Starting with Calvin's tenets that the church organization described in the Acts of the Ap)ostle8> and the pastoral epistles is ordained by cSod to be directed by a college of elders, and that this Church is an example or article of faith for every particular congregation, it de- wlopcd this assumption, following Calvin's inter- pretation of Eph. iv. 11 sqq., Rom. xii. 7, and 1 Cor. xii. 28, into the doctrine that in accordance with the aforesaid divine arrangement there are two kinds of elders; namely, not only bearers of the teaching office — who, in agreement with the Lutheran Church, were held to be restricted to teaching and the administration of the sacraments —but also " ruling " elders, who were regarded as filling the spiritual, but not the teaching office (Calvin's " Institutes," IV., chaps, i.-v., xi., xii.). Pastor and ruling elders together constituted the SDveming body of the congregation (Fr. consis- toire, cf. K. Rieker, Grundsdtze reformirter Kirchefi" verfaasung, Leipsic, 1899, pp. 102 sqq., 141 sqq.). Then there came together from the congregations, comprising a definite group, certain delegates of the consistoireSf both teaching and ruling officers, to form committees (" synods "), through whose agency the corresponding church circuit was gov- erned, the same as the congregation by the agency of the consistoire. Further, the French Evangelical Church as a whole is governed by a general synod (cf. G. von Polenz, Geschichte dea framosischen CalmnismuSf 4 vols., Gotha, 1857; G. V. Lechler, Geschichte der Preshyterial' und Synodtdverfassung, Leyden, 1854, pp. 64 sqq.). The essential basis of the [Reformed] church government is thus clearly apparent in the main, even though now and then its lines of distinction coalesce. It rests upon divine authority just as in the pre-Reformation Church; save that this conmiissioned authority is not im- parted to the teaching elders, but only to the ruling ones. Yet the former take part, and indeed as weighty personages, in the sessions of the govern- ing bodies, though this is only because they admin- ister the order of salvation, and because all church government, in the nature of the case, has no other object than to render possible and make sure the order of salvation; hence the teaching presbyters enjoy their influence upon church government not as retainers of a divine commission to rule, but as expert representatives of their divine commission to teach; so much so, for instance, that in questions of doctrine the non-spiritual members of s3mods have no voice. These fundamental ideas of the French constitution of presbyterial-synodal church government have undergone, in the course of time and in connection with their development in Ger- man territories, various alterations an accoimt of which properly belongs to church history. Two fundamental points differentiate the Lu- theran theory of church government both from the pre-Refonnation and Roman Catholic theory and from the Calvinistic-Reformed the- 3. Funda- ory. In the first place, the Lutheran mental Church does not assume that there Differences is any form of church government of ordained by divine commission, coin-. Lutheran ddently with the institution of the View. Church, but rather esteems every form of government admissible by whose operation sufficient provision is made for the rightful administration of word and sacra- ments. Hence there is no Lutheran dogmatic basis of church government; and Lutherans accord to the claim of the Reformed that there is no such higher dignity than that of a theological opinion. The second point is the fact that the Lutheran Church, when, in accordance with the imperial decree of 1526 at Speyer, it developed the State Church polity, virtually from the very start placed church government in the State sovereign's hand. In consequence of these two differences the ques- tion of Lutheran church government is much more complicated than that of the pre-Reformation Church, or of the Roman Catholic or of the Reformed Churches. It has been asserted that the Reformers' ideals Ohnroh Gtovemmant 94 were inoonfiistent with state gcvemment of the Church; and Bome (notably so F. J. Stahl, in Kirchenverfa88ung nock Lehre und 4. Oerman Recht der Protestanien, Erlangen, 1840, Refonn- 2d ed., 1862; Lutheriache Kirche und en not Union, Berlin, 1859) have inter- Opposed to preted these ideals as tending in the State Gov- direction of the pre-Refonnation con- eminent oeption; others (as A. L. Richter, in the Zeitachrift fiir detdschea RecfU und die Rechtsttnasenachaft, iv., 1840, pp. 1 sqq.; Lehr- buch dea Kirckenrechla, Leipsic, 1841 sqq. ; Geachichie der evangeliacken Kirchmverfaaaung in Deutach- landf 1851) think that they sympathize with the presbyterial-synodal organization. This difference of opinion shows how slight is the foundation for either side. Both views have arisen from the rational desire to obtain historic support and Reformation authority for party strivings — the product and expression of modem times — and the contentions of both Stahl and Richter are inadmissible. The chief argument against Stahl 's theory is the attitude of the Reformers with refer- ence to the actual institution and organization of chiurch government by the territorial sovereigns: it is incompatible with a conception of polity fimdar mentally contrary. Richter, on his side, to demon- strate his proposition of presbyterial-synodal ide- als of organization on the part of the Reformers, assmnes that their views underwent a change somewhere about 1525; before that time their ideals were presbyterial-synodal, but, owing to their experiences with Anabaptism and the Peasants' War, the said ideals were crowded out, and the Reformers were obliged to admit the actual neces- sity of church government under territorial sover- eignty. Richter submits this contention without more particular evidence, which would be hard to find. He forgets, for one thing, that the prin- ciples from which the territorial sovereignty form of church polity is deduced theologically were extant even prior to 1525, and were dedared by the Reformers; on another side, that not until after that year did the Reformation begin its eccle- siastical organization, so that only the ideas real- ized by the Reformers after that year are in ques- tion; it was not in the spirit of that age to project and formulate ideal systems of organization with- out practical conditions to uphold them. R. Sohm in his Kirchenrecht (Leipsic, 1892) has defended the thesis that the territorial sovereignty form of church government came about in oppo- sition to Luther's doctrine and after 5. State his death, and that it was a product Ooyemment of the pusillanimous faith of Luther's Accepted contemporaries and successors, being in Luther's closely related to the reaction, espe- Time. dally on Melanchthon's part, to Ro- man theories and to the consistorial fabric which grew out of their influence, and the reenforcement of these consistories with temporal means of ooerdon. This thesis is untenable. If historical evolution be taken just as it stands, and the literature of the sixteenth century be considered as a whole, there can be no doubt that the govern- ment of the Church by the soverdgns of the State was in harmony with the Reformers' theory; provided in this connection is understood by church government not the Reformers' "eccle- siastical authority " (see AuTHORmr, Ecclesias- tical), but all that is involved in a legal direction of the church organism. The theory in question is not in any way taught by Melanchthon exclusively, as had been occasionally affirmed before Sohm; but in its main outlines it is apparent as early as Luther's tract An den Add deutacher Nation (cf. O. Mejer, Die Grundlagen dea lutheriachen Kirchen- regimenta, Rostock, 1864, pp. 26 sqq.), and it is elsewhere taught by Luther and others. It is dearly implied in the Lutheran confessional wri- tings (Augs. Con., art. xxviii.; Art. Schmal., de poteatate papcB, pp. 354-355; Larger and Smaller Catechisms, pp. 361, 363, 446, and elsewhere; most plainly in Auga. Con. variata, article on marriage of priests, in Hase, Libri aymbolicij p. L.). Its theological basic thoughts come to light in a long array of liturgies and other kinds of promul- gations on the part of the Reformatory territorial sovereigns. The Church as a corporate unity separated from the State is a thoroughly modem idea, to Luther thoroughly unknown (cf. Schenkel, 6. Actual TSK, 1850, p. 1; Hundeshagen, ZKR, Views i., pp. 451 sqq.; W. Kahl, Verachieden' of Luther heit der katholiachen und evajigdischen and his Anachauung uber daa Verhaltnia von Contem- Stoat und Kirche, Leipsic, 1886; 0. poraries. Mejer, RechtaUben der deutachen evan- geliacken Landeakirchen, Hanover, 1899, pp. 28 sqq.; K. Rieker, ut sup., pp. 55 sqq.). In this unity two powers work side by side, the two swords of the Middle Ages; but this indicates merely a " division of the administrative organiza- tion of the single body "; the well-known and so often misunderstood utterances of Luther as to the relation of the temporal to the spiritual power are not intended to mean that the temporal power has nothing at all to do in the Church, but rather that within the one body two members, each in its office, have to cooperate for the weal of the whole organism, only neither is to encroach upon the other within its rightful sphere. The spiritual commission of the teaching order thus appears to be confined to the word and administration of the sacraments (that is, ecclesiastical power in Luther's sense of the term); the authority of the governing order appears to be directed toward rightfully up- holding the laws of God as expressed in the Ten Commandments, especially according to the first table of the same, to the end that no unlawful form of divine service be endured in the land. From these premises everything essential to the state control of church government proceeds with logical finality. Nor is this conclusion impaired by the fact that the Reformers themselves accounted the government's position not so much a source of rights as a sum of obligations the government was to fulfil, a responsible office which called into play all those prerogatives which modems are wont to designate as corollaries to a '' govern- ment." To be sure, alongside these lines of thought are 95 Ohtiroh Gk>v«mment ilso to be found certain documentary indications of the germs of a second and divergent theory; not one, however, that reaches backward toward the pastoral fonn of church fi^vemment, but one out of which, in favoring circumstances, a presbyterial- synodal polity might have grown. There is here in mind, above all, that fundamental principle of Protestantism, the common priesthood. For even though it be true that this principle was conceived by the Reformers only as a religious 7. Infltt- principle (so that things were carried ence of the too far when in earlier times it was Idea of the attempted to derive from this basis Common independent administration and con- Mcsthood. gregational tenets, and set these up as express doctrines of the Reformation), it is none the less an overshooting of the mark on another side when modem writers like Sohm (ut sup., p. 510) and Rieker (ut sup., p. 79) profess to credit this thou^t with no influence at all upon the constitution of the Evangelical Church (cf. R Sehling, in ZKR, 1894, p. 229, and Kirchenge- tetZQ^nmg urUer Moriz van Sachsertf Leipsic, 1898, pp. 3 flqq.). If, conformably to the well-known doctrine of the Lutheran confessional writings (cf . the same collected with the pertinent citations in 0. Mejer, Lehrbtich des Kirchenrechta, GOttingen, 1869), the congregation of believers is bound by the obligations of faith to see to it that sufficient provision is made at all times for the rightful ad- ministration of word and sacraments, and if, furthermore, this congregation is charged with responsibility before God in this matter {Apol., p. 292, and elsewhere), it follows that the congrega- tion as a congregation must see to it that this divine eommission is property exerdsed by those whom it appcHnts to this end. Upon such bases a pres- byterial-synodal church government might veiy well be constructed. But these ideas were not developed, because, as above set forth, they were thnist aside and suppressed by the system of terri- torial sovereignty that governed the Church. Or, dightly changed, they were introduced into the territorial sjrstem by the teaching that since each member of the congregation is bound to contribute Mcording to the measure of his ability toward the maintenance of a rightful and adequate adminis- tration of the word and sacraments, and since the territorial sovereign possesses an especially high measure of such ability (in virtue whereof he is designated as membrum ecclesia prcecipuum), he must aoooidingjy apply all his power entrusted to bim by (jod towaid the satisfaction of that obli- gation. By this process the government of the Church might practically fall into the hands of the territorial sovereign alone; because the means at his disposal are so vastly superior to those of all other church-members that these, in comparison, find nothing further to do (Luther's Bedenken von 1590. Erlangen ed.,liv., p. 179; Art. Schmal.,p. 350; Mejer, ut sup., pp. 109 sqq., cf. 27, 36, 46). The idea of membrwn eccUsia protcijmum, to be sure, is again and again obscured by subsequent absurd usage; but it always carries the assiunption that the territorial sovereign has the power to apply ^ governing rights to the fmtherance of eccle- siastical ends. This was the case in the Reforma- tion period and in general so long as his rights were regarded and exercised as operative private rights. According to the civil law of to-day, however, the governing rights of the territorial sovereign are in the nature of public powers, which reach no fmther than their corresponding official obligations. The doctrine of membrum ecdesue prcecipuum is there- fore antiquated, and has no significance in present praxis. On the other hand, conjointly with the custodia prioria tabulasy it constituted, down to the middle, or thereabout, of the nineteenth century, the prinoipal foundation upon which the territorial sovereignty rule of the Church was declared to be a part of the territorial governing office, and as such was regarded as an adjunct of state supremacy. Meanwhile, after some beginnings of changing views that were even earlier apparent, since the middle of the eighteenth century the point of view according to which church government is admin- istered by the State has changed more and more. In place of the purpose to uphold the 8. Modem first table of the Ten Commandments, Develop- there intervened, as Territoriahsm ment of (q.v.) came into power, the humani- German tarian-political aim to make the State Church religiously a unity, to the end that Government, quiet and peace, the supreme ends of the State, be achieved; and when a subsequent fiurther evolution of things brought the tolerance principle into play, for this aim was substituted one deriving from freedom of conscience, which determines state activity on this side to-day. The theory of the Chureh was next changed by the natural right school; the Church is not an institu- tion founded by God, but a society, an association within the State. But several equally legitimate churches standing side by side in the State can be treated by the state government only as church associations which govern themselves; and if among them there is a Lutheran Church, its status does not differ from that of any other, and the right of the State in its government becomes a mere Kirchenhoheit (jus circa sacra), which is essentially the police control of associations. This appears the more equitable since the new constitutional prog- ress has brought matters to such a pass that the popular representatives have acquired directly or indirectly a determining influence in legislation and certain other specific rights of government, indeed the entire sphere of operation; since, fmther, all representatives in the Diet have equal voice — the Reformed, the Roman Catholic, and the non- Christian members the same as the Lutherans — and this equality of influence on the part of non- adherents of the Lutheran Church is inconsistent with its constitutional parity. Accordingly there are projects on every side in the direction of a logical transformation of the territorial sovereignty form of church polity into corporate self-govern- ment. It has been previously remarked that the Reformers' theology opened the way to progress in this direction; and that the example of the Calvinistic Reformed Church was not far removed, even though the latter's dogmatic tenets were not here to the purpose. And in fact it is true that« Ohuroh HUtory 96 as Boon 88 the oollegialistic and constitutional State theories gained force and were here earlier, there later, here more, there less, carried into execution, likewise in the Lutheran Church the congregations have employed presbyterial church committees; synods have been constituted of representatives of these committees for districts; and finally a general synod for the land, or, where several Lutheran denominations exist, a synod of the denominations has been brought together as the general repre- sentative body of the church. So the Lutheran Church is acquiring the organization of a corporate Church, in virtue whereof it governs itself. E. Sehlino. CHURCH mSTORT. II. a. Ancient Christianity. b. Medieval Christianity. c. Modern Christianity. VI. Value. VII. Literature. 1. Ancient Historians. 2. Historians from 1500 to 1800. 3. Historians from 1800 to 1900. 4. Manuals of Church His- tory in One or More Volumes. 5. Histories of Doctrine. 6. Chronoloeical Tables. 7. Atlases. Nature and Aim. Church History and Secular History. III. Sources. Written Sources (§1). Unwritten Sources (§2). IV. Duty of the Historian. Investigation (S 1). Presentation of Results (§2). V. Periods and Epochs. 1. Sacred or Biblical His- tory. a. Christian History or EodesiastiGal History Proper. L Nature end Aim: Church history em- braces, in the widest sense, the whole religious development from the creation to the present time, and is continually growing in bulk. In a narrower eense, it is confined to a history of Christianity and the Christian Church from the birth of Christ and the Day of Pentecost, when Christianity made its first appearance in an organized form as distinct from the Jewish religion. The historian has to trace the origin, growth, and fortunes of the Church, and to reproduce its life in the different ages. The value of his work depends upon the degree of its truthfulness, or exact corre- spondence with the facts. Church histoiy is not a heap of dry bones, but life and power: it is the Church itself in constant motion and progress from land to land, and from age to age, until the whole worid shall be filled with the knowledge of Christ. It IB the most interesting part of the world's history, as religion is the deepest and most important concern of man, the bond that unites him to God. It embraces the external expansion and contraction of Christianity, or the histoiy of missions and persecutions, the visible organization of church polity and discipline, the development of doctrine and theology, the wor- ship, with its various rites and ceremonies, litur- gies, sacred poetry and music, the manifestations of practical piety, Christian morality, and benevo- lent institutions; in one word, all that belongs to the inner and outer life of Christianity in the worid. It is a panorama of God's dealings with the human race, and man's relations to God under all aspects. It shows the gradual unfolding of the plan of redemption — a plan of infinite wisdom and goodness, in constant conflict with the Satanic powers and influences which are struggling for the ascendency, but are doomed to ultimate de- feat, and to be overruled for good. It is the great- est triumph of God's wisdom to bring good out of evil, and to overrule the wrath of man for his owQ gloiy and for the progress of truth and right- eousness. Church histoiy is a book of life, full of warning and precept, of hope and encouragement. n. Church History and Secular History: These differ as Church and State, as Christianity and humanity, as the order of grace and the order of nature; 3ret they are inseparably connected, and the one can not be understood without the other. Among the Jews the spiritual and secular history together form the one histoiy of theocracy. Both currents inteimingle in the Byzantine Empire, in the European States and the Latin Church during the Middle Ages, in the period of the Refor- mation, during the colonial period of America, and in all countries where Church and State are united. Gibbon's History of the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire is in great part also a history of the rise and progress of Christianity, which survived the fall of Old and New Rome, and went forth to conquer the barbarian conquerors by Christianizing and civilizing them. Every history of the papacy ^ also a history of the German Roman Eknpire, and vice versa. No history of the sixteenth century can be written without constant reference to the Protestant Reformation and Roman Catholic reac- tion. The Franciscan, Dominican, and Jesuit mis- sions along the St. Lawrence, down the Mississippi, and in Mexico, Florida, and the islands of the Caribbean Sea, and the Puritan settlements of New England are the beginning, alike of the ecdesias- tical and secular history of North America. In modem times the tendency is more and more toward a separation of the spiritual and temporal powers; nevertheless, the Church will always be influenced by the surrounding state of civil society, and must adapt itself to the wants of the age, and progress of events; while, on the other hand, the world will always feel the moral influence, the restraining, stimulating, and sanctifying power of Christianity, which works like a leaven from within upon the ramifications of society. nL Sources: These are mostly written, though in part unwritten. The written sources include (1) The official documents of ecclesiastical and ci\il authorities, such as acts of councils, creeds, litur- gies, hymn-books, church-laws, papal bulls and encyclicals. (2) The writings of the 1. Written personal actors in the history, and Sourcaa. contemporary observers and reporters, such as the Fathers for ancient Chris- tianity, the Schoolmen for medieval, the Reformers and their opponents for the Reformation period. (3) Inscriptions on- walls, pictures, churches, tomb- stones, and other monuments. The history of the Hebrew religion has derived much light from mod- em discoveries of monumental remains in Egypt, Babylonia, and Assyria (qq.v.), the deciphering of the hieroglyphic and cimeiform inscriptions, the Moabite Stone, and the code of Hammurabi. See Inscriptions; Moabite Stone; and Hammurabi AND H|s Cops, 97 Ohnroh History The unwritten sources are works of Christian art, such as churches, chapels, pictures, sculp- tures, crosses, crucifixes, relics, and other monu- ments which symbolize and embody Christian ideas. The Roman catacombs, with their vast extent, their solemn darkness, their lab3rrinthine mystery, their rude epitaphs and sculptures, 2. Un- their symbols of faith, and their relics written of martyrdom, give a lifelike idea of Soupoes. the Church in the period of perse- cution, ite trials and sufiFerings, ite faith and hope, its simple worship and devoted piety. "He who is thoroughly steeped in the ima^iy of the catacombs will be nearer to the thoughts of the early Church than he who has teamed by heart the most elaborate treatises of Tertullian or Origen." The basilicas are charac- teristic of the Nioene period; the Byzantine churches, of the Byzantine age and the Eastern and Russian Church; the Gothic cathedrals, of the palmy days of medieval Catholicism; the Renais- sance style, of the revival of letters. Even now, most churdies and secto can be best appreciated in the localities, and in view of the monumente and the people, where they originated, or have their center of life and action. IV. Duty of the Historian: The historian must master the sources in the original languages in which they were written (Greek, Latin, 1. Invest!- Sjrriac, Coptic, and the modem lan- sation. guages of Europe); separating the genuine from the spurious, the orig- inal from corruptions and interpolations, sifting the tnith from falsehood, the facte from fiction and partisan judgment, comparing the accounte of all actors, friend and foe, narrator, eulogist, advo- cate, and antagonist, whether orthodox or heretic, whether Christian, Jew, or Gentile, aiming in all this laborious investigation at " the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth." He must, then, reproduce the clearly ascertained facts and resulte of his investigation in a faithful and lifelike narrative, so as to present the objective course of history itself, as it were, in a photo- graph, or rather in an artistic painting; for a pbotogn^>h gjves a dull view of the momentary look of a person, while the portrait of the artist combines the changing moods and various aspecte of his subject into a living whole. The genuine writer of history differs as much from 2. Pna. the dry chronicler of isolated facts sntatlon and dates as from the novelist. He ^^••nlta. must represent both thoughte and facts. He must particularize and gen- eralize, descend into minute details and take a comprehensive bird's-eye view of whole ages and periods. He must have a judicial mind, which deals impartially with all persons and evente com- inic before his tribunal. He must be free from jartizan and sectarian bias, and aim at justice and (ruth. It is the exclusive privilege of the divine mind to view all things mb specie cOemitaHSf and to ^^ the end from the beginning. Man can know things ^ly consecutively and in fragmente. But his- tory is its own best interpreter; and the farther it advances the more one is able to understand UL— 7 and appreciate the past. Historians differ in gifte and vocation. Some are miners, who bring out the raw material from the sources (Flacius, Baronius, Tillemont, Gieseler, Denifle, Hamack, Pastor); others are manufacturers, who work up the material for the use of scholars (Bossuet, Mos- heim. Gibbon, DoUinger, Milman, Neander). Some are wholesale merchante, some retailers. Some are bold critics, who open new avenues of thought (Ewald, Baur, Renan); others popularize the re- sulte of laborious researches for the general benefit (Hagenbach, Merie, Hase, Pressens^, Fisher). V. Periods and Epochs: These represent the different stages in the religious development of the race. They must not be made arbitrarily, according to a mechanical scheme (such as the centurial division, introduced by Flacius in the "Magdeburg Centuries," and followed by Mos- heim), but taken from the actual stops or start- ing-pointe (which is the real meaning of "epoch," from Gk. epechdj "to stop," "to pause") and circuite (Gk. peridot) of the history itself. The following are the natural divisions: 1. Saored or Biblical History: The history of divine revelation, from the creation to the close of the apostolic age, running parallel with the Scriptures, from Genesis to Revelation. Here dis- tinction must be made between the dispensation of the Law and the dispensation of the Gospel, or the history of the Old Covenant religion and that of the New Covenant religion. 2. Christian History or Boolesiastical History proper, from the begLoning of the- apostolic age to modem times. Subdivisions: (a) History of Ancient Christianity, embracing the first six centuries to Gregory I. (590): Gre- co-Latin, Patristic, Catholic, the common stock from which the Greek, the Roman, and the Prot- estant churches have sprung. Subdivisions: (1) The life of Christ and the apostolic age. (2) The age of persecution, to Constantine the Great and the Council of Nic»a (325). (3) The age of the union of Church and Stete, of the formulation of Christian doctrine, and ecumenical councils (to 590). Some historians carry ancient Christianity down to Chariemagne (800) and the begirming of the Holy Roman ^npire and the temporal power of the papacy. In this case there is a fourth sub- division, from Gregory I. to Charlemagne (590 to 800). But Charlemagne belongs to the Middle Ages and the Germanic phase of Christianity. (b) History of Medieval Christianity, from the close of the sixth to the beginning of the six- teenth century, or from Gregory the Great (590), the first medieval pope, to Luther (1517). The Greek and Roman churches, divided since the con- troversy of Photius and Pope Nicholas I., pursue their independent course. The papacy receives ite full development, the Holy Roman Empire is the dominant power, religious thought gradually moves toward the Reformation, and Western Europe comes more and more into prominence. Sub- divisions: (1) The missionary period, Gregory I. to Gregory VII. (590-1050); the Church spreads among the Celtic, Slavonic, and Teutonic races of Northern and Western Eiuope, Mohammedanisrn Ohnroh History 98 originates and grows, the Great Schism occurs between the East and the West. (2) The absolute papacy, Gregory VII. to Boniface VIII. (1050- 1294) — the period of the Crusades, the rise of the mendicant orders, scholasticism, the rise of the uni- versities and Gothic architecture, the development of heretical sects, and the Inquisition. (3) The decline of the papacy and signs of the Reformation, Boniface VIII. to Luther's theses (1294-1517)— the " exile " of the popes at Avignon, the papal schism, the reforming coimcils of Pisa, Constance, and Basel, Wyclif, Huss, Savonarola, Wessel, the German mystics, Eckhart and Tauler, the Renais- sance, the discovery of printing and the New Worid. (c) History of Kodem Christianity, from the Reformation (1517) to the present time. Protes- tantism and Romanism; founding of the various Evangelical Churches (the Lutheran, Calvinistic, Anglican, etc.); restoration and revival of Roman- ism; the Council of Trent; Jesuitism; Jansenism; the Puritan conflict in England; the Westminster Assembly; the restoration of the Episcopal Church under Charles II.; the expulsion of the Stuarts; the Edict of Toleration; the organization of the dis- senting denominations (Presbyterians, Independ- ents, Baptists, Quakers); the settlement of North America; Pietism and the Moravians in Germany; the rise of rationalism in Germany, deism in Eng- land; the Methodist revival in England and the Colonies; the French Revolution and spread of infidelity; organization of philanthropic agencies, the Sunday-school, and modem missions; progress and triimiph of ultramontane Romanism, culmi- nating in the Vatican Council (1870); conflict of faith with rationalism and infidelity; growth of the churches in the United States on the basis of the voluntary principle; unionistic movement among English-speaking Protestants; the new criticism, based on the historic study of the Scriptures and early church history, shaking traditional views of the Old Testament and the person and mission of Christ. Subdivisions: (1) The age of the Protec- tant Reformation and the Roman Catholic Coun- terreformation or reaction (1517-1648). (2) The age of scholastic and polemic confessionalism, in conflict with non-conformity and subjective piety (1650-1750). (3) The age of rationalism and re- ligious revival and church union (1750-1900). VI. Value: The study of history enables one to imderstand the present, which is the fruit of the past and the germ of the future. It is the richest storehouse of wisdom and experience. It is the best oonmientary of Christianity. It is full of comfort and encouragement. It verifies on ev- ery page the promise of the Savior to be with his people always, and to build his Church on an indestructible rock. It exhibits his life in all its foms and phases, and the triumphant march of his kingdom from land to land and generation to generation. Earthly empires, systems of philoso- phy, have their day, human institutions decay, all tilings of this worid bloom and fade away, like the grass of the field; but the Christian religion has the dew of p>erennial youth, survives all changes, makes steady progress from age to age, overcomes all persecution from without, and corruption from within, is now stronger and more widely spread than ever before, directs the course of civilization, and bears the hopes of the himian race. The history of the world is governed in the interest, and for the ultimate triimiph, of Christianity. The experience of the past is a sure guaranty of the future. Vn. Literature: Only works on general church history will be mentioned here. 1. Ancient Historians: Eusebius (d. 340)— "Church History" from the birth of Christ to Constantine the Great, 324 — and his successors in the Greek Church, Socrates, Sozomen, Theodoret. The Latin Church (e.g., Rufinus) contented itself with translations and extracts from Eusebius and his continuators. The Middle Ages produced most valuable material for history (chronicles, papal bulls, theological treatises, etc.), but no great gen- eral church history; the Reformation first called forth the spirit of critical inquiry. 2. Historians from 1500 to 1800: Matthias Flacius (d. 1575) and other Lutheran divines of Germany wrote the " Magdeburg Centuries " (Latin, Basel, 1559-74), covering thirteen Christian cen- turies in as many volumes — the first history from a Protestant point of view, in opposition to the claims of Romanism (see BIaodeburg Centuries). In defense of Romanism, and in refutation of Flacius, Csesar Baronius (d. 1607) wrote in Latin " Ecclesiastical Annals," in 12 folio vols. (Rome, 1588 sqq.; new ed., by A. Theiner, Bar-le-Duc, 1868 sqq.), continued by Raynaldus, Spondanus, Theiner, and others — a work of extraordinary learning and industry, but to be used with caution. Tillemont (d. 1698), in his invaluable M^moirei (16 vols., Paris, 1693-1712), wrote the history of the first six centuries from the sources, in biblio- graphical style and in the spirit of the more liberal GaUican Catholicism. Gottfried Arnold (d. 1714), of the Pietistic school of Spener, in his Unpar- teiische Kirchen- und Ketzerhiatorie (4 vols, folio, Frankfort, 1699 sqq.; to 1688 A.D.), advocated the interests of practical piety, and the claims of heretics and schismatics, and all those who suf- fered persecution from an intolerant hierarchy and orthodoxy. J. L. Mosheim (d. 1755) wrote his " Institutes of Ecclesiastical History " (in Latin, Helmst&dt, 1755, and often since in several trans- lations) in the spirit of a moderate Lutheran or^ thodoxy, with solid learning and impartiality, in clear style, after the centurial arrangement of Fla- cius, and furnished a convenient text-book, which (in the translation of Murdock, with valuable supplements) has continued in use in England and America much longer than in Germany. J. M. Schroeckh's Christliche Kirchengeschichte (35 vols., Leipsic, 1768-1803), continued by Ktrchenge- Bchichte aeit der Reformation (10 vols., 1804-12), is far more extensive and far less readable, but in- valuable for reference, and full of information from the sources. It forsakes the mechanical centurial division, and substitutes for it the periodic arrange- ment. H. P. K. Henke (d. 1809) followed with a thoroughly rationalistic work (6 vols., Brunswick, 1795-1806; continued by J. S. Vater, 3 vols., 1818-20). 99 RELIGIOUS ENCYCLOPEDU Ohurch Hl8tox7 3. Hiatorlans from 1800 to 1900: August Nean- der, a converted Israelite, professor of church history in Berlin (d. 1850), marks an epoch in this branch of theological literature; and by his truly Christian, consdaitious, impartial, truth-loving, just, and liberal, and, withal, thoroughly learned and pro- found spirit and method, he earned the title of ** Father of Church History." His AUgemeine Geschiehle tier christlichen Religion und Kirche (6 vols., Hamburg, 1825-52), though incomplete (it stops with the Council of Basel, 1430), and some- what diffuse and monotonous in style, is an im- mortal monument of genius and learning. It pays special attention to the development of Chris- tian life and doctrine, and is edifying as well as instructive. It has been naturalized in England and America by the translation of Professor Torrey (5 vols., Boston, 1847-52; 12th ed., 1872; new ed., with a complete index, 6 vols., 1881), and will long be studied with profit, although in some re- specis superseded by more recent researches in the first three centuries. Equally valuable, though of an altogether different plan and spirit, is the Kirchengesckichte of J. K. L. Gieseler (5 vols., Bonn, 1824-56), translated first by Cunningham in Philadelphia (1846), then by Davidson and Hull in En^and, and revised and completed by H, B. Smith of New York (5 vols., 1857-^80). The text is a meager skeleton of facts and dates; but the body of the work consists of carefully ttlected extracts and proof-texts from the sources which furnish the data for an independent judg- ment. F. C. Baur's work on church history, partly published after his death (5 vols., Tubingen, 1853 8qq.), is distinguished for philosophic grasp, critical combinations, and bold conjectures, especially in the treatment of the apostolic and postapostolic ages, and the ancient heresies and systems of doc- trine. K R. Hagenbach's KircKengeschichte (7 vols. , Leipaic, 1869 sqq.; revised ed., by Nippold, 1885 aqq.) ia a popular digest for the educated lay reader, riiilip Schaff's History of the Christian Church (3 vols.. New York, 1859 sqq. ; Germ. ed. of the 1st three vols., Leipeic, 1868, revised ed. of same in Eni^, New York, 1882-1907) is written from the An^o-German and Ang^o-American standpoint. H. C. Sheldon's History of the Christian Church (5 vols.. New York, 1894) is by an American Meth- odist. England has produced greater works in ipedal departments than in general church history — «.g., Gibbon's Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire, Milman's Latin Christianity ^ Stanley's Jewish Church and Eastern Church, Farrar's Life of Chritt, The Apostle Paul, and Early Days of Chris- tianity, J. B. Lightfoot's Apostolic Fathers, Trench's Lectures on the Mediaeval Church, the Texts and Studies ed. J. A. Robinson. George Waddington presents the general histoiy to the Reformation inclusive (6 vols., London, 1833 sqq.); his work is B^Mrseded by J. C. Robertson's History of the Christian Church to the Reformation (3 vols., Lon- don, 1854 sqq.; new ed., 8 small vols., 1875). The older work of Milner (d. 1797) is written in popular style for edification. The most valuable contribu- tioQfl of modem English scholarship to ancient church history are found in Smith and Cheetham's Dictionary of Christian Antiquities (2 vols., Lon- don, 1875-80) and Smith and Wace's Dictionary of Christian Biography (4 vols., 1877-87). The largest Roman Catholic church history of recent times is Abb^ Rohrbacher's Histoire universeUe de V6glise catholique (25 vols., Paris, 1842 sqq.). 4. KannaU of Church History In One or Kore Volumes: (a) Roman Catholic: J. J. I. von Ddl- linger (Vienna, 1836, unfinished; Eng. transl., 4 vols., London, 1840-42); J. A. Mdhler (posthumous, ed. P. B. Gams, 3 vols., Regensbui^g, 1867-70); J. B. Alzog (10th ed., by F. X. Kraus, 2 vols.. Mains, 1882; Eng. transl., 4 vols., London, 1879^2; 3 vols., Cincinnati, 1876); F. X. Kraus (3 parts, Treves, 1872-75; 4th ed., 1896); J. Hergen- rOther (4th ed., ed. J. P. Eirsch, 3 vols., Freiburg, 1902 sqq.); F. X. Funk (4th ed., Paderbom, 1902); C. J. von Hefele (4th ed., by A. Kn6pfler, 1905). (b) Protestant: K. A. Hase (11th ed., Leipsic, 1886; a masterly miniature picture; Eng. transl.. New York, 1855); C. W. Niedner (2d ed., Berlin, 1866; very learned and very heavy); J. H. Kurtz (14th ed., by N. Bon- wetsch and P. Tschackert, 2 vols., Leipsic, 1906; Eng. transl., 3 vols.. New York, 1888-89); A. Ebrard (4 vols., Erlangen, 1865-67; polemically Reformed); J.J.Herzog(3vols.,Erlangen, 1880-82; moderately Reformed); E. Chsustel (French, 4 vols., Paris, 1859-74; new ed., 1881 sqq.); H. Schmid (2 vols., Erlangen, 1881); K. A. Hase, Vorlesungen (4 vols., Leipsic, 1885 sqq.); R. Sohm (9th ed., Leipsic, 1894; Eng. transl., London, 1895); W. MdUer (3 vols., Freibui^g, 1889-94; 2d ed., by H. von Schubert and G. Kawerau, 1897-1902; Eng. transl., London, 1892-1900); Karl Mailer (2 vols., Tti- bingen, 1892-1902); F.Loofs (Halle, 1901); H. von Schubert (2d ed., Tubingen, 1904). By American and English scholars are G. P. Fisher, History of the Christian Church (New York, 1887); J. F. Hurst, History of the Christian Church (2 vols., New York, 1897-1900); A. H. Newman, Manual of Church His- tory (2 vols., Philadelphia, 1900-03); Cheetham and Hard wick, Church History (4 vols., London, 1908). 6. Hiatories of Bootrlne: G. Mttnscher (4 vols., Marburg, 1797-1809); F. C. Baur, Lehrbuch der Dogmengeschichte (Tttbingen, 1847; 3d ed., 1867); idem, Vorlesungen, ed. by his son (3 vols., Leipsic, 1865-67); A. Neander (ed. J. L. Jacobi, BerUn, 1857; Eng. transl, 2 vols., London, 1858); K. R. Hagenbach (5th ed., Leipsic, 1867; Eng. transl, 2 vols., Edinburgh, 1880); W. G. T. Shedd (2 vols., New York, 1863); G. Thomasius (2 vols., Erlangen, 1874-76); F. D. Nitzsch (Berlin, 1870; unfin- ished); A. Hamack, Lehrbuch der Dogmengeschichte (3d ed., 3 vols., Freiburg, 1894-97; Eng. transl, 7 vols., London and Boston, 1895-1900); idem, Orundriss der Dogmengeschichte (4th ed., Freiburg, 1905; Eng. transl. New York, 1893); F. Loofs (3d ed., Halle, 1893); R. Seeberg (2 vols., Leipsic, 1895-98); G. P. Fisher (International Theological Library, 1896); H. C. Sheldon (4th ed., 2 vols.. New York, 1906). See Dogma, DoaMATics. 6. Chronological Tables: H. B. Smith, History of the Church of Christ in Sixteen Chronological Tables (New York, 1860); F. X. Kraus, Synchro- nistische Tabellen gur Ktrchengeschichte (Treves, Ohuroh Order Churoh Beflifitera 100 1876); idem, SynchronisHsche Tabellen zur christ- lichen KunstgeschichU (Freiburg, 1880); H. Wein- garten, ZeUtafdn und Ueberblicke zur Kirchenge- sckichte (6th ed., by C. F. Arnold, Leipsic, 1905). 7. AtlAsefi: K. Heussi and H. Mulert, Atlas zur Kirchengeschichie, 66 maps with 18 pages of intro- duction and index (Tubingen, 1905). The general historical atlases of R. H. Labberton (14th ed., Boston, 1889), F. W. Putzger (24th ed., Bielefeld, 1900), and E. A. Freeman (accompanying his His- torical Geography of Europe, 3d ed., London, 1903) are also useful for church history. The main activity in recent times in historical investigation and treatment has been devoted to the first three Christian centuries, including the work of Hamack, Fimk, Kattenbusch, Lightfoot, Robinson, McGiffert, and many others. The Mid- dle Ages are receiving an increasing amount of attention; names worthy of mention in this field are Ddllinger, Ehrle, Denifle, Schwane, Kirsch, and Finke among Roman Catholics, and Karl MQller, ^auck, Mirbt, Sabatier, Creighton, Stubbs, lica, and others among Protestants. (Philip ScHAPrt) D. S. Schaff. Bxbxjoobapht: For fuller infomubtion cf. Philip Sohaff, HitUfry of the Ckriaiian Church, i. 1-63. New York. 1882; and introductions to other general works on church history. Further. Schaflf, Whai is Church Hiaioryf Philadelphia. 1846; W. Q. T. Shedd. The PhUoaophv of HiBtory, Andover, 1861; H. B. Smith. The Nature and Worth of the Science of Church Hietory, in his volume of essays, Faith and Philoeophy, pp. 49-87. New York. 1877; J. De Witt, Churdi Uietory ae a Science, in the BihUotheca Sacra, 1883; E. A. Freeman, The Meihod of Hiaiorical Study, London. 1880; A. C. McGiflfert. The Study of Church Hietary, in the BiMtolfteca Sacra, 1893; W. Bright. The Study of HieUrry, in Waymarke of Churdi Hittory, London. 1894; Lord Acton. The Study of Hietary, Lon- don. 1895; A. Hamack. Dm Chrietentum und die Oe- •chichte, I^ipsio, 1895; K. Lamprecht. Wtiat /« Hittoryf transl. from the Germ, by £. A. Andrews. New York. 1905. CHURCH ORDER (Ger. Kirchenardnung) : The general ecclesiastical constitution of a State. The eariy Evangelical Church attached leas im- portance to ecclesiastical ritual than the pre- Reformation Church had done. As early aa 1526 Luther observes in Deutsche Messe und Ordnung des GoUesdiensts : " In sum, this and all other forms are so to be used that where they give rise to a mis- use they should be forthwith set a^side, and a new form be made ready; since outward forms are in- tended to serve to the advancement of faith and love, and not to the detriment of faith. Where this they cease to do, they are already dead and void, and are of no more value; just as when a good coin is debased and retired on account of its abuse, and issued anew; or when e very-day shoes wax old and rub, they are not longer worn, but thrown away and new ones bought. Form is an external thing, be it ever so good, and thus it may lapse into misuse; but then it is no longer an orderly form, but a disorder; so that no external order stands and avails at all of itself, as hitherto the papal forms are judged to have done, but all forms have their life, worth, strength, and virtues in proper use; or else they are of no avail and value whatever " (Werke, Weimar ed., xix. 72 sqq.). According to Lutheran ecclesiastical teaching (Formula of Con- cord, II.; Solida declaraHo, x.; Apology, xiv.; Me- lanchthon's Loci, 2d redaction in CR, xxi. 555-556; the Saxon VisitaHonsbuch of 1528; etc.) a uniform liturgy is requisite only in so far as it is indispen- sable to uphold proper doctrine and the adminis- tration of the sacraments; whereas in general the rightful appointment of the external fimctions of church officers and their sphere in the congrega- tions is committed to the church governing board of the state authorities. The spontaneous develop- ment of church law, and especially the regulation of divine service, the sacraments, and discipline, as Luther ideally conceived it, proved impracti- cable, and gave place, though not invariably so, to definition on the part of temporal sovereigns. All these regulations, especially those of governments and cities, by means of which the canonical church forms that had previously prevailed in the land were modified in a reformatory direction, while the newly developing church sjrstem became progres- sively established, are called "Church Orders." Those of the sixteenth century are the most im- portant (cf. E. Sehling, in ZKR, xxix., 1897, pp. 328 sqq., and introduction to his edition of the Church Orders, i., Leipsic, 1902). A Church Order usually begins with a dogmatic part in which the agreement of the State Church with the general Lutheran confessions is set forth with more or less of detail (Credenda); then follow regulations concerning liturgy, the appointment of church officers, organization of church government, discipline, marriage, schools, the pay of church and school officials, the administration of church prop- erty, care of the poor, etc. (Agenda, q.v.). A sys- tematic topical arrangement is by no means al- ways adhered to. As a rule, later compilations have made use of earlier forms, and thus the Orders are grouped in families. E. Sehxjno. Bxblioorapht: H. C. KdniiE, Bibliotheca offendarum, Zeller- feld. 1726; J. J. Moser. Carpue jurie evanffeliorum eccL^ aiaetici, 2 vols.. Zollichau. 1737-38; A. L. Richter, Die evanodiechen Kirchenordnunoen dee 10. Jakrhunderte, 2 vols., Weimar. 1846. CHURCH PATRON SAINT (patronus sanctus): The particular saint to whom a church is dedicated, and under whose protection it stands. The early Church in a great variety of ways put guardian saints in the place of the tutelary deities (dettUulares) known to the pagan religions in coimection with specific objects and relationships. In primitive times church patrons were taJcen especially from the number of the martyrs, who were esteemed to be influential mediators with God. Then when the worship of saints had developed from the venera- tion of martyrs, the guardian patrons were selected from among the saints not only for separate churches, but also for countries, dioceses, orders, cloisters, cities, congregations, gilds, brotherhoods, etc. The possession of relics of a saint in a certain church often determined his choice as patron. When sub- sequently the custom arose of naming churches after some Christian mystery — as, for instance, the Holy Trinity, the Holy Ghost, the Sacred Heart of Jesus — ^it came about that a church might be commended to the protection of a saint without bearing his name, thus creating the distinctioo 101 Ohnroh Order Ohuroh Be^fiters between a protective and a titular patron. In accordance with its teaching as to the saints and veneration of relics, the Roman Catholic Church has developed a special doctrine concerning venera- tion, election, alteration, etc., of church patron saints (cf. the decree confirmed by Urban VIII., Mar. 23, 1630, in L. Ferraris, Bibliotheca prompta canoniea, 11 vols., Venice, 1782-94, s.v. patroni tancti). The Refonners and Protestants generally have retained the old custom of designating churches after saints and Christian mysteries for the purpose of thus bestowing upon them a definite, distinguishing name. In the choice of it, more or less deference is shown to the preferences of the congregation and the founder. E. Sbhlino. BiBuooRAnrr: M. R C. Walcott, Saend Arth<gologv, b.t. "Patroa," London, 1808. CHURCH REGISTERS. Eariy (%iireh Books (§ 1). Mediend Reeisten ({ 2). The ficKinninga of Modem Registers (| 3). Contents and Gharscter (| 4). Valoe for Other than Church Uses (| 5). Eodesiastical and Cml Registers ({ 6). Collections of Church Registers ({ 7). The German word Kirchenbuch has different meanings. It refers to church books in the sense of "service-books," and to parish books which recorded inventories, rents, income, ecclesiastical celebrations, and other matters referring to wor* ship; but in modem times the word has generally taken the meaning of registers of sacramental acts, such as baptism, marriage ceremonies, confessions, and funerals. An especially old and remarkable example of a " church book " in the older sense is that of Old- edoe. which begins before 1371 and contains a table for determining Quinquagesima Simday, the pas- toral epistle of Bertram, bishop of LUbeck (1376), lists of pastors, also of tithes, income of pastors, donations, etc. Church books of another kind, but differing from modem church registers, are the cartularies of bishops in England, as, for instance, the Register of John Pontissara (1282-1304) and the Renters of John de Sandale and Rigaud de Affierio, bishops of Winchester, 1316-23 (London and Winchester, 1897). These books contain ever3rthing relating to the government of bishops. The church book in the sense of a I. Early register of ecclesiastical celebrations Church is important for the history of modem Booki. registers, since in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries it was trans- fonned into the church register of baptisms, marriages, etc., for instance in Mecklenburg and HoUtein. Land-registers and registers of taxa- tion go back much farther in Germany into the fifteenth century, in England, France, Italy into the fourteenth or thirteenth, even earlier. An- other source for the date of personal records are the church bills found in the older parish registers. A more thorough knowledge of the history, nature, and importance of church registers began only when efforts were made to collect and test existing material. Church registers, or at least compilations corresponding to them, are traceable to the civ- ilized nations of the earliest times, for instance the Egyptians. The Hebrews had also their records of birth and genealogical tables. In the Roman empire registers of births may be traced back to the time of the kings; from the time of Augustus are found registers of marriages. As Christianity took its rise in the Roman empire, it accepted to a certain extent the existing elements of culture. The diptyches (see Liber VrriB; Sculftxtrs, Christian) were adopted from the Romans, and adapted to Christian usages, the members of the congregation being registered not for military reasons or for the levying of taxes, but as citizens of the kingdom of God. Besides the dates of birth, there were also recorded dates of marriage and of death. These " sacred books and tablets " were important preeminently from a historical stand- point, as they contained the names of bishops, mar- tyrs, and benefactors. The diptyches did not develop into church registers of the modem kind, nor were they of any importance for the modem Church, owing chiefly to the degeneration of culture after the destruction of the Roman empire, and to a perverted tendency of the medieval Church. Instead of the dip- tyches of the deceased and living, 2. Medieval churches and monasteries adopted Regiaters. necrologies and morilogies, in which were entered especially the names of donors and benefactors. They were usually called " books of life " (see Liber Vita). Besides these, there were in existence church books in the older sense, that is, registers of taxes, inven- tories, etc. On account of the lack of personal registers, princes and lords had their own family books, while the age of other people had to be determined, even as late as the sixteenth century, by the testimony of living persons. At the close of the Middle Ages the census in the modem sense was instituted in flourishing cities like Augs- burg and Breslau. The Renaissance had a wholesome effect upon the development of church registers, in France and Italy as early as the beginning of the fourteenth century. A register of baptisms from Cabridres near Vauduse dates from 1308, fragments of a register of marriages and deaths in Middle France from 1335 and 1336. In Italy the use of such registers may be traced to the fourteenth century. In Spain the famous cardinal Ximenez in 1407 at the Synod of Toledo ordered the introduction of baptLnnal and matrimonial registers; soon after- ward similar orders were issued in Portugal. In Switzerland and (jermany church 3. The Be- registers go back to the time of the ginningB of Reformation. Earlier attempts had Modem not been successful. The first bap- RegisteiB. tismal register in Zurich dates from 1525, the register of marriages in Strasbui^ from the same time. Church registers in Constance began in 1531, and in Frankfort, Thuringia, Saxony, and Bohemia about the same time. In the imperial dty of Nuremberg they existed from 1524, in Silesia from 1534, under the influence of the Silesian Reformer Hess; the other Chnrch Be^nterB Ohuroh and School 102 territories followed soon afterward, in the early sixties of the sixteenth century. The number of these registers, since the enormous losses resulting from the Thirty Years' War, especially in Electoral Saxony, can be estimated only approximately. There is reliable information of the existence of more than 150 registers dated 1522-63. The ear- lier introduction of church registers in Italy and France must be ascribed, to the independent influ- ence of the classical renaissance, which became of importance in Germany only after its union with the religious efforts of Luther. In the Netherlands the Reformation was for a long time suppressed and its confessors were eidled, but a s3rnod in 1574 changed these conditions, and church registers were soon generally introduced; but there are extant fragments of earlier date. From Germany the use of church registers penetrated the Scandi- navian kingdoms at a comparatively late date. In Denmark they were introduced by royal order in 1646, in Norway in 1685, in Sweden in 1686. As in Germany, so in England, the general intro- duction of church registers followed separation from the Papal Church, by order of King Henry VIII. in 1538. In spite of this unevangelical origin, the introduction of chiurch registers in England was accompanied by immediate success. There have been preserved not less than 812 church registers from the year 1538, 1,822 from 1528 to 1558, and 2,448 from 1558 to 1600. From 1551 date the first evidences of church registers in Scot- land; in Ireland their general introduction took place only in the nineteenth century. In trans- oceanic countries personal registers were used from settlement there by the civilized peoples of Europe. The earliest church register is that of the Dutch in Reciff, Brazil, 1633. The East India House in London preserves church registers from Bombay from 1703, from Bengal dated 1713, from Madras dated 1743. Of Roman Catholic church registers there are only sporadic cases in Germany at the time of the Refonnation. Their general introduc- tion followed the decrees of the Council of Trent in 1563. These decrees referred only to registers of baptisms and marriages; records of funerals were introduced in 1614 by the Rituale Romanum. Dur- ing the Thirty Years' War chureh registers were sometimes taken away from the Evangelicals and continued by the Catholics, so that the supposed antiquity of some Catholic registers has no basis in fact. The church renters did not consist solely of lists of baptisms, marriages, and funerals; a church register at Lehrbach in Hesse contains not less than twelve columns. The registers, especially those of the seventeenth century, are frequently a rich source for the histoiy of ch\m;h discipline. The registers of the catechumens and con- 4. Contents firmed form a part of the church record and which is very important for the history Character, of Christian worship. They may be traced back to the first period of the Refonnation. The most curious chureh records are found among the so-called family books. There the members of the congregations are arranged alphabetically according to families, and their resi- dences, with the religious acts performed on them, are given. In this way there originated chronicles of whole villages; so, for instance, the village of Dankerode in the Hartz mountains. Another noteworthy class is found in the so-called minis- terial books which were introduced after 1686 in Sweden. They consist of six different parts: Register (1) of births and baptisms; (2) of deaths and funerals; (3) of marriages; (4) of catechetical examinations at home; (5) of newly admitted members; (6) of members who had moved to other parishes. The most interesting part is the fourth, which contained records of religious instruction, of examinations, and of attendance at the Lord's Supper, and notes on conduct and discipline before and after marriage. After the church registers had become known and been generally introduced in all civilized states of Europe, about the end of the seventeenth and beginning of the eighteenth century, their value and importance began to be appreciated from other points of view, and they were used as sociological sources, first in England after the seventeenth cen- tury. After Natwral and Political Annotations upon the Bills of MortaHiy^ by John Graunt (London, 1666 and 1676), there followed a rich literature of similar character in England, France, Germany, Holland, Italy, and Sweden. It is true, many of these productions were merely sociological, but some of them included the theological side, as, for instance, WilUam Derham's Physical Theology (London, 1713). This work formed the model for Die gdttliche Ordnung in den 5. Value for Verdnderungen des menschlichen Ge~ Other than schlechis, by Johann Peter SOssmilch Church (1741, 3 vols., 1776), and Mohsen, a Uses. physician, published in his work on vaccination for the first time a history of chureh registers of baptisms and deaths. Thus, a powerful influence was exerted upon them by the rapid growth of sociology and statistics, and the attention of large circles was called to them. After the end of the seventeenth century extracts from church registers were ordered to be made by the pastors and superintendents of Brandenburg- Prussia and sent to the government offices in Berlin for purposes of vital statistics. The keeping of chureh registers became dependent upon the orders of civil authorities; this led to their general adoption and to stricter enforcement of rules, but at the same time the registers lost much of their churchly character as they were used chiefly in court and for purposes of taxation and for military purposes. In conformity with the general law of Prussia, every pastor had to make one copy of his church register and send it to the local court. Electoral Saxony and Austria issued similar orders. In the course of time personal records were sep- arated altogether from the Church and entrusted to the municipal authorities, civil lists taking the place of church registers. This was due in France in part to the Revolution, in part to the peculiar development of the royal authority. King Francis I. issued as eariy as 1539 an order making church registers subject to the supervision of the munic- ipal courts. Under Louis XIV. the keeping of 103 Ohuroh Beslfiters Chnroh and Sohoo church r^istere was altog;ether due to himself and the wcuhir government, according to a decree of 1667. Further decrees were issued in 6. Eccksi- France in 1736 and 1792. They were astical and received into the civil code of Napo- Ci¥il leon, and with the Napoleonic con- Kegisten. quests were carried over to Belgium in 1796, then to Holland and to several states of Germany. In Germany, the entire sep- aration of eivil affairs from connection with the Church was brought about especially by the revo- lutionary movement of 1848. The Pnissian con- stitution of 1850 provided for the introduction of provisions like those of the French in regard to records of persons. This provision was made a law in Pniffiia in 1874; accordin^y, special civil registry-offices were introduced, and from that time church registers lost their importance in public affairs. In 1875 these same decisions were applied to the whole German empire. Clexgsrmen are not eligible as legiBtiy officers. In 1895 civil registers were introduced also in Austria-Hungary. But with the enactment of these laws chureh registers did not dis£4>pear in Germany; on the contrary, they regained their original significance and were given back to the Chureh. In place of the secular authorities, the ecclesiastical leaders, in Prussia the membere of the consistories and of the Evan- gelical Superior Chureh Council, assumed the super- vision of the church registers. The kingdom of God and the dvil order of the State are two different ^heres with their own special aims and purposes. Registration of baptisms and of admission into the congregation, of marriages and funerals, of attend- ance at confessions and the Lord's Supper, and of spiritual discipline are facts for the chureh regis- ters, while data concerning physical births and deaths, matrimony from the civil point of view, to- gether with all facts concerning the physical and nat- ural being of man, are a matter of the civil registry. In modem times collections of chureh registers have been undertaken; there is a genealogico- statistical center in Denmark, in the academy of Sweden, and in state arehives in Mecklenburg and CHdenbuig. But in case of such collections dupli- cate copies should always be made, because it is essential that at least one copy of the 7. Collec- chureh register remain with the local tiont of church. The collections should be Church under the supervision of chureh author- Registen. ities and be deposited in church ar- chives, not in state arehives or other secular institutions. As a resiilt of the French Revolution and subsequent wars, the church rec- ords of Alsace-Lorraine, the Netherlands, the Rhine Palatinate, the Lower Rhine, and the duchy of Berg are in state archives or in superior district courts. In Prussia and German Austria-Hungary the chureh registers were left with the churehes, in ^ite of the introduction of civil registry-offices. Recently attempts have been made in Germany, Denmark, Sweden, Austria, En^and, and Belgium to consolidate the different collections of church registere for statistical purposes. In Belgium a general index for all old chureh registers was pre- pared in 1865. In Austria a statistical central conmodssion was instituted in 1882 for a similar purpose. In England an enormous amount of material has been collected in the Record Office, on the basis of the Parish Register Act of 1882. (E. Jacobs.) Biblioorapht: J. C. W. Au^UBti. Handbuch der ehrUaidien Arehaologie, iii. 600-730, Leipeio, 1837; J. S. Bum, HUt. of Paritk ReoiUtn, aUo of tha Reoiaien of Scotland, /r«^ land .... London, 1862; J. Jaatrow, Die VoUumoJU d€utachtr StddU, BerUn. 1876; R. E. C. Waters. PaHA ReoUten in England, London, 1883; H. Truaen, Dot preuaHaehe KirdienredU im BerncKe dtr tvanoeliadUn Landeakirehe, Berlin, 1804; £. Friedbers, Ldirbueh dsa tvangeliMchen und katholiaehen KirchenrtehU, Leipne, 1805; Epiaeopal ReguUn of the Diocaa§ of WincheaUr, London, 1807; J. Gmelin, in Deutaehe GctcAidUiMZtttr, i (1000), 155-170; Krieg. in KorreapondewMaU dea OeaanU- vereina der deutaekan Oeaehiehia' und AUartumavarwina. 1007. no. 25. pp. 102-105. CHURCH AND SCHOOL. Pablio Sohoob not OriginaUy Maintained by tht CSrardb (5 1). Influence of the Reformation (§ 2). Pietism ({ 3). Compulsory Education ({ 4). Religion and Coercion Exclusive (§ 5). Compulsory Religious Instruction not Desirable (| 6). Position and Attitude of Teachers ({ 7). Denominational and Undenominational Schoob (| 8). Qerical O>ntrol of Schools (§ 0). The question of the relation of Church and Scho<4 did not become a burning one until after the Refor- mation, when the modem State began to recognize its duty to provide public elementary schools for its subjects and make school-attendance obligatory. Since compulsory attendance was the necessary con- dition for the success of public elementary schools, the Church, from its very nature prevented from employing coercion, could not compete with the State in this field. It was necessary, therefore, for Church and State to come to an understanding, particularly as the latter never organized its school- system de novo, but took over and developed the educational organization of the Church. The proposition that the School is the daughter of the Church is not confirmed by the history of the early Church. Religious education was considered the business of the family and the community; and education in any other sense was a private matter. During the Middle Ages z. Public the Church maintained schools for Schools not future clerics and a few noblemen, and Originally prepared children for confirmation. Maintained It was Chariemagne who gave the first by the great impetus to popular education. Church. Even at the close of the Middle Ages the writing-schools in Germany were maintained either by the' cities or by private in- dividuals, not by the Chiurch. With the Reformation, the Church assumes a different attitude toward popular education. Luther insists on the establishment of schools; and Me- lanchthon declares that the imion of 2. Influence Church and School is necessary. Pop- of the Ref- ular education is demanded for relig- orxnation. ious reasons; but the right to provide for the same is recognized as belonging to the State. The existing elementary schools in the towns were reorganized; and the introduction Churoh and Sohool Ohuroh and State 104 of religious instruction gave them the character of public schools. Similar schobls were founded in the country villages. All these schools were quite elementary in character, religion, reading, and writing forming practically the only subjects of instruction; but for more than two centuries they offered the only educational opportunity to the great majority of the population. Even such schools could exist only under favor- able circumstances. Before the Thirty Years' War there were not many of them left; and after the war, when the ideas of Ratke and Comenius began to be effective, the tendency was to try something new, rather than to reestablish the old 3. Pietism, system. In this movement the Piet- ists took the lead. The public school, as revived by them in the interest of religious edu- cation, was introduced by various German states, but first by Prussia in 1763. The State recognized the service of the Church, and even entrusted the supervision of these schools to the clerg;^, who were regarded as officials of the State. The example of Prussia was followed by Bavaria 4. Comjnil- (1802), Denmark (1814), Austria •ory Edu- (1869), and France (1882), with the cation, enforcement of school-attendance. Holland, England, and the United States have attained all that is necessary by less incisive measures. In Italy and Spain education is compulsory only from the sixth to the ninth year, and wretched conditions prevail even to-day in the Roman Catholic states of South America. In Russia attendance at an elementary school shortens the period of military service. Ever since the State took charge of elementary education and made it oompiilsoiy there has been a movement in progress toward the emancipation of the schools from the clergy; and for over a him- dred years three questions have been in dispute: (1) Is compulsory school-attendance consistent with religious instruction? (2) Ought the school to be denominational or undenominational? (3) Does the control of the school belong to the clergy or to trained schoolmen? In principle, religion and coercion exclude each other. This is a matter about which Protestantism is now becoming more sensitive, and it is p>o6sible that the present protest against oompulsoiy religious instruction may develop into a general protest against all enforced culture. Of course, no similar protest is heard from Rome. The Roman Church, accus- tomed to the maxim "compel them to come in," is striving for power, and, for this reason, 5. Religion seeks contsol of the schools. It is and Coer- willing for the State to enforce educa- don Ex- tion, so long as the Church is benefited dudve. thereby. It has no feeling for the inner conflict between compulsory education and freedom of conscience, regarding ooerdon as necessary in view of present social and religious conditions. So much the stronger, how- ever, is this feeling in Protestantism. To be sure, in the training of children a certain amoimt of ooerdon is necessary, since the pathway of educa- tion leads through obedience to freedom. Par- ticularly in religious instruction, though, is it desirable to keep the end in view and gradually diminish coercion as freedom is approached. The custom of the eariy Church to leave religious in- struction to the family justified itself. Even if it is evident that the religious instruction of the family needs to be supplemented, still it is clear that the school can not replace the family, since the teacher alwasrs represents the law, while religion requires freedom. There have been many school-teachers of large religious nature who have touched the hearts and consdences of their pupils without em- ploying coerdon; but still the fact remains that the prevalence of religion is not due to the religious instruction given in the public schools. As regards the parents, even in modem states they can be compelled to send their children to schools where religious instruction is given. This is justified on the ground that the children are minors; and that whatever arbitrary control over the children the parents may lose is more than made up for by the mental growth of the children. But while the State can enforce education, the Church is prevented from doing this and must, therefore, protest when its services are thrust upon those who do not want them. An effort has been made to conceal the nature of this 6. Compul- religious coerdon by insisting that 80iy Re- instruction in the Bible has to do with Ugious In- historical information only. While struction such an argument might be applied not Desir- to mere church history, it is inappli- able. cable here. It involves a misunder- standing of the most important part of the subject. Two methods have been employed to escape this difficulty. Either religious instruction has been banished from the school entirely; or an effort has been made to modify it to meet the needs of dissenters, which is impossible if they are atheists. If the Church is to exerdse educational activity, providon must be made for it. For instance, one whole school-day may be set apart each week for the instruction of youth in religious subjects, as is the case in France. Also in Italy, Holland, England, and some states of the United States the state schools are non-religious in prin- dple. No cogent argument can be brought against such a system, for religious instruction is certainly not the business of the State. After all, the in- terests of Christianity are furthered by it. By assuming the responsibility of instruction in the usual school branches, the State makes it possible for the Church to concentrate its efforts in the religious field. It is not so much the mere separa- tion of Church and State that seems objectionable as the severing of an old historical union that has richly justified its existence by its works. TUs solution of the old problem would relieve the teacher of the embarrassment of teaching things that are possibly not an expression 7. Podtion of his own inmost convictions — a and Atti- difficulty often experienced by minis- tude of ters. The teacher should either be al- Teachers. lowed to teach religious subjects in his own way, or else be relieved of the duty entirely. It must be added, however, that this separation of Church and State, in the nuumer in 105 Church and School Church and State which it hiui been accomplished in Holland, France, Elng^and, and the United States, has aroused oppo- sition in the ranks of the teachers. Conscious of their high calling as educators, rather than as mere instructors, they are unwilling to see religion ban- ished from the schools, however much they may be opposed to the domination of the schools by the Church. Through modem emigration the various religious sects have been mixed together, especially in the cities. Practical considerations make it necessary that the children of a commimity where 8. Denomi- a number of confessions are repre- national sented shall all attend one school; and and Unde- thus originated the undenominational nomina- school. This arrangement gives chil- tional dren of a confession that is in the Schools, minority the advantage of a larger and better equipped school than they could attend otherwise. Further, such schools are favored by the spirit of tolerance and liber- alism now prevailing in religious matters, and by the non-religious character of the modem State. Against undenominationalism it is urged that the public school, as an educational institution, can least of all dispense with religious instruction, which forms the basis of all instmction; that religion, which carries with it the Uteraiy and historical studies, can not be separated from all other sub- jects and made an independent study; that the personality of the teacher will of necessity make such schools either Protestant or Catholic; and that spies of the opposite confession will then under- mine the confidence between the children and the teacher. The force of these objections can not be denied. It is clear that a school that educates must have harmony among its pupils; but in this view denominationalism in the school becomes a postulate of pedagogy, not of the Church. There is no question as to the importance of the Church for education. The question is whether practical theology or pedagogy is the better quslified to dictate the method to be employed in using the educative material contributed by the Church. It is plain that theology needs pedagogy as badly as pedagogy needs theology. Among the reasons that have decided teachers against the denominational school one remains to be mentioned: the usual [in Germany], but not necessary, supervision by the clergy. 9. Clerical Reasons alleged in favor of clerical Control control are: the splendid pedagogical of services rendered by the Church Schools, through such men as Comenius, Fran<£e, Niemeyer, and Schleier- maeher; the fine background of religious life which tiie clergy bring to the school, and their unselfishness in the work; the confidence expressed in the dergy by the State in turning over to them the public schools after the Reformation; and, not least, the -high culture of the clergy. Against such control it is argued that the public school is only following the higher institutions of leaming in emancipating itself from clerical guardianship; that the imeducated teachers of the clerical regime have been replaced with teachers trained scien- tifically in the theoiy and practise of pedagogy; that the clergy have not kept abreast of the grow- ing science of education, and are, therefore, un- prepared for the work; that this work is prejudi- cial to their high calling as ministers of the Gospel; and, finally, that clerical control benefits chiefly the ultramontanes. The clergy themselves are becoming less prejudiced in the matter and are beginning to admit the force of these arguments; and, on the other hand, their more prudent oppo- nents recognize that it is the duty of the Church, not of the State, to keep a lookout over the relig- ious and moral welfare of the public schools. C. Geter. Biblxoorapht: On the theory of education in relation to Church and State oonBult: C. Diekmann, Der hibliadM OttdiidUaufUerridU in der VolkudiuU^ Leipaic, 1876; G. A. L. Baur, OrundgUoe der ErMtehunoeUhrt, Gieaaen, 1887; R. H. Quick, Remarke About MonU and Rtligioua Education, in his E—ay, London, 1887; G. A. Coe, Edu- cation in Religion and Morale, New York, 1884. On the history of education oonault: K. Schmidt, Oe- eehichU der Pddaooffik, Kdthen, 1889; W. C Grasby, Teaching in Three Continente, London, 1891; J. Pajrne, Hietory of Education, ib. 1892; J. Bdhm, Oeechiehte der POdaooffik, Nuremberg. 1893; S. G. Williams, Hietory of Modem Education . . . from the Revival of Leaming to the Preeent, Syracuse. 1896; T. Davidson, Hietory of Eel- ucaHon, New York. 1900; E. G. Dexter. Hietory of Edu- cation in the U. S., New York, 1904. On the question of religious instruction in various countries consult in Germany: £. Sachsse. Die Lehre von der kirchlichen Ertiehung, Berlin. 1897; J. Beyhl, Die Be- freiung der VolkeechuUehrer aue der geietlichen Herrechaft, Berlin. 1903; F. Naumann. Der Streit der Konfeeeionen um die Sdiule, Berlin, 1904. In France: L. Duchesne, Autonomiee eccUeiaeHquee. £glieee eipariee, Paris, 1906. In England: Of the Education Acts. 1870-91, there are discussions by A. £. Steinthal, London. 1891; C. W. A. Brooke, ib. 1897. Of those from 1870 to 1902. by Sir H. Owen, and by W. A. Casson and G. C. Whiteley, both London, 1903. On the Act of 1902 consult: C. E. Ben- ham. H. H. Hanson, H. Mothersole, £. C. Rawlings. all London, 1903; also: W. H. Carnegie, Church and the Schoole; Churdiman'e View of the Education Controverey, ib. 1905. In the U. S.: S. T. Spear. Religion and the State, New York. 1876; J. Conway, ReepecHve RighU and Dutiee of Family, State and Church in Regard to Educa>- tion, ib. 1890; J. H. Crooker. ReHgioue Freedom in Ameri- can Education, Boston, 1903. CHURCH AND STATB. I. General Treatment. Scope of Subject ({1). Ancient Rome and the Eastern Empire (| 2). Rise of Papal Temporal Power (§ 3). Subordination of Church to State (| 4). The Modem State (8 6). Relations with Rome (8 6). The Evangelical SUte Church (§ 7). Tendency toward Separation (§ 8). Decadence of Protestantism in Germany (§ 9). Self-Goyemment for Church the Remedy (| 10). II. The United States. PhikMophical Background (8 1). Colonial Period (8 2). Conditions after the Revolution (8 3). Speeial Legislation (8 4). I. General Treatment: Since the Christian oomr munity presenta itaelf outwardly as a part of the Bodal order, for the regulation of which the State exists, the question arises, What shall be the relation between Church and State? From the point of view of the dififerent confessions this ques- stion might be variously answered. However, Church and State 106 disregarding minor distinctions, three answers are possible: The State may rule the Church and administer ecclesiastical affairs for its X. Scope of own purposes; the Church may rule Subject the State and use the temporal authority to fiurther the interests of the Church; or Church and State may be com- pletely separated, each confining itself to its own sphere, and neither exercising any authority over the other. As a matter of history, however, Church and State have seldom been completely independ- ent of each other, the one occupying itself solely with things spiritual, the other restricting itself to things temporal. The Roman Catholic Church still insists on having a voice in the control of tem- poral affairs, and the Protestant states of Europe usually claim a considerable share in ecclesiastical affairs. The difficulty of coordinating the eccle- siastical and the political authority as two distinct systems, or, indeed, of effecting any great innova- tion where the Church is concerned, is to be ac- counted for on historical grounds. The funda- mental legal ordinances involved here are not made by act of will, but are passed along from one period to the next, from one community to another. Laws and rights are inherited; and in no field is this so true as in that where religion is concerned. Even where new forces have effected the most complete changes, the effort is made to prove that each form links itself back on the old. The time of King Josiah, which saw the reconstruction of the Israelitic tradition in the spirit of the new law; the Pseudo-Isidor, who represents the asserted increase in the power of the hierarchy as an old right; even the Reformation itself, which claimed so frequently to restore the primitive Church — all bear witness to the statement. From the very beginning the relation between religious worship and temporal authority was a most intimate one. The chief of 2. Ancient the tribe, as likewise the king of the Rome and first commimity that could be called the Eastern a state, united in himself the functions Empire, of judge, military leader, and priest. He represented hia people in their re- lations toward one another, toward their enemies, and toward God. Religion was an affair of the State. In the later development the ruler might transfer his priestly duties to a special class of priests, but the close relation between religion and rule remained. At the advent of Christianity into the world's history the Roman emperor, as pontifex maximuSf stood at the head of the religious system in the Roman Empire. It was not his object, how- ever, to suppress the foreign gods worshiped in Roman possessions in the interest of the Roman deities whose high priest he was. In so far as these foreign gods had their states over which they ruled, all, including Yahweh, were regarded juristically as free and equal, though Yahweh was deposed after the destruction of Jerusalem. The God of Christianity, on the other hand, having no visible kingdom, was not a deity in the Roman sense of the word. Hence the persecution of the Christians as atheists. With the advent of the Christian emperor the oi^ganization of the Church and its relation to the State was definitely determined for centuries to come. The position of pontifex maximus which Constantine united with his arbitrary authority had not been depreciated by the decay of the old Roman fcith. He was the absolute head of the Church. Even after the title of pontifex maximiu had been dropped, toward the end of the fourth century, the office remained. The designation episcopus universalis is only a Christian translation of the heathen expression. To be sure, the em- peror no longer performed the functions of a priest, but he united in himself all ecclesiastical authority. He appointed and disciplined the priests and exer- cised a protectorate over the leges regias, those duties toward God which were required of every one. Laws and rights were created by the dictum of the emperor. Thus the Churdi became an institution of the State, and at the same time a com- pulsory institution. The very persecution which, in the name of religion, had formeriy been directed against Christianity was now employed to uproot heathenism, as well as to put down dissent within the Church. To be a citizen of the empire one had to be an orthodox Christian. This system, which was most consistently developed in the Eastern Empire, after its separation from Rome, became the heritage of the Russian autocracy. Though Russia has had its Holy Synod since the time of Peter the Great, the Czar remains the only source of authority in the Church, and uses the ecclesias- tical organization to strengthen the State. Con- sequently withdrawal from the state church is not permitt^. The second characteristic relation of Church to State was developed in the Western Empire. While the temporal power in the West 3. Rise of gradually waned after the division of Papal Tem- the empire, the ecclesiastical organiza- poral Power, tion remained intact; and, when the ancient State disappeared, the pope virtually succeeded the emperor as pontifex maxi- mus and appropriated as much temporal author- ity as was consistent with his priestly character. This transition of authority may be said to have begun in the year 445, when Valentinian III. pro- mulgated a law requiring obedience to the ordi- nances of the pope. Thiis the religious dream of a civilas dei was fused with the Roman tradition of an imperium inundi. Over against this papal State stood the Germanic tribes. Their conversion had been accomplished without difficulty, but for this very reason it had not been profound. Their indifference toward the Roman Church is ex- plained by their relation to Arianism. Goths, Bur- gundians, and Vandals had their own churches, which were separate from those of the provincials. The bishops were representatives of the king, and the subjected Roman provincials were treated just as the Phanariots are treated by the Turks. Even the conversion of the Franks did not greatly improve the position of the Roman Church. The Prankish king suffered no foreign interference in ecclesiastical affairs, not even from the pope him- self. Here material interests take precedence, and the Church assumes importance chiefly as a large property-holder. In fact, it was the Franks 107 Ohuroh and State wbo discovered the process of secularization. With the restoration of the Western Empire by Char- lemagne Byzantine ideas came into play. The Roman idea of a papal imperium mundi was ap- parently dormant. When, therefore, Germany became the center of gravity of European history it was quite natural that the bishops should be ad- vanced to the position of temporal princes, in the interest of the State. Otto the Great completed this innovation by taking under his protection the spiritual head of these princes, the pope himself. Thus the functions of the bishop were largely secularized. Investiture with property constituted his title, and his chief duty was to aid in carrying on the business of the empire. Without any premonition of the danger aiiead of them, the Germanic people entered upon this fatal course. It remained for Gregoiy VII. to lift the veil and show the Church in its character of a ruling power. With him begins the period of the so-called spiritual universal state, which lasted for several centuries. Just as formerly the State had ruled the Church, so now the Church, to a large extent, ruled the State. The officials of the Church were brought under the authority of Rome, and such public interests as education, charity, care of the sick, and even legislation and the administration of justice, were made affairs of the Church. As against the powerful Roman hierarchy the State, crude, undeveloped, and split by dissensions, was practically helpless. It should be added, however, that not infrequently the State rebelled against having to take a subordinate position; and toward the dose of this period it developed such legal institutions as jjlacetum regium and recurstu ab abu9u to curtail ecclesiastical authority. In view of this fact, the spiritual universal state must be regarded as theoiy, rather than reality, and the relation of Church to State during this period as one of legal coordination, but with the preponderance of competency on the side of the Chim;h. The Renaissance brought a revival of the ancient idea of the State, and with this a transformation of the relation of Church to State. The 4. Subor- new state made it its chief function to dinationof advance the welfare, or happiness, of Church to its subjects, but, since preparation for State. eternity was seen to be essential to human welfare, the State now ex- tended its activities into the ecclesiastical field. In short, to a greater or less extent, it took over the organization of the Church and assumed re- sponsibility for the intellectual and spiritual well- being of the people. The famous sentence Dux Clivia ett papa in auta terns, the reform-program of the Bavarian grand dukes, of George of Saxony, of Louis XIV., of Joseph II., and finally the Con- atUution civUe du derg€ of 1700 — all these give proof of the characteristic relation between Church and State which had its origin in the Renaissance. It was the fate of the Reformation to fall in the midst of this political development. It was neces- sary that the new Christian conmiunity should have an outward organization; but whence was this to oome? Considered juristically, that was a grave question. For Luther, however, it presented no difficulties. It was sufficient that means of grace be provided, and immaterial how this might be accomplished. In the end, it was found t^t the simplest arrangement was to entrust the care of the Church to the existing authorities. Thus arose the German state churches, as the mature product of the state of the sixteenth century. The Reformat tion did not recognize the necessity for an eccle- siastical organization distinct from that of the State. The Church was a homogeneous mass, and each temporal prince fostered that particular section which was conterminous with his temporal domain. With the appearance of dissent and the rise of other confessions, the inadequacy of this simple arrangement became manifest. The solution of the difficulty was offered by the theory of natural right, which was expounded byHobb^ (q.v.) and Rousseau. This is the view that the State is based upon an original agreement among the people, who delegate to the sovereign whatever authority he has. Every church, just as the State, is a com- munity; but the State remains the supreme com- mimity, in which these other commimities take their place. Thus the State again becomes secular in character. To be sure, the temporal prince retains his authority over the churches. This he no longer claims on Christian grounds, but by right of jus territoriale. In this way the territorial system was developed (see TERRrroRiALiBM). It should not be forgotten that this was the form in which tolerance first asserted itself. The next step in the development was CoUegialism (q.v.), which is only a palliated territorialism. The ruling prince remains the highest authority in the Church. The only result was that now a sharper distinction was drawn between jura circa sacra, rights which are naturally incident to the position of a sovereign, and jura in sacra, rights which are deduced from the Church. The fact that these rights are exercised through two sets of officials is merely incidental, being due to considerations of convenience. Prussia affords the classic example of this kind of relation between Church and State. Whatever may be characteristic of the present position of the Church in its relations to the State has not been brought about by any 5. The essential change in the Church, but by Modem the wonderful development of the State. modem State and the rapid growth of constitutional government. The State, as the political organization, holds the su- preme authority, which can not be modified or limited, except by the State itself. Such a self- limitation, however, is the striking characteristic of the modem constitutional State. The people have been given a voice in the government. In sharp contrast to the police-state, which absorbed eveiything, has been the fostering care exercised by the government over private organizations for the conduct of affairs of public interest. This new position taken by the State has been particularly favorable to the manifestations of religious life. Religious liberty is now generally secured to all by state constitutions. At the head of the various societies, or orgamzations, which now enjoy a cer- Church and State 108 tain independence under the law, stand those great religious communities called churches. Legally they occupy a veiy high position; and the reason for this is clear. Their functions are not merely of a private nature; from time immemorial the interests of the Church have been regarded as national and ethically coequal with the a£fair8 of the State itself. In a word, religion is a matter of public interest, and is recognized as such by the State. To be sure, the Church is subject to the State; otherwise the sovereignty of the State would be a fiction. On the other hand, the modem German state waives its right to take the Church so closely under its control as did the old police- state. In fact, the constitutional state regards it as essential that the independence of the Church be maintained. This principle has been often proclaimed, e.g., in the Frankfort Orundrechte and in the Prussian Constitution. Thus the Church is quite propeily given the position of a separate com- munity, existing under the State and working for the public weal. The legal terminology employed to characterize this relation of Church to State recognises self-government as the essential feature. The French law, which has become typical, speaks of ciUtea reconnua, not as a juristic person, but as a part of the public authority, and calls the local organizations itablissemerUs pu^igues, analogous to political communities. Hence the protection and aid rendered to the Church by the civil government. While theoretically the State may subordinate the Church completely to itself, in practise it does not do it. The degree of authority 6. Relations exercised varies, as does also the with Rome, degree of independence enjoyed by the Church. In view of the funda- mental conception of the State, the Roman Catholic Church is given too much latitude in Germany and the Protestant Church too little. In reality, the Roman Catholic Church is not simply a self- governing state church, holding itself subject to the State. It remains that same remarkable world- power which in the Middle Ages shared with the State the fimctions of government. If the power of Rome has been greatly diminished in the modem State, this has been accomplished only by force. In principle, the Roman Church has 3rielded noth- ing. The manner in which the present organiza- tion of the Roman Catholic Church in Germany came into being is characteristic. The German states entered into agreements with the Holy See just as they would make treaties among themselves regarding secular things (see Concordats and Delimitino Bulla). France led the way in the Napoleonic Concordat. The necessity of restoring the lost equilibrium at once manifested itself, and, too, in a curious manner. All the states, on their own initiative, proceeded to supplement the\ treaty with Rome by promulgating laws to give \ them a certain supervision over the Roman Catho- lic Church. Here the articles organiquea furnished the model. Of course, such restrictions have never been recognized by the pope; and the fact that they are directed against him only serves to em- phasize his position as a temporal ruler. In fol- lowing such a couwe, the State puts itself in the position it occupied during the Middle Ages, when it sought to assert its authority against Rome by means of the now obsolete placetum regium, rectir- 8U8 ab abuau, nominaiio regia, and by the exclusion of persancB mintis gratce (see Placet; Nominatio Rboia). That the State is unable to substitute for these ancient institutions something more in accord with present political ideals and conditions can be due only to a lack of confidence in its own sovereignty. The inner contradiction between the theory and practise of the State in the niatter of exercising its authority toward the Roman Catholic Church is strikingly shown in cases where the pope is actually invoked to curb some Romanist official who is attacking state institutions. Thus, through the force of tradition, the modem German state has been placed in this false and extremely objec- tionable attitude toward Rome. Quite different in this regard is the position of the Evangelical Church. In contrast to the Roman Catholic Cliurch, which claims such a 7. The large interest in the control of external Evangelical affairs, the Protestant body, whose State interests are spiritual rather than Church, temporal, would be satisfied to occupy the modest position of a self-governing body within the State. As a matter of fact, how- ever, the Evangelical Church in Germany has never attained to that measure of freedom and independ- ence which the constitutional state recognizes to be its right. Despite all the assurances on the side of the government, the old territorial system, the administration of church affairs by the State, con- tinues to thrive. It IB futile to assert that it is not the State, but the sovereign in person, who rules the Church; for, in public affairs, the person of the ruler can not be separated from the State. In Germany it seems to be taken as a matter of course that the Evangelical Church ought to be, -and must be, ruled by the State. Of course, the Church enjoys a certain academic freedom; also the provision is maintained that the State shall exercise its rule here through separate authorities. It was a further step in this direction when the present synodal system was introduced in the last century. The local parishes have their administrative boards, and send their representatives, clergy and laymen, to the Synod. The General Synod, the highest representative body, cooperates with the sovereign in the matter of ecclesiastical legislation. The logical outcome of this process of development should have been complete self-government for the Church; but such has not been the case. In- deed, this entire movement is only a phase of that more general movement whose object has been to develop and strengthen the State. The Church is organized along parallel lines with the State, and church administration remains state administra- tion. Just as in things temporal the sovereign remains supreme, despite local self-government and popular representation, so in things ecclesiastical. The present relation between the State and the Roman Catholic Church is recognized as imsatis- factory, and on both sides there has been a tend- ency to change it. To be mentioned particulariy is that significant modem movement on the 109 Church and State part of the State whose object has been the com- plete separation of Church and State. In this new departure the United States took the & Tendency lead. Since then, strange to say, this Toward essentially Calvinistic idea has been SeparatioiL carried out by such Roman CathoUc countries as Mexico, Brazil, Cuba, and most recently by France. One might almost 8ay that the separation of the Church from the State is recognized by a republican government as an obligation. Such separation is due to hostility toward the Church, and its object is the subordina- tion of the Church. The Protestant sees nothing (objectionable in this. In his view the fact that the State claims a certain surveillance over the out- ward organization of the Church has no signifi- cance for the inner life of faith. The Roman Catholic, on the other hand, who carries his relig- ious sentiment into these external things, strenu- ously opposes any influence of the State in this direction. The Toleramanirag of the Center, which wafl introduced in the German Reichstag in 1900, is suggestive. Under the guise of demanding freedom for the Church in general, it embodies the complaints of the Roman Catholics. It demands, among other things, complete freedom for the cure of souU throughout the empire, for the erection of church building? and the holding of religious wor- ship, and also demands the removal of the placetum and of all restrictions placed by the State upon religious societies and associations. It is this last point, the question of religious orders, that is not 80 easily conceded. Here economic interests come into consideration; and it is unlikely that the exist- ing laws limiting the acquisition of property by mortmain will be changed in the interest of religious orders. This ToUranzantrag makes no mention of ministerial education. The State now provides for the education of ministers, but whether it will be able to nationalize the clergy, and thus remove present religious dissensions, is doubtful. The Evangelical Church gives the State no occasion to rciwrt to radical measiures; but naturally a separa- tion of the Roman Catholic Church from the State carries with it a similar separation as regards the Evangelical Church. This is illustrated by recent e\'ent8 in France. While the old territorial state rendered a mag- nificent service in rescuing the Gospel, the close embrace of the State now threatens 9. Deca« the Church with sufiFocation. The dence of Evangelical Church in Germany has Protestant- completely lost the support of the ism in masses. For them it is an institution Gennanj. of the State, or of the aristocracy, and part of the system which they oppose. It is regarded as une partie du gouvemement, just as was the Roman Catholic Church in France in the eighteenth century. But how is any other con- dition possible under a church regiment whose fundamental principle is that the Church must subserve the political interests of the State? As the Prussian state law puts it, the Church must show ** gentleness and tolerance in doctrine and beha- vior,'- and it " must abstain from all interference in private and family affairs." It must maint>ftin " quiet and order," " quiet and peace "; and that is the main consideration for the State. This program is carried out by German officials with perfect fidelity to duty, and with as much love to the Church as the Church, in its present depressed condition, is able to inspire in them. Naturally, the legal pastor must fit into this rigime. The result is that in any great religious movement, for instance against Rome, the ecclesiastical organiza- tion may leave a Protestant people completely in the lurch. Political interests predominate; but such interests, which come and go with ministries, do not coincide with those of the Evangelical Church, whose chief interest is to extend the King- dom of Jesus Christ. While it woiild be a mistake for the Evangelical Church in Germany to aim at immediate separation from the State, the remedy for exist- 10. Self- ing evils lies in that direction. There is Government no doubt that complete separation is for Church only a question of time; but for the the Remedy, present what the Protestant Church needs is that measure of independence which, in theory, the modem State accords to it. The attainment of self-government is the serious task that the Church now confronts. But those who uphold the old territorial system ask if this is practicable. Here the only thing worthy of earnest consideration is the question of the continued existence of the state church. It has been argued that independence for the Church would bring with it a dissolution of the religious body into innu- merable sects, thus destroying the national charac- ter of the Church. Although the small religious society offers advantages in the way of individual freedom, it must be admitted that the large com- munity best provides for the service of the Master. The fear, however, that the Church would disinte- grate if released from the grasp of the State is ungrounded. The removal of the antiquated terri- torial system does not mean necessarily that hence- forth there would be no relation whatsoever between Church and State. Between the territorial system and the French system of sheer separation there is a mean. Self-government for the Church consti- tutes this mean. * Under such a system the Church would be freed from the stifling domination of the State, without being reduced to the position of a mere company, or association. Such a relationship for the Church would not be inconsistent with its popular character. In France the two branches of the Evangelical Church have been placed in the position of secular organizations; but even in such a guise they continue to flourish as national churches. The various branches of the Protestant Church in the United States are also popular in character, the general impression to the contrary notwithstanding. In each case the Church is some- thing more than the aggregate of local organiza- tions. Over and above the local society stands the denomination, the Church, to which others than the members of such organizations belong. It is a spiritual body; but as such it is formally organized. It is provided with a constitution, and is recog- nized by law. From a juristic point of view the relations be- Oharoh and State 110 tween Church and State resulting from self-gov- ernment on the part of the Church ofifer no difficulty. From a practical point of view the question might be raised: Has the Evangelieal Church in Germany the strength and vitality to maintain itself without the support of the strong arm of the State? It should be remembered, however, that it has been just this antiquated system of state government for the Church that has made such a question possible. A people is educated by its institutions; and in this respect the Evangelical population of Germany has been badly educated. If the Evan- gelical Church is now without confidence in itself this condition of affairs is due to centuries of state domination over the Church. It may be admitted that independence for the Church would involve a difficult period of transition, but it is assumed that the State would continue to aid the Church until the Church had become self-supporting. For the relations between Church and State in different countries see the articles upon the countries and states. See also the numerous related articles, such as Church, the Chbistian; Church Gov- ernment; Jurisdiction, Ecclesiastical; Polity; and Religious Corporations. (Otto Mater.) n. The United States: The relations of the relig- ious and political institutions in the United States differ radically from those found elsewhere in Chris- tendom, and need to be considered separately. The American people are without an ecclesiastical estab- lishment provided by organic law. The popular description of this condition is that there is '' a complete separation of Church and State in the United States." While this phrase holds the kernel of a truth, it does not fairly express that truth. The fact of the political separation is unduly em- phasized, while the real connection between the two institutions is overlooked. At the time of the settlement of this country it was universally regarded as a normal function of the civil power to see to it that all X. Philo- subjects, in theory at least, sustained sophical some definite ecclesiastical relation; Back- and the aggregate of such relations as ground, had the sanction and support of the civil power constituted an ecclesias- tical establishment. American political philosophy aa it developed through the colonial and early national periods preserved the concept that the civil power is charged with a duty in respect to the religious affairs of the people, that it has an eccle- siastical function to perform; and it developed this concept to the effect that it is a normal function of the civil powers to make it politically possible and legally convenient for all the people to sustain volimtaiy ecclesiastical relations, or to sustain none at all. Under the American political system all ecclesiastical relations must be voluntary, must be without political penalty, and must be legal; but the demand upon the civil government as the physically dominant institution of society to realize these conditions is as great as it ever was to pro- tect a state church. This obligation of American civil governments is now confirmed by a public opinion which has been gaining strength through four generations and is now generally accepted without controversy. It is now expressed in a series of guaranties and limitations contained in the organic law of the several commonwealths, in a well-developed system of statute legislation pro- viding definite legal procedure covering many eccle- siastical relations, and in a body of notable judicial decisions rendered by the civil courts of last resort defining under ever changing circumstances what shall be the relation of Church and State. Historically, this development has been as follows: At the outbreak of the American Revolution the colonies were divided ecclesiastically 2. Colonial into three groups. In one group, con- Period, sisting of New York, New Jersey, Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia, the direct establishment of the communion of the Church of England, without, however, a resident episcopacy, was more or less complete in law. In a second group, consisting of Massachusetts, New Hamp- shire, and Connecticut, the congregational form of ecclesiastical organization on the basis of the terri- torial parish was established in law and in fact. In a third group, consisting of Rhode Island and Penn- sylvania, no ecclesiastical establishment had been developed either in law or in fact. Wherever there was an establishment, what may be described as the civil chim;h law was largely political and ad- ministrative in its character. As a result of political revolution the direct establishments by royal au- thority were nullified in law and degraded in popu- lar estimation. The indirect establishments in the New England commonwealths, inasmuch as they were based upon provincial legislation and local administration, remained undisturbed for some years. There remained, however, as survivals of the direct establishments a number of incorporated parishes in New York and Virginia and a few in other states. As the remains of a still eariier estab- lishment in New York, there were several incor- porated Reformed Dutch churches which had re- ceived special protection by the tenns of the Treaty of Breda (1664). During all the colonial period dissent had resisted the legal church establishments, especially the system of taxation for their support; and after the overthrow of British sovereignty a demand developed for a divorcement of political and ecclesiastical affairs. An illustration of the sentiment prevailing at the close of the Revolution is to be found in an act of the Assembly of Virginia of the year 1785, the preamble of which declares that " to suffer this ci\^ magistrate to intrude his powers into the field of opinion, and to restrain the profession or propagation of principles on the sup- position of their ill tendency, is a dangerous fallacy which at once destroys all religious liberty," and that " it is time enough for the rightful purposes of civil government for its ofiScials to interfere when principles break out into overt acts against peace and good order." At the formation of the Federal government relig- ious liberty was seciu^ to the people of the United States, as far as the action of Congress was con- cerned, by provision of the Constitution (art. iv., chap. 3, and the first amendment). It wiU be seen that both of these provisions are limitations upon the Ill RELIGIOUS ENCYCLOPEDIA Church and State powers of Congress only. That body might pass no law in order to establish a state religion, neither could it provide any religious test as a 3. Coadi- qualification for holding office under tions alter the Federal government. The framers the Revo- of the Constitution did not under- lution. take to protect the religious liberty of the people against the action of their respective state governments. Religious affairs were declared to be within the sphere of domestic relations, and therefore reserved to the control of the states. The development of the local pecul- iarities in the ecclesiastical institutions of the sev- eral sections of the coimtry continued without inteiTuptaon. The colonial legislatures had granted a few charters of incorporation to local churches, and this practise was continued for a few years by the state legislatures. It was, however, soon aban- doned because of the popular sympathy ^ith the complaint that such particular charters of incor- poration constituted special legislation secured through political influence. After the Revolution there arose a demand in the middle states for a uniform procedure by which the local organizations of all religious denominations might receive a cor- porate form. To meet the needs of the time legis- lation was enacted which introduced the second stage in the development of American ecclesiastical policy, via., the era of the general statute. The first general statute that could serve the churches of all denominations became law in New York on April 6, 1784. An act of similar intent and like provisions was passed in 1793 by the state of New Jersey, and} these two statutes with their subse- quent revisions became the models for similar statutes in many of the northern states. These early statutes resulted from the necessity of pro- viding legal trustees with a standing in court, in whom mi^t rest the title to property devoted to religious purposes. They were enacted at a time of little religious interest and of bare toleration of religious bodies by legislators. The powers con- ferred upon religious corporations that might come into being under these general statutes were very limited; and in no state were such corporations allowed to be self-perpetuating. Partiality to re- ligious denominations on the part of the state legislatures was dreaded, and there was also a very real fear among the lawmakers themselves lest something might be done toward recreating an ecclesiastical establishment. The method of pro- viding for the incorporation of religious societies by means of a general statute has developed un- equally in different sections of the country, and it has not yet been adopted by all the states. As late as 1866, the states of Rhode Island, Virginia, and South Carolina had no such statute; and in 1896 a general statute of incorporation was still forbidden by constitution in the states of Virginia and West Virginia. A third stage in the development of American civil church law has come as the residt of special- ising legislation with reference to religious organi- zations in two directions. In one direction in- creased discrimination has been made between ecclesiastical bodies proper, and other social, edu- cational, and philanthropic organizations. The second form of specialization, however, is of far more importance than the first. In the 4. Special states having the most highly developed Legislation, legislation the general provisions of the statutes have, from time to time, been supplemented by special optional provisions affecting convocations of particular religious de- nominations. The demand for this class of legis- lation has in nearly every case come from the churches themselves. As the denominations have grown in strength and their members have devel- oped a more intelligent interest in their own special features of polity, many of them have made efforts to find legal expression for the essential features of their respective polities. Through these supple- mental provisions, there has been wrought into the statute law of many of the states the recognition of purely ecclesiastical functionaries. It can not now be said to be the intention of the legislatures to keep the control of the temporal affairs of the churches in the hands of corporations, " inde- pendent of priest, bishop, presbytery, or synod or other ecclesiastical judicatory.'' There has devel- oped in recent years a marked legislative cordiality toward the churches. While at the beginning of the nineteenth century the avowed policy in American legislation was to treat all religious in- terests alike by doing as little as possible for any of them and forcing all to conform to one procedure, at the beginning of the twentieth century the policy seems to be to treat all interests alike by giving to each all that is asked. The early concept of religious organization in American law was very naturally that of a simple and completely autonomous local society. To de- nominations whose types of polity correspond to this concept the legislation of the general statute era has been satisfactory. The special optional provisions referred to, have, therefore, been enacted for the benefit of churches having polities by which the local bodies sustain a definite relation to some more general authority. It has been those denomi- nations which have an administrative or episcopal type of organization that have shown the greatest energy in securing denominational legislation of the kind mentioned. At the present time twenty-five distinct religious denominations have thus been specially legislated for. The statutes of sixteen states now contain special provisions for the in- corporation and regulation of Protestant Episcopal chiurches. Eight states make similar provision for Roman Catholic churches, and seven states for Methodist Episcopal churches. The privilege that is being accorded to religious bodies of having such legislation enacted as best developed their respect- ive polities is resulting in what may be defined as a legal crystallization of ecclesiastical polity. Pres- byteries, conferences, synods, classes, conventions, superintendents, overseers, presiding elders, vicars general, bishops, and archbishops, have come to have a legal status by virtue of their ecclesiastical status and legal powers incidental to their spiritual jurisdiction. Such features of ecclesiastical or- ganization as secure recognition in the civil law are thereby less liable to alteration than the non-legal Ohuroh and State Ohtirohyard 112 features, and more capable of resisting the influ- ences of social environment. The fmidamental principles of political philosophy which were to regulate the relations of Church and State among the American people had been well defined and generally accepted while the nation was still confined to the original states along the Atlantic coast; and successive expansions of the national domain have not resulted in any radical changes of policy. The same principles have been applied by the Federal government in Alaska, the Hawaiian Islands, Porto Rico, and the Philippine Islands. Nowhere has the civil power failed in its function of affording legal protection and procedure for religious organizations, and nowhere have the churches exceeded these legal powers and infringed upon civil rights. The alien peoples who have come under American political training give evi- dence of appreciating the altered relation of Church and State. After more than one hundred years of test under all conditions, it is now as true as at the beginning of American national life that the full and free right to entertain any religious belief, to practise any religious principle, and to teach any religious doctrine which does not violate the laws of morality, and which does not infringe personal rights, is conceded to all. The law knows no heresy, is committed to the support of no dogma and to the establishment of no sect. George James Batles. Bibliography: W. E. GUdstone, The State in Us Relationa loOfc the Church, 2 toIs:, London* 1841; S. T. Coleridge, On the Conetituiion of Church and State, ib. 1852; T. R. Birke. Church and State, ib. 1869; J. W. Joyce. The Civil Power in iU RelaHon to the Church, ib. 1860; E. de Pres- aens^. Church and French Revolution, ib. 1869; J. RQttiman. Kirdie und Stoat in Nordamerika, Basel. 1871; E. Fried- berg, Die Oremen ewieehen Stoat und Kirche und die Garantien geoen deren Verletaung, TQbingen. 1872; J. P. Thompson, Church and State in the United States, Boston, 1873; J. S. Mill, State Interference with Church Property, in his Diaeertatione, 4 vols., London, 1873-75; J. Hcr> genrdther, The Catholic Church and the Christian State, London, 1876; H. Gefifcken, Church and State, their Re- lation* hietorically Conndered, 2 vols., London, 1877; M. Minghetti. Stoat und Kirche, Gotha, 1881; F. Nippold, Die Theorie der Trennung von Kirche und StatU, Bern, 1881; P. Hinschius, AUgemeine DareteUung der VerhAlt- nieae von Stoat und Kirche, Freiburg. 1883; A. P. Stanley, Beaaye chiefly on QuesHona of Church and State, London, 1884; De Gabriao, L'Sgliae et I'ftat, Paris, 1886; W. Armitage, Sketchea of Church and State in the Firat Eight Centuriea, London, 1888; P. Schaff. Church and State in the United Statea, New York, 1888; U. Balzani, The Popes and the Hohenataufen, , New York, 1889; A. T. Innes, Churdi and State, Edinburgh. 1890; C. Benoist. L'£tat et VSgliae, Paris, 1892; P. E. Lauer. Church and State in New England, Baltimore, 1892 (Johns Hopkins Univer- sity Studies, 10 ser., nos. 2-3); K. Rieker, Die recKtliche SteUung der evangdiachen Kirche DeutacManda in ihrer geachichUichen Entwieklung, Leipsic, 1893; W. Kahl, Lehrayatem dee Kirchenrechta und der KirchenpoHOk, i. 246 sqq., Freibung, 1894; D. A. Wirgmann. The Church and the Civil Povjer, London, 1894; F. Satolli, Loyalty to Church and State, Baltimore, 1895; W. D. and J. B. Johnston, Relationa between Church and State, Ann Arbor, 1896-97; T. Mommsen, RdnUaehea Strafrecht, Leipsic, 1899; T. Kaftan, Vier KapUel von der Landeakirche, Sleswick, 1903; W. D. Abraham, Church and State in England, London, 1905; M. Lecomte, Rapport au a6nat aur la projet de loi concemant la aipartUion dea Sgliaea et de Vital, Paris. 1905; E. Troeltsch, in P. Hinneberg, Die Kultur der Qegenwart, I. iv., Leipsic, 1905; P. Sabatier, k propoa de la a&pmration dea igliaea et de Vital, Paris, 190(8, Eng. tranal., DiaeaUMiahment in France, New York, 1906; W. Bimey, France and the Pope; the Separation of the Churdiea and the French Republic, New York, 1907; A. Eitel, Der KirchenattauU vmter Klemena V., Beriin. 1907.
CHURCH TRIUMPHANT CHURCH TRIUMPHANT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH TRIUMPHANT: 1. A church founded by a Mrs. Beekman (d. 1883), who claimed to be the " spiritual mother of Christ in the second com- ing " and declared George Jacob Schweinfurth the " Messiah of the New Dispensation." Mr. Schwein- furth left the ministry of the Methodist Episcopal Church, became a follower of Mrs. Beekman, and subsequently the leader of her followers. Head- quarters of the body were established at the Weldon Farm, six miles from Rockford, 111. The Church accepted the Bible as the word of God, but denied the essential divinity of Christ, holding that he received the spirit of God, became free from sin and its curse and so divine. Schweinfurth claimed equality with Jesus in this respect and was accepted us the " Christ of the second coming." The Church is now extinct, and when most flourishing numbered only twelve congregations with 384 com- municants. Bibliography: H. K. Carroll, Religious Forces of the United States, pp. 105-106, New York. 1896. 2. A religious and communistic society, having headquarters at Estero, Fla., founded by Cyrus F. Teed, and also known as the Koreshan Ecclesia. See Communism, II., 4.
CHURCH VISITATIONS CHURCH VISITATIONS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH VISITATIONS: A method of eccle- siastical supervision of churches and church work. This institution has for its purpose the oversight of church government, and is a means of securing insight into, and of promoting, church life. As early as the fourth century it was the custom of the Eastern Church for the bishops or their deputies to visit the churches of the diocese. In the West also this visitation by' the bishop dates from an early time. This institution was especially cultivated in the Frankish Church. There visitations took place when the bishop traversed his diocese to per- form the rite of confirmation. Under Charlemagne the bishop was aided and controlled by the count or his mayor. They jointly held the synodal court (Sendgericht)f punishing not only eccle- Early siastical offenses, but also sins like Practise theft, perjury, sorcery, etc. The and Its decay of visitations in the following Decay, period was due to two causes: (1) the bishops were more and more estranged from their spiritual calling by becoming secular princes; (2) the custom of redemption — that is, exemption from penalties on payment of a sum of money — ^was introduced into the synodal courts, making them an important source of revenue. The Council of Trent ameliorated these conditions, and made it the duty of the bishops to visit their diocese either every year or every second year, according to its size. Visitations became important again at the time of the Reformation. They were the means of carrying out the Reformation in individual terri- tories. That in electoral Saxony became the model and basis of the others. The first impulse in this direction came not from Luther, but from Jacob Strauss in Eisenach (1525) and from Nicolaus 118 Church and State Churchyard Hwifwnann, preacher at Zwickau. Both showed the necessity of such oversight. Induced by the fanatics and the Peasants' War, Luther strongly urged the elector to order a thorough visitation. It was immediately begun, and, although at first only sporadic, it soon revealed its necessity. In 1526 Luther proposed a general church- and school- visitation, which was carried out by a commission of clergy and laymen in 1527-29. The Saxon book of visitation, composed by Melanchthon, Unter- richi der Visitatoren an die Pfarrherrn ym Kurfiirst- enikum zu Sachsaen (1528), was generally adopted as the model. There the principle of Revival church government by the state found During its first expression. The visitation the Refer- included in its scope the official con- mation. duct of the pastors, the order of church service, cozifession, and church disci- pline. The whole constitution of the Lutheran Church has its basis and model in this institution. Because of their historical value the proceedings of the visitations were published, either as a whole or in part, those of the Wittenberg district by Winter (1862), those of the district of JUterbogk by Gdtze, those of Magdeburg by Danneil (1864). Bui'k- hardt plann^ a comprehensive history of the Cserman church- and school-visitations in this period, but only the Saxon visitations appeared (1879). Nebe published in 1880 (in abstract only) the proceedings of the visitations of the bishopric of Halberstadt from 1564 to 1589; the complete visitations in the Guelphic states from 1542 to 1544 were published in 1897 by Kayser. While the first visitations were extraordinary measures, they were soon made a stated order. The Prussian articles of 1540 order one annually, and most of the later church orders contain ordinances for periodical repetition. After the Thirty Years' War these functions attained again their former importance and con- tributed greatly to the restoration of order and church life. In the eighteenth century they degen- erated, but were reinstituted in their old form in the German state churches in the nineteenth century, largely through their advocacy at the Eisenach conference of 1852-53. They recur regularly, two to six years apart. The superintendent or general superintendent is the visitor, often in Modem cooperation with an officer of the state ; Practise, or a commission is instituted with the superintendent as leader. The visi- tations are usually held on Sunday and consist of a sermon by the pastor, an address by the visitor, an examination of the conditions of religious in- struction, discussion with the ministers and teachers, the vestry or the house fathers, revision of admin- istrative affairs, of church registers and buildings, of the cemetery, etc. The question has been dis- cussed whether in these visitations the element of devotion and churchly revival should predominate, or whether they should be conducted merely for the purpose of obtaining information. In this respect there is no uniformity in the different German state churches, nor do they agree on the question whether part should be taken by s3modical representatives. (G. UHLHORNt) III. -8 BiBUOoaA.PHT; On tlie early and the Lutheran vintationa: J. Auerbaeh, D« vinkUionum §ccU9icB proffreuu a primU imnporibut, Frankfort, 1862; A. L. Richter, Oeaehiehte <Ur «van0«lMcA«n Kirehenverfauung in DetUaehland, pp. 43 ■qq.. Leipdo, 1861; C. A. H. Burkhardt, Geaehichte der •dehBi9chen Ktrchery- und Se/ttd-ViaitaUoMn, 16Bjh4S, ib. 1870; K. Kayser. Die nformaioritehen Ktrchenvieita- Honen in den wafieehen Landen, 164^44, OOttingen. 1807. On Boman Catholio rules oonoernins visitations consult L. Thomassinus, Vetue ac nova eedeaia . . . inetrudio es- Voeiia, 3 vols., Lucca. 1728; P. Melchers, Dt oanomea dioeeeium viaikUione^ Cologne, 1803; Bingham. Origineet books v.. IX.. XVII.; XL, s.v. " Visitationen."
CHURCHWARDENS CHURCHWARDENS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCHWARDENS: Two lay officers in each parish of the Anglican communion, whose duty is to have charge, with the vestry, of the temporalities of the church, and to see that provision is made for the maintenance and orderly celebration of public worship. In England one is usually nominated by the incumbent and the other elected by the parishioners; in the Protestant Episcopal Church both (called '* senior " and " junior " wardens) are elected by the congregation annually in Easter- week.
CHURCHYARD CHURCHYARD

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCHYARD: Conformably to the contem- porary Greek and Roman custom, the primitive Christian burial-places lay outside the community. There was no difference in this respect between corporate cemeteries and private grounds, between the subterranean and those on the surface. East and West, this actual condition is the same. It appears that this custom was broken for the first time within the pale of Christendom through the circumstance that Constantine the Great was en- tombed in the Church of the Apostles at Constan- tinople— a decisive precedent for the future. For that matter, during antiquity in general there was provision for urban burial as a mark of special honor (virtuUi causa)— Augustus and Trajan, for instance, at Rome; and, without exception, the Vestals. Under a flexible construction there also soon followed eminent ecclesiastics (e.g., Ambrose) and persons of woridly distinction, but first and foremost the martyrs and saints, whose bodies were exalted and lodged in the neighborhood churches. During the fourth century it was even customary in Egypt to preserve mimmiified bodies of saints in their homes. In fact, what was originally the exception began to be the general rule toward the end of the fourth century, so that secular and spiri- tual authorities were obliged to forbid the multi- plication of burials in churches. Finally a com- promise was arranged whereby burial inside the church was granted in exceptional cases by episco- pal authorization; whereas to the congregation as such was made over the ground enclosing the church {atrium ecdesia : " churchyard "). This ground, it is true, did not attain to the high esteem of the church interior; but still it availed, being consecrated, as holy ground; while the vicinity of the sacrificial mass and of the sanctuary prayer contributed also, in a degree, to enhance its favor. See Cemeteries. The medieval Church exercised unrestricted authority over the churchyard, which it regarded as an adjunct of God's house. The same right of asylum protected them both (cf . German Friedhof^ Churching of Women 114 in the sense " safeguard ")• By consecration a particular seal was imparted to the churchyard; and a dedication of the church demanded likewise a new consecration of the churchyard, though not vice versa. The execution of a bloody sentence on this ground involved excommunication. The not infrequent custom of fortifying the churchyard, together with the church, for the protection of the church was ecclesiastically contested, indeed, but not annulled. On the other hand, it is required that the graveyard be well fenced in or hedged. Special plots are reserved for the priests. The graves of children who die without baptism are located in a place distinct from the rest of the cemetery. No one who has not departed this life in peace with the church may be laid to rest in consecrated ground. A tall cross must be set up in the middle of the cemetery. Another necessary requirement is a charnel-house (pssuarium), into which the disin- terred bones are gathered. There belongs lastly to the structural completeness of the cemetery the lantern of the dead, a round or polygonal tower with a top-piece for the reception of a perpetual light. Its origin inheres, perhaps, in the symbol- ism of light; but popular credulity saw in this light a means of defense against evil spirits. Artistic decoration of the graveyard appears to have been the exception in medieval times. Such an excep- tion is the renowned Campo Santo in Pisa, begim in 1278, and further embellished in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. The Church of Rome has retained the observances and canonical regulations of medieval usage, but only in isolated instances — as with reference to tombstone inscriptions and the maintenance of cemeteries adjoining the chiu-ch — have the same been supplemented with new regu- lations. Cemetery development in the Greek Church generally parallels that in the West. The Greek Church likewise classes the graveyard with conse- crated things, provides for it official dedication, and reckons with the possibility of desecration. The Reformation consistently broke with the medieval conception of the cemetery as locu8 rdigiosua, and at the same time did away with the specific Roman Catholic burial rites. With all this, however, the duty by no means lapsed of showing a pious regard for the resting-place of the dead. The church ordinances dwell on the matter frequently. Modem legislation has revised former customs and legal usages. Interment in the churches, with exceptions of princes and bishops, has been forbidden. And alongside the confes- sional cemetery for believers, there has grown up the mimicipal cemetery for non-confessors. Victor Schultzb. Bibxjoobapbt: Lists of works germane to the subject will be found under Bttrial and Ceueteries.
CHURCH YEAR CHURCH YEAR

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH YEAR: The comprehensive term given to the regular succession of seasons, feasts, and fasts in the calendar of the Christian Church, independent of the civil calendar although to some extent making use of it for convenience of reckon- ing. The simplest basis of division is that denoted by the week of seven days, which was in use among the Jews from early times, and had been introduced into Roman usage shortly before the beginning of the Christian era, replacing the period of eight days {nundinum), Both Jewish and Gentile Chris- tians, accordingly, were prepared to accept this division, although they rejected the pagan names for the days of the week, and preferred to call Sunday the Lord's Day {dies dominica, htmera kwriaki), numbering the others in order as feria secunda, tertia, etc. With this for a basis, and Sun- day, the commemoration of the resurrection of Christ, as the earliest approach to a recurrent fes- tival (see Sunday), the entire sequence of festivals and seasons gradually grew up (see Feasts and FESTIVALS, II., and the articles on the separate days thus distinguished). In the Western Churches which have adopted such a chronological scheme the ecclesiastical year begins with the first Sunday in Advent, which is always " the nearest Sunday to the feast of St. Andrew " (Nov. 30), whether before or after (i.e., the first Sunday after Nov. 26). There are four Sundays in this season of preparation for Chris- tians. In the Roman Catholic and Anglican Churches one or two " Sundays after Christmas " follow as the case may be to this feast of the Epiph- any (Jan. 6). In the German Lutheran Churches Dec. 26 is the " second Christmas," a Sunday from Dec. 27 to Dec. 31 is the " Sunday after Christmas," and a Sunday from Jan. 2 to Jan. 5 is the " Sunday after New Year" (which is also observed as a church day). Sundays after Epiphany are num- bered in order, there being from one to six of them according to the date of Easter. Then three Sun- days, named Septuagesima, Sexagesima, and Quin- quagesima from the approximate distance to Easter, lead up to the forty days (forty week-days, the Sundays not being included as fasting-days) of lent beginning with Ash Wednesday and termi- nating in the festival of Easter. The next five Lord's days are known as Sundays after Easter, and the whole period of fifty days following Easter, with the feast of the Ascension occurring on the fortieth, is a time of the highest spiritual joyful- ness. The paschal season terminates with the festival of Pentecost (Whitsunday), which falls on the seventh Simday after Easter (the sixth Simday after Easter being the " Sunday* after Ascension- day "). The succeeding Sundays to the end of the church year are designated in the Roman Catholic Church Sundays after Pentecost, in the Anglican and Lutheran after Trinity, the Feast of the Holy Trinity falling in all these bodies on the octave of Pentecost. There may be from twenty-three to twenty-eight Sundays after Trinity, twenty-four to twenty-nine after Pentecost. In the Eastern Church the jrear is divided into three parts without reference to the date on which it begins (Sept. 1); the part preparatory to Blaster, called trididion after the book containing the litur- gical forms used during the season, begins with the " Sunday of the Pharisee and the Publican " (so called from the Gospel for the day), which corresponds to the last Sunday after Epiphany in the Western reckoning; the paschal season (pen" tekostarion) extends to and includes the first Sun- 115 RELIGIOUS ENCYCLOPEDU Oharohyard Ohurohinff of Woman day after Penteco6t (the Greek feast of AU Saints) and the remaining period (oktoichos) has its Sun- days designated, according to the evangelical lections, either as " Matthew Sundays " (second to fourteenth after Pentecost) or as " Luke Sundays " (fifteenth after Pentecost to the Western second in Advent and those after Epiphany). See Calendar, THE Christian. Tlie following «re the earliest and latest dates on whioh the Tariotts chur^ days named can fall: First Sunday in Advent. Nov. 27-Dee. 3. Septuaceeima Sunday, Jan. 18-Feb. 22. Ash Wedneeday, Feb. 4-Mar. 11. Easter. Mar. 22-Apr. 25. Ascension Day, Apr. 30-June 3. Whitsunday. May 10-June 13. Trinity Sunday. May 17-June 20. Bibuogkapht: Consult the literature dted under Fkabtb ▲KoFEflnvALa, especially the works of Augusti, Bingham, Binterim. and Ouser: J. C. W. Augusti, Die Fette der aUen Ckriaien, Leipaic. 1817-20; F. H. Rheinwald. Die kirdUiche Arth6oloin€, pp. 164-257, Berlin. 1830; H. Alt, Der duris^ lUhe Cultua, part 2, doM KircKenjahr, ib. 1860; W. I. Kip, Tks Hiat., Objtei and Proper Obeervanee of Lent, New York, 1875; 8. Butcher. The Eedeeiaetical Calendar, London, 1877; A. H. Grant, Church Seaaone, Hietorioal and Poetical, New York« 1881; Handbudi der theolooUchen Wieaenn eehaftem, ed. O. Zdckler. iv. 361 sqq.. N6rdlingen, 1885; A. Tait. Hiifh Daye of (ke Chrietian Year, London, 1890; DC A, ii. 2054-59 (gives list of the celebrations and their names in the different calendars); the Uterature under Calendab; Common Pbatbr, Book or.
CHURCH, ALFRED JOHN CHURCH, ALFRED JOHN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH, ALFRED JOHN: Church of England classical scholar; b. in London Jan. 29, 1829. He was educated at Lincoln College, Oxford (B.A., 1851); and was curate of Westport St. Mary's, Gloucester, 1853-56; of St. Peter's Chapel, St. Marylebone, Lon- don, 1861-68; rector of Ashley, Tilbury, Glouces- tershire, 1892--97; professor of Latin in University College, London, 1880-87. In theology he is an orthodox liberal Anglican, with a distinct apprecia- tion of the value of higher criticism. His reputar tion rests upon his many pleasing tales from the Latin and Greek classics and from church history, those from the latter being such as The Story of Jerusalem (London, 1880); " To the Lions " (1889); The Crusaders (1904).
CHURCH, RICHARD WILLIAM CHURCH, RICHARD WILLIAM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCH, RICHARD WILLIAM: Dean of St. Paul's; b. in Lisbon Apr. 25, 1815; d. in Dover Dec. 9, 1890. He entered Wadham College, Ox- ford, 1833 (B.A., 1836; M.A., 1839; hon. D.C.L., 1875); was fellow of Oriel 1838-52; tutor 1839-42; junior proctor 1844-45; rector of Whatley, Somer- set, from 1852 to 1871, when he became dean of St. Paul's. He was select preacher at Oxford 1868, 1876-78, 1881-82. The religious influences to which he was subjected at Redlands, near Bristol, where he attended school 1828-33, were narrowly evangelical; at Oxford, however, he was drawn into the Tractarian movement and he became an intimate friend of Newman. A striking incident of his career was the veto by the proctors in con- vocation at Oxford, Feb., 1845, of the proposition to condemn Newman's Tract 90, in connection with the degradation of William George Ward (q.v.). The veto was pronounced by the senior proctor, Henry Peter Guillemard, but it was inspired by the junior proctor, Church. As dean he restored St. Paul's Cathedral, readjusted its revenues, and reorganized its staff; he was faithful and zealous, but unostentatious. He translated The Catechetical Lectures of St. Cyril of Jerusalem (London, 1838) for Pusey and Newman's Library of the Fathers, wrote The Beginnings of the Middle Ages (1877) for the Epochs of Modem History series, and, with Canon Paget, revised Keble's edition of Hooker's Ecdesir astical PclUy (Oxford, 1888). He published a crit- ical study of St, Anselm (London, 1870); an essay on Dante (first printed in the Christian Remembrancer^ 1850; reprinted with a translation of Dante's De monorchia by his son, F. J. Church, 1878); Spenser (1879) and Bacon (1884) in the English Men of Letters series. His last work was The Oxford Move- ment (1891). Bibliography: liary C. Church, Life and Letters of Dean Church, London, 1804 (by his daughter); A. B. Donald- son. Richard WiUiam Church, ib. 1006; DNB, suppla- ment, ii. 6-9. CHURCHES OF GOD IN CHRIST JESUS. See Adventists, 6,
CHURCHING OF WOMEN CHURCHING OF WOMEN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CHURCHING OF WOMEN: According to the prescriptions of Lev. xii., women were regarded as ceremonially unclean after childbirth (see Dbfilb- MENT AND PURIFICATION, CEREMONIAL, I., 1, § 2; II., 1, § 1), and, especially since Mary submitted herself to the ordinance of purification (Luke ii. 22), the idea found entrance into the Church. Dionysius of Alexandria, in his epistle to Basilides {MPO, X. 1281), treats it as a matter of course that pious mothers will not approach the Lord's table until ceremonially clean, and Zonaras and Balsamon gave it canonical force. According to the ritual laid down for the first visit to the church (Groar, Euchologion, p. 267), the mother was to present herself on the fortieth day after de- livery with her child and its sponsor; the priest offered a prayer for her complete purification, and another for the child, accompanied with the sign of the cross; then, carrying the child, he led the mother within the church with an appropriate formula. In an Ethiopian ritual mother and child were anointed on the forehead with holy oil. The Western Church took a different view. Gregory the Great wrote in answer to a question of Augus- tine of Canterbury that recent mothers might in- deed abstain for a time from communion out of reverence, but that they were not to be condemned if they received it soon after childbirth; and this de- cision passed into the canon law (Decreta Gregorii, iii. 47). The Western custom, however, was to bring the mother formally to church, with the child, usually on the fortieth day, and the con- ception of purification still maintained itself, symbolized by the aspersion with holy water at the church door. An office for the "benediction of women after childbirth " is contained in the Rituale Romanum as edited by Paul V. in 1614. The priest, wearing a white stole, meets the woman at the door, and after the recitation of Ps. xxiv. holds out one end of his stole to her and conducts her into the church; she kneels before the altar while certain prayers are said, ending with a blessing. The Reformation in Germany, for the most part, abol- ished the ceremony as giving rise to misconceptions and abuses, though some churches retained it, OhytrsBus Giroumciaion 116 giving an evangelical character to the rite, and the duty of thanksgiving after safe delivery was fre- quently insisted on. In the rationalistic period the practise of giving a special blessing to the mother was usually dropped, though to this day it is usual to ask the prayers of the congregation for her and for the child at her first appearance in church: and several of the most recent Lutheran service- books contain an office for her benediction at the altar after the public service. [Such an office is also contained in the Book of Common Prayer ... of the Church of England. Its title in the first book of Edward VI. was "The Order of the Purification of Women/' but this was altered in the second to "The Thanksgiving of Women after Child-birth, commonly called the Churching of Women."] (Geobg Rietschbl.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: A. J. StepheoB, Book of Common Prayer VfiOi NotM, iu. 1751-63. London* 1863.
CLAP, THOMAS CLAP, THOMAS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLAP, THOMAS: Fifth president of Yale College; b. at Scituate, Mass., June 26, 1703; d. in New Haven Jan. 7, 1767. He was graduated at Harvard 1722; was minister of Windham, Conn., from 1725 till his induction as president of Yale, 1740. He was already noted for stringency of discipline and pronounced Calvinism, and as presi- dent his course was somewhat arbitrary and auto- cratic, but nevertheless was marked by regard for sound scholarship and propriety. The college funds were increased in legitimate ways and two new buildings were added; the college church was organized and the professorship of divinity was established. He sympathized with the " Old Lights" in the disputes stirred up by Whitefield and the revival preaching of his time. He resigned the presidency in 1766, a few months before his death. Besides many controversial pamphlets he wrote An Essay on the Nature and Foundation of Moral Virtue and Obligation , intended for a text- book (New Haven, 176«5), and The Annals or His- tory of Yale College (1766). Bibliography: F. B. Dexter, in the Papers of the New Haven Colony Historical Society, v. 247-274. New Haven, 1894. CLARE (CLARA), SAINT, AND THE POOR
CLARES CLARES

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARES: The founder of an order of women parallel to the Franciscans, and the order itself. Clara Scefi was born at Assisi, of a noble family, July 16, 1194. At the age of eighteen she was ex- pecting to be married, when a sermon of St. Francis showed her the vanity of earthly things. Under his direction she put on sackcloth and went out to beg for the poor. On Palm Sunday (Mar. 18, 1212), she took the three vows, and went to reside pro- \n5aonally in the Benedictine convent of St. Paul. Soon she was joined by her younger sister Agnes, and Francis made a little cloister for them near the church of St. Damian. Others, including her mother and youngest sister, joined her here; and she acted as head of the community imtil her death, Aug. 11, 1253. She was canonized by Alexander IV. in 1255. The growth of her order was rapid; and it was not long before all the larger towns to which the Franciscans came had also a convent of Poor Clares. At the end of the sixteenth century, even after the Reformation had diminished the number, there were still 900 houses, with some 25,000 sisters, under the immediate direction of the general of the Franciscans, and a scarcely smaller number under the diocesan bishops. Until 1219 Clare and her associates had nothing but the oral counsels of Francis to follow. In 1219 Cardinal Ugolino gave them the rule of St. Benedict, with some additions in the direction of severity. Later, Francis and Ugolino drew up for them a rule in twelve chapters, analogous to that of the Friars Minor. It prescribed the strictest poverty, confinement to the enclosure of the con- \Tnt, fasting and abstinence, and prohibited the holding of any property, even by the convents. This rule was formally confirmed by Innocent IV. m 1246, and accepted by the majority of the convents. By degrees, however, varieties of observ- ance grew up, and in 1264 Pope Urban IV. attempt- ed to enforce a revised rule, with certain mitiga- tions in the matter of fasting and income for their support. This was accepted in most countries; but there were (and are still) some convents in Italy and Spain which adhered to the primitive rigor, and claimed the exclusive right to the name Clarisses, while the others were known as Urban- ists. At the beginning of the fifteenth century the strict reform of St. Coleta, based upon the orig- inal rule of Francis and Ugolino, was introduced in all the convents over which she had influence. Upon the representation of the Franciscan John Capistran to Eugenius IV. that the rule contained more than a hundred precepts binding imder pain of grievous sin, the pope ruled in 1447 that the only precepts binding under pain of mortal sin should be those relating to the three vows, the enclosure, and the election or deposition of an abbess. This is still the case. The Capuchin Sisters, originating in Naples, 1538, and the Alcantarines, 1631, taking their name from the reform of St. Peter of Alcan- tara, are simply Clarisses of the strict observance. The Poor Clares have houses in England and Ire- land. They established themselves in the United States in 1875, where they have (1907) five houses. Bibliography: ASB, August, ii. 73^768; Life of St. Claire, Dublin. 1854; F. de More. Vie de 8. Claire d'Aeeiee, Paris, 1856; P. Jouhanneaud. Vie de S. Claire d'Aeeiee, Limoges, 1873; Joseph de Madrid, Vie de S. Claire d'Aeeiee, Paris, 1880; E. Wauer, Entetehung und Atu- breitung dee Klariaeenordene, Leipsic, 1006. The Reotda was published in Italian at Barcelona, 1644, and in French at Laval, 1651. On the order consult: E. Lempp, in ZKO, sdii (1892). 181-245; Currier, Relioioue Ordere, pp. 240-262. CLARENDON, CONSTITUTIONS OF. See Beck- ET, Thomas. CLARENI (CLARENINI). See Francis, Saint, OF Assisi, AND THE FRANCISCAN OrDER, III., § 7.
CLARK, FRANCIS EDWARD CLARK, FRANCIS EDWARD

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARK, FRANCIS EDWARD: Congregation- alist, founder of the United Society of Christian Endeavor; b. at Aylmer, Quebec, Sept. 12, 1861. He was graduated at Dartmouth in 1873 and Andover Theological Seminary in 1876, after which he was pastor of Williston Church, Portland, Me. (1876-83), and of Phillips Church, South Boston (1883-87). In 1881 he founded the Society of Christian Endeavor, and in 1887 resigned his pastorate to devote his entire energies to its pro- motion. Since that year he has been president of the United Society of Christian Endeavor, and is also president of the World's Christian Endeavor Union and editor of The Christian Endeavor World, the official organ of the society. In the interest of the society he has traveled over the world. Among his publications may be mentioned Young People's Prayer Meetings (New York, 1887); Our Journey around the World (1894); World-Wide Endeavor (Boston. 1897); and A New Way around an Old World (New York, 1900).
CLARK, GEORGE WHITFIELD CLARK, GEORGE WHITFIELD

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARK, GEORGE WHITFIELD: Baptist; b. at South Orange, N. J., Feb. 15, 1831. He was graduated at Amherst in 1853 and Rochester Theological Seminary in 1855, and was pastor at New Market, N. J. (1855-59), Elizabeth, N. J. (1859-68), Balston Spa, N. Y. (1868-73), and Somerville, N. J. (1873-77). He retired from the active ministry in 1877 on account of ill health, and since 1880 has been engaged in missionary, financial, and literary work for the American Baptist Publication Society. Besides a History of the First Baptist Church of Elizabeth, N. J., (New- ark, 1863) and a Gospel Harmony in English (New York, 1870), he has written a Commentary on the New Testament (9 vols., Philadelphia, 1870-1907).
CLARK, THOMAS MARCH CLARK, THOMAS MARCH

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARK, THOMAS MARCH: Second Protes- tant Episcopal bishop of Rhode Island; b. at Newburyport, Mass., July 4, 1812; d. at Middle- town, Conn., Sept. 7, 1903. He was graduated at Yale 1831 ; studied in Princeton Theological Sem- inary 1833-35 and was licensed as a Presbyterian at Newburyport 1835; was ordained priest in the Protestant Episcopal Church 1836; became rector of Grace Church, Boston, 1836; of St. Andrew's, Philadelphia, 1843; assistant at Trinity, Boston, 1847; rector of Christ Church, Hartford, 1851; was consecrated bishop of Rhode Island, 1854. His books include Lectures to Young Men on the Formation of Character (Hartford, 1852); The Primary Truths of Religion (New York, 1869); Readings and Prayers for Aid in Private Devotion (1888); Reminiscences (1895).
CLARK, WILLIAM ROBINSON CLARK, WILLIAM ROBINSON

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARK, WILLIAM ROBINSON: Church of England; b. at Inverurie (13 m. n.w. of Aberdeen), Aberdeenshire, Scotland, Mar. 26, 1829. He studied at King's College, Aberdeen, and Hertford College, Oxford (B.A., 1864), and was ordered deacon in 1857 and ordained priest in the following year. He was curate of St. Matthias', Birming- ham (1857-58) and of St. Mary Magdalene, Taun- ton, in 1858, where he was vicar 1859-80. From 1870 to 1882 he was prebendary of Wells, and since 1883 has been professor of philosophy in Trinity College, Toronto. He was lecturer of St. George, Toronto, 1882-85, and lecturer in history in Trinity College, Toronto, 1883-91, as well as Baldwin lecturer in the University of Michigan in 1887, and Slocum lecturer in the same university in 1899. In 1900 he was elected president of the Royal Society of Canada. He translated Hagenbach's History of Doctrines (3 vols., Edinburgh, 1880-81) and the major portion of Hefele's History of the Councils (to 787, 4 vols., 1871-96), and has written, besides other works, Witnesses to Christ (Baldwin Lectures; London, 1888); Savonarola : his Life and Times (1892); The Anglican Reformation (1896); The Paraclete (Slocum Lectures, 1900); and Pascal and Port Royal (1902).
CLARKE, ADAM CLARKE, ADAM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARKE, ADAM: Wesleyan preacher, com- mentator, and theologian; b. at Moybeg (near Kilcronaghan, 2 m. e. of Draperstown), County Londonderry, Ireland, c. 1762; d. in London Aug. 26, 1832. He became a Methodist in 1778, and was in a succession an exhorter, local preacher, and regular preacher. His first circuit was that of Bradford, Wiltshire, to which he was appointed in 1782. He served in various places and traveled throughout Great Britain, achieving fame as a preacher, and being president of the British Confer- ence m 1806, 1814, and 1822. After 1805 he held an appointment in London, where he was a member of the committee of the British and Foreign Bible Society for several years, and one of the advisers of its Oriental publications, in addition to editing certain ancient documents of state in continuation | of the Foedera of Thomas Rymer. He resigned from this task in 1819, having retired four years previously, in view of his impaired health, to Mill- brook, Lancashire, where he resided until his return to the vicinity of London in 1823. He was also active in the service of the Wesleyan Mission- ary Society from its inception in 1814, making two missionary journeys in 1826 and 1828 to the Shet- land Islands, where he established Methodism. The most important of his numerous works was his commentary on the Bible (8 vols., Liverpool, 1810-26), which long had an extensive circulation. He also published a Biographical Dictionary (6 vols., London, 1802) and its supplement, The Biographical Miscellany (2 vols., 1806). His Miscellaneous Works were edited in thirteen vol- umes by J. Everett (London, 1836-37). Bibliography: An Aeeouni of Ae Infancy^ iZeli^iM and Literary Life of Adam Clarke, 3 vols., London. 1833 (toI. i. ia autobiographical, vols. iL, iiL by his daughter, M. A. Smith, with an Appendix by his son, J. B. B. Clarke). Constilt lives by J. Everett, London, 1843; J. W. Ether- idge, ib. 1858; S. Dunn, ib. 1863; and DNB, x. 413-414.
CLARKE, JAMES FREEMAN CLARKE, JAMES FREEMAN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARKE, JAMES FREEMAN: Unitarian; b. in Hanover, N. H., Apr. 4, 1810; d. in Boston June 8, 1888. He was graduated at Harvard 1829, and at the Cambridge Divinity School 1833; was pastor in Louisville, Ky., 1833-40; became pastor of the newly organized Church of the Disciples, Boston, 1841, and remained there till his death, with the exception of an interval between 1850 and 1853 when the church was temporarily disbanded. He was a director of the Unitarian Association from 1845, was chosen its secretary in 1859, and helped to form the National Conference of Unitarian Churches in 1865. He was a leader of the anti- slavery movement, and an efficient member of the Sanitary Commission during the Civil War; at a later period he advocated civil service reform. He was prominent in educational work in Boston, an over- seer of Harvard, and a trustee of the public library. In 1867 he was made professor in the Harvard Divinity School and gave lectures on comparative theology. Christian doctrine, and other subjects, from which his important books. Steps of Belief (Boston, 1870) and Ten Great Religions (2 parts, 1871--83) were developed. The Church of the Disciples was founded expressly to allow its mem- bers entire freedom of individual belief, and he prepared a Service and Hymn Book (1844) for its use, combining the features of ritualistic and non- ritualistic worship. Of his other original works mention may be made of the History of the Cam- paign of 1812 and Defence of Gen, William Hull [his grandfather] for the Surrender of Detroit (1848); The Christian Doctrine of Forgiveness of Sin (1852); The Christian Doctrine of Prayer (1854); Ortho- doxy, its Truths and its Errors (1866); Common Sense in Religion, essays (1874); Essentials and Non-essentials in Religion (1878); Events and Epochs in Religious History (1881); Legend of Thomas Didymus, the Jewish skeptic (1881; re- issued as The Life and Times of Jesus, as Related by Thomas Didymus, 1887); Anti-Slavery Days (New York, 1883); The Ideas of the Apostle Paul Trans- lated into their Modem Equivalents (Boston, 1884); Manual of Unitarian Belief (1884); Every Day Religion {18S6); VexedQuesH^ms in Theology (1886); The Problem of the Fourth Gospel (1886). He edited The Western Messenger at Louisville 1836-39 and printed in it the first poems of Emerson; with W. H. Channing and R. W. Emerson he prepared the Memoirs of Margaret Fuller Ossoli (3 vols., 1852); and published many magazine articles, addresses, sermons, and pamphlets. Bibliography: /. F. CUnke, Autobiography, Diary, and CorreMpondmee, ed. Edward Everett Hale, Boston, 1891.
CLARKE, JOHN CLARKE, JOHN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARKE, JOHN: Early American Baptist, with Roger Williams founder of Rhode Island; b. probably in Suffolk, England, Oct. 8, 1600; d. in Newport, R. I., Apr., 1676. He was a highly edu- cated physician who left England as a persecuted separatist and arrived at Boston Nov., 1637, just as drastic measures were being taken by the Massa- chusetts government against Anne Hutchinson and John Wheelwright (see Antinomianism and Anti- NOMiAN Controversies, II., 2). Whether from sympathy with Mrs. Hutchinson's views or from his aversion toward intolerance, he cast in his lot with the banished party and became a leader in the search for a home where liberty of conscience could be enjoyed. The climate of New Hamp>- fihire having been found too severe, the party led by Clarke and William Coddington secured, through the good offices of Roger Williams, the right to settle on Rhode Island; and in March, 1638, the nineteen male members entered into a covenant to subject their persons, lives, and possessions to the Lord Jesus Christ, and to do his will as revealed in Holy Scripture. Yet they guarded jealously the principle of liberty of conscience by providing that " none be accounted a delinquent for doctrine provided it be not directly repugnant to the gov- ernment of laws established." In 1641 the law establishing liberty of conscience was reiterated and fortified. Clarke had much to do with the uniting of the Rhode Island settlements with Providence under a charter procured by Williams, and is thought to have draft^ the law-book, which provides for democracy and liberty of conscience. If not an antipedobaptist before he left England, he became such probably as early as 1641, cer- tainly by 1644, when Mark Lukar, an antipedo- baptist, became associated with him in a church at Newport, of which Clarke had been pastor from about 1641. While visiting Lynn, Mass., in 1651, Clarke and two fellow workers were arrested and fined, and one of them was whipped. Thereupon Clarke published III Newes from New England (London, 1652), in which he vindicated the princi- ples of liberty of conscience and believers' baptism. The next twelve years he resided in England as representative of his colony. In 1663 he secured from Charles II. a charter which provided for com- plete civil and religious liberty. To the Newport church many Baptist churches owe their origin. Albert H. Newman. Bibliography: Reeorda of Ae Colony of Rhode Ititand and Providence Plantationa in New England, vol. i., Provi- deoee. 1856; J. Callender. An Hiatarical Diteourae on the Civil and Rdigiaue A ffaira of the Colony of Rhode Uland and Frovidenee PlantaHone, Boston, 1730; S. G. Arnold, Hiat. of the State of Rhode laland, vol. i.. New York. 1859; I. Badcus, HiaL of New England, with particular Refer- ence to the Denomination of Chriatiana called BapHata, Newton. Mass., 1871; H. 8. Burrage, Hiat. of the Bap- tiata in New England, ib. 1804; A. H. Newman, Hist, of the Baptiat Churchea in the U. S., ib. 1808; DNB, z. 432.
CLARKE, SAMUEL CLARKE, SAMUEL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARKE, SAMUEL: The name of four prom- inent English theologians. 1. English non-conformist; b. at Wolston (22 m. s.w. of Leicester), Warwickshire, Oct. 10, 1599; d. at Isleworth (11m. s.w. of London), Middlesex, Dec. 25, 1683. He was educated at Coventry and Emmanuel College, Cambridge, was ordained about 1622, and held charges at Knowle, Warwickshire, Thomton-le-Moors and Shotwick, Cheshire, but his Puritan tendencies soon exposed him to the rebuke of his ecclesiastical superiors. He held a lecture- ship at Coventry, but was inhibited by the bishop from preaching, only to give offense by a similar course at Warwick. In 1633 he was presented to the parish of Alcester, Warwickshire, whence he went, seven years later, to protest to the king against the et cetera oath. In 1642 he went to London and was chosen curate of St. Bennet Fink. There he was a governor and twice president of Sion College, and was also a member of the committee of ordainers in 1643. He was one of those who pro- tested against the execution of the king, and opposed the lay-preaching permitted by the Independents. After the Restoration he took part with his dose friend Richard Baxter in the Savoy Conference, and was ejected from his living in 1662. He re- moved to Hammersmith in 1666 and later went to Isleworth, where he spent the remainder of his life. Among his nimierous works, valuable on account of the sources used, which are now frequently almost inaccessible, special mention may be made of the following biographical collections: The Saints Nosegay (London, 1642); A Mirror or LooHng-Glass both for Saints and Sinners (1646); The Marrow of Ecclesiastical History (2 vols., 1649-50); General Martyrology {l^l); English Martyrology (1652); and Lives of Sundry Eminent Persons in the Later Age (1683). He also published, among other works, England's Remembrancer (Ix)ndon, 1657); A Dis- course against Toleration (1660); and Book of Apo- thegms (1681). Bibliography: His autobiography was prefixed to the lAvea of Sundry Eminent Peraona, 1683; a Memoir by G. T. Clarke, a descendant, was prefixed to the reprint of the Sainta Noaegay, London. 1881; DNB, z. 441-442. 2. Orientalist; b. at Brackley (16 m. s.w. of Northampton), Northamptonshire, 1625; d. at Oxford Dec. 27, 1669. He entered Merton College, Oxford, in 1640, but left the university during its occupation by the royal troops. After the surrender he returned (M.A., 1648). In 1649 he was ap- pointed the first architypographus of the imiversity and was also upper bedell of the civil law. In 1650 he was master of a school at Islington, where he assisted Brian Walton in his Polyglot Bible, his attention being directed chiefly to the Hebrew text, the Aramaic paraphrase, and the Latin translation of the Persian version of the Gospels. He returned to Oxford in 1658 and was reelected to both his former positions. In addition to his work for Clarke Claudianus Mamertiis 128 Walton, he wrote ScientitB metrica et rhythmicaf aeu tractatua de prosodia Arabica (Oxford, 1661), while the Maasereth Beracoth Tiitdus Talmudicua (1667) ifi also ascribed to him. Bibuooraprt: A. k Wood, AihencB OxonieriMt, ed. P. Bliaa. iii. 882-885. 4 vola., London. 1813-20; DNB, x, 440-441. 3. Biblical commentator, eldest son of Samuel Clarke the non-conformist; b. at Shotwick (6 m. n.w. of Chester), Cheshire, Nov. 12, 1626; d. at High Wycombe (24 m. s.e. of Oxford), Bucks, Feb. 27, 1701. He received his education at Pembroke Hall, Cambridge, and was appointed fellow in 1644, but was deprived of his fellowship seven years later for refusing to take the oath of pllegiance to the Commonwealth. At the Restoration he held the rectory of Grendon Underwood, Bucks, but was ejected for non-conformity in 1662. He then settled at High Wycombe. In theology he was Baxterian, and extended divine inspiration to the verse- divisions of the Bible. His chief work was his Old and New TestanienU with Annotations and Parallel Scriptures (London, 1690), beside which mention may be made of his Survey of the Bible (1694), designed to supplement his earlier work, and The Divine Authority of the Scriptures (1699). Bibuographt: DNB, x. 442-443, where further literature ia given. 4. Philosopher; b. at Norwich Oct. 11, 1675; d. in London May 17, 1729. He was educated in his native city and at Caius College, Cambridge (B.A., 1695). There, in 1697, he prepared a Latin translation of the Traits de physique by Jean Ro- hault, to which he added notes based on Newton's Principia. The work was long the standard text- book of its subject at Cambridge and went through repeated editions. In 1698 Clarke became chap- lain to John Moore, bishop of Norwich, and held this post for twelve years, in addition to the rectory of Drayton near Norwich and a small living in the city. In 1704-05 he delivered the Boyle Lectures on The Being and Attributes of God, the Obligations of Natural Religion^ and the Truth and Certainty of the Christian Revelation (2 vols., London, 1705-06). These addresses won him the reputation of the leading English metaphysician for the next quarter of a century, but his rationalism exposed him to the criticisms of the ultraconservatives on the one hand, while his orthodoxy brought upon him the attacks of the deists on the other. In 1706 he as- sailed the doctrine maintained by the nonjuror Henry Dodwell that the soul receives immortality only through baptism, and in the same year was presented to the rectory of St. Benet's, London, holding this imtil 1709, when Queen Anne made him rector of St. James's, Westminster. There, how- ever, he gave offense in 1712 by his Scripture Doc- trine of the Trinity y which exposed him to the charge of Arianism. A prolonged controversy ensued, and the matter was finally taken up by the House of Convocation, the lower house being especially hostile^ The upper house practically dropped the case, and Clarke refrained from giving further offense, although he does not seem to have altered his views. About 1718 he was appointed master of Wigston's Hospital, Leicester, but the remainder of his life was devoted to philosophy rather than theology. He became involved in a controversy with Leibnitz, Clarke declaring that time and space have a real existence, and the correspondence was published at London in 1717. He had many adherents among the Latitudinarians and meta- physicians, including Bishop Berkeley, Arthur Collier, Francis Hutcheson, Bishop Butler, William Whiston, Sir Isaac Newton, and Bishop Hoadly. The High-church party, on the other hand, was hostile to him. Clarke's writings included, in addition to those already mentioned, sermons, a Latin translation of Newton's Optics (London, 1706), and editions of Ceesar (1712) and the Iliad (1729). They were collected and edited by Bishop Benjamin Hoadly in four volumes (London, 1738). Bibliography: W. Whiston, Hiaiorioai Memovn cf . . . Dr. Samuel Clarke, London, 1741 (contadns A. A. Syke'a Eloffium of Samud Clarke, and T. Emlyn's Memoira of . , , Dr. Samutl Clarke); the Life, by B. Hoadly, was prefixed to hia Work*, ib. 1738; DNB, z. 443-140.
CLARKE, WILLIAM NEWTON CLARKE, WILLIAM NEWTON

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARKE, WILLIAM NEWTON: Baptist; b. at Cazenovia, N. Y., Dec. 2, 1841. He was grad- uated at Madison (now Colgate) University (B.A., 1861) and Hamilton Theological Seminary, Ham- ilton, N. Y. (1863). He held Baptist pastorates at Keene, N. H. (1863-69), Newton Centre, Mass. (186&-80), and Montreal, Canada (1880-83). He was professor of New Testament interpretation in the Toronto Baptist College 1883-87, and pastor at Hamilton, N. Y., 1887-90. Since 1890 he has been professor of Christian theology in Colgate University. His theological position " is intended to present the substance of the Scriptural teaching, interpreted by Christian thought, in the light of modem knowledge." He has written a Commentary on the Gospel of Mark (Philadelphia, 1882); Out- line of Christian Theology (New York, 1898); What Shall We Think of Christianity t (1899); Can I Believe in God the Father f (1899); A Study of Christian Missions (1900); and The Use of the Scriptures in Theology (1905).
CLARKSON, THOMAS CLARKSON, THOMAS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLARKSON, THOMAS: Antislavery agitator; b. at Wisbeach (35 m. n. of Cambridge), Cam- bridgeshire, England, Mar. 28, 1760; d. at Play- ford Hall, near Ipswich, Sept. 26, 1846. He studied at St. John's College, Cambridge (B.A., 1783). In 1785 he won a prize for a Latin essay upon the negative side of the question "whether in- voluntary servitude is justifiable " (Eng. transl., London, 1786; enlarged, 1788). Thenceforth the story of his life is the history of the anti- slavery struggle. He labored with indefatigable perseverance in collecting and disseminating in- formation, and spent most of his modest fortune upon this cause. His labors were crowned with success under the lead of William Wilberforce (q.v.). Of his many writings concerning slavery the most important is The History of the . . , Abolition of the African Slave Trade by the British Parliament (2 vols., London, 1808; new ed., 1839). He also wrote A Portraiture of Quakerism (3 vols., 1806); Memoirs of . . , William Penn (2 vols., 1813); An Essay on the Doctrine and Practice of the Early Christians as they Relate to War (1817); Researches, Antediluvian, Patriarchal, and Historical concerning the Way in vfhich Men first Acquired their Knovsl- edge of God and Religion (1836); Essay on Baptism (1843); The Grievances of our Mercantile Seamen (1845). Bibliography: T. Taylor, BioffraphietU Sketch of Thomtu Clarkaon, London, 1830; J. Elmes, Thonuu Clark§on, a Monogruph, ib. 1854; DNB, z. 464-456.
CLASS-MEETING CLASS-MEETING

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLASS-MEETING: A part of the discipline of the Methodist Churches, whereby the members of a congregation are divided into sections or classes, over each of which is a class-leader, appointed by the pastor, whose duty it is (according to the Book of Discipline of the Methodist Episcopal Church, pt. i., chap, ii., § 1): "I. To see each person in his class once a week at least; in order (1) To inquire how their souls prosper. (2) To advise, reprove, com- fort, or exhort, as occasion may require. (3) To receive what they are willing to give toward the Relief of the preachers, church, and poor. II. To meet the ministers and the stewards of the society once a week; in order (1) To inform the minister of any that are sick, or of any that walk disorderly, and will not be reproved. (2) To pay the stewards what they have received of their several classes in the week preceding." The class-meeting is said to have arisen accidentally in 1742 in connection with a plan to pay off the church debt contracted by building the edifice at Bristol. The members were divided into sections of twelve, and one of each section was appointed to call regularly every week upon the others of his section to receive their con- tributions. They soon began to report delin- quencies in conduct on the part of those whom they visited, and the possibilities of the plan in providing a means of discipline for the congregations was at once apparent to Wesley. He introduced the plan in London, and it became a distinctive feature of Methodism. At first the leaders called personally upon each member at his own house; but this was found inconvenient and a common meeting-place was appointed. The leader began and ended each meeting with singing and prayer, and about an hour was spent in conversation. Bibliography: L. Tyerman, Life cf John WUUv, voL L, pp. 377-380. London. 1876.
CLAUDE, JEAN CLAUDE, JEAN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLAUDE, JEAN: A French Calvinist preacher and controversialist; b. at Sauvetat-du-Dropt, in the department of Lot-et-Garonne, 1619; d. at The Hague Jan. 13, 1687. He studied theology at Montauban, and was ordained in 1645. He held charges at La Treisse and St. Affrique, but became pastor at Nimes in 1654. Here he lectured before the Academy in 1656 on homiletics and practical exegesis. In 1661 he presided over the provincial synod held at Nîmes, and opposed so vehemently a project of reunion with the Roman Catholic Church brought forward by the Prince de Conti, governor of Languedoc, that he was inhibited from preaching in the province. In October, 1661, he went to Paris, caUed by Countess Turenne, in order to refute a treatise by Nicole who sought to show that transubstantiation had always been held in the Church. In 1662 he was appointed professor and pastor at Montauban. When the government forbade his preaching here also, he returned to Paris, and was in 1666 called as pastor of the Protestants to the capital by the consistory of Charenton. In 1668 and 1669 he took part in the celebrated controversy with the Jesuit Nouet and the Jansenist Amauld on the mass; and in 1678, on the invitation of Mile, de Duras, he had a discussion with Bossuet in her presence, which, however, resulted in her conversion to Bossuet's faith. On the revocation of the Edict of Nantes he retired to The Hague. He was an eloquent preacher and one of the most profound thinkers of his day. Among his works are: R&ponse aux deux trait^s de Nicole, sur la per- pituiU de la foi (Charenton, 1665); Relation sue- cincte de V&at oU sont maintenant les 6glises r^ formies de France (1666); TraiU de VEucharistie (Amsterdam, 1668); R&ponse au livre de M, Amauld " De la perpituiU de la foi " (QuevUly, 1670); La defense de la Reformation contre le livre intituU ** Pr^ug^ legitimes contre les Cahnnistes" (Que- villy, 1673; Eng. transl., by J. Townsend, A De- fence of the Reformation, 2 vols., London, 1815); TraiU de la lecture des Pbres et la justification (Amsterdam, 1685); Les plaintes des Protestants cruellement opprimis dans le royaume de France (Cologne, 1686; Eng. transl., An Account of the Persecutions ... of the Protestants in France, London, 1686). Certain posthimious writings were published at Amsterdam in 1688 and 1689, and selections were translated into English; some have proved very popular, e.g., On the Composition of a Sermon (latest ed., London, 1853). G. Bonet-Maury. Bibliography: [Dev^Be, A. R. de la], Ahrigj do la vis do M. Claude, Amsterdam, 1687; E. and E. Haag. La France proteetanU, ed. H. L. Bordier, Paris, 1877-86; Liohtenbeiser, E8R, iii 105-199, Paris, 1878.
CLAUDIANUS MAMERTUS CLAUDIANUS MAMERTUS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLAUDIANUS MAMERTUS: Viennese philos- opher and theologian; b. at or near Lyons c. 425; d. at Vienna between 470 and 474. His brother Mamertus, before 462 bishop of Vienna, called him there as a presbyter. He devoted himself to church music and appears to have compiled a lectionary. Apollinaris Sidonius celebrated the industry of the two brothers (in Epistoloe, iv. 11). The hymns ascribed to him are by other authors. His letter to Sapaudus (Engelbrecht, Untersuchungen uber die Sprache des Clatuiianus Mamertus, p. 203, "^enna, 1885), ip which he laments the decay of the sciences, has historical value. About 470 he wrote his main work,Z>e statu animcB, in which he showed acquaint- ance with- Jerome and dependence upon Augustine. Of the Greek Fathers he cites only Gregory Nazi- anzen; he was imacquainted with the work of Nemisius of Emesa, "On the Nature of Man." Plato was to him king of philosophers, though Plotinus's Enneads influenced him greatly; in the use of the categories of Aristotle, he was a fore- runner of the Schoohnen. His work is used by Cassiodorus {MPL, Ixx. 1279). Berengar of Tours studied and valued it {MPL, clxxviii. 1869), and Nicolas, secretary to Bernard of C^airvaux, gave him and it the highest praise (MPL, cdi. 499 C). He was one of the most consistent and positive champions of the dualism of soul and body, against the naturalistic conception of the soul as a mere product or " harmony " of the body, held by such Claudius uleznen 130 men as Tertullian, Hilary of Poitiers, Cas8ian,and Faiistus of Riea. His arguments for a spiritual substance have reappeared substantially in works of Thomas Aquinas and Descartes. (F. Arnold.) Bibliography: The EpUtola ad Sidonium is in MGH, Auet. ant., viii (1887), 63-64. Gonflult: Tillemont. Mi- ffiotref. xvi. 11^126, 741. cf. Hutoire liUfraire de la France, ii. 442-446; M. Schultse, Claudianua Mamertua Hber daa Weeen der Sede, Dresden, 1883; F. Ueberwes. GtaehichU dm- Phitoaophie, ii. 121. Berlin, 1886, Eng. transl.. i. 362- 364. New York. 1872; De la Broise, Mamerti Claudiani vUu ejtuque doetrina de anima hominie, Paris, 1890; C. F. Arnold, Ccuariiu van ArekUe und die oallieche KircKe eeiner Zeit, pp. 89. 131. 326-326. Leipsic. 1894.
CLAUDIUS, MATTHIAS CLAUDIUS, MATTHIAS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLAUDIUS, MATTHIAS: German author; b. at Reinfeld (10 m. w. of Lubeck) Aug. 15, 1740; d. at Hamburg Jan. 21, 1815. He studied law at Jena, and spent the most of his life at Wandsbeck, as auditor of the Bank of Sleswick-Holstein at Altona, and as private citizen. His writings are poems and articles published over the signature " Asmus " in the Wandsbecker Bote and other periodicals. He issued the first collection of these contributions at Hamburg in 1775, and the last in 1812 (8 vols., 13th ed., 2 vols., Gotha, 1902), en- titling his work Asmus omnia sua secum portans, Oder sdmtliche Werke des Wandsbecker Boten, Claudius was not a theologian, nor were his essays homiletic or devotional, while his poems are never used as hymns in the churches. His leading char- acteristics were practical Christianity, expressed in the language of the people, and earnestness, thinly veiled by irony and humor. In tendency he was decidedly opposed to the rationalism of his time, even though he ridiculed the pedantry of an anti- quated orthodoxy. He became involved in a con- troversy with Friedrich Jacobi, in which he based his own position on the Biblical proof of redemp- tion through Christ, and his general view was that philosophy and human reason are subordinate in credibility to revelation. Bibliography: The Werke were edited by C. Redlich, 2 vols.. Gotha. 1882; selections are in Meyer's Volkebiidter, Nob. 681-^83. Leapsio. 1889. His life was written by C. Monckeberg. Hamburg, 1869; W. Herfost. Gotha, 1878; K. Stockmeyer. Basel. 1895. Consult also C. Redlich. Die poetiachen Beitrfige eum Wandtbeeker BoUn geaammelt, Hamburg, 1871.
CLEMEN, CARL CHRISTIAN CLEMEN, CARL CHRISTIAN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLEMEN, CARL CHRISTIAN: German Protes- tant; b. at Sommerfeld (a suburb of Leipsic) Mar. 30, 1865. He studied in Tubingen, Halle, Berlin, and Leipsic (Ph.D., 1889), and after being an assistant pastor in London 1889-90, became privat-docent at Halle in 1892. In 1903 he accepted a call to Bonn as titular professor of New Testa- ment exegesis and systematic and practical theol- ogy, and was also an assistant in the university library 1903-05. In 1899-1903 he was general secretary of the Evangelischer Bund, and since 1902 has been convener of the international committee for the promotion of the Evangelical Church among the Czechs. His theological position is scientific. He has written Die Chronohgie der patUiniaehen Brief e (Halle, 1893); Die EinheiUichkeit der paidi- niachen Brief e (Gdttingen, 1894) ; Niedergefahren lu den Toten (Giessen, 1900); PatUua, aein Leben und Wirken (2 vols., 1904); Schleiermachera Glaubena- lehre (1905); Die Apoatelgeachichie im Lichte der neueren text-, quellen- und hiatorisch-kritiaehen Forachungen (1905); Die EnUUhung dea Neuen TettamefUa (Ldpdc, 1006); and Predict und bib- liBcher Text (Gieasen, 1006).
CLEMENT CLEMENT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLEMENT: A missionary bishop of the Celtic or old British Church in the Eastern parts of the Frankish domains who, like Adalbert (q.v.) in Neustria, stood in the way of the Romanizing inno- vations of Boniface in the first half of the eighth century (see Boniface, Saint). We know of him only from the accounts of his opponents, who stigmatize him as a " heretic, misleader of the peo- ple, disseminator of error, servant of the devil, and false priest." He was married and had two sons. Justifying himself by the Mosaic law, he rejected the canonical prohibition of marriage with the widow of a deceased brother. He had views of his own on predestination and election, and seems to have held to some sort of universalism. He disputed the authority of the Fathers, Augustine and Jerome, and did not acknowledge the suprem- acy of the pope. At the instigation of Boniface a Frankish synod in 745 condemned him to imprison- ment; a Roman synod added the anathema of the Church. Nevertheless Clement held fast to the opinions and practises of his fatherland. His ul- timate fate is not known. A. Werner. Bibliography: Rettberg, KD, L 324-325; H. Hahn, Jahr- bueker dM fr&nkisdun Reicha, pp. 67-82, Berlin. 1863; P. Jaff6. BMioih0ca rtrwn Oermaniottrum, iii. 133, 136- 149, Berlin, 1866; J. H. A. Ebrard. Di€ irotdutUUcha Misaianakirche, GQterslob. 1874: A. Werner, Bon^atius, pp. 113. 273. Leipnc, 1875; Hauok. KD, i. 611.
CLERK CLERK

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLERK: The name originally used, in its Latin form clericus to designate all ordained persons, or members of the " clergy " (q.v.). From the fact that during the Middle Ages they were the most frequent possessors of a higher education, the name came to be loosely applied to educated men. In English post-Reformation usage the name of clerk was applied to a lay official of parish churches whose duty it was to assist the minister, especially by leading the responses of the congregation.
CLERMONT, SYHODS OF CLERMONT, SYNODS OF

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLERMONT, SYNODS OF: Of synods held at the town of Clermont (Clermont-Ferrand, Arwr- ntim, capital of the present department of Puy-de- Dome, 250 m. s.8.e. of Paris) the most important was that convoked by Urban II. in 1095, in which the crusades originated (see Urban II.). Two earlier synods belong to the Merovingian time, the first on Nov. 8, 535, under Theudebert I., the acts of which have some importance for knowledge of conditions at the beginning of the Frankish period, and the second between 584 and 591 under Childe- bert II. to consider a question of discipline. For the alleged second synod in 549 cf. F. Maassen, 0€$ehic)Ue der QuelUn dea kanoniachen RechU, i (Graz, 1871), 209-210. Other synods have no general interest. (A. Hauck.)
CLEVERHESS CLEVERNESS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLEVERNESS: A term applied to mental as opposed to spiritual ability. It is related to, but not identical with wisdom, is often connected with it (cf. Jas. iii. 13), but generally with the distinction that cleverness is referred to the worldly side of knowledge and ability, wisdom to the spiritual side. Frequently it has an ironical undertone, implying the reverse of simplicity and humility. The Jewish nation owns cleverness as an inher- itance from Jacob. Its most brilliant represent- ative in the Old Testament is Solomon. In the New Testament the word expressing the idea is phronimos, the principal passage is Matt. x. 16. The disciple of Christ must have a discerning mind and eyes open to the things of this world in order to discern the dangers threatening him and the means he may employ against them. Cleverness, a natural gift of God, is not objectionable in itself, but it should be controlled and raised to the quality of a moral virtue. Attaching to it is the temptation of self-conceit (cf.Rom. xii. 16; I Cor. iv. 10; II Cor. zL 19). The world uses cleverness to serve self- interest (Luke xvi. l-9\ The ''wisdom of the Just" (Luke i. 17) must have the foundation given Matt. vii. 24, and must be controUed so as to keep an unsullied conscience (Jas. iii. 13) in order to attain a blissful issue of earthly life (Ps. xc. 12). Worldly cleverness is entirely in the service of eudemonism. While the vocation of a minister calls for cleverness, the clergyman must look for it in the sense of Jas. L 5. Karl Burger.
CLIFFORD, JOHN CLIFFORD, JOHN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLIFFORD, JOHN: English Baptist; b. at Sawley (7 m. s.e. of Derby), Derbyshire, England, Oct. 16, 1836. He studied at Midland Baptist College, Leicester, and University College, London (B.A., 1861). Since 1858 he has been minister of Praed Street and Westboume Park Church, Pad- dington, London. He was president of the General Baptist Association in 1872, and from 1876 to 1878 was secretary of the London Baptist Association, becoming president in 1879. He was also president of the Baptist Union of Great Britain and Ireland in 1888 and 1899, as well as of the National Council of Free Evangelical Churches in 189^-99 and of the British Chautauqua in 1899-1900. He edited The General Baptist Magazine 1870-^ and was ooeditor of The Review of the Churches 1891-94 and of The Baptist Union Magazine 1892-95. Of his publi- cations may be mentioned Oeorge Mostyn (Lcoidon, 1874); Daily Strength for Daily Living: Expo- eitiona of Old Testament Themes (1885); The In- spiration and Authority of the Bible (1892); Typical Christian Leaders (1898); God's Greater Britain (1899); The UltimaU Problems of Christianity (Angus lectures for 1906). Bibliography : C. T. Batomaa, Life itf John diffcrd, Lon- don, 1908.
CLINICAL BAPTISM CLINICAL BAPTISM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CLINICAL BAPTISM: The name of clinici was applied, from the third century, to those who were baptized at home in illness by sprinkling, not im- mersion. Cyprian, the first in whom the word is found, disapproves of it (Epist., lxix.) but asserts the full validity of such baptism. On the other hand. Pope Cornelius, referring to the case of Novatian, who was thus baptized, apparently ex- pressed a doubt (Eusebius, Hist, eccL, VI. xliiL 14, 17). This doubt or prejudice so far maintained itself that the fourth century Council of Neo- CfBsarea (canon xii.) forbade the ordination of such persons. Since the traditional but not essential accompanying ceremonies were of necessity omitted in these baptisms, it appears from the letter of Cornelius that it was customary, if not enjoined, to supply them later. [The same rule is foimd to-day in the Rituale Romanum (ii. 15); and the Anglican Prayer-book provides for the bringing to church of those who have been privately baptised, and their formal " reception into the Church."] (A. Hauck.)
COADJUTOR COADJUTOR

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COADJUTOR: An assistant to a cleric who is partly or wholly incapacitated; appointed either temporarily or permanently, and in the latter case with or without the right of succession. By the canon law a parish priest thus incapacitated may obtain an assistant or vicarius from his superiors; but this appointment is temporaiy and revocable, and the Council of Trent expressly forbids the right of succession to be given — though this has not been held to prevent the pope from making exceptions. The title coadjutor is regularly applied to such an assistant given to a bishop. By ancient law no successor to a bishop could be chosen in his life- time, and the duties of an incapacitated bishop were performed either by neighboring prelates or by a specially designated interoentor {dispensaim, intercessor). Such arrangements were usually made by the provincial council; sometimes the pope was consulted, and this causa episcapalis was grad- ually reserved to him. The ancient principle, laid down by the C!ouncil of Nicaea, that there should not be two bishops in one city was respected at least formally by the designation of the coadjutor from the title of some other see (see Bishop, TrruukR). According to the Coimcil of Trent, coadjutors may be appointed only in case of urgent necessity, and not with right of succession unless the pope, after full investigation, approves the necessity and the person chosen. The diocesan bishop may make the request, with the assent of his chapter; or the chapter may take the initiative in case of the in- capacity or refusal of the bishop, in which case the decision rests with the pope. A coadjutor with right of succession enters on the full jurisdiction immediately upon the decease of his principal, without further formality. (O. MEJERf.) Bibliography: G. Gninau, De coadjuioribue epieeoporum, Breslau, 1804; Held, Dae RedU eur Aufeteilung einee Koadjutort, Munich, 1848; A. L. Richter, LehHnuA dee . . . Kirchewrechie, Leipsie, 1886; E. Friedberg, Lehrtruck dee . . . KirchenredUe, p. 172, Leipsie, 1805; Bingham, Qri- ginee, books iv.-vi.
COBB, HENRY NTTCHIE COBB, HENRY NITCHIE

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COBB, HENRY NITCHIE: Reformed (Dutch); b. in New York Nov. 15, 1834. He was graduated at Yale in 1855 and studied at Union Theological Seminary 1856-57. He was a Presbyterian mis- sionary to Persia under the auspices of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions in 1860-62; pastor of the Reformed Church at Mill- brook, N. Y., 1866-81, and since 1882 has been corresponding secretary of the Board of Foreign Missions of the Reformed Church in America. He was chairman of the executive committee of the Ecumenical Conference on Foreign Missions held in New York in 1900 and was a deputy to the Missions of the Reformed Church from Oct., 1904, to May, 1905. He has written Far Hence : a Budget of Letters from Our Mission Fields in Asia (New York, 1893).
COBB, SANFORD HOADLEY COBB, SANFORD HOADLEY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COBB, SANFORD HOADLEY: Presbyterian; b. in New York Feb. 4, 1838. He was grad- uated at Yale in 1858 and Princeton Theological Seminary in 1862, was pastor of Reformed churches at Schoharie, N. Y. (1864-71), and Saugerties, N. Y. (1871-83), the Westminster Presbyterian Church, Grand Rapids, Mich. (1885-94), and the Presbyterian Church of Greenwich, Conn. (1900- 1901). He made a tour of the world in 1883-84, visiting the various mission fields, and has writ- ten The Story of the Palatines (New York, 1897) and The Rise of Religious Liberty in America (1902).
COBB, SYLVAIVUS COBB, SYLVANUS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COBB, SYLVANUS: Universalist; b. at Nor- way, Me., July 17, 1798; d. in East Boston, Mass., Oct. 31, 1866. His early life was that of a New England farmer's son of the time. He became a Universalist before reaching his majority, began to preach in 1820, was ordained in 1821, and settled in Waterville, Me., where he organized the first Uni- versalist church in the State in 1826. He was pastor at Maiden, Mass., 1828-37, removed to Waltham in 1838, and to East Boston in 1841. Much of his time was given to evangelizing tours which made him widely known as preacher and lecturer. He was a member of the Maine and Massachusetts legislatures. In 1839 he began the publication of The Christian Freeman and Family Visitor, a weekly paper devoted to Universalism and the antislavery and temperance causes, and continued it till 1862, when it was united with The Trumpet, Mr. Cobb remaining as editor till 1864. In 1858-59 he carried on discussions in The Freeman with the Rev. Nehemiah Adams on the subject of endless punishment, and with the Rev. C. F. Hudson upon annihilationism, which were afterward published in book form. He wrote A Compend of Christian Divinity (Boston, 1845) and The New Testament with Explanatory Notes and Practical Observations (1864). Bibliography: 8. Cobb, AtUobiography, with Memoir hy 8. Cobb, Jr., Boston, 1867 (the Autobioffraphy goes to his forty-first year and is continued in the Mgmoir), COBLENZ ARTICLES. See Ems, Congrebs of.
JOHAITNES COCHLAEUS, JOHANNES

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COCHLAEUS (DOBNECK, WENDELSTINUS), JOHANNES: Roman Catholic controversialist; b. at Wendelstein (near Schwabach, 9 m. 8.s.w. of Nuremberg), in Middle Franconia, Jan. 10, 1479; d. at Breslau Jan. 10, 1552. He was the son of a peasant, and began his studies comparatively late. He first studied in Nuremberg, where Heinrich Grieninger, a humanist, was teacher of poetics. In 1504 he entered the University of Cologne where Count Hermann von Neuenar, Ulrich von Hutten, and other humanists were his associates. He also was on intimate terms with Carl von Mil- titz who later became papal chamberlain. From 1510 till 1515 he taught at St. Sebald in Nurem- berg and edited several of his manuals, which were highly esteemed. During the years 1515-19 he traveled in Italy as tutor to three nephews of Willibald Pirkheimer. Here the laxity of morals and lack of religious zeal confirmed a dislike al- ready formed for Italian and Roman affairs. Although repelled by scholastic theology, he studied with great zeal the Bible, Origen, Chrysostom, and Augustine, and, in 1517, acquired the degree of doctor of theology at Ferrara. At Rome he was consecrated priest and appointed deacon of the Church of Our Beloved Lady at Frankfort-on-the- Main. On his return to Germany he was inclined to side with Luther, but changed his mind to re- tain good relations with the episcopal court of Mainz and with Hieronymus Aleander of Worms, who applied to him personally for the purpose of 151 Oocceius OcBle-ByrlA a discuflBion on the best means of opposing Luther. From this time he employed his pen for the cause of Romanism. His one ambition was to meet Luther in a pub- lic disputation, and with the aid of Aleander he succeeded in being admitted to private negotia- tions with Luther. His polemical attacks and in- vectives overshot the mark so that even the Ro- man Catholics disapproved of his actions. Though without friends or money, his zeal increased the more, and he never tired of finding ways to ob- struct the cause of Luther. He even Controversy recommended the suppression of the with Lttther. University of Wittenberg. In 1521 he ofifered his services to the pope, but nobody cared for him at Rome. It was not till 1522 that his first treatise against Luther ap- peared— De gratia sacrcunerUarum liber units Joan- fits CochUti adveraus asaertUmem M, LiUheri (Stras- burg). Luther replied with his Adversua armatum virttm CocUum, wMch again was answered by Coch- beus in Adversua cucuUatum minotaurum Witten" bergeruem, . . . Deaacrarumffratiafiterum (1523), In the autumn of 1523 he went to Rome as he did not feel himself safe at Frankfort, but returned early in 1524. Meanwhile his patrons and friends at Frankfort had joined the opposing party. Coch- beus accompanied Campeggi, the papal nimcio, to the Convention of Regensburg as interpreter and member of the commission which discussed the reform of the clergy. His position at Frankfort becoming untenable, he fled to Cologne in 1525, and in 1526 received a canoniy at St. Victor's in Mainz. He attended the Diet of Speyer in 1526, but his hope of holding a disputation with Luther was not fulfilled. Although Luther had ignored him after replying to his first treatise, Cochkeus was indefatigable in writing polemical Disappoint- tracts against Luther and the Refor- mentsof his mation. After the death of Hierony- Later Life, mus Emser in 1528 he went to Dres- den as adviser and assistant of Duke George of Saxony in his literary feuds with Luther. He followed the duke to the Diet of Augsburg, and was one of the Roman theologians commissioned to refute the Augsburg Confession. His attacks found little favor with the Romanists, and Johann Eck became the chief author of the ConfutaHo, Cochlsus's hope of receiving financial support from Rome proved illusoiy, and it became more and more difficult for him to get his numerous unsa- lable pamphlets printed. In 1534 or 1535 George of Saxony secured for him a canonry at Meissen. Subsequently he was provost of St. Severus at Erfurt until 1539. The death of George was a severe blow for him, and for the cause of Roman- ism. As the progress of the Reformation in Sax- ony made it impossible for him to retain his eccle- siastical offices, he accepted in 1539 a canonry from the cathedral chapter in Breslau. King Fer- dinand called him to the diets of Hagenau, Worms, and Regensburg, but here again he was ignored. He followed with sseal the preparations for the Council of Trent without being able to take part in it. He remained the same zealous champion of Roman Catholicism to the end, although he found little recognition, and, to complete his tragic fate, Pope Paul IV. put his name on the Index. Cochlaeus's Historice HiuuiUarum libri xii. (Mainz, 1549) is still valuable, but the work which has made his name popular to the present is his history of Luther, Commentaria de actia et His Most scriplis Martini Luthert Saxonis chro- Important nographice ex ordine ab anno Domini Works. 1517 usque ad annum 1646 inclusive fideliter conscripta (Mainz, 1549). The book became the model and source for many later polemical productions, and the view expounded in it that the whole Reformation was nothing but an incidental jealousy between the Dominican and Augustinian orders was believed even by intelli- gent men. (T. Kolde.) Bibliography: U. de Weldige Cremer, De Joanni§ Cochlai vita et ecripHa, Manster, 1865; K. Otto, Johannee Coth- Icnu der Humaniet, Breslau. 1874; F. Geas, Johannee Cochlania der Oeoner LutKere, Leipsic, 1886; M. Spahn, Johannee Cochlatue, LebenebUd, Berlin. 1898; J. KOstUn, Martin Luther, paasim, 2 vols., ib. 1903.
CODMAN, ROBERT CODMAN, ROBERT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

CODMAN, ROBERT: Protestant Episcopal bishop of Maine; b. in Boston, Mass., Dec. 30, 1859. He was educated at Harvard (B.A., 1882) and at the Harvard Law School, from which he was graduated in 1885. After practising a few years, however, he determined to take orders, and accordingly studied at the General Theological Seminary, from which he was graduated in 1894. After his ordination to the priesthood, he was rec- tor of St. John's, Roxbury, Mass., until 1900, when he was consecrated third bishop of the diocese of Maine.
COB, GEORGE ALBERT COE, GEORGE ALBERT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COE, GEORGE ALBERT: American philoso- pher; b. at Mendon, N. Y., Mar. 26, 1862. He was graduated at Rochester University (B.A., 1884) and Boston University (Ph.D., 1891), and as traveling fellow of the latter institution spent the year 1890-91 at the University of Berlin. He was professor of philosophy in the University of South- em California 1889-90 and acting professor of phi- losophy in Northwestern University, Evanston, ni., 1891-93. Since the latter year he has been John Evans professor of philosophy in the same institution. He was lecturer on the psychology of religion in Boston University in 19(X). He has written The Spiritual Life : Studies in the Science of Religion (New York, 1900); The Religion of a Mature Mind (Chicago, 1902); and Education in Religion and Morals (1904).
DALOUGH COEMGEN, SAINT, OF GLENDALOUGH

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COEMGEN, SAINT, OF GLENDALOUGH: A very popular Irish hermit saint of the fifth century, whose story is given here as typical of those of his kind.* He is said to have • With regard to the alleged histories of the early Irish saints the Bollandists remark (June, iii. 331, com, hitt to Ufe of 8. Molingus or Dayrgellus): "To such a degrse are the same things related of all Irish saiats that it is difficult to believe them. For example, baptism is received from an angel, future sanctity is foretold in boyhood, the hermit life is followed in a hollow tree, a forward woman shovinC her preference too boldly is flogged, and there is a wonder- ful power over the animal world." 158 OoBle-Syria Oolani died June 3, 618, at the age of 120 years. His parents were Christians and had their son edu- cated by Petitx;, a pious Briton, and by holy men in Ireland. When a young girl showed a liking for Coemgen he flogged her with nettles. Find- ing a lonely valley with a lake overshadowed by mountains (Glendalough, County Wicklow, 8 m. n.w. of Rathdrum), he settled there, living in a hollow tree, and subsisting on herbs and water. Afterward he was admitted to the priesthood, and returned to Glendalough, where he founded a monastery. Then he withdrew some little dis- tance, giving orders that no one should come to him, and spent four years in his new retreat in fasting and prayer. For a time he was prevailed upon to leave his hermit life and rejoin the monks in his monastery, but he soon returned to solitude. The birds and beasts were his familiar companions, " the branches and leaves of the trees sang sweet songs to him," and he received celestial visitors. Then he was seized with the desire of wandering, visited holy men in various parts of Ireland, and had in mind a longer journey, but gave it up on the advice of a hermit, who told him that " it was more becoming for him to fix himself in one place than to ramble here and there in his old age, as he could not but know that no bird could hatch her e^ while flying." So he went back to his her- mitage. When the king of Ireland invaded Lein- ster Ccemgen advised the local king to fight for his country; and the invader was utterly defeated and slain. Remains of Ccemgen's monastery still exist in Glendalough and a cave is shown as " St. Ccemgen's Bed." Bibliography: i45B, Juxie, i. 303-313; Lanigan, Bed. HUt., iL 43-50; G. Petrie. Th€ Ecclena9tioal Architecture of IreUxnd, pp. 170-174. 247-267, DubUn. 1846; J. Healy, Jneuia aanetorum, pp. 414 aqq., Dublin. 1890.
COS COKE, THOMAS

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COKE, THOMAS: First Methodist bishop; b. at Brecon, Wales, Sept. 9, 1747; d. at sea on a voyage to Ceylon May 3, 1814. He studied at Jesus College, Oxford (B.A., 1768; M.A., 1770; D.C.L., 1775); took orders in the English Church and became curate at South Petherton, Somerset; fell under Methodist influences and in 1777 openly joined that body and attended the conference at Bristol He gave much help to Wesley, who styled him " his right hand "; in 1782 he became first president of the Irish conference; in 1784 he was set apart by Wesley at Bristol as " superintendent " for America. Wesley did not approve of the title bishop, which the American conference adopted in 1787 at Coke's instigation. The latter, with two elders, arrived in America, Nov., 1784, and pro- ceeded to the famous Christmas conference at Bal- timore, at which he ordained Francis Asbury as superintendent. With Asbury he drew up the Doctrines and Discipline for the Methodist Church in America. He made nine voyages to America (the last in 1803) and fulfilled his duties there ener- getically and well. He was a leader in England after Wesley's death (1791), and was indefatigable in the cause of missions. In 1813 he wished an appointment .fjom the government as bishop of India and offered to return to the Established Church; when the proposal was rejected he fur- nished funds himself to establish a Methodist mis- sion there, sailed with a band of helpers, but died on the voyage. His numerous publications in- clude Extracts of the Journals of the Rev. Dr, Cokeys Five Visits to America (London, 1793); a life of John Wesley (1792), prepared in collaboration with Henry Moore (see Wesley, John); A Com," mentary on the Old and New Testaments (6 vols., 1801-03); A History of the West Indies (3 vols., Liverpool, 1808-11). Bibliography: LivM were published by: 8. Drew, New York, 1837. and J. W. Etheridge, London. 1860; cf. L. Tyennan, lAfe and Timee of John Weeley, voL iii., ib. 1871; W. Moister. The Father of our Mieeione, ib. 1871; DNB, xL 247-249.
COLEMAK, LEI6HT0N COLEMAN, LEIGHTON

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLEMAN, LEIGHTON: Protestant Episcopal bishop of Delaware; b. at Philadelphia May 3, 1837*, d. at Wilmington, Del, Dec. 14. 1907. He was educated at the Protestant Episcopal Academy in his native city and the General Theological Seminary, New York City, from which he was graduated in 1861. He was rector of St. Luke's, Bustleton, Pa. (1861-63), St. John's, Wil- mington, Del. (1863-66), St. Mark's, Mauch Chunk, Pa. (1866-74), and Trinity Church, Toledo, O. (1874-79). From 1879 to 1887 he resided in Eng- land, and on his return to the United States was rector of the Church of the Redeemer, Sayre, Pa., in 1887-88. In the latter year he was consecrated bishop of Delaware. He was chairman of the American Church Temperance Society 1900-06 and frequently member of important ecclesiastical com- mittees. In theology he was a Catholic Churchman, and as such energetically maintained the cardinal doctrines of the Church and Christianity. He pub- lished: History of the Lehigh VaUey (Philadelphia, 1868); History of the American Church (London, 1895); and Popular History of the American Church (1906). COLEMAN, LYMAN: Congregationalist; b. at Middlefield, Mass., June 14, 1796; d. at Easton. Pa., Mar. 16, 1882. He was graduated at Yale 1817; was principal of the Latin Grammar School at Hartford 1817-20; tutor in Yale 1820-25; stu- dent of theology, and for seven years pastor of the Belchertown (Mass.) Congregational Church. He resigned, spent two years in foreign travel, held various positions, until in 1862 he became professor of Latin in Lafayette College. He published: An- tiquities of the Christian Church (Philadelphia, 1841), a translation and compilation from Augusti's Christliche Arch&oiogie and other German works; Ancient Christianity Exemplified (1852); Historical Text-hook and Atlas of Biblical Geography (1854); and Prelacy and Ritualism (1869).
COLENSO, JOHN WILLIAM COLENSO, JOHN WILLIAM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLENSO, JOHN WILLIAM: Bishop of Natal; b. at St. Austell (13 m. n.n.e. of Truro), Cornwall, Jan. 24, 1814; d. at Durban, Natal, June 20, 1883. After taking his degree at Cambridge (St. John's College) in 1836, he was an assistant master at Harrow (1839-42), and then returned to St. John's, of which he had been a fellow since 1837, as tutor for four years. From 1846 to 1853 he was vicar of Forncett St. Mary in Norfolk, and in 1853 be- came the first bishop of the new see of Natal in South Africa. He worked zealously for the con- version of the natives, for whom he wrote man- uals of instruction both sacred and secular in the Zulu language, as well as a Zulu grammar and dictionary. Suspicion as to his orthodoxy was aroused by his commentary on the Epistle to the Romans (1861); and when his Pentateuch and Book of Joshua Critically Examined (7 parts, Lon- don, 1862-79) began to appear, its line of thought (originally suggested to him by the questions of his simple Zulu converts) and especiaUy his call- ing in question the historical accuracy and tradi- tional authorship of these books, wherein he an- ticipated many of the ideas of later scholarship, aroused a perfect storm of opposition. His metro- politan, Bishop Gray of Cape Town, put him on trial and deposed him at the end of 1863, while his book was condemned in the following year by both houses of the Convocation of Canterbuiy. Deny- ing Bishop Gray's jurisdiction, Colenso appealed 166 Oolaail to the Crown, and the judicial committee of the Privy Council pronounced his deposition null and void. A state of schism ensued, Colenso main- taining himself as still lawfully bishop of Natal, while out of communion with the rest of the An- glican body in South Africa, which set up the bishopric of Maritzburg to take the place of Natal. Bishop Colenso was a warm friend of the Zulus, and in the later part of his life alienated many of his English adherents in South Africa by his advo- cacy of their cause. In 1875 he visited England to obtain justice for a native chief against the local authorities, and in the war with Cetywayo in 1879 and following years he stood boldly for right treat- ment of the king and his people regardless of the fears and selfish interests of the colonists. Be- sides the works already mentioned, he published two volumes of NaUd Sermons (London, 186^-68) and The New Bible Commentary by Bishops and Other Clergy of the Anglican Church [i.e., the "Speaker's Conmientary," ed. F. C. Cook, which was gotten up largely to answer his views] Crit- icaUy Examined (6 parts, London, 1871-74). BiBuoomiiPRT: For list of writiocs by and on Bishop Colenso. consult: G. C. Boase and W. D. Courtney. Bib- liotkeea ComtUnenais, i. 76-79, iii. 1125-27. London, 1874-81; Lif9 is by Q. W. Cox, 2 vols., ib. 1888; DNB, XL 290-203. COLERIDGEy SAMUEL TAYLOR: A famous English poet, philosopher, and critic; b. at Ottery St. Maiy (12 m. e. of Exeter) Oct. 21, 1772; d. in London July 25, 1834. After gaining a thor- ough knowledge of the classics, and of Shakespeare and Milton, at the " Bluecoat School " in London, he was sent in 1791 to Jesus College, Cambridge. He suddenly left the university without a degree in 1793, and enlisted in a regiment of dragoons, from which, however, his friends procured his dis- charge not long afterward. He decided now to devote himself to a literary career, and joined Southey at Bristol, forming part of a group of en- thusiastic young men who hidled the French Revo- lution as the beginning of a new order of things. They dreamed of foimding a sort of communistic cobny, to which they gave the high-sounding name of Pantisocracy, on the banks of the Susque- hanna. Southey soon saw the futility of the un- dertaking, and withdrew from it; and Coleridge settled for a while at Nether Stowey, near Bridge- water, in Somersetshire, whither presently Words- worth also came. The two friends, du r- Life. ing their long walks and talks, felt the need of applying their principles of free- dom to literature, and especially to poetry. They broke altogether with the stiff, artificial style which had been the rule of the eighteenth century, and boldly proclaimed their intention of going straight to nature for both subject and manner of treatment. Their first appearance in print after this decision was taken — ^anonymous, so little confidence had they in its reception — ^was with the epoch-making book Lyrical Ballads (1798), which is usually con- sidered as marking the formal beginning of the English romantic movement. Coleridge's con- tributions to the book were only four in number, of which " The Ancient Mariner '* was the most important. In fact, there is probably no poet in the whole range of English literature to whom so high a rank has been universally conceded on the basis of so small a body of first-rate poetry, in- cluding, besides the poem mentioned, especially " Chnstabel," " Kubla Khan," and " Genevieve." Coleridge made a trip to Germany in the company of Wordsworth and his sister Dorothy, spent some time at G6ttingen, and became absorbed in the philosophy of Kant, which he was the first to in- troduce to his coimtrymen. Indeed, the main purpose of his later life was the interpretation and enforcement of its principles. With the exception of a year in Malta and Rome, he spent most of the time until 1810 with his friends in the Lake Dis- trict, after which he went to London, and for the last nineteen years of his life was an inmate of the house of Dr. Gillman at Highgate Hill. Gillman's influence and care finally succeeded in weaning him from the opiiun habit, to which, at first imder the stress of physical suffering, he had become en- slaved. He pkmned many books, and partly exe- cuted a few; but he exerted more power in wonder- ful conversations with his friends, including a large number of yoi^mger men who, as his reputation for transcendental wisdom increased, resorted to him as an oracle. The combination of manifold gifts which he possessed was, in a way, a hindrance to achievement. He was too much of a poet to be a strict philosopher, and too much of a philoso- pher, at least in his later life, to give free play to his marvelous poetic faculty. Moreover, with all his learning, he was lacking in the energy neces- sary to fuse into one whole, according to a definite plan, the scattered material of which his mind was full. He was a very great critic; in fact the de- cided opinion of so competent a judge as Mr. Saints- bury (History of Criticism, iii. 230, London, 1904) is that he deserves in this capacity the third rank, surpassed only by Aristotle and Longinus. Not the least of the services which he rendered as a critic was the restoration of Shakespeare to his rightful position, after the oblivion into which the eighteenth century had cast him. Coleridge had especially what is called a " semi- nal " mind; there was probably no one in his gen- eration who sowed the seeds of so many ideas which were destined later to bring forth much fruit. Even more than in poetry, he was the orig- inator of new tendencies in religious thought. On account of the desultory and fragmentary way in which he left his reflections, it is not easy to bring his views into a clear and definite system. While some have seen in him a convinced defender of revealed religion against deism and pantheism, others have thought that he was a pantheist him- self, or at least a thorough Neoplatonist. There is no doubt that he passed through successive phases of belief, from the empiricsi philosophy through pantheism to Christian theism. His Religion In his youthful ambition for freedom, and Philoe- he cut loose from the dogmas of the ophy. Church of England and threw in his lot with the Unitarian movement. Of his German masters he followed Kant most closely, though he went a good deal beyond him Ooleiiace Oolismy 156 in a positive direction. At the same time he adopt- ed not a few Neoplatonist ideas, and so finally by this eclectic process built up the fabric of belief which is found in his Biographia lUeraria (1816), still more in his Aids to Reflection (1825), and also in his essay On the ConstUiUion of Church and StaU (1S2Q), Coleridge recognizes the equality of the claims of belief and knowledge; but as he wishes to hold the entire content of revelation, especially the spe- cifically Christian doctrines, he is anxious to show the reasonable nature of revelation. The Chris- tian faith is a perfect completion of human reason; but the less this truth is generally recognized the more necessary it is to clear away nusunderstand- ings which lead to false conclusions. At the be- ginning of his intellectual process man must know himself, in order to rise to the knowledge of God, in whose likeness he is created. Now man finds in himself a spiritual element, which is his will. This will, however, is limited on one side by the law of conscience, on the other by the existence of evil. In accordance with this foundation, religion is essentially ethical — its aim a practical one, the moral and intellectual elevation of mankind. Questions of Christian doctrine must thus be de- cided by the practical reason rather than by the intellect. Speculative thought has no place in religion but the formal and negative one of show- ing that the Christian doctrines do not contradict himian reason. This practical reason, the source of our religious knowledge, is the gift of God, who is himself the highest Reason and in whose light we see light. It is an intuitive power, and the ideas perceived by it are of a true reality. In re- gard to the relation of this practical reason to Holy Scripture, Coleridge says that the Gospel must be taken at its own valuation — ^not as a theological system of theoretical propositions designed to en- lai^ our knowledge, whether ethical or metaphys- ical, but as a historical narrative recounting or explaining certain facts which, though they are doc- trinal truths, are none the less facts. The Bible is inspired only so far as it bring? the voice of God to the heart. Eveiything must be considered in the light of the significance it has for the moral life of man- kind. The ethical character of Coleridge thus comes out especially in his doctrine of sin, regen- eration, and justification. Sin has its source in the wiQ, which inclines to evil and thus loses its freedom and power for good; but it can liberate itself once more, by renewed subjection to the light of God in the conscience, to become again a ra- tional will. This is regeneration, by which man recovers the possibility of vital intercourse with the divine spirit. Redemption is thus an ethical act of the subject, and there is no room in this scheme for an objective redemption. Salvation is indeed said to proceed from Christ; but his person as well as his work remains a mystery, since the capacity of suffering is inconsistent with his divine attributes, and a vicarious sacrifice with ethical conceptions. In the attempt to include the whole content of revelation, Coleridge admits the possi- bility of believing doctrines which transcend hu- man reason. Some of these, like that of the Trin- ity, he does not consider objects of the practical reason, although he says that the true idea of God includes such a notion. His understanding of it is based on Neoplatonism. The Logos, the divine light, is immanent in humanity. He has revealed himself in history, in religion, as well as in philos- ophy and poetry — ^most perfectly in Christ and Christianity, but Socrates and Plato have a place beside Paul and John. The Logos leads mankind to ever higher moral and intellectual development, not only in this life but also in the next; and thus the restoration of all things is made possible. It is not surprising that the attempt to widen Christianity into a religion embracing all that is true, good, and beautiful in the world should have met with strong opposition and equally strong ap- proval. Coleridge's modest earnestness, the pa- cific tone of his argument, the mystical element in the intuitive reason, the emphasis laid upon the ethical side of Christianity, the reconciliation of faith and knowledge, the recognition of good in any form, and the wide freedom given to individual conceptions were characteristics which appealed to many minds in that period more than any other form of Christian belief. Those who were influ- enced by this teaching, though they did not go so far as to foimd a new church, took up some ele- ment or elements of it and developed them further along the same lines; and it is not too much to say that Coleridge was the originator of the Broad- church or liberal movement in the Church of Eng- land which was so striking a feature of the nine- teenth century. Bibuoorapht: Materials for a life are found in his own Biooraphia literaria, ed. with notes by his nephew. H. N. Ck>leridKe, for Bohn't Library, 1866; in the Table Talk and Omniana, ed. for the same series by T. Ashe. 1888. re- published by Bell. 1905; and in his Miscellanie*, ed. Ashe, 1888. Various LeUert appear in Sir H. Davy '3 FroffmerUary Remaina, London. 1858; in C. K. Paul's W. Godwin, ib. 1876; in Franr't Magazine, July. 1878: Weatminater Review, April and July, 1870; and in E. V. Lucas's CharUa Lamb and the Lloyda, New York, 189S. Ck>leridKe BibHographiea are provided by R. H. Shep- herd, London, 1001, and by J. L. Haney. ib. 1904. Lives are by: J. D. Campbell, ib. 1894 (a critical study of the life, not going into the literary work); A. Brandl, Berlin, 1886, Eng. transl., London, 1887; H. Caine. ib. 1887; W. Pater, in AppreciaHona, ib. 1889; H. D. Traill, in EnoU^ Men of Lettera Seriea, ib. 1890; cf. L. Stephen. Houra in a Library, ib. 1892; W. Watson, in ExatTtioM in CriHdam, ib. 1893. Consult further the essays by W. G. T. Shedd and J. Marsh in the Complate Worka of Cole- ridge, i. 9-64. 67-110, New York, 1856; J. Tulloch, Mait- ment of Relioioua Thouf^ in Britain, pp. 1-40. ib. 1886.
COLET, JOHN COLET, JOHN

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLET, JOHN: One of the "reformers before the Reformation"; b., probably in London, 1466 or 1467; d. there Sept. 16, 1519. He studied at Ox- ford and on the Continent. In 1497 he began to give lectures on the New Testament at Oxford. Rejecting the allegorical interpretation and the scholastic method, he aimed to get at the sense, and he showed independence by suggesting that the first chapters of Genesis were poetry. At Oxford he met Erasmus and became his intimate friend. In 1504 he was made dean of St. Paul's and took the degree of D.D.; he introduced expository preaching and a perpetual divinity lecture on three days in each week. In 1505 he inherited a fortune 157 Oolerid«e Coligny from his father, the greater part of which he shortly after applied to the foundation of St. Paul's School. In 1509 he prepared in English a little treatise on Latin accidence for the boys in St. Paul's School, to which William Lilly, head master of the school, famished a syntax; it was probably printed about 1510, and has been reprinted many times since, even as late as 1836. A Right Fruitful Admonition con- ceming the Order of a Good Christian Man's Life Made by the Famous Dr. Colet was first printed in 1534; later it came to be known as Daily Devotions, or the Christian's morning and evening sacrifice, and to include matter not by Colet. BiBUOGiiAPBT: His manuscripts have been published with transL and notes, 5 vols., London, 1867-74. by J. H. Lupton, who edited and translated Erasmus's life of Colet. ib. 1883. and wrote A Life of Dean Colet, ib. 1887 (the beet nuxlem life). Consxilt: F. Seebohm, Three Ox- jard Reformer; Colet, Eraemite, More, ib. 1887; A. J. Mason, Leeturf on Colet^ Fiaher, and More, ib. 1895; DNB, 3d. 321-328. COUGHY, c6"ll"nyi', GASPARD DE: French statesman and Huguenot leader; b. at Ch&tillon- Eur-Loing (80 m. s.e. of Paris) Feb. 16, 1516; assassinated at Paris Aug. 24, 1572. He was the second son of Gaspard de Chdtillon, marshal of France (d. 1522), and Louise de Montmorency, a sister of the famous constable of France, but became the head of the family in 1533. He had thorough military and diplomatic training, and at the same time a character of singular purity. He fought with great distinction against Charles V. (1542-44), and in 1547 was made commander of the French infantry. In 1552 he was made admiral of France, and in 1555 governor of Picardy. As I. Life to such he signed the armistice of Van- 1559- Con- celles Feb. 5, 1166; but when Henry version to II. broke it he fought valiantly, de- Protestant- spite his disapproval of the act, and ism. after the defeat of the constable at St. Quentin, Aug. 10, 1557, he actually saved Paris by holding the city of St. Quentin for seventeen days, thus enabling the French to reor- ganize their army. On its siurender he was carried a prisoner into the Netherlands, where he was con- fined first at Sluis and then at Ghent, until ransomed at enormous expense after the peace of Ch4teau- Cambr^sis (Apr. 3, 1559). But from the prisons of Philip II. he returned a Protestant. He was not entirely a stranger to the Reformation. His mother was familiar with the ** new ideas," and had refused to allow a priest to attend her at death. His tutor, Nicolas B^rauld , was a friend of Erasmus. His wife, Charlotte de Laval, was strongly attracted by the movement; his brother Odet later joined the Re- formed, and his other brother Andelot had openly embraced Protestantism. In his long imprison- ment Coligny had leisure to read Calvinistic writings sent him by Andelot. His resolve to break with the established faith was strengthened by a letter from Calvin, dated Sept. 4, 1558. Through the sudden death of Henry II. (1559), and the accession of Francis II., the Guises gained full control, whereupon Coligny retired from court »nd resigned the governorship of Picardy (1560), though he retained his post as admiral. He did not openly acknowledge his belief until July, 1559, being fully aware that his step might be fatal to his family. Meanwhile the public disooatent at the usurpation of the Guises reached a climax. The conspiracy of AmlxBiK in 1560 amply shows the state of popular opinion in France. At the Con- vention of the Notables at Fontainebleau (Aug. 21-26, 1559) Coligny made brave hf^ ^ efl5cient attempts to gain more freedom of w^" x^^'for the Protestants, but the sudden death of 2. 1560-66. Francis II. (Dec. 5, 1560) changed the whole aspect of affairs. Cath- erine de' Medici became regent for her son Charles IX., then ten years of age, and adopted a policy of accommodation which furthered the spread of Protestantism throughout France, so that when Coligny again pleaded for his coreligionists at the assembly of the States-General at Orleans (Dec. 13, 1560) his words were not ignored. Persecution ceased, toleration was shown on both sides, and there were fair prospects of ending the conflict with a peaceable settlement. But on Mar. 1, 1562, the massacre of Vassy took place, and a month later the first religious war began with the occupa- tion of Orleans by Andelot. On one side were the Roman Catholics, the Guises, and Anthony of Navarre; on the other, the Protestants, Ool^y, the Prince of Ck)nd^, and Henry of Navarre; and between the two parties, the court, the king, and Catherine de' Medici. The war actually ended with the araassination of Francis of Guise by Jean Poltrot de Merey, in the camp before Orleans, Feb. 24, 1563; and on Mar. 19 peace was concluded at Amboise, by which freedom of conscience, and, within certain limits, liberty of worship were granted to the Protestants. But the hatred of the house of Guise for Coligny was only deepened by the events. Poltrot declared that he had been encouraged to murder Francis of Guise by Coligny, Beza, and others, but Coligny was acquitted by the Assembly of Notables at Moulins (Jan. 29, 1566). Four years of peace followed. But in the mean time the development of affairs in the Netherlands, the imprisonment of Egmont and Horn (Sept. 9, 1567), and rumors of a plan to capture the prince of Cond^ and execute Coligny so aroused the Protes- tants that they incited the second religious war. The scheme of seizing the king at Monceaux, near Meaux, failed (Sept. 27, 1567), but the victory at St. Denis (Nov. 10, 1567) led to the brief peace of Longjumeau (Mar. 23, 1568), by which the agree- ment of Amboise was renewed. With- 3. 1566-72. in the year, however, the tl\ird' relig- The Mas- ious war began. It ended with the sacre of St peace of St. Germain (Aug. 2, 1570), Bartholo- after the battles of Jamac, Moncon- mew. tour, and Amay le Due, and gave the Protestants freedom of conscience and worship together with three cities of safety. Mean- while Charles IX. had become averse to the Spanish direction which French politics had lately shown. Coligny was called to Blois Sept. 12, 1571; and the king seemed to listen to him with confidence. The negotiations for a marriage between Margaret of Valois, the sister of the king, and Henry of Navarre finally succeeded, and were regarded as favorable to the Protestant cause. The wedding OoUaglallBin 163 ceremony was celebrated Aug. 18. But Aug. 22, when Coligny returned from the Louvre to his house (the present No. 144 Rue de Rivoli) he was fired upon twice and slightly wounded by an assassin. The next day the king and queen dowager visited him. Oh»>tH« way back to the Louvre the king confesse<iS20). mother that Coligny had urged him to retain tWroyal power in his own hands. The queen mother, already an avowed enemy of Coligny, now resolved to destroy both him and hL adherents. All arrangements having been quickly completed, the massacre of the Huguenots (q.v.) was be^^un at four o'clock on Sunday, Aug. 24, St. Bartholomew's Day. The first object of attack was Coligny, who was slain, thrown from the window, his head cut off, and his body dragged through the streets and hanged on the gallows of Montfaucon. After a few days his corpse was taken down and buried by Marshid Montmorency, and after many vicissitudes it was reinterred in a fragment of the wall of his ancestral castle (which was destroyed during the French Rev- olution) on Sept. 7, 1851. From Paris the massacre spread throughout France, sparing neither sex, age, rank, nor learning. The estimated number of Hu- guenots killed varies between 10,000 and 100,000, but may most probably be reckoned at 5,000 in the capital and somewhat over 20,000 in the rest of France. At the command of the king the Parlia- ment declared Coligny guilty of high treason and pronounced his children infamous (Oct. 27, 1572), although this decision was reversed by another of the same body on June 10, 1590. A solemn Te Deum was sung at the Vatican by Gregory XIII., who also had Vasari paint three frescos represent- ing the wounding of Coligny, the conference con- cerning the massacre, and its execution. On July 17, 1889, a marble statue was erected in honor of Coligny by Protestant subscriptions and in disre- gard of Roman Catholic protests, in the Rue de Rivoli near the place where he was woimded. The literary work of Coligny was scanty. His accoimt of the siege of St. Quentin, written in ad- mirable style, was first printed imder the title Mimoirea de Vamiral de Coligny (Paris, 1623; Eng. transl. by D. D. Scott, Edinburgh, 1844), while a number of briefer works and letters are scattered in various journals, and his military regulations have been edited by M. L. Cimber and F. Danjou (Archives curieueee de Vhietoirt de France^ series i., voL viiL). (Theodor Schott.) Bibliography: The first life was written at the request of the family by F. Hotmann, Giupcari* CoUmii . . . vita, Leyden, 1676, Eos. transl., London. 1696, Fr. transl., Paris, 1676. An excellent account is by £. Bersier, Coligny avant let auerre$ de reHgum, Paris, 1884, Eng. transl.. The Earlier Life of Coligny, London, 1886 (comes down to 1660). A still more elaborate Ufe was begun by E. Maroks, Gaepard von Coligny. 8ein Leben und doe Prankreieh eeiner Zeit, vol. i.. part 1, Stuttgart, 1892 (comes down to 1662). Consult further: J. Delaborde, Gaepard de Coligny, Paris. 1879-83; A. Meyhiu, Vie de Gaepard de Coligny, ib. 1862; W. M. Blackburn, Admiral Coligny and the Rite of the HuguenoU, Philadelphia. 1869; C. Buet, L'Amiral de Coligny et lee gueme de religion, Paris, 1884; W. Besant. Oaepard de Coligny, London, 1894; Camhridge Modem Hiatory, vol. iii., chaps, i., vii., viii.. New York, 1906. On the Massacre of St. Bartholomew consult: W. Sol- dan, Qeechichte dee Proteetantiemue in Frankreidi, Leip- sio, 1866 (stiU the best); H. White, Maaeaere of 8L Bar- thdomew. New York, 1868; H. M. Baird. Riee iff Ik^ HuguenotB, ib. 1879; H. Baumgarten, For der Bartko- hm&uenaeht, Strasbuzg, 1882.
COLIGNY, ODET DE COLIGNY, ODET DE

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLIGNY, ODET DE: Cardinal of Châtillon, brother of Gaspard de Coligny; b. at the castle of Châtillon-sur-Loing (75 m. s.e. of Paris), depart- ment of Loiret, July 10, 1517; d. at Canterbury, England, Mar. 22, 1571. He received a cardinal's hat from Clement VII. in 1533, and in 1534 went to Rome for the election of a new pope; and, although he had not yet been ordained priest, he was made archbishop of Toulouse, and, in 1535, bishop coimt of Cambrai, which raised him to the rank of a nobleman of France. In 1560 Pius IV. named him grand inquisitor of France, but the opposition to the institution on the part of the Parliament of Paris relieved him from the odious duties of the position. During the reign of Heniy II. (d. 1559) he was apparently indifferent to the religious dissensions, but in April, 1561, he publicly accepted the Reformed faith. He now took active part with his brother in the religious quarrels and mediated between the Huguenots and Catherine de' Medici. In 1562 he was declared heretical by the In- quisition. He fled to Lyons, relinquished his title of cardinal, calling himself the count of Beauvais, and served in the field in the religious wars. In 1568 he went to London, where Queen Elizabeth showed many marks of favor to him and his wife C' Mme. la Cardinale " ). While preparing to join his brother at La Rochelle, he was poisoned, as it was rumored, by his valet at the instigation of Catherine de' Medici. He wrote Lea Conetitittione synodales (Paris, 1554), and a number of unpublished letters are in the Bibliothdque Nationale in Paris and the Record Office in London. He is buried in the Canterbuiy cathedraL G. BoNKr-MAURT. Bibliography: Bouchet, Preuvee de Vhietoire g^nialogique de la maieon de Coligny, Paru, 1662; Q. Bonet-Maury, Lee originee de la riforme h Beauvaie, ib. 1874; Beoquerel, Scwaenire hieloriquee aur VAmiral Coligny, ea famUle et ea eeigneurie, Paris. 1876; L. Marlet, Le Cardinal de ChdHUon, ib. 1883; idem, Correepondanee d'Odet tU Coligny, ib. 1885; E. G. Atkinson, The Cardinal of CKd- iUlon in England, 1368-71, London. 1890.
COLLECT COLLECT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLECT : A short prayer which forms a normal part of the mass and breviary offices in the Roman Catholic Church, as of the communion service and morning and evening prayer in the Anglican com- munion. Like the epistle and gospel which follow it in the altar service, it changes with the day or season, and on festivals has reference to the event or person commemorated. It is usually concise, and its normal structure embraces an invocation, a reason for the petition, the petition itself, the benefit hoped for from its granting, and the con- clusion pleading the merits of Christ, since most collects (especially the ancient) are addressed to God the Father. Many of the collects now in use can be traced back to the sacramentaries of Gela- sius and Gregory the Great, if not farther. Bibliography: W. Bright, Ancient CoUede, London, 1861; DC A, 1. 403-404; KL, iii. 603-606; McCUntock and Strong. Cychpadia, ii. 409-410 (valuable). 169 Ooliffny OoUesialism COLLEGIA KATIOirALIA (POHTIFICIA): The name of several training-schools in Rome for mis- gioDAnes destined to labor in Christian but not Roman Catholic countries. Their original f ounda- tbn was due to Ignatius Loyola, who established the first of them for Germany in 1552. The later ones are all modeled after this, the Collegium Germani- cum. After a short period of prosperity, it declined and was in a poor condition when Gregory XIII. restored it in 1573, following up this action by the foundation of Greek (1577), English (1579), Hun- garian (united in 1584 with the German), Maronite (15S4), and Thracian-Illyrian colleges, as well as three similar institutions at Vienna, Origin and Prague, and Fulda. The system re- Early ceived two notable additions on the History, foundation of the English College. Candidates for admission were to be received only after several months' probation and the taking of a vow never to abandon the clerical state and to be always ready to return to their na- tive countiy and work there at the bidding of their superiors. Five special privileges, moreover, con- siderably facilitating ordination, were conceded to those who were thus received. These two points, with their analogy to monastic conditions, made the colleges almost monastic congregations, whose superiors were the cardinal protectors assigned to them. The revised statutes, however, given to the German College in 1584 forbade the reception of those who had already taken the vows of an order, or the taking of such vows by a member of the college, as this would have been inconsistent with their lifelong dedication to their special work. Some of Gregory's foundations, including those at Prague, Vienna, and Fulda, lapsed in course of time. The German-Himgarian, (}reek, English, and Mar- onite went on, and Clement VIII. added a Scottish CoQege in 1600. On the establishment in 1622 of the Congregation de Propaganda Fide the over- sight of the colleges gradually passed into its hands in all essential points. Under its Later De- auspices the Collegium Urbanum de Tdopment. Propaganda Fide was foimded by Gregory XV. in 1627, and the Irish (Allege a year later. Other new or revived foun- dations outside of Rome with similar aims were those of Vienna, Prague and Loreto (1627), Fulda (1628), the archiepiscopal seminary of Prague (1638), the Greek seminary at San Benedetto in UUano (1732), and the Chinese at Naples (1736). By the middle of the nineteenth century the Mar- onite (Allege had been united with the Urbaniun, and a number of others founded, including a Greek seminary at Palermo; a Swiss at Milan; the great S^ninaire des Missions £trang^res for China and the neighboring regions and the S^minaire du Saint- Esprit for the French colonies, both in Paris; an Irish college there and at Douai, and four colleges in Ireland itself, at Dublin, Yoimghall, Thurles, tnd Carlow, the last destined for foreign mission- aries. Of the national colleges erected in Rome the German, Greco-Ruthenian, English, Scottish, and Irish are still in operation. These all train their students for work in a definite geographical area; even the general Collegium Urbanum educates each student for his own native coimtry, and as a rule sends him back there. The constitutions of all these colleges follow more or less Present closely that of the (jierman College. SatuB. The students, drawn as far as possible from the country in which they are to work, are under the direction of some order, usually the Jesuits. They remain in a permanent relation of intercourse with the rector of their college, who in his turn is subject to the Propaganda. There are a number of other more or less similar insti- tutions in Rome which must not be confounded with the national colleges. These serve for their respective countries (North and South America, Belgium, Poland, Bohemia, Switzerland, France) as homes for the students coming thence to attend the lectures of the Collegium Roman urn; only the North American and the Polish have the status of collegia pontificia, i.e., imder the immediate supers vision of the pope. (See Curia.) (E. Friedberg.) Bibliography: O. Mejer, Die Propaoanda, G6ttingen, i. 73-01, 225-245, Gdttingen, 1852; A. Belleaheim, WiUiam Cardinal AUen und die engliaehen Seminare auf dem Feet- lande, Mains, 1885; KL, iii. 610-646 (very extended treat- ment). On the German Ck>llege: D<u deuUdie CoUegium in Rom^ Leipaio, 1843; A. Steinhuber, Geeehithlte dee Col- legium ffermantcum^un^artcttm in Rom^ 2 vols., Freiburg, 1894.
COLLEGIAL OR COLLEGIATE CHURCHES COLLEGIAL OR COLLEGIATE CHURCHES

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLEGIAL OR COLLEGIATE CHURCHES: In the Roman Catholic Church, churches served by a body of canons, regular or secular, living together in collegia; and in the Anglican Church, by a dean and a number of canons, while the cathedral churches are always served by a bishop. In New York aty the term " Collegiate Church " is best known as applied to a corporation in the Reformed (Dutch) Church which owns considerable property, out of whose rental the deficit in the support of four churches with their clergy and chapels is met.
COLLEGIALISM COLLEGIALISM

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLEGIALISM: [A term denoting a concep- tion of the relation between Church and State which developed in Germany in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. The name, first used by J. H. B6hmer of Halle (d. 1749), was derived from the Roman law, which, before Constantine, con- sidered the Christian congregations as collegia illicita (" illegal associations ").] The school of natural rights, which has been running its triumphant course since the middle of the seventeenth century, teaches as follows: the State is not a divine foundation and institution, but a corporate unity, founded by means of a social compact of free men (pactum unionis); under this bond the " powers that be " have arisen by virtue of an additional compact, or pactum subjectionis. Furthermore, neither is the Church any longer a divine institution, but a collegium which has grown up in the State through a social compact. Accord- ing to these doctrines, the medieval idea of the unity of Church and State, of unum corpus christir anum, is given up. The State has no longer in common with the Church the object of promoting the spiritual welfare of men, but the object of the State is the prosperity of its subjects: the State is an object in itself. Several religious associations GolliiiB 160 are conceivable side by side; and, intrinsically re- garded, all these associations stand on a perfectly equal footing: there is no internal warrant given for any difference of treatment among them on the side of the State. Still a^ain, if the Church is only one association within the State, it is of course but logical that the Church governs itself and admin- isters its affairs independently, and that the sover- eign State authority exercises over this association, the same as over other associations, merely a right of surveillance. On the basis of this doctrine of natural right, territorialism (q.v.) had maintained, in theory, the independence of the Church; but it was coUegialism, an elaboration of territorialism, that carried that doctrine to its logical conclusion. The first and foremost exponent of coUegialism is conceded to be Christoph Matthaus Pfaff (q.v.). Its adherents include Mosheim, G. L. Bdhmer (whose views are embodied in the Prussian common law, his Principia jtiris canonici speciatim juris ecdesiastici, Gdttingen, 1762, having been used in the revision of the eccle- siastical law), Georg Wiese, Schleiermacher, Puchta, and others. It may be summarized as follows: The Church as a voluntary association has only two classes of members, teachers and hearers — ^not the three estates of nobility, clergy, and people (Germ. Wehr-, Lehr- undNdkrstdnde) — ^and these two classes stand side by side with equal rights, the teachers having no sovereign authority over the hearers. In this way the rights of the third estate become still more sharply emphasized than was the case under territorialism. As free associations the churches are self-governing (jura acurarum coUegi- alia)) the State has only the same rights, as affect- ing them, that it has in relation to any other asso- ciations existing in the State; that is, only the right of supervision, the jura sacrorum majeatatica. And these latter are restricted by the exponents of coUegialism to actual rights of supervision; so that the power inherent in association is guaranteed the character of a real government. At the same time, this power of association may be made over by an act of transfer to the State ruler; and the expo- nents of coUegialism teach that this was the case in Germany by virtue of a tacit transfer. The rights of the State sovereign over the Church are therefore not identical with the State's rights (as in terri- torialism), but they are the power of association as conveyed per pactum, which is to be distinguished from the sovereign's inherent rights in the way of State surveillance. Although this system has been able to change practically nothing in actual con- ditions, nevertheless, by defining more sharply than did territorialism the division between Church and State, between power of ajBsociation and State sovereignty, it has prepared the way toward the modem comprehension of things and the modem construction of the constitution of the Church. See Church and Statb. E. Sehlino. Bibliography: F. J. Stahl, Kirehenverfaaauna nadi Lehre und RedU der ProteHarUen, Erlangen, 1840; A. L. Rich- tor, Ge8chi4^Ue der evangdUchen Ktrchenverfasaung in DeuUchland, Leipsic, 1851; O. Mejer, Orundlagen det lutheriadten KirehenreoitnenU, Rostock, 1864; K. Rieker, RedUliche Stellung der evangdischen Kirche DeiU$dilandt, Leipac, 1893. COLLEGIANTS (RHYHTSBURGERS) : A branch of the Remonstrants in HoUand (see Reimon- BTRANTs). In 1619 the Remonstrant minister Christopher Sopingius was dismissed at Warmond, whereupon Gysbert van der Kodde proposed that the congregation hold services without the min- istrations of a clergyman. Such exercitia or col- loquia prophetica were common in the time of the Reformation. One prayed and read and any one who felt inclined addressed the congregation. At first meetings were held every month, afterward every week. After the death of Prince Maurice (1625) the Remonstrant ministers were aUowed to retum, but Van der Kodde opposed the settlement of a minister at Warmond and, with a number of followers, removed to the neighboring vUlage of Rhynsburg (3 m. n. of Leyden), where they con- tinued their services. The example of Rhynsbuig was foUowed and coU legia were formed in various places, one of which (at Rotterdam) lasted tUi 1787. Delegates met annuaUy at Rhynsburg, where the Lord's Supper was celebrated and adults were baptized. A result of Spinoza's residence at Rhynsbuig (1661-64) was that many CoUegiants accepted his ideas and rejected prophecy and miracles. This caused a spUt, and for years two parties met separately imtU a reconciliation was efifected at the beginning of the seventeenth century. The CoUegiants beUeved that Christianity had sadly degenerated through the influence of the sects. They claimed fr^om of speech for aU and mutual toleration. They did not desire to establish a new Church and admitted aU Christians to their meetings. They were noted for benevo- lence, especiaUy for caring for the poor and for orphans. They did not seek public offices and they had a horror of war. Their significance lies in the fact that they defended the principle of the Refor- mation— ^the right of the individual in matters of religion — ^against those who wished to limit this right. H. C. RooGEt. The influence of Polish Socinianism is discerned in two particulars, in the liberal type of doctrine and in the practise of immersion. The CoUegiants drew largely from the Mennonites, who had no adequate educational -facilities and were attracted by the able exegesis of the Bible in the CoUegiant meetings. The last meeting seems to have been held May 27, 1787. A. H. N. Bibliography: J. C. van Slee. De RijnMburger CoUeaianten, Haarlem, 1885 (best); J. M. Schr«ck. KirchengesckichU, v. 330-331, 10 vols., Leipsio, 1804-12; H. Grdgoire, Hittmredet •ecUa rdioieuaea, v. 328 sqq., 6 vols., Paris. 1828-^45; J. L. von Mosheim, Church Hiatory, cent, zvii., book iv., chap, viii., London, 1863; KL, iii. 607-'606.
COLLENBUSCH, SAMUEL COLLENBUSCH, SAMUEL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLENBUSCH, SAMUEL: German mystic; b. at Wicklinghausen (a suburb of Barmen) Sept. 1, 1724; d. at Barmen Sept. 1, 1803. He studied medicine at Duisburg and Strasburg, in the latter place becoming interested in mysticism through the large collection of works on that subject and on alchemy found there. For a time he engaged in experiments in alchemy, but after repeated failure returned to Duisburg and took up the practise of medicine. In 1784 he removed to Barmen. 161 His reading included Leibnitz's TkSodic^ and the writings of Anton, Oetinger, and Bengel, by which his tendency toward a mystic piety was strengthened. In Duisburg he had won a place in the circle in which J. G. Hasencamp was leader, and in Barmen he was brought into relations with a similar circle, the characteristic of which was a deep and earnest piety. He became interested in problems of dogmatics, particularly in soteriology and eschatology. His system is to be understood from the stand- point of the new learning. To the question, Why has God sent his Son into the world 7 the answer was given in the words of Rom. viii. 4: That the ordinance of the law might be fulfilled in us. Christ as the antithesis of Adam, who brought death on man, offers life, and this has come about through the love of God, which induces faith. But in his doctrine of the Christ he held a thoroughgoing Kenosis (q.v.) as best expressing the self-humiliation through which Christ achieved salvation. Going with this was a strong opposition to the doctrine of predestination. For him revelation was history, and Biblical history the story of redemption, finally accomplished on the cross. The force of his expo- sition gained him large influence, and his teaching, extended by the labors of his disciples Krafft, of Erlangen, and G. Menken, had a formative bearing upon the newer theology as represented by Tho- masius and Hofmann. His outlook upon this life gave a practical turn to the activities of his fol- lowers which is expressed in the Missionary Society and Mission House of Barmen. (H. CrsmerI.) Bibliography: For his doctrines consult: ErkUkrutHf Inb" litcJier Wakrheiien, 2 vols., Elberfeld, 1807-16; Ooldene Aepfd in mlbemen Sehalen, Barmen, 1854; F. W. Krug, Die Lekn dea Dr. CoUenhuMch, Elberfeld, 1846. For his life consult: MittheUunoen aus dem Leben und Wirken S. ColUnbuseh in Barmen, Barmen, 1853; K. C. £. Eh- mann, F. C. OeHnaer'a Ltben und Briefe, pp. 778-708, Stuttcart, 1869.
COLLIER, JEREMY COLLIER, JEREMY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLIER, JEREMY: Nonjuring English cler- gyman; b. at Stowe Qui or Quire (5 m. n.e. of Cambridge), Cambridgeshire, Sept. 23, 1650; d. in London Apr. 26, 1726. He studied at Caius College, Cambridge (B.A., 1673; M.A., 1676), took orders, and was rector at Ampton, Suffolk, 1679-85, then resided in London. After the Revolution he wrote a number of bitter political pamphlets on the Jacob- ite side, and made himself offensive to the govern- ment by his conduct; he was twice imprisoned (1688 and 1692), but was treated leniently on the whole; was made bishop by the nonjurors in 1713. He led a life of great literary activity; his Short View of the Immorality and Profaneness of the English Stage (London, 1698) was a vigorous attack and was vigorously resisted; it is hypercritical and too vehement, nevertheless it marks the beginning of a better day for the English drama. His Essays ^complete collected edition, 1722) are interesting and not without historical value. His work of most permanent value was An Ecclesiastical His' tory of Great Britain to the End of the Reign of Charles II. (2 vols., 1708-14; ed. with life by T. Lathbury, 9 vols., 1852). He published also The Great His- torical, Geographical, Genealogical, and Poetical Dictionary (4 vols., 1701-21), a translation and UI.-ll continuation of Moreri's Dictionnaire historique, and translated the Meditations of Marcus Aurelius (1701). Bibliography: There is an extended notice in DNB, zi. 341-347, with references to literature.
COLLINS, ANTHONY COLLINS, ANTHONY

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLINS, ANTHONY : Deist; b. at Isleworth (2 m. s.w. of Brentford, a s.w. suburb of London) or at Heston (3 m. w. of Brentford) June 21, 1676; d. in London Dec. 13, 1729. He studied at Eton and King's College, Cambridge, and in the Temple, London, but never practised law. He was a man of means, possessed of no slight ability in practical affairs, amiable and blameless in private life. Locke was his intimate friend, and during visits to Holland in 1711 and 1713 he became acquainted with Le Clerc and other scholars there. After 1715 he lived in Essex and was justice of the peace, deputy lieutenant, and treasurer of the county. His works are noteworthy more for the commotion they occasioned than for their intrinsic merit. The best known is A Discourse of Free-Thinking (Lon- don, 1713), in which he asserts that sound belief must rest on free inquiry, and hints that the adop- tion of rational principles would exclude a belief in supernaturalism. Richard Bentley made a reply (Remarks , . . by Phileleutherus lApsiensis, 1713), in which he showed many defects in Ck)llins' scholar- ship; Swift also entered the lists with Mr, CoUins's Discourse of Freethinking Put into Plain English by Way of Abstract for the Use of the Poor (1713). Earlier works were An Essay Concerning the Use of Reason (1707), Priestcraft in Perfection (1709), and A Vindication of the Divine Attributes (1710); in the last-named he maintains that we can have a true, even if limited, knowledge of the divine attributes. In 1715 he published A Philosophical Inquiry Con- cerning Human Liberty, a defense of determinism. A Historical and Critical Essay on the Thirty-mine Articles (1724) elaborates an aigument of Priest- craft in Perfection that the twentieth of the Thirty- nine Articles is fraudulent. In A Discourse on the Grounds and Reasons of the Christian Religion (1724) he assumes that the fulfilment of prophecy is the only valid proof of Christianity, and, since such fulfilment can be found only by taking unwarranted liberties with the text, he argues that Christianity has no valid proof. A reply to this work by Ekiward Chandler (q.v.) called forth The Scheme of Literal Prophecy Considered (1726). Collins's works were published anonymously, but their authorship was really no secret. See Deism, I., S ^ Bibliography: L. Stephen, Hiatory of BnoUth Thouoht, 2 vols., London. 1881; J. Cairns, Unbdief in tha BigKt- eenOi Century, pp. 37-78, ib. 1881; DNB, zi. 363-364.
COLLINS, WILLIAM RUSSELL COLLINS, WILLIAM RUSSELL

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLINS, WILLIAM RUSSELL: Reformed Episcopalian; b. in New York City Dec. 14, 1862. He was graduated from the Reformed Epis- copal Theological Seminary at Philadelphia in 1888, and was minister and rector of Emanuel Church, Baltimore (1887-91); assistant rector of St. Paul's, Philadelphia (1891-93); and rector of Christ Church, Cumberland, Md. (1893-97); Trinity, Ashtabula, O. (1897-1900); Church of the Recon- ciliation, Brooklyn (1900-02); and St. Paul's, Woodlawn Heights, New York City (since 1903). Since 1903 he has also been professor of liturgiology 8S] lon^theBlbU 16d and ecclesiology and of the literary study of the English Bible in the Reformed Episcopal Seminary, Philadelphia. In theology he is an adherent of moderate Calvinism, being likewise opposed to ritualism and to the higher criticism.
COLLTER, ROBERT COLLIER, ROBERT

韓

尚無翻譯正文。

英

COLLIER, ROBERT: Unitarian; b. at Keigh- ley (31 m. n.e. of Manchester), Yorkshire, England, Dec. 8, 1823. He was a mill-hand from 1832 to 1838, and a blacksmith in England and America from 1838 to 1859, being also a local Methodist Episcopal preacher during the latter ten years of this period. He emigrated to the United States in 1850, and nine years later, becoming a convert to Unitarianism, went to Chicago as pastor of Unity Church, where he remained until 1879. He then accepted a call to the Church of the Messiah, New York City, holding this charge until 1903, when he became pastor emeritus. He has published sev- eral volumes of discourses and addresses, a biog- raphy of A. H. Conant (Boston, 1868), and collab- orated with J. H. Turner in the History of the Town and Parish of Ilkley (London, 1886).
來源: public_domain